JP2019081019A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing eye-catching power of balls passing through a ball entry port.SOLUTION: A covering front plate 1200 prevents at least some balls stored in a storage flow path 1231 from being visually recognized easily, thus reducing a possibility that player's prediction of operation that may occur corresponds to operation that may occur in adoption of a mechanism for generating a different performance depending on difference in the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231. Thus, eye-catching power of the performance can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 86

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation member of the big winning opening operates with the predetermined number of balls passing through the detection opening as a trigger, and the predetermined number or more of balls pass through the detection opening of the detecting means. There is a game machine which prevents that (patent document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-181572

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the visibility of the downstream of the big winning opening does not change, so the effect of the effect by the ball passing through the big winning opening becomes insufficient, and the power of attention may be reduced. There was a problem of that.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the attention power of a ball that has passed through a large winning opening.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a game area in which the balls flow down, a ball entrance through which the balls flowed down the ball pass, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Entry switching means for switching between a first state capable of guiding to the entry ball opening and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can not be guided to the entrance; In the gaming machine provided with detection means for detecting ball entry, the ball passes through the ball entry port in a state where it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port during a predetermined period. A ball entry preventing means is provided which makes the ball entry difficult, and the ball entry preventing means is provided with a containing means for containing the ball that has passed through the ball inlet, and it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls contained in the containing means. Means for making it difficult to

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the attentional power of the ball which has passed through the ball entrance.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to extend the period in which the attention power to the ball can be maintained.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XII-XII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XII-XII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is a first It is a rear view of a variable winning prize apparatus, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXId-XXId line of Drawing 21 (c). (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is a figure showing time change of the first specified winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a figure showing time change of the first specified winning opening in the second operation pattern FIG. 14C is a diagram showing time change of the first specified winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXVIII-XXVIII line of Drawing 27 (c). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hitting classification counter and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specification winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specification winning a prize mouth in the 4th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specification winning a prize mouth and the 5th in the 5th operation pattern. 2 is a diagram showing a time change of the specified winning combination. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 3rd embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXXII-XXXII line | wire of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXXIVa-XXXIVa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus, (c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of Drawing 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball | bowl which reached | attained the 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the game board in a 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hitting classification counter and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the sixth operation pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the seventh operation pattern It is the figure which showed the change. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the eighth operation pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the ninth operation pattern It is the figure which showed the change. It is a figure showing time change of the 1st specified winning a prize mouth and a specific field in the 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial rear view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hitting classification counter and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specification winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specification winning a prize mouth in the 11th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specification winning a prize mouth in the 12th operation pattern, and the 2 is a diagram showing a time change of the specified winning combination. It is a partial front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the LII-LII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is a figure showing time change of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the thirteenth operation pattern, (b) is a time measurement of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the fourteenth operation pattern It is the figure which showed the change. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of Drawing 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of Drawing 35 (b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a), (c) is a first FIG. 63 is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (a), and (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable winning apparatus, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LXIVd-LXIVd line of FIG.64 (c). It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus along the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a), and (c) is a first FIG. 70 is a rear view of the variable winning device, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a), (c) is a first FIG. 71 is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line LXXId-LXXId in FIG. 71 (c). It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (d) is a figure showing an example of change of the state of the first specified winning opening in round game R and time change of the state of the movable member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 11th embodiment. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79. FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (c) are front schematic views of a projecting rib, an opening / closing means, and a second additional winning opening schematically showing the arrangement of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the 1st example of control. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in the notice production performed in the round before timing production (operation production) is performed, Comprising: (b) is timing production (operation production) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in the inside. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing production (operation production). (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of the timing production (operation production) in the interval between rounds in front of the round game R of the 5th round, and (b) is during timing production (operation production) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing presentation (operation presentation). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content alerting | reporting with the 3rd symbol display apparatus that the round game of the 6th round is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table It is. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specified winning opening, interference member and specific area in the 15th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specified winning opening in the 16th operation pattern, interference It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specified winning opening in a 17th operation pattern, an interference member, and a specific field, and (b) is the 1st specified winning opening in an 18th operation pattern, interference It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. It is a figure showing time change of the 1st specified winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in the 19th operation pattern. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specification winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in the 20th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specification winning a prize mouth in a 21st operation pattern, interference It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. It is a model figure explaining the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the block diagram which showed the content of RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed typically an example of the fluctuation display data table among display data tables. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing. It is the flowchart which showed the state command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed special symbol fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing. It is a flowchart which shows through gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows main processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot control processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of jackpot operation setting processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of opening and closing processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of ending processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of information processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of winning a prize processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of abnormal treatment. It is a flowchart which shows storage control processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the upper limit setting process 2 of the operation | movement counter. It is the flowchart which showed the content of storage valve operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows V prize-winning processing. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed main processing. It is the flowchart which showed command decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit related processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot inside production processing. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the production round command setting processing for display. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation indicator setting processing. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp | ramp output process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of button input monitoring and presentation processing. It is a flow chart which shows ball number check processing. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 1st contact classification selection table 202b in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure showing time change of the opening and closing plate and the auxiliary opening and closing member in the 22nd operation pattern, and (b) shows time change of the opening and closing plate and the auxiliary opening and closing member in the 23rd operation pattern It is a figure and (c) is a figure showing time change of the opening and closing board in a 24th operation pattern, and an auxiliary opening-and-closing member. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content alerting | reporting with the 3rd symbol display apparatus that the round game of the 6th round is performed. It is the model which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st contact classification selection table. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection table. It is the figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing board in the small hitting A, the solenoid and the distribution apparatus, and the opening / closing board in the small hitting B, the solenoid, and the distribution apparatus.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. 1 to 23. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Ball balls are played by balls (hereinafter, also referred to as game balls or pachinko balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls and a windmill, as well as rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. It is attached to the back side of 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is being fixed by the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting between the rails (a winning opening etc. is disposed and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed in response to the winning of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and the ball enters the ordinary ball entry port 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal design (the 2nd design) is done. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit If it is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. In this pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is 1/320 probability, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot has a probability of 1/60. In addition, for convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the ball to the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as “lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the row for entering the ball to the second ball entry 640 The lottery of special symbols to be played is referred to as the "special symbol 2 lottery".

  When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or 10 balls are won The operation to be released is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time.

  In addition, as a jackpot type of the special symbol, six kinds of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c" are provided (FIG. 22) reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a is different depending on the jackpot type, and is configured to change the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 1000.

  When a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is for each type of entrance. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81, up to four times each. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls reserved for the first entrance 64 (number of balls reserved for special symbol 1), or the number of balls reserved for the second entrance 640 (specially selected) If the number of balls held for symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 both remain, the lottery based on the holding balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the success or failure of the normal symbol is determined. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be easy. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol is facilitated.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37 While being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the normal ball entry port 67 remains, the lottery of the next normal symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is It is started.

  In the present embodiment, as an added value after the end of the big hit, a definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the definite variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the definite variation state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of times of drawing of the special symbol. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), pachinko machine 10 from the end of the jackpot until it becomes the next jackpot There may be a transition to a high probability state of special symbol (due to special variation of symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of other jackpot types (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), it is configured to be a time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times.

  In addition, the lottery number of the special symbol to which the definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol mentioned above is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  In addition, the number of drawing times of the special symbol which is a time-shortened state of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (due to probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state It is the state of the game which is easy to shift. In the high probability state of the special symbol in this embodiment (during the definite variation of the special symbol), the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640 is included. . On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbol" refers to the time when the special symbol is not in a certain variation, and the jackpot probability is a normal condition, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol.

  In addition, the time saving state (during time) of the normal symbol refers to a gaming state in which the ball is likely to be won to the second ball entry port 640 because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased. In addition, the normal state refers to the state of the game which is not even during the special symbol oddity or the regular symbol time reduction (the jackpot probability also does not increase the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol (the second symbol)).

  During special symbols or during regular symbol shorting, not only is the probability of hitting the symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A long time is set in comparison with. When the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball reaches the second entrance 640 as compared to the case where the motorized role 640a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, it becomes easy to perform the lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the electric role thing 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time shortening of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time thereof The number of times of opening the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit may be configured to be larger than that in the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) does not change during the time variation of the special symbol or the time symbol of the normal symbol, and the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, At least one of the opening times of the motorized accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened during the special symbol odd variation or the normal symbol time change, the ordinary symbol ( Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be up compared to the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a seven-segment display 37b on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is being executed. To display the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol as the stop symbol after the end of the variation, or the ball entered in the first ball entrance 64 The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the entrance The number of balls is held for a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times is limited to four times It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, its big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) according to the jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is shown.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 as a trigger, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display unit 37, the third symbol The third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and the second symbol as a variable display triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is configured of ten main symbols attached with the numbers "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. A jackpot is generated after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even number "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is added A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit A" or "big hit a", any number among all the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number A variation display is performed in which the main symbols to which the symbol is added are aligned. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a display (right-handed navi) for prompting the user to shoot a ball by aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric symbol 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball to the right of the game board 13 is released. The ball can be made easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting (right hitting). Moreover, although it mentions later for details, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 Compared to the case where it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball, it is easy to be a big hit (big hit a) that can obtain the largest profit. Therefore, in the definite variation state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot, and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player by executing the right hitting. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to a definite pattern or the normal symbol is set to a short time, the ball can not enter the second ball entry port 640 unless the player strikes the right, so the special is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol variation state or the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the definite variation state of the special symbol or the short symbol state of the normal symbol, the player displays the definite variation state of the special symbol or the short symbol state of the normal symbol by displaying a specific image (right-handed navi). To ensure that the benefits of being

  In the right-handed navi, characters such as “Aim for the right!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three arrows pointing to the right are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely obtain the benefit from the definite variation state of the special symbol and the time shortening state of the normal symbol.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In this warning image, it is determined that the player is performing a right strike even though it is not a period in which the player should strike a ball to the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 (a right strike). It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case where it is detected. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player has made a right-handed strike in the normal state (in a state where neither special symbol oddity nor ordinary symbol short time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the motorized accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily released in the normal state (the ball is unlikely to enter the second ball entry port 640 even if the right strike is performed). For this reason, if the player strikes the right in the normal state, the chances of receiving a special symbol lottery will be reduced as compared to the case of striking the ball at the first entrance 64 by striking the left. That is, when the player strikes the right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting a left-handed hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

  If it is determined that the player is hitting the right in the normal state, the character "Warning" and "Playing with the left!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Letters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made to notice that he should not hit the right (should hit the left). Also, by checking the presence of the right strike warning screen, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine whether there is a player who is executing an unusual game method of performing a right strike in the normal state.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not right strike is performed, for example, the ball is inserted into a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) to which the ball can flow when the right strike is performed. Judging by whether or not the ball.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, the right strike warning image is displayed, It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right The hit warning image may be displayed. As a result, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of the fraud only by confirming the presence or absence of the right strike warning image. Also, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specified winning hole 1000a, a signal indicating that fraud is being made to the hall computer It may be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine the presence or absence of the possibility that the fraud is being performed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud is being performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is, for example, a case where entering the first specified winning opening 1000a is detected despite the fact that it is not a special gaming state (big hit state).

  If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the character "Warning" is displayed in a large size at the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom of the screen, the words "Please call a gate error clerk" are displayed. With these characters, it is possible for the player to determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the store clerk or the like in the hall can be requested to repair etc. quickly.

  The second symbol display device 83 has a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) each time a ball passes through a normal entrance (through gate) 67. Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation display of the second symbol, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (variable time) is set so that the game state is shorter than in the normal state, during the definite change of the special symbol, or during the short time of the normal symbol. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during a certain symbol of the special symbol and during the short pattern of the normal symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is in a certain variation, and the normal symbol is in time.

  In addition, to the second ball entrance 640 by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting or increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized role 640a during the definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the special symbol or during the time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electrically operated accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entry ball gate (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball flows down the right side of the game board A part of is made passable. When the ball passes the normal ball entry (through gate) 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes normally through (the through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp 84 Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol other than the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, and is set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) You may. Further, the number of assembled ordinary ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 where balls can be won is disposed. When a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main ball is turned on due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640 where balls can be won is disposed. When a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  In addition, each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball hits the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 are configured the same. However, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second win the ball at the second entrance 640 is different, for example, the first entry The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won on the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is hit on the second entrance 640 may be five.

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role part 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role part 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol of "o" as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal ball entry (through gate) 67, the motorized role combination The object 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to win the second ball entry port 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the symbol usually is high compared to that in the normal state, and the time it takes to display the variation of the symbol is short, so the variation of the symbol is normal. It becomes easy to display the symbol of "○" in display. Thus, the number of times the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, the time during which the motorized jack 640a is opened also becomes longer than during the normal state, during the special symbol oddity and during the normal symbol time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entry port 640, as compared to the normal state, during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part such as that provided at the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can be won.

  Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state in the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball hits the second entrance 640. is there. However, the probability of becoming the big hit (big hit A, big hit a) in which the largest profit (expulsion) is obtained as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot is the case where the ball wins the second entrance ball entrance 640 Is set higher than when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64.

  During normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so to the first entrance 64 without the motorized entry. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the winning to the first entrance 64 provides many opportunities for winning a big hit, and the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim to become a player.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the electric role part 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in the open state during the definite variation of the special symbol and the time symbol of the normal symbol. Because it is in a state where it is easy to win the second entry ball opening 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second entry ball opening 640 (so-called "right-handed" ), It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a big hit by winning the second ball entry 640 while making the motorized role 640a open by passing the normal ball entry (through gate) 67. It becomes.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  The first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640) of the first ball entrance 64, and the first specific winning device is opened in the left-right direction at the substantially central portion thereof. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if it becomes a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol made due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol for the big hit. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specified winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first specified winning opening 1000a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specified winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specified winning hole 1000a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger value (game value in the present embodiment) as a game value (game value) 15 balls are awarded based on the winning of one ball.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an open / close plate 1300 forming an open state for guiding a ball to the first specified winning opening 1000 a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 for operating the open / close plate 1300. Have. The first specified winning combination port 1000a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to raise and lower the opening and closing plate 1300 to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the first specified winning opening 1000a. Act to repeat alternately.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  In the game board 13, a first out port 66 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 1000a and 640, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a big hit lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result on the second symbol display device Do.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the first specified winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side as Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 enters the second entry port 640 of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable frontal device unit 80 by the player performing a right-handed strike by the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof. The ball is not introduced, and almost all of the sphere which has flowed downstream thereof is guided to the flow path forming portion.

  6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning apparatus 1000 has a main body member 1100 configured of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covering front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covering front plate And a power transmission member 1400 for rotatably loading the opening and closing plate 1300 by rotation and pivotally supported on the back side of the main body member 1100, and the power transmission member The power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 are covered from the rear side to the drive device 1500 which drives 1400, the regulation member 1600 which regulates the discharge of the ball in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, And a rear cover 1700 which is fastened and fixed.

  The main body member 1100 is a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and the thin plate member 1110 is recessed from the front toward the back side and the shaft 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 A ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and a housing portion 1120 which is partially housed and partially formed through, a holding hole 1130 which is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side in front view of the housing portion 1120 A projecting portion 1140 which is provided to project according to the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging a ball from the front to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation for supporting the power transmission member 1400 by protruding to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 The supporting portion 1160 and the supporting claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 at the upper portion of the discharge port 1150 are mainly Provided.

  The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is housed, and a rectangular recess 1122 which is recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121 and its rectangle A through hole is formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to a straight line connecting a pair of support concave portions 1121 in order to move the load bearing portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the concave portion 1122 to the front and back of the thin plate member 1110 And 1123 mainly.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the covering front plate 1200. Ru. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

  The surface area of the rectangular recess 1122 is larger than that of the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the depth of the recess is slightly larger than that of the plate portion 1310. Thus, the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122 in the posture (closed state) in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is inclined, and the opening and closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding on the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The projecting portion 1140 is projected to a position where it abuts on a ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by coming into contact with the protrusion 1140. In the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200, the same projecting portion 1235 is disposed at a position not overlapping with the projecting portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 is provided with a shaft portion 1161 for rotatably supporting the power transmission member 1400, and a projecting height equal to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in a rib shape.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotation tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a predetermined distance or more. That is, during operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angular range in contact with the rotary tip 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 is a thin plate member 1210 disposed a predetermined distance away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 to the back side. 1220, a storage portion 1230 extending in a box shape opened toward the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side in the left-right direction of the side wall 1220, and disposed at the upper end of the storage portion 1230 And a detection sensor 1240.

  A flow passage which is a hole in which the ball flows up and down by the thin plate member 1210, the right side wall of the side wall 1220, the left side wall of the housing 1230, and the thin plate 1110 of the main body 1100. The department is composed.

  The housing portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and is protruded toward the back side in a storage flow passage 1231 whose inside is formed with a width in which a ball can flow down and a middle belly portion of the storage flow passage 1231 It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in a front view.

  The storage channel 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens on the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 to pass the ball Form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage flow channel 1231 is formed is made of a light transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the rear side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front and rear direction And the surface 1231b.

  The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal surface is made larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal surface of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b.

  The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 is protruded to a position where it can contact the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231, and decelerates the ball by coming into contact with the ball.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left in the front view. Thus, the ball landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled leftward and guided to the flow path forming portion.

  The detection sensor 1240 has a through hole as the first specified winning hole 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specified winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage and the number of winnings is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between when rolling the ball toward the detection sensor 1240 and when dropping the ball downward without contacting the ball, due to the difference in posture, and the horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310 And a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the end in the short side direction of the plate portion 1310, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portions 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view And a load receiving portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 is provided with a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the rising position (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the rising position (open state) along which the short direction is along the front and rear direction The distance between the front plate 1200 and the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of a sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 is provided with a chamfered portion 1312 which is chamfered into an arc shape in cross section at an upper corner of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised posture (open state).

  The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length capable of mounting five balls in a row.

  The load receiving portion 1330 is an arc-shaped ball entry preventing portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmitting portion 1332 extending to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intervening transmitting portion An engagement portion 1333 protruding from the side 1332 in the rear view right side (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is disposed) is mainly provided.

  The engagement portion 1333 is extended to a position that interferes with the movement trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, not the corner but the chamfered portion 1333a contacts the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disc-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending in the axial radial direction from the main body portion 1410.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protruding pin 1412 protruding from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

  The projecting pin 1412 is a portion engaged with the distal end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the projecting pin 1412 is displaced with linear operation of the distal end member 1520 by switching of the excitation of the drive device 1500, and power transmission is performed. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 has a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an extending tip portion from an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411, and a pressing portion 1422 protruding from the rotating tip portion 1421 to the front side. Equipped with

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 which linearly moves the movable member by switching of the excitation, and a front end member 1520 of a front view H shape (shape having a recess respectively at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510 , Mainly.

  The tip end member 1520 is configured such that the upper recess thereof can accommodate the projecting pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, while the power transmission member 1400 rotates, a recess is formed in a shape that allows the projecting pin 1412 to be accommodated inside (see FIG. 20).

  The restricting member 1600 has a rod-like shaft 1610 pivotally supported by the support claw 1170, an extension 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft 1610 with a thickness equal to the diameter of the shaft 1610, and a main body A surface on the side of the member 1100 is mainly provided with an extending portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 which is formed in a surface position and is thicker than the extending portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening and closing plate 1300, and receives the pressing load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 when the opening and closing plate is in the raised posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150 (the ball is discharged in an overlapping manner with the discharge port 1150) in the inclined posture (the posture in which the end opposite to the shaft 1610 is disposed at the lower position, storage state). In a manner that can be narrowed to an extent not

  The restricting member 1600 is biased by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the raised posture (the posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, the discharging state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes an outlet 1710 which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the outlet 1150 passes. The ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000 taken along line IX-IX of FIG. 8 and 9, the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122 to cover the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be made to follow the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval where balls can pass, in the state shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. By guiding the ball in between, the ball can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and irregular winning (for example, even if not guided by the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball that hit a nail or the like is blown away in the lateral direction Passing through 1240) can be prevented.

  Although details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300, the sphere is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the sphere is not stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XI-XI of FIG. 10 and 11, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated. Further, in FIG. 11, the outline of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the ball. As a result, the balls guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are prevented from falling.

  A ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls along the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 along the slope, and the detection sensor 1240 from the right end And enter the reservoir channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the ball is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the covering front plate 1200. Therefore, compared to the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to an extent that the plate portion 1310 abuts on the covering front plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost necessary for the opening and closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  Further, by reducing the movement trajectory of the tip of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the short direction, interference between the ball passing through the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the opening and closing plate 1300 can be avoided easily when the opening and closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although the details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state in the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere which has passed the detection sensor 1240 is the storage channel Stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of the present embodiment is formed to have a length capable of storing spheres with the predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) as the upper limit. When ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the tenth ball stops at a position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball is a plug, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere tries to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In the present embodiment, the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state triggered by the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240, whereby the ball remaining on the open / close plate 1300 flows downward to the open / close plate 1300 The spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged by switching the restriction member 1600 to the discharge state with the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state in which the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but remains at a position where it does not pass through the detection sensor 1240 Do.

  When the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but the tenth sphere receives the load from the entering prevention unit 1331 in the middle of the switching and the stored flow It is pushed into the inside of the passage 1231 (see FIG. 21 (b)). That is, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a mode in which the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed, and on the way to the closing state of the opening and closing plate 1300 Block the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while in contact with the ball (while rubbing), so that the timing at which the tenth ball passes the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates deviates. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Therefore, it is not necessary to set a limitation in a period from detection of the specified number of eyes by the detection sensor 1240 to change of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state, and it can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening and closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after waiting for the tenth ball to abut on the ninth ball (after the center of the ball is disposed on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the entering prevention unit 1331 In order to operate the opening and closing plate 1300, the opening and closing plate 1300 is controlled to open and close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of balls passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball (delay) only for the 11th ball. That is, in the first to tenth spheres, it is possible to pass the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progressing speed of the special game state, as compared to the case of delaying the passage of the ball on the whole sphere.

  For example, in the case of a structure in which winning of the subsequent ball is delayed by decelerating the ball passing the detection sensor 1240 once at the passing position, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, Since each of the 10th to 10th balls decelerates the balls even when rolling on the rolling surface 1311 partially in a row, the time until the 10th ball passes the detection sensor 1240 And the game was delayed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration for decelerating the first ball to the tenth ball is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. For example, even if the balls flow in series, since it is possible to pass the detection sensor 1240 with the flow down speed, it is possible to speed up the game.

  In addition, most of the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state has passed due to repair such as ball clogging, and even when the game is started at the end of that period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is not There is nothing to slow down the meaning, so more balls can be entered.

  Also, with regard to the 11th ball, even if it flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 at a high speed (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening and closing plate 1300 starts the tilting operation), regardless of the speed The 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th ball.

  The arrangement of the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12, the ball | bowl stored in the storage flow path 1231 is illustrated.

  Here, a mechanism will be described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are arranged the same each time. First, the ball P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided by the rearward inclined guide surface 1231a at the lowermost part of the storage channel 1231 and is disposed at a position that contacts the front of the regulating member 1600. Ru.

  The sphere P1 is weighted by the subsequent arrival of the entering sphere P2 at the lower end, and settles in the configuration illustrated in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side (the right side in FIG. 12) of the sphere P1 in a front view. That is, depending on how much the pachinko machine 10 is arranged in the back and forth direction, it may be closer to the covering front plate 1200 side or may be closer to the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, the projecting portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the projecting end of the projecting portion 1140 abuts on the ball P2, so that the ball P2 is a main body member in a state of contacting the ball P1. It does not abut the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The ball P2 is weighted by subsequently arriving at a position where the entering ball P3 abuts the ball P2. Here, in the present embodiment, even if the protruding portion 1235 disposed on the covering front plate 1200 is at any position in the front-rear direction of the ball P2, the ball P2 and the protruding portion 1235 are on the right side. And the ball P3 enters and is disposed at a position where the ball P3 can not abut the thin plate member 1210 of the front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the ball P2 in the longitudinal direction, the center position of the ball P3 is disposed on the back side of the center position of the ball P2, and the ball P3 is on the back side of the ball P2 (FIG. It will come in contact with). Therefore, the ball P2 is moved to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the ball P3. Thereby, the ball P2 settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the ball P3 receives the load from the ball P4 which subsequently enters the ball, under the same conditions as the condition in which the ball P2 receives the load from the ball P3 (except that the back and forth direction is reversed), Settle to the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the n-th ball into the reservoir channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load directed from the (n + 1) -th ball to the front and rear direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the fixing of the arrangement of the spheres is not performed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but the projecting portion 1140 is provided at a predetermined location while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere. This is realized by arranging 1235. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the balls are stored in a fixed arrangement each time the act of storing the balls in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the storage quantity of each time can be unified.

  Discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the ball P1 is discharged and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the ball P2 is discharged and the ball P3 is at the position of the ball P2 in FIG. It is illustrated that it is placed at

  As described later, with the excitation of the solenoid 1510 released and the opening / closing plate 1300 being closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, and the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. At the time of discharge of the ball. The ball (ball P1 in FIG. 12) disposed at the lowermost end is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the subsequent ball (ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are discharged in order.

  Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the extending portion (the flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage channel 1231, Since the flow velocity of the ball P2 is larger than the flow-down speed of the ball P2, a gap is generated between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load given from the ball P2 to the ball P1 can be minimized at the time of discharging the ball P1, the velocity at the time of discharging the ball P1 is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored following the ball P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the subsequent spheres P2, P3 and P4 flow downward (downward in FIG. 12) along the slope of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 abut on the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the balls P3 and P4 are turned in the directions DP3 and DP4 having longitudinal components, and decelerate while passing through the positions of the leading balls P2 and P3 respectively.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by contacting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the ball stored earlier is retained. Relocate to where it was and decelerate.

  Thereby, a gap is generated between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load given from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 can be minimized when discharging the sphere P2. The velocity at the time of discharge of the ball P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored following the ball P2.

  That is, since the subsequent spheres flow down the storage channel 1231 for a long distance, the larger the number of stored spheres, the more the ball accelerates due to the gravity of the subsequent spheres, and the discharge mode of the sphere P2 Although there is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like may change, the change of the discharge mode is determined by the action of the above-mentioned protruding portions 1140 and 1235 (the ball to be discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and its subsequent Space between the ball and the ball to suppress the load due to gravity).

  Thereafter, the spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231 by repeating the flow from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13 (a) to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13 (b). As described above, by creating a gap between the ball discharged by rolling the rolling surface 1231b and the ball following the ball, the ball discharged is discharged without receiving the weight of the ball following it Therefore, regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the discharge mode (the speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) of the balls can be made uniform.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to equalize the discharge mode (the speed at the time of discharge, the discharge interval, and the like) of the balls by the protruding portions 1140 and 1235. In the present embodiment, the ball discharging mode is a mode that requires approximately 0.2 seconds for one ball to be discharged. Therefore, the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged by maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning apparatus on line XVI-XVI of FIG. It is a sectional view of 1000. In FIGS. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in the non-excitation state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300. It is spaced apart.

  Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive a load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the discharge state by the biasing force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 overhangs in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or less than the projection area of the sphere. This can physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning apparatus on line XIX-XIX of FIG. It is a sectional view of 1000. In FIGS. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The interposed transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. In this state, the extending portion 1620 of the regulation member 1600 receives a load from the intervention transmission portion 1332 and the posture of the regulation member 1600 Switches to the inclined posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and an urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the restriction member 1600. In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring And the structure capable of suppressing the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state. The large biasing force of the torsion spring makes it possible to immediately switch the regulating member 1600 to the discharge state, which leads to the effect that it is possible to quickly discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. The adopted structure will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the engagement portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed on the operation trajectory E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening and closing plate 1300 starts operation from the closed state, while the opening and closing plate 1300 is open. When the power transmission member 1400 is switched to the position shown in FIG. The movement locus E1 is illustrated as an outline of a movement locus of a portion including the pressing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but a surface forming the rotation direction. The axis direction is perpendicular to the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, although the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) for biasing the regulating member 1600 is in the direction of pushing back the opening / closing plate 1300 toward the closed state, this biasing force is a power regardless of how large the biasing force is. It can not be applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening and closing plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening and closing plate 1300. Therefore, it can be unnecessary to keep applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the switching plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 is excited so as to generate a driving force that can switch the regulating member 1600 to the storage state against the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage is reduced. Also, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even if a variable load is applied to the opening and closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the restriction member 1600 can be maintained in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, as the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of a ball is exemplified. That is, for example, since the open / close plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311, when the ball lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball and the number of balls changes frequently. A variable load is given to 1300. Also, for example, the load is applied to the restriction member 1600 from the ball stored in the storage flow passage 1231, in particular, the ball disposed at the lowermost end of the storage flow passage 1231; And give a fluctuating load.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600 interlock with each other, so the restriction member 1600 can not be discharged while maintaining the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Therefore, even if the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state improperly, it is physically possible that the sphere (more than 10 spheres in this embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 passes the detection sensor 1240 It can prevent. Thereby, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be illegally maintained in the open state, and it is possible to prevent the fraud that increases the number of prize balls to be acquired.

  FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600 in chronological order. FIG. 20 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a). 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a view of FIG. 21 (a). 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (d) is XXId of FIG. 21 (c). It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus 1000 in -XXId line | wire.

  In FIGS. 20 and 21, only the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. The other components are not shown, and the state of the opening / closing plate 1300 changing from the open state to the closed state is shown in time series.

  That is, in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (state where the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is In FIG. 20C, the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1 corresponds to FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2 from the reference line O1. A state in which the position 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the first specified winning hole 1000a disposed on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line as a reference, and the outline of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as the cross section used in the illustration is an imaginary line. It is illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b) without interfering with the ball.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, although the power transmission member 1400 rotates, the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the posture as it is. In FIG. 20 (c), the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 abut.

  Thus, power can be applied to the power transmission member 1400 before the opening and closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, the rotation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is started simultaneously with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the restricting member 1600 maintains the discharge state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state. And an intermediate state (see FIG. 21B).

  In the middle state of the opening and closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the ball flows down to the front side (right side of FIG. 21 (b)) of the opening and closing plate 1300 by projecting the plate portion 1310 to the front side. The balls can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the ball acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21 (b)), but the power transmission is achieved by moving the tip member 1520 in the rear view right (FIG. 21 (a) right). Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 through the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing plate 1300 from rotating by the weight of the ball.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening and closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), the ball can be prevented from passing downward on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 while enabling discharge of the ball from the outlet 1150. .

  Thus, during the time taken to discharge the balls from the storage channel 1231, the problem of maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharge state, and the problem of shortening the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 which is opposite to it (shortening the interval) In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the plate portion 1310 is extended to an intermediate position while pinching the ball between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200 while continuing the discharge of the ball. , Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in a posture that prevents the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is at a position separated below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. Can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the restricting member 1600 is in the discharging state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000 .

  As shown in FIG. 21 (d), at the same time when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 interlock with each other by the operation of the tip end member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600.

  Although the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state has been described in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is grasped by going back to FIGS. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21 (d) changes to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, since the load receiving portion 1330 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed in the movement direction of the restricting member 1600, the restricting member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the load receiving portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharging state after the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated, the opening and closing plate 1300 can not be maintained in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharging state. Can. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent occurrence of an irregular winning that the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts to be discharged.

  Also, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 if the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still opened and the ball abuts on the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In this embodiment, it can be impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open / close plate 1300 is in the process of changing from the open state to the closed state, the rotating front end 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward. When the ball abuts, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 which works in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the ball. Therefore, when the ball abuts on the rolling surface 1311, the weight of the ball causes the plate portion 1310 to move downward, so the ball can not be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. This can prevent the occurrence of irregular winnings.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110, and FIG. 22 (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. If the value of the first hit random number counter acquired based on the start winning combination matches any of the determination values defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22 (b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type , And is specified in association with the type of the entrance that became the lottery trigger of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19" A jackpot A is associated with and defined (see 202b1 in FIG. 22 (b)).

  In the case of the jackpot A, the 15 round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 payout balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49", the jackpot B is associated and defined (refer to 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  If the jackpot is B, eight rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 1200 winning balls.

  In the range of “50 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot C is associated and defined (refer to 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot C, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 600 winning balls.

  As described above, the first variable winning device 1000 is the first operation pattern in any case when it is a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64). Works with Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be won by the player appears as a difference due to the number of rounds, and as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls for payout increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

  In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), it is possible to win 15 rounds of jackpots with a probability of 20%, but to be 4 rounds of jackpots with a probability of 50% So basically, you can not expect a large number of balls. On the other hand, since the 4 round jackpot game is finished in a short time as compared to the 15 round jackpot game, it is possible to start the launch of the ball to aim for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202 b 4 in FIG. 22 (b)).

  If the jackpot becomes a, as in the jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 payout balls.

  In the range of "80 to 89", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the big hit b (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot b, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with the second operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that of the jackpot a.

  In the range of "90 to 99", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the big hit c (see 202b6 in FIG. 22 (b)).

  In the case of the jackpot c, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with the third operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time taken for the jackpot game is longer than the jackpot a, and is awarded for each round The time it takes to play balls and jackpots fluctuates.

  As described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is made (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the jackpot type. Due to the difference in the operation pattern, while making the jackpot round number unchanged, it is possible to change the time required for the jackpot game while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In this embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c), the time required for the big hit game can be extended as compared with the case where the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when a jackpot number (small jackpot b and jackpot c) having a small number of payouts is obtained, the timing for striking the next jackpot and hitting the ball will be delayed compared to the case of jackpot a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency is obtained when the player is obtained by the jackpot game by the difference in jackpot type. It is possible to make a difference in the number of payouts included.

  In this way, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), jackpot (jackpot a) that can receive a large amount of time-efficient payout, time-efficiently paid out Also, it is possible to provide a small jackpot (jackpot b, jackpot c), and to increase the player's profit obtained when the jackpot a is won. Thereby, while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a, the difference in the number of payouts when playing continuously for a predetermined time (the maximum value of the total number of winning balls and the minimum value of the total number of winning balls It is possible to configure a gaming machine capable of increasing the difference).

  As mentioned above, during the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state, the special symbol's definite variation state of the special symbol that is likely to be the big hit of the special symbol and likely to be the big hit a (maximum hit ball) when the big hit is repeated is repeated. This facilitates the player's winning of a large number of winning balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22 (c)). Moreover, in the high probability state of a normal symbol, "5-204" is prescribed | regulated as a determination value used as a hit of a normal symbol (refer 202 c 2 of FIG.22 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to It is determined whether or not it is a hit. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a time measurement of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23C is a view showing a change, and FIG. 23C is a view showing a time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 performed when a big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the open / close plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, a round game R of the first round is started.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as the time in which the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged as a whole sphere. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored storage channels. Be done. Therefore, it takes 2 seconds to adjust to discharge 10 balls.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  In the first operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round. Therefore, even after the second round, a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a, so the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be advanced quickly.

  Similarly, round game R of the third round to the 15th round at maximum is repeated between rounds R between the rounds with the first interval time Int 1 between the rounds R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced at the same time to open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated based on the second operation pattern. When the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, a round game R of the first round is started.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the second round is started.

  The inter-round second interval time Int2 is set as a time capable of at least partially discharging the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored storage channels. Be done. Therefore, since the number of the balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, if ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds There are still five spheres remaining in the reservoir channel 1231.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the balls of the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the second round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls can not pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends for the first time after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  Similarly, round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated between second round time interval Int2 between rounds between rounds R similarly, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts are compared between the first actuation pattern and the second actuation pattern in the 15 round jackpot game. In addition, the ball can be fired at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds.

  First, when performing a big hit game in the first operation pattern, the time required for ten balls to pass through the first specified winning opening 1000a is at least 6 seconds. If the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time Int1 between the rounds, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) x 15R + ED (11s). Further, the number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10 C × 15 R).

  On the other hand, when playing a big hit game in the second operation pattern, although 10 balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a in the first round, only 5 balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) x 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the number of payouts is 1,200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only up to 5 balls can be won in round games R after the second round.

  Therefore, when playing a big hit game with the second operation pattern, while it takes three or more times longer than playing a big hit game with the first operation pattern, the payout balls become about half, and the time efficiency of winning balls is obtained Is dramatically worse.

  This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the case of playing a jackpot game in the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rare value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a, improve the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot, and improve the interest for the jackpot game.

  In addition, although 2nd interval time Int2 between rounds was set to 1.0 second, it is not limited to this, It can set to various numerical values, and it is possible to change it at each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between the rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds It is also possible.

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between the rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, for example, only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, so for example, the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round When ten pieces are stored, the round game R is started with eight balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, so the number of payouts is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, so for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If it has been stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  Moreover, it is also possible to set the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds to 2.0 seconds (or more). In this case, there are no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the immediately following round game R, and ten balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, so a large number (150) of awards It can be desired to shorten the ball and the progress time of the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated based on the third operation pattern. When the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, a round game R of the first round is started.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  By discharging the balls in the first interval time Int1 between the rounds, a state is formed in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the second round. (In the present embodiment, ten pachinko balls can be passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a, can be paid out the ball of that minute, and the first operation time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to receive the payout of the winning balls in the same manner as the first operation pattern while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the 10th round are repeated between the rounds R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  When the round game R of the 10th round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds passes, After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the eleventh round is started.

  In the eleventh round, the timer 15 starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied in the round game R of the 11th round, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eleventh round is ended.

  Similarly, round games R of the 12th round to the 15th round are repeated between the rounds R with the second interval time Int2 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  By discharging the balls during the second interval time Int2 between the rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R after the eleventh round. Therefore, after the 11th round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls can not pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends for the first time after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  In addition, the number of winning balls to be paid out in each round game is also reduced compared to the tenth round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller compared to the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15) and the payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game It can be changed (by the timing) depending on what round game the player is playing.

  In the third operation pattern, although the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final stage has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, there may be a mode in which the number of payouts initially is small, but the number of payouts increases toward the final stage, or a mode in which there is a peak of the number of payouts in the middle round.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to the present operation pattern, by changing the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game depending on what round of the round game R is played, the jackpot game is given speed, and the player's interest is improved. It can be done.

  In the case of playing a jackpot game in the third operation pattern, the player is expected to pay out in the first operation pattern since there is no change from the first operation pattern up to the round game R in the tenth round. It is possible to play the jackpot game with the feeling of expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time between rounds Int2 set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to any numerical value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in a certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to all 1.5 seconds, and in another certain jackpot type, the second inter-round time of the third operation pattern The setting such as setting the interval time Int2 to be 0.5 seconds in the odd round and 1.0 seconds in the even round can be performed in advance.

  That is, by further dividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games different in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the 11th round, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the end of the jackpot game, and the attention to jackpot game can be improved.

  Also, the change in the degree of payout may be associated with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when playing a jackpot game in the third operation pattern, the liquid crystal screen displays the figure of the character that is running, and the beginning of the remaining stamina of that character (the first round) is displayed The character being run runs well and, in conjunction with that, many prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the character's stamina is lost (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run, gets out of the way, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  As described above, by making the degree of payout of the winning balls correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, the player can easily empathize with the liquid crystal effect, thereby improving the player's interest in the jackpot game be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game with the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced on the basis of the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so the jackpot game is predetermined. It is possible to progress over time for presentation time. In other words, for example, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the time of the big hit game by the ball winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a being performed unexpectedly at high speed It is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image to be loop-reproduced over a predetermined effect time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before completely viewing the jackpot effect.

  In addition, when performing a big hit game with a 2nd operation pattern or a 3rd operation pattern, the presentation displayed on a liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (such as "do your best") is set so that the cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate is more likely to be displayed as the jackpot game time becomes longer. As a result, the jackpot game with the second actuation pattern or the third actuation pattern can be progressed without stressing (or rather willing) the player.

  On the other hand, it may be displayed as an aspect of giving stress to the player. For example, it will be described that the running character is displayed during the jackpot game, and the character is displayed as a break in the rest area in the interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, the interval between the rounds is set every time the ball is won by the specified number, and the character can complete the run without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the specified number of winnings is not satisfied and the inter-round interval does not occur unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited for Therefore, it is possible to perform effects in which fatigue accumulates without any gap with the game mode (in the effect mode in which time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is originally short It is possible to have the effect that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the character that is exhausted and to give stress to the player, so it is possible to enhance the player's improving mind that he / she recovers at the next big hit.

  In addition, when the same display is performed, the character may perform hydration in accordance with the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently supply water, the number of times of supplying water (the number of prizes) is the first after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern. Since the period during which the character runs (the period of the jackpot game) also increases as it decreases compared to the operation pattern, the amount of water that can be supplied is insufficient compared to the sweat coming out of the character, and the character becomes tired more and more It is possible to perform the effect to be played (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode) without causing a difference from the game mode. In this way, it is possible to make the character's appearance correspond to the profit obtained by the player (payout ball including time efficiency), and what is the jackpot won by the player (medium hit) Can be made easy for the player to grasp through the effects of the entire jackpot game).

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed, but the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment is a ball that can be stored inside It is configured that the number of can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, the arrangement of the balls stored in a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 when the ball enters from the second specified winning hole 2255a is shown by a hidden line.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 is provided with an opening / closing plate 1300 similar to that of the first embodiment, a power transmission member 1400 and a drive device 1500, and a body member slightly different from the first embodiment. 2100, a covering front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further, a second variable winning apparatus 2800 newly disclosed in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 includes a second specified winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a basis for payout in the case of a big hit game passes.

  The second specified winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, when the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a or the second specified winning opening 2255a, which is normally closed, has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) The action of opening the ball is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until or until 10 balls are won. Although the details will be described later, the opening operation is enabled in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 1000a and the second specified winning hole 2255a, and therefore, a greater amount of winning balls are paid out than in the normal time.

  The main body member 2100 is added to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, storage portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support portion 1160 and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. And a slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is similarly a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and in which the second detection sensor 2255 can be inserted. And a drive guide rib 2183 in which a pair of wall portions are arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and linearly extended in the left-right direction, and a pair of drive guide ribs along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 The transmission guide rib 2184 having a wall extending in parallel and extending in a straight line extending in the vertical direction, and a shaft 21 supporting the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800 And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is an elongated hole for guiding the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 disposed in the covering front plate 2200 is inserted.

  The ribs 2183 and 2184 are ribs for guiding the sliding motion of the interposing rod 2850 and the transmitting rod 2860 interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected in the upper right direction of the containing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the containing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the covering front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second storage unit 2250 is provided.

  The second housing portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of a thin plate formed in a plane position with the thin plate member 1210, and has an opening facing upward and a terminal end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The second detection channel 2251 and the second detection channel 2251 are disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture in which the opening is aligned in the extending direction of the second storage channel 2251 near the storage channel 2251 and the upper end portion of the second storage channel 2251 The sensor 2255 is closed between the front plate of the second accommodation portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the left side of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left And an inclined surface 2257.

  In the case where the second storage flow path 2251 passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and the sphere is accommodated inside the second accommodation portion 2250, when the outlet 1150 is closed and the sphere is stored, the number of stored spheres is It is configured to be 14 at maximum.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device having a second specified winning opening 2255a and producing the same function as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the ball enters the housing 1230 by switching the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is switched to the housing through the second housing 2250 by switching the second variable winning device 2800. When entering the ball 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects a sphere.

  The inclined surface 2257 allows the ball to flow down to the side where the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are configured to be directed to the flow path forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 Ru. Therefore, during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the first specified winning opening 1000a is in the open state or the second specified winning opening 2255a is in the opening state, the player can open any one of the specified winning openings 1000a and 2255a. If the game is in the state, it is possible to receive a large amount of winning balls by playing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is disposed in the second storage channel 2251 with a margin for arranging one sphere on the upstream side. Therefore, a plurality of spheres flow in series in the second storage channel 2251 at a timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (a timing at which the remaining number of balls passes the second detection sensor 2255 to reach a specified number). , A specified number of balls or more can enter the ball.

  In addition to the configuration (shaft portion 1610, extending portion 1620, and ball receiving portion 1630) included in the restricting member 1600 of the first embodiment, the restricting member 2600 further extends the shaft portion 1610 to the left, and the extending portion 1620 And a second extending portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 in a plane direction view of the second embodiment.

  The second extension portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the second restricting member 2600 performs the switching operation of the second variable winning device 2800 and the switching member 1300 of the second variable winning device 2800. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

  The second variable winning device 2800 has a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 which slides in the lateral direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a middle abdomen while one end thereof is supported by the tip member 2820 And a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and protruding from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100, and a tip of the transmission member 2830. A rod-like interposition rod 2850 fixed at one end to member 2820 and slidably disposed inside drive guide rib 2183, and one end disposed at a position where it can abut on interposition rod 2850, and a transmission guide rib The other end is extended along the inner side of the 2184 and the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600. A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The interpositional rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183 and is restricted from moving in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured in such a manner that they move closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 increases (the distance between the drive guide ribs 2183 decreases). Movement in the back and forth direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184, and is restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured in such a manner that they move closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 increases (the distance between the two is reduced). Movement in the back and forth direction is restricted.

  The end surfaces of the interposing rod 2850 and the transmission rod 2860 in contact with each other are inclined to face each other. As a result, the transmission of the force from the intervening rod 2850 to the transmission rod 2860 can be smoothly performed.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is formed in a circular arc shape in which the opposing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod 2860 is curved, and the regulating member 2600 is directed to the discharging state. The biasing force of a biasing torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod 2860 via the opposing surface 2641. Thus, the transmission rod 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a ball can not enter the ball in both of the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for making it possible to enter the ball into the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

  In FIG. 27A to FIG. 27C, the operations of the restricting member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in time series. FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), the configuration unnecessary for the description is omitted for ease of understanding, and the slide plate 2840 changes its state from the closed state to the open state. The situation is shown in chronological order.

  The state in which the solenoid 2810 is de-energized in FIG. 27A and the tip member 2820 is disposed at the most distant position from the solenoid 2810 is immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited in FIG. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the tip member 2820 is disposed at the middle position of the movement range is disposed in the state where the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (final reach position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). The respective states are illustrated respectively. Note that, in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. , And the open state which enables the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulating member 2600 is in the discharging state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excitation state, the restriction member 2600 can be prevented from being in the storage state by the action of the second variable winning device 2800. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, a control aspect (for example, the control aspect of the first embodiment) that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains non-excitation) Thus, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

  Further, when the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 or the second storage flow path 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, displacement of the tip member 2820 causes displacement of the slide plate 2840 via the transmission member 2830 and displacement of the transmission rod 2860 via the intervening rod 2850. Do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposing rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are in contact with each other is slightly separated in the state of FIG. The motion of the rod 2860 is initiated substantially simultaneously.

  The lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 applies a load in the push-down direction to the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 as the transmission rod portion 2860 is lowered and displaced by being pushed by the end portion of the intervening rod portion 2850. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is slightly pushed down to be in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, when the tip end member 2830 is moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the interposition rod portion 2850 to maintain the regulating member 2600 in the storage state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the intervening rod portion 2850 slides to the extent that the inclined surface passes through the transmitting rod portion 2860 while facing the transmitting rod portion 2860 side, whereby the intervening rod portion from the transmitting rod portion 2860 The load applied towards 2850 can flow in a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the bar 2850.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposing rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposing rod portion 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 through the regulating member 2600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip end member 2820 through the restriction member 2600 from fluctuating, and therefore the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840, which changes in state due to the displacement of the tip end member 2820, in the open state. It is possible to prevent the driving force of the vehicle from fluctuating. Thereby, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction generated by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod 2860 to change the state of the regulating member 2600. Therefore, the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. Thereby, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the restricting member 2600 is possible, so that it is possible to suppress deviation between the control value of the number of discharges designated every interval time between rounds in the big hit game and the actual number of discharges. It is possible to stabilize the number of discharged products.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27 (c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the movement direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod 2860. Thus, the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown), which biases the restricting member 2600 toward the disposition in the discharge state, effectively acts on the transmission rod 2860.

  Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the restriction by the interposition rod 2850 is released, the biasing force of the torsion spring Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol in the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit. It is specified in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  In addition, the jackpot classification that is specified in correspondence with the value of the first hit classification counter C2 in the case of becoming a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery drawing based on entering the first ball entrance 64), The description is omitted because it is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and in the following, in the present embodiment, a case of winning a big win in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entry 640) explain.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29" A jackpot d is associated with and specified (see 202 b 21 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot d, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with a fourth operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of the number obtained by adding the limited increase amount to about 2250 winning balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 99", the jackpot e is associated and specified (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot e, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with the fifth operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the winning balls to be paid out to the player are paid out by adding the limited increment to the 2250 winning balls, but the difficulty level of increasing the number of payouts is compared with the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the number of payouts is increased, the time taken for the jackpot game is configured to greatly exceed the case of the jackpot d.

  As described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is made (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the jackpot type. Due to the difference in the operation pattern, it is possible to change the time required for the jackpot game while making the number of payout rounds unchanged while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (1-7 round game R round). When the first variable winning device 2000 is allowed to receive balls of the specified number or more, an extra payout is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (round game R of the eighth round) and the progress of the eighth round It is configured to maximize the time it takes. On the other hand, in a round game R after a specific round game R, the player can acquire the balls for the increased amount paid out by causing the first variable winning device 2000 to receive the balls of the specified number or more. Configured as.

  In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, as a profit including time efficiency, the gaming method by which the player can obtain the highest profit is stopped by the specified number of winnings until the eighth round, and the round games R after the ninth round. The goal is to increase the number of payouts by aiming for more than the prescribed number of winnings. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put in the first variable winning device 2000 more balls by a prescribed number of rounds, depending on what round game R it is, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an open pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30 (b) is a view showing the fifth in the fifth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the clocking change of 1 specific winning a prize mouth 1000a and 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the timer 28 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the solenoid 2810 to move the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. The slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds is closed. Drive control, and after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, start round game R of the second round.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the outlet 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the number of balls (for example, 11 or 12) exceeding 10 in each round game R may be made to win the second specified winning opening 2255a at the timing of passing of the second specified winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time between rounds Int1 is 10 pieces, so more than 10 balls were won in the second specified winning hole 2255a in each round game R At the start of the immediately following round game R, the number of balls exceeded is left in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of stored pieces when entering the ball from the second storage flow path 2251 side is 14 pieces, so in the big hit game of the big hit d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds Limited to 4 through the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to limit the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over winning) that can be acquired by a player who plays a jackpot game of jackpot d to 60 (= 15 × 4 C). As a result, it is possible to prevent a large change in the number of payouts due to the difference in the game mode (timing of launch, interval of launch, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can equally enjoy the profit regardless of the player's experience value.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the 15th maximum round are repeated between the rounds R between the rounds with the first interval time Int 1 between the rounds R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to be displaced at the same time so as to open and close the second specified winning opening 2255a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 2810 is such that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the timer 28 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the solenoid 2810 to move the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. The slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the outlet 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the number of balls (for example, 11 or 12) exceeding 10 in each round game R may be made to win the second specified winning opening 2255a at the timing of passing of the second specified winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time between rounds Int1 is 10 pieces, so more than 10 balls were won in the second specified winning hole 2255a in each round game R At the start of the immediately following round game R, the number of balls exceeded is left in the storage channel 1231.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the seventh round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds similarly between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to displace and open and close the second specified winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds has elapsed, and the first interval time Int1 between the rounds After the lapse of, the round game R of the eighth round is started.

  In the eighth round, the timer 15 starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the round game R of the eighth round, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is ended.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, when balls exceeding the specified number have passed the second specified winning combination 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the round game R of the eighth round Since the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, in the eighth round game round R, perform only up to the number of winnings after subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number in the seventh round) from the specified number Because it can not be done, the payout of the prize ball including the eighth round is equalized to the payout of the prize balls for the specified number up to the eighth round. In addition, since it is not possible to win a prescribed number of pachinko balls in round game R of the eighth round, wait 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, before proceeding to the next round. It will move to the game.

  As a result, the player suffers from the feeling that the extra prize balls paid out by the seventh round are lost and the time loss that the eighth round game R is prolonged more than necessary. You will receive Thus, by the seventh round, it is possible to play a game carefully so as not to win balls exceeding a prescribed number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning of balls exceeding the prescribed number, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

  In addition, if there is no winning over the specified number by the seventh round, the balls of the specified number can be passed through the 1 specified winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the payout of the specified number of balls is received It is possible to end the eighth round game R without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, it is possible to receive the payout of the specified number of winning balls while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Therefore, in the jackpot game of the jackpot e, intentionally stopping the number of winnings exceeding the prescribed number until the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the seventh round can be maintained high.

  In addition, when the jackpot game R of the eighth round is finished, the timer means controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds, and the first interval between rounds After the lapse of time Int1, a round game R of the ninth round is started. In addition, at the time of the start of round game R of the 9th round, it can be considered as a state where a ball does not remain in storage channel 1231.

  In the ninth round, the solenoid 2810 starts to measure the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. To drive the slide plate 2840 for a long time.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round is ended.

  Similarly, after the round game R between the 10th round and the 15th round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds between each round game R, the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specified winning hole 2255a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the round game R after the ninth round, the opening and closing plate 1300 does not open and close, so the winning balls paid out by the ball that has won the second specified winning opening 2255a beyond the specified number after the ninth round The player can receive it without being deducted.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game of jackpot e is performed, the jackpot game R is suppressed so that the winning of the second specified winning opening 2255a exceeding the prescribed number in the jackpot game R does not occur until the seventh round, and the jackpot game R of the ninth round onward is stipulated. Aim to win the second specified winning combination 2255a exceeding the number is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the largest profit when considering profits including time efficiency.

  That is, in the round game R of each round, when the balls exceeding the specified number are put into the second specified winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains a profit and a case where the player suffers a loss. In this way, different game characteristics can be provided for each round of the jackpot game, and the alertness of the player who performs the jackpot game can be improved (the random jackpot game can be prevented from being performed) .

  In addition, according to the present operation pattern, the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by winning the ball exceeding the prescribed number in the second specified winning hole 2255a, substantially after the ninth round. It can be restricted. This makes it possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to the difference in the game mode (the timing of launch, the interval of launch, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the payout balls from significantly changing. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can equally enjoy the profit regardless of the player's experience value.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the ball reached the flow path forming portion when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed and the ball which has flowed down to the downstream of the opening and closing plate 1300 when open is dropped as it is. The first variable winning device 3000 is configured to delay the falling of the ball when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, and to win a part of the balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the provided front plate 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes the same opening / closing plate 1300 as the first embodiment, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the regulation member 1600, and the rear cover 1700. A body member 3100 and a covering front plate 3200 slightly different from the one embodiment are provided. In FIG. 32, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

  The main body member 3100 is added to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, storage portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support portion 1160 and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. The additional winning opening 3181 disposed in a manner to be connected to the front left side wall of the covering front plate 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the front left side wall of the additional winning opening 3181 And a curved extension plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

  The additional winning opening 3181 is a ball entry port that discharges the ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the gaming board 13, and the upper limit of 15 is obtained by the ball entering the additional winning hole 3181 The number of winning balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, eleven balls are set to be dispensed.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate for restricting the passage of the balls flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the vertical direction in the game area equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and is extended in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 . In addition, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed to be inclined downward as going from the mid-part to the left in front view, and to be inclined downward from the mid-part to the right in front view.

  In addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall 1220, the housing 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) included in the front cover 1200 of the first embodiment, the front cover 3200 is between the side wall 1220 and the housing 1230. In the region of the sheet member 1210 and extending from the back surface to the back surface of the thin plate member 1210.

  The fall delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening and closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening and closing plate 1300, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. An extending plate portion 3251 extending vertically from the rear surface of the thin plate member 1210, and connecting between the upper surface of the extending plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and having a curved upper surface And the formed rolling arc portion 3252.

  The fall delay plate 3250 has a long shape on the left and right, and slows down so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including bounding and falling due to rolling) half the length of the plate Are formed. The opening and closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that the ball flows down in 1 second or less when the ball flows down a distance half the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extending plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the separation width from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. An end surface 3251b is formed on the opposite surface 3251a and a surface facing the side wall 1220 of the housing 1230 and opposite to the housing 1230 and spaced apart from the housing 1230 by a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the sphere at the portion vertically below the center of the sphere in the state where the sphere is disposed most upstream (left in FIG. 32) It is considered as below, in the part which is switched over the radius of the sphere at the middle position (the middle position in the left and right direction in FIG. 32) and is arranged vertically below the center of the sphere in the most downstream side (right in FIG. 32) More than the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 is configured such that a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251a follows the longitudinal direction and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 3200. (A tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction follows the surface direction of the thin plate member 1210 (a direction in which it is extended)).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 in the axial direction is set larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  When the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball which has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covering front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side, the path from the rolling arc portion 3252 rightward to the dropping position Pf3, which is a position just before the ball falls Flow down through.

  In this embodiment, the distance between the opposing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is less than the diameter of the ball. The ball is prevented from falling through the rolling arc portion 3252. Therefore, the ball drops from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, the aspect of the flow of the ball on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. Note that FIG. 34 (b) illustrates a sphere disposed at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34 (c) illustrates a sphere disposed at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 34B and 34C, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and abuts on the plate portion 1310. The length of the flow down to the contact portion of the ball with the drop delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion in the axial direction and the center of the ball) is shortened as it flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34B, the diameter length r1 up to the portion where the ball abuts on the falling delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the ball. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34C, the diameter length r2 up to the portion where the ball abuts on the falling delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the ball.

  The diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of rotation of the sphere when the sphere rotates with the axis along the longitudinal direction as the axis of rotation. In other words, if the rotation speed of the ball is the same, the rolling speed of the ball decreases (the ball is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 become shorter. According to the present embodiment, the opposing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases as it goes downstream. Therefore, the radius of rotation of the ball is gradually shortened as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

  Further, the extending plate portion 3251 is extended along the rotation axis of the opening and closing plate 1300, and in FIG. 34 showing the axial direction view thereof, as compared with the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in), the ball is displaced downward. That is, the more the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250, the more the ball can be separated from the first specified winning opening 1000a, so the ball flowing down the drop delay plate 3250 can be deviated from the first specified winning hole 1000a. it can.

  Thereby, even if the ball entry preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and as it is directed toward the first specified winning opening 1000a. It is possible to prevent the situation of winning by jumping.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is moved upward to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 will be described. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is a first variable winning device 3000 along line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35 (a) shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, and FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) show the opened state of the opening / closing plate 1300. FIG. 35 (c) shows the opening / closing plate 1300. The outlines of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state of the above are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. Moreover, in FIG. 35 (a) and FIG.35 (b), an example of the ball which entered into the flow-path formation part of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus 3000 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that has landed on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 goes to the right in front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. In the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept in the closed state, it falls after reaching the dropping position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the extending plate portion 3251 described above, and the rolling time of the ball can be maintained long, and the attention power to the ball can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the opening and closing plate 1300 moves upward (rotational movement) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 is rotated. It smoothly moves upward along the arc shape of the movable arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the ball contacts at the start of movement of the ball is directed in the front and back direction, the movement of the ball at the start of operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be smoothened. it can.

  When the ball moves upward and rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down, the flow-down direction shown in FIG. 35A is parallel to the flow-down direction. Therefore, compared with the case where the flow-down direction of the ball changes in a completely different direction before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, the sense of discomfort of the player who visually recognizes the movement of the ball before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is alleviated. it can.

  As described above, the open / close state of the open / close plate 1300 is raised by raising the open / close plate 1300 from the state where the ball is disposed below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see phantom line in FIG. 35C). By being pushed back above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (backflowing), winning of the first specified winning opening 1000a becomes possible. That is, the ball, which is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and in a state in which winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a is impossible once, can be made possible to win the first specified winning opening 1000a by upward movement. Since it is possible to return, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In other words, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), there is still a possibility that the ball passes through the detection sensor 1240, so the state in which the ball is disposed upstream of the detection sensor 1240 is illustrated. It can be said that That is, by the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the open / close plate 1300 is closed.

  Also, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specified winning hole 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction close to the first specified winning hole 1000a. The player can be made to feel anticipation that the player may win a prize in the first specified winning combination hole 1000a, and the player's attention can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the closed state, the falling of the ball that has reached the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then the rolling surface 1311 is changed when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the open state. By revitalizing the above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball reached in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the big hit game will win the first specified winning hole 1000 a in the next round game Thus, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening and closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the ball being disposed on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. That is, as in the conventional game machine, in a structure in which the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening and closing plate, the ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing plate and the glass plate by the operation of the opening and closing plate. There is a problem that the opening of the board is obstructed, which may cause a loss to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening and closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained substantially constant (limit) can do. Therefore, as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely, the ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing plate 1300 and the glass plate The risk of the operation of the plate 1300 being blocked can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the ball is slightly sandwiched between the glass plate and the open / close plate 1300 while the open / close plate 1300 is in the open state. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position of.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the flow-down mode of the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. In FIG. 36 (a), the flow-down mode of the two balls reaching the first variable winning device 3000 when the ball is released is shown in time series, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball The ball when two balls are connected in a row to reach the first variable winning device 3000 by performing a special striking method (so-called "twist strike") to strike the ball weakly and strike the second ball strongly. The flow-down aspect of is illustrated in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is released and the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval, the ball is used. When the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be disposed on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 flows down the fall delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the opening / closing plate 1300 is next opened. Can.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls are in a row and reach the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed by the ball P1 winning the first specified winning opening 1000a. At the time of switching to the state, since the ball P2 is disposed near the position (drop position Pf3) immediately before the detection sensor 1240, it can not wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened next, and the ball P2 It falls from the board 3250.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down in a row due to a special hitting method, two balls flow down at a predetermined interval due to hitting (normal hitting method). The user can more easily receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time into a state in which the ball can enter the first specified winning opening 1000a). This makes it possible to suppress a game due to a special strike method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. In FIG. 37, the state immediately after the open / close plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state is illustrated, and a ball which bounces upward by colliding with the open / close plate 1300 is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300, no bounce occurs as shown in FIG. 37, and the ball landed on the open / close plate 1300 is rebounded during the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. Only the ball bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow-down mode of the bouncing ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Be done. Therefore, the bouncing ball allows the player to receive a payout of the winning ball. Therefore, the ball reaching the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing that the opening / closing plate 1300 switches to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player can not obtain a profit. It can be prevented.

  In addition, even when a ball is won in the additional winning opening 3181, since it is possible to win a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a separately from it, additional winning The payout by winning in the mouth 3181 becomes a prize ball (a profit for the additional portion) to be paid out beyond the specified number. That is, depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at a special timing that the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, a difference can be made in the profit obtained by the player. The ability to pay attention to the flowing balls can be improved.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where a special symbol of a definite variation state (high probability state) is given as an added value after the big hit regardless of the difference in the flow-down mode of the ball entering the first variable winning device 1000 However, the first variable winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a probability variation determination unit that makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right of transition to a definite variation state (high probability state) of a special symbol according to the difference in the flow-down mode of the ball. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown enlarged. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, the transmission window is formed on the game board 13 in the lower part of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability fluctuation of being disposed on the back side of the game board 13 The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering front plate 1200, the opening and closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability change determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 is a flow passage through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows down, and is a communication passage 4810 extending vertically downward and a bifurcated flow communicated with the lower end of the communication passage 4810. The probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, which is a channel, and the specific region 4830 disposed in communication with the flow channel on the left side in the front view of the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 and the channel in the right side A non-specific area 4840, a sorting device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with the gaming ball at a branch portion of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 detecting passage of the gaming ball in the specific area 4830, and And a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 for detecting passage of gaming balls in the specific area 4540.

  The communication passage 4810 is formed to have a length of approximately one second until the ball entering from the discharge port reaches the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed to protrude inside the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and causes the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830 (to form an open state) and to flow down to the nonspecific area 4840 (close state). A distribution operation member 4851 operable between the closed position and the closed position, and a solenoid 4852 for driving the distribution operation member 4851 are mainly included.

  It is only in the special round (the fifth round in this embodiment) in the jackpot game that the probability variation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right of transition to the special symbol's probability variation state (high probability state). In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in the open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in the closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to a special symbol oddity state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily made to win the second ball entry port 640.

  In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of a fraction.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol oddity state (high probability state) is given until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 50 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is 50 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination.

  In the present embodiment, five types of "big hit D", "big hit E", "big hit F", "big hit G", and "big hit f" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols (see FIG. 40). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 differ depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 indicates each jackpot type and the special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29" A jackpot D is associated with and defined (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot D, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  In the range of “30 to 49”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the big hit E (see 202b in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot E, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can rarely obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the high probability state.

  A jackpot F is associated with a range of “50 to 79” as the value of the first hit type counter C2 and defined (refer to 202 b 43 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot F, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  In the range of “80 to 99”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the jackpot G (see 202b 44 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot G, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls and can rarely obtain the right to shift the special symbol into the high probability state.

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 50% probability that the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) Can be obtained with certainty. On the other hand, even in the remaining 50%, it is rare to be able to obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94", The jackpot f is associated and specified (see 202b 45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot f, as with the jackpot D, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed with the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  A jackpot g is associated with the range of “95 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 and defined (see 202 b 45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of a jackpot g, a five round jackpot game is executed in a tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and can rarely obtain the right of transition to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  As described above, the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 are the sixth with a probability of 95% when it is a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640). Operate with the operation pattern. At this time, since the right to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) can be obtained almost certainly, the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64) It is advantageous for the player as compared to the case of winning a jackpot. Therefore, in order to obtain a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), in the special symbol oddity state (high probability state), the player plays the right game Do.

  During the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the variation time of the normal symbol shortens (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a increases when the normal symbol hits (1 It is set as second × 2). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol state of variation, it is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and if it is a big hit, it will be a large hit f (almost certainly the transition to the special symbol of high probability state) Because it is easy to repeat the probability change state of the special symbol which is likely to be a jackpot that can acquire the right of the player, it is easy for the player to acquire a large number of prize balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the open patterns of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specified area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is the first specified prize in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

  The MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are controlled so as to be held, and the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the third round is started.

  In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a prescribed number of pachinko balls have won) are satisfied in the third round of round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the third round is ended.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the timer means starts measuring the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to carry out the first specified prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the port 1000 a to cause the open / close plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the solenoid is held to close the distribution operation member 4851 again. The control unit 4852 drives and controls the distribution operation member 4851 for a short time. This predetermined time is set as a time that does not allow passage of the ball to the specific area 4830.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko ball wins) is satisfied in the fourth round round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls can not be entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a maximum interval of 0.6 seconds, it takes 6 seconds for the specified number of shots to be fired. That is, normally, it is only possible to enter about 5 balls into the first specified winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately five winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, so the sense of discomfort given to the player is suppressed by the time of the fourth round game R being shorter than the other rounds. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  In the second opening time OP2, when the number of spheres discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is less than seven (when the number of stored balls is up to six), all the balls discharged are probability fluctuation determination flow paths 4820 If the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 balls or more (when the number of balls stored is 7 or more), at least one of the balls discharged is It is set as a time shorter than the time when the ball of the part passes through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so even if the fourth round round game ends in the second operation time T2, The spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily made seven or more. Accordingly, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in the present operation pattern, it is not necessary to set the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round game R The opening and closing plate 1300 can be operated without discomfort. This will be described below.

  In the prior art, when the specified number of balls are won in the first specified winning opening 1000a before the start of the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 and the round game R is ended, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Although there is a risk that the ball can not be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, and the player can not acquire the right to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to keep the opening and closing plate 1300 closed while the distribution operation member 4851 was kept closed before the operation (in one round, it was opened twice).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is a game characteristic that switches whether or not the ball won in the first specified winning opening 1000a by the round game R in the round immediately before the fifth round can be entered into the specific area 4830 Even when the ball can not enter the first specified winning hole 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state Since the ball heading to the specific area 4830 has already won a prize in the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol in the definite variation state (high probability state) without any problem.

  Therefore, in the present operation pattern, even when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round game R, the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 is performed by opening the opening / closing plate 1300. On the other hand, while preventing the player from having a sense of incongruity, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the player can not acquire the right of transition to the definite symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol by the prize mode. can do.

  In addition, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round round game R is held in the storage channel 1231 for the first operation time T1, so the first round in the fifth round round game R It is possible to prevent the ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. In this way, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol by the mode of winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a in the round game R in the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem of changing whether or not it can be done.

<When operating with the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 3rd round, description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed, and the round After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the timer means starts measuring the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to carry out the first specified prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the port 1000 a to cause the open / close plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the solenoid is held to close the distribution operation member 4851 again. The control unit 4852 drives and controls the distribution operation member 4851 for a short time. This short time operation is set as an operation which does not allow passage of the ball to the specific area 4830.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko ball wins) is satisfied in the fourth round round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls can not be entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a maximum interval of 0.6 seconds, it takes 6 seconds for the specified number of shots to be fired. That is, normally, it is only possible to enter about 5 balls into the first specified winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, ten balls (full balls) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled by approximately 5 winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced in the closed state with the balls winning in 3 seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231 .

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  In this operation pattern, the number of balls discharged from the outlet 1150 at the interval immediately before the fifth round of round game R is about five, so for some rare reasons, eight or more balls in three seconds are the first specific prizes As long as the ball 1000 does not win, all the balls to be discharged pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and the distributing member 4851 is displaced.

  Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere does not remain in the probability variation determination channel 4820, and therefore the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can not obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of round games R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern, and thus, in this operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern The same effect as the effect in

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the balls can be stored near the fullness of the storage channel 1231 during the round game R of the fourth round. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right of transition to the special symbol's probability change state (high probability state) by the difference in the degree of storage of the ball, so that the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231. It can improve the attention to the ball. Thereby, the power of attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter the round game R in the fourth round, it is possible to almost certainly obtain the right to shift to a special symbol in the definite variation state (high probability state) Although it is possible, because the time for round game R is short, the player who is accustomed to the game fails to acquire the right to transition to a special symbol in a state of high probability (high probability state) even in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

  That is, an unfamiliar player is more likely to play a game while hitting a jackpot during a big hit game, while a person who is used to playing a game is likely to avoid hitting to avoid wasting balls between rounds in a big hit, and to strike easily between rounds. Is the difference resulting from

  More specifically, in the case of a game of abstinence, a plurality of balls always flow down near the opening / closing plate 1300, and a ball is awarded to the first specified winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the round game R of the fourth round. As it occurs, if there are 3 seconds, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can obtain the right to shift to a special symbol in a certain variable state (high probability state) without any problem.

  On the other hand, when starting to launch after the fourth round of round game R starts, if you stop rounding so that the ball does not run down in the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval period, the dead ball is indeed Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach around the opening / closing plate 1300 until a while (for example, after 2 seconds has not elapsed) from the start of the fourth round game round R. Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to obtain the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state). Therefore, even players who are accustomed to playing games can be made to launch in the middle of a big hit game.

  As described above, the sixth operation pattern inherently involves the possibility that the benefits obtained by the player familiar with the game may be reduced due to the launch mode. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, the player can be encouraged to play in the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

  In addition, on the other hand, it is possible to provide a jackpot game requiring concentration, which can not be tasted by other pachinko machines 10, to a player who still stops rounds after grasping the above-mentioned risk. . That is, the number of wasted balls is reduced by performing a round stop operation such that the ball is back-calculated to start flowing out so that the ball flows into the first specified winning hole 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specified winning hole 1000a in the fourth round. While, you can also get the right to transition to a special symbol in a state of high probability (high probability state). In this case, the final round game is stopped before the end of the third round game R, and the launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, while considering the randomness of the flow-down of the ball entering the round game R in the third round, it is necessary to have a high-level calculation of starting launch while predicting the ball entry timing. Therefore, when the timing at which the ball which has started striking has reached the vicinity of the first specified winning opening 1000a is as calculated, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is the first specified prize in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 3rd round, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is started to measure the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko ball wins) is satisfied in the fourth round round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since it is not possible to win the specified number of balls in the first round of round game R in the fourth round of round game R, the fourth round of round game R is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. End with the passage of

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. The opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, when seven or more balls are discharged from the outlet 1150 (storage In the case where the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than at least a part of the ejected balls from passing through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so the fourth round round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven or more, the distributing operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining balls can be made to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can obtain the right to shift to the special symbol in the definite variation state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of round games R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern, and thus, in this operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern The same effect as the effect in

<When operating with the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 3rd round, description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the drive mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed, and the round After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is started to measure the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the 4th round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of 1st operation time T1) lapsed or specified number of pachinko ball winnings) is satisfied, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since it is not possible to win the specified number of balls in the first round of round game R in the fourth round of round game R, the fourth round of round game R is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. End with the passage of

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. Is controlled to hold the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. This short time operation is set as an operation which does not allow passage of the ball to the specific area 4830.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, when seven or more balls are discharged from the outlet 1150 (storage In the case where the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than at least a part of the ejected balls from passing through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  In the present operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so the specified number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 1000a in the fourth round round game R It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the round game R of the fourth round without waiting until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, as in the case where the fourth round of round games R is ended by winning a prescribed number of rounds, if the fourth round of round games R is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1 in many cases, Immediately after that, after the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, the displacement of the distribution operation member 4851 occurs.

  On the other hand, if seven or more balls are ejected at the interval immediately after the sorting operation member 4851 ends waiting for the fourth round of round game R to the maximum value of the first operation time T1. A sphere can be allowed to flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not rush the defined number of winnings, but by making the specified number of balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a win near the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the player has a special symbol. It is possible to obtain the right of transition to a definite change state (high probability state).

  Also, as another method, by ending the fifth round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the balls discharged in the interval immediately after the fifth round game R can be made a specific area. The player can also acquire the right of transition to the special symbol's probability change state (high probability state) by flowing down.

  In this manner, according to the present operation pattern, the player is given a special symbol in a definite variation state (high probability state) according to the player's discretion (selection of timing of winning of the ball to the first specified winning opening 1000a, etc.). Whether or not the right to transition can be obtained can be differentiated.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round game round R is designated. When the operation time is designated (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player keeps the special symbol no matter how the game is performed by continuing the ball entering the first specified winning hole 1000a. Since the right of transition to the definite change state (high probability state) of can be acquired, it is possible to play the game with ease.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player selects the operation time by himself according to the game mode (when the specified number of balls are made to win the first specified winning opening 1000a In some cases, it is possible to obtain the right to shift to a special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) by selecting. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to play the round game R intensively, to improve the ability to pay attention to the balls flowing down the game area and to give the player an uplifting feeling to acquire a definite change state by himself. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  As a feature of the sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern, the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is shorter than usual, and the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, and the fourth round game When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift to a special symbol's indeterminate state (high probability state). That is, in the case where the number of winning balls obtained in the fourth round of round game R is small, it is possible to realize the game characteristic that it is easy to acquire the right of transition to the definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the interval immediately after the third round of round game R is set to such a length that the balls of the storage channel 1231 are discharged all over the ball, the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) is given. Hard to get. That is, in the case where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state), it is possible to realize the game characteristic that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. As a result, since it is possible to prepare more balls for the player to hit in the normal state to be continued later, it is possible to easily suppress the player's cash investment.

  These differences can be grasped by whether or not the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fourth round, so the player predicts the state after the end of the jackpot game at the start of the fourth round game R can do. And, even in the case of the operation pattern where it is difficult to acquire the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state), the right of the transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) by the form of ball entry. It is possible to obtain

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player in the jackpot game by forcing the player to make a selection. That is, the game mode that makes it easy to obtain the right to shift to a special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) is exactly the opposite.

  Specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round of round game R, as many balls as possible to the first specified winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. While winning the prize increases the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to a special symbol (high probability state) (it is beneficial to win many balls from the start of the fourth round), while In the case of the operation pattern of 9, in the fourth round of the round game R, wait for the specified number of balls to reach the end of 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and extend the period of the round game R This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to a special symbol's state of probability (a state of high probability) (there is a benefit in curbing ball winning at the start of the fourth round).

  Thus, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the special symbol's probability change state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball is won in the round game R (game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, the player can be prevented from getting bored, and concentration on the game can be maintained.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specified area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the tenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the 6th operation | movement pattern mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 4th round, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. Is controlled to hold the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  In the present operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the elapse of the second opening time OP2 operates for a short time, basically, the ball can not flow down to the specific region 4830.

  In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state during the fifth round round game R, if the round game can be ended early, the ball that has won the first specified winning opening 1000a in the fifth round is flowed to the specific area 4830 However, in this operation pattern, the round game R of the fifth round starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 in this operation pattern. As a result, the player can not enter the specified number of balls and can not finish the fifth round game at an early stage. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specified winning combination port 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round can not flow down to the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of round game R has the same portion as the above-described sixth operation pattern, even in this operation pattern, The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of 6 can be achieved.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specified winning hole 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round. Since the patterns of the other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player visually recognizing the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000.

  In the tenth actuation pattern, in relation to the sixth actuation pattern and the seventh actuation pattern, even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round game round R, the ball is allowed to flow down the specific region 4830 It differs in that it can not do.

  That is, by mixing the present operation pattern, even if the player can fully store the balls in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the player is not relieved, and the discharged balls are in the specific area. It can be prompted to confirm whether it passes 4830 or not. That is, in the big hit game, the step (first step) as to whether or not the ball can be stored in the storage channel 1231 and the distribution operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes It can be divided into the step (second step) as to whether or not it is possible to make another place pay attention to each step. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually and to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, although the case has been described where it is possible to obtain the ball corresponding to the jackpot type regardless of the progress mode of the game in the special symbol oddity state (high probability state), the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment The 5000 includes a ball adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for the player to acquire more balls, as the number of times of fluctuation before acquiring a jackpot in the special symbol state (high probability state) is smaller. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 has a main body member 2100 and a covering front plate 2200, as in the second embodiment. In addition to the provision of the opening / closing plate 1300, the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and a new in this embodiment, The ball adjustment apparatus 5900 mainly performs adjustment of a ball by making the ball which entered the second ball entry port 640 enter the storage channel 1231 via the communication hole 5920, and is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward from the lower end of the rotation tip 1421 of the extension portion 1420 along the shape of the rotation tip 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the lower end of the time difference forming portion 5423 is extended to a position where the time difference forming portion 5423 contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state in the non-excitation state of the solenoid 1510.

  In the second variable winning device 5800, in addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the interposition rod portion 5850 having a slightly added shape and the slide operation in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear surface view of the transmission rod portion 2860 are enabled. It is arranged to be able to abut on the movable closing member 5931 of the ball adjusting device 5900 by being pushed down to the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (L-shaped portion in rear view added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 in the second embodiment). A pressing operation unit 5870 is provided.

  The ball adjusting device 5900 is formed by penetrating through the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the down flow passage forming portion 5910 which makes the ball entered into the second ball inlet 640 flow down. Communication holes 5920 disposed in a mode (opening diameter, arrangement) capable of flowing balls into the flow path 1231 and opening / closing members 5930 for opening / closing the communication holes 5920 in conjunction with the drive of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 Prepare for The down flow passage forming portion 5910 is disposed in such a manner as to pass through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, but is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. The illustration of the middle part is omitted.

  The down flow passage forming portion 5910 is a branched flow path in which the ball entering the second inlet port 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is disposed opposite to the communication hole 5920 and the ball to the communication hole 5920 Adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 enter the second ball inlet 640 further after the specified number (30 in this embodiment) is exceeded And an extra ball discharge channel 5915 for discharging the balls into a ball discharge channel (not shown).

  The adjustment channel 5911 is formed as a decelerating channel 5912 formed as a reverse-view reverse C-shaped channel curved in a half turn around the lower end and the second inlet port 640 from the upper end of the decelerating channel 5912 And a falling channel 5913 extending vertically in the back direction.

  The shape of the decelerating flow path 5912 reduces the load of the balls discharged from the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent balls staying in the decelerating flow path 5912 toward the opening of the communication hole 5920 regardless of the number of staying balls. be able to. That is, when the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is loaded by the weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, the decelerating flow path 5912 has a gentle slope near the communication hole 5920 (a slope close to horizontal). Because of this, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Accordingly, regardless of the number of staying balls, the speed at which the ball immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load given from the ball to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

  Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the flowing ball is free from deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when the ball enters the second entrance ball port 640 in a row, the front ball is decelerated earlier compared to the later ball, and the later ball is mistaken by blocking the later flow of the ball. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the extra sphere discharge channel 5915.

  In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay sequentially from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying balls is 30, the upper end portion of the 30th ball is the excess ball discharge flow path 5915 The flow path length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, after the 31st ball, it enters the extra ball discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, after the end of the jackpot game, transition to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, it is assumed that the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, and the player can aim for the next big win while suppressing the ball loss by advancing the game by the right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball having entered the second entry port 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, it stays in the adjustment channel 5911 as it approaches the end of the high probability state from the start of the high probability state. The ball increases.

  When the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, the opening and closing member 5930 is disposed at a position projecting to the inside of the communication hole 5920 and closes the opening below the outer diameter of the ball, while any solenoid 1510 or 2810 is excited. At the same time, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position for retracting to the outside of the communication hole 5920, and the movable closing member 5931 and the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 are connected together. A connection rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a slide rail portion 5933 which is disposed at the tip of the connection rod portion 5932 and supports the movable closing member 5931 so as to be vertically movable relative to the connection rod portion 5932 The connection rod portion 5932 is provided with one end to apply an upward biasing force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 taken along line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. In FIG. 46 (a), a state in which the communication hole 5920 is opened is illustrated, and in FIG. 46 (b), a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and spheres can flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231 and stay there, the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231 The fourth ball AP 54 is held at a position where it does not get out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the big hit game, since a plurality of balls IP 51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) having passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a or the second specified winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage channel 1231, the communication hole The ball AP 54 held at a position where it does not drop out of 5920 is filled up with the space IP 51 for entering the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the ball kept at the position where it does not get out of the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 thereafter and is maintained at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharging state, the movable closing member 5931 extends from the overhang adjusting channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231. Inflow of balls is regulated.

  When the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 is finished, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. 46 (a) again, and the ball AP54 which has been held at the position not coming off the communication hole 5920 earlier The balls up to the point flow into the reservoir channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is defined by a maximum of three per one opening of the communication hole 5920. Ru.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the case where the jackpot game progresses by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47A to 47C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. In FIG. 47A to FIG. 47C, the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600 and the opening and closing member 5930 by the drive of the solenoid 1510 is illustrated in time series.

  In FIG. 47 (b), the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 is the back side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47A). The state where the time difference forming portion 5423 is arranged above the engaging portion 1333 is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass.

  When the state of FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state of FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920 while the engagement of the opening / closing plate 1300 Since the portion 1333 still abuts against the time lag forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction, and the movement of the opening and closing plate 1300 is restricted, the regulating member 2600 maintains the storage state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the restricting member 2600 is in the discharging state, and the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, since the communication hole 5920 can be closed before discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started in driving the solenoid 1510, the force of discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is linked to the adjustment flow path The ball can be prevented from flowing from 5911.

  48 (a) and 48 (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. In FIG. 48A and FIG. 48B, the operation of the restriction member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by the drive of the solenoid 2810 is illustrated in time series. The state in which the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited is illustrated in FIG. 48 (a), and the state in which the solenoid 2810 is excited is illustrated in FIG. 48 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 5931 is depressed by the depressing portion 5870, whereby the communication hole 5920 is opened. Thus, the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the biasing force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Therefore, the communication hole 5920 is opened by exciting either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810, and the ball can flow into the storage flow passage 1231, while the communication hole 5920 is opened by de-excitation. It is closed and the inflow to the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

  In the big hit game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled by the above-described mechanism, a certain number of balls (three at the maximum in this embodiment) flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

  In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes It is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is 1 with a probability of one. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, after the end of the big hit game, the special symbol oddity state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is finished 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is 30 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily made to win the second ball entry port 640.

  In this embodiment, three types of "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a are different depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Configured

  FIG. 49 is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type, and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99" A jackpot H is associated with and defined (see 202b 51 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of a big hit in the lottery of special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is a big hit h within the range of “0 to 19”. Are defined in association with each other (see 202b 52 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of jackpot H or jackpot h, a 15 round jackpot game is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls, can win a prescribed number of balls regardless of the timing of winning a big hit, and can receive a payout of a prescribed upper limit.

  In the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entry 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of the jackpot i, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of payout balls and the time taken for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is won.

  That is, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), while expecting the payout of the specified number of winning balls regardless of the timing of the big hit, In the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entry ball slot 640), according to the number of entering the second entry ball slot 640 until the big hit, Since the maximum value of the number of payouts and the time taken for the jackpot game are variable, the game of making the payout balls differ depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs in the game property of acquiring the jackpot in the right-handed game You can add sex. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being played casually, and it is possible to improve the attention to each variation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing the eleventh in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the clocking change of 1 specific winning a prize mouth 1000a and 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the eleventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the timer 28 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the solenoid 2810 to move the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. The slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  In the first round of round game R, with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, the communication holes 5920 are opened, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48), but the first (2) When storing spheres from the storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255. Even if it is 3), it is possible to end the round game R by winning a prescribed number (10C) without a problem.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Drive control to start a round game R of the second round after the lapse of the third interval time Int3 between the rounds. Here, since a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval of 3 seconds, part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 at the end of the first round game R It is possible to globally discharge the spheres (up to 14) that can be stored in a row.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the 15th maximum round are repeated between the rounds R between the rounds with the first interval time Int 1 between the rounds R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to be displaced at the same time so as to open and close the second specified winning opening 2255a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 2810 is such that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time between the rounds Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to the present operation pattern, three balls from the adjustment flow passage 5911 flow into the storage flow passage 1231 each time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the largest number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the whole ball is stored until the end of the big hit game (at the end of the round game R in the 10th round). Since it is possible to cause the road 1231 to enter the ball, it is possible to end the jackpot game in a state where the ball does not remain in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating with the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started. In addition, since it is the same as that of the 11th operation pattern to round game R of the 4th round, it abbreviate | omits description.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the lapse of the third interval time Int3, the round game R of the fifth round is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  Here, even in the fifth round of round game R, it is possible to flow the balls from the communication holes 5920, but unlike the case up to the fourth round, the balls enter from the first specified winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of balls from the communication hole 5920 is actually performed, the specified number of balls can not be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls obtainable in the fifth round game R of this actuation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls obtainable in the same round round R in the eleventh actuation pattern and the first Since the end of the round game R is to be waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is prolonged.

  Similarly, round games R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds are repeated with third interval time Int3 between rounds between rounds R similarly, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is performed so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In this operation pattern, from the fifth round game R, reduction in the number of winning balls that may occur in the subsequent round game R and extension of the round time cause balls to flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231 Depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the jackpot, the reduction in the number of balls or the extension of the round time changes to what extent. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel corresponds to the number of balls having passed through the second entrance 640, while the drawing of the special symbol 2 by passing the sphere of the second entrance 640 (second entrance Since it is possible to receive the lottery based on entering the ball to 640, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 relates to the number of lottery of the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 It is assumed that the numbers are the same.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specified winning opening 1000a or the second specified winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to 12 balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231 until the fourth round game round R. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the balls are flowed into the storage channel 1231 through the communication holes 5920 because the jackpot game was started in a state where 13 or more balls were stored in the adjustment channel 5911 That's the case. In other words, after shifting to the high probability state, the jackpot game is started in a state where the drawing of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640) is received 13 times or more. .

  Therefore, the number of prize balls decreases if you win a jackpot after receiving a special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640) 12 times after shifting to the high probability state Since the extension of the round time does not occur, it is possible to improve the player's ability to pay attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery.

  In addition, after the 13th lottery, the number of winning balls is reduced for each lottery, and the round time is extended for every 3 lottery, so the player for the number of times that the jackpot can be obtained Can improve the power of attention.

  That is, for example, when a big hit is obtained in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), storage is made through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow path 1231 is two, the number of balls that can be won in this round is eight. In addition, when a big hit is acquired in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), the storage flow path through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round. Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is three, the number of prizes that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the number of winning balls in the round game R of the fifth round decreases.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning the jackpot by the 13th to 15th lottery, in any case, it flows into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R and the ball remains in the adjustment channel 5911 Is zero. Therefore, from the round game R of the sixth round, it is possible to win a specified number of balls in the first specified winning hole 1000a, thereby it is possible to end the round game R of the sixth round, round time There is no change in the degree of extension.

  In addition, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 in the case of winning the jackpot is 16-18, in the round game R of the sixth round, in the case of 19-21, in the round game R of the seventh round, 22-24 When the number of balls is reduced in the eighth round game R, in the ninth round game R, in the ninth round game R, in the eighth round game R, in the tenth round game R, in the tenth round game R And an increase in round time will occur.

  Thereby, as in the present embodiment, in the game property where the high probability state is terminated by the number of times of drawing, the case where the jackpot is obtained shortly after the transition to the high probability state and the case where the jackpot is obtained near the end of the high probability state Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profit (the number of balls to be paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.) given to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the benefit given to the player is reduced as the number of lottery from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition increases, so that the number of lottery until the jackpot acquisition is small. Originally, there should have been a chance to be able to receive the lottery with a high probability even with the remaining lottery number, but it is possible to partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction that it can not be received.

  In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first drawing after becoming a high probability state, then the remaining 29 drawings were added, and the next drawing should have been 59 times. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to 30 times can be partially resolved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In the high probability state as well, if you win a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the second specified winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern It becomes possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of times of drawing after opening and closing and transition to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming to win a ball at the first ball entrance 64 in the high probability state.

  In this case, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 is increased without being linked to the drawing of the special symbol as compared with the case of playing the right-handed game, the interval for receiving the drawing is extended, and the game time is increased. There is a risk of becoming long.

  Therefore, as a way of gaming in the high probability state, the player can receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is won Do you aim to win the jackpot of the jackpot h) (do you play right-handed game), be prepared to increase the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 by the jackpot win, and be prepared to extend the game time, jackpot game Whether to aim for a jackpot of jackpot type (hijacker H) that can eliminate the risk of winning balls in the game or to play a left-handed game can be selected as appropriate. As a result, the range of gaming methods to be selected can be expanded according to the taste of the player and the situation (such as playable time) placed.

  In addition, after the high probability state is finished, it is difficult to open the second ball entry port 640, and the player shifts to the left strike game. In this case, although a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, in the big hit type (big hit H) that can be acquired in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by the predetermined number of winnings, the profit (the number of balls awarded, the profit on both sides of the playing time) given to the player is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being impaired. The player can start playing the game at any timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of drawing of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (second entrance In the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the time of winning a jackpot is the special symbol 2 up to a jackpot winning, although it has been described on the assumption that the number of balls entered into the mouth 640 is the same. It should be kept in mind that the number is equal to the number of lotteries.

  That is, while the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed along with the ball winning in the second entrance 640, it is for the player to recognize whether or not the jackpot has been won in the lottery, the subsequent reach effect or Since it is after the button pressing effect, etc., it is common that the player continues to hit the ball into the second ball entrance 640 also during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 can be held up to four, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player efficiently receives a lottery, a so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of lottery in which the player can recognize the determination of the jackpot, the state in which a maximum of about four balls are entered into the second ball entry port 640 is maintained.

  In addition, even if the number of reservations is maximum, even if entering the second entrance 640, the lottery is not received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911, so that the jackpot game can be benefitted by the player. The possibility of decreasing is increased. Since the suspension is digested by stopping the fluctuation and starting the next fluctuation, in other words, the longer the period until the suspension of the fluctuation, the higher the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game decreases. It will be.

  Therefore, when the ball is kept at the time of the high reach such as long reach and the like, it is possible to form the game characteristic which increases the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the big hit game decreases. As a result, since the player can be prevented from continuing the launch of the ball in the production with a high sense of expectation such as long reach, etc., the concentration power which the player has allocated to the adjustment of the shot output of the ball is eliminated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration to the effect such as long reach, and to improve the attention to the effect.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described, but the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. The arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is in the specific area 4830 It is comprised so that the state after a big hit game may change by whether it passes through.

  52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 taken along line LII-LII of FIG. In FIG. 52, the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is illustrated. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering front plate 1200, the opening and closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600). And the rear cover 1700), the interference device 6900 according to the sixth embodiment is provided.

  The interference device 6900 is disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and has a slide movable shaft disposed along a flat surface with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the tip of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910 And an interference member 6930 which slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes an elongated hole 6921 which is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 as the tip end side of the tip member 6920 is.

  The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in a thin plate member 1110 disposed opposite to the storage flow passage 1231 of the covering front plate 1200, and the rear end is an elongated hole 6921 The rear end moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. This back-and-forth operation enables entry into the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is disposed at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to bring it into the extended state (see the phantom line in FIG. 52), the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231.

  53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. 53 (a) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53 (b) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and “V” is described on the ball that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later .

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), while 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the retracted state of the interference member 6930, the third ball in the extended state of the interference member 6930. The subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of round games R for the jackpot game is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the prescribed number of balls can not be won. Since the round game R can not be ended by the predetermined number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the predetermined time. The effects that can be realized using this difference will be described below in conjunction with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (special variation of the special symbol) of the special symbol, for example, 4 minutes It is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is 1 with a probability of one.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol oddity state (high probability state) is given until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 10 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is 10 times After completion, it is configured to be set to the normal state, but when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, it is normal until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 10 times after the end of the big hit game It is configured to be in the time saving state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, two types of "big hit I" and "big hit j" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 differ depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state).

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54) . In the case of a jackpot I, a two-round jackpot game is executed in a thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 balls and can almost certainly not acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the high probability state.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the big hit j is associated and specified (see FIG. 54).

  In the case of jackpot j, a two-round jackpot game is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  As mentioned above, when it is a big hit in the lottery of special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), almost certainly get the right of the transition to the special symbol state (high probability state) of the special symbol Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case of winning a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64). Therefore, in order to obtain a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), in the special symbol oddity state (high probability state), the player plays the right game Do.

  During the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the variation time of the normal symbol shortens (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a increases when the normal symbol hits (1 It is set as second × 2). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol state of variation, it is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and if it is a big hit, the big hit j (the transition to the special symbol of high probability state) Because it becomes easy to be repeated the definite variation state of the special symbol which becomes the jackpot) which can acquire the right of, it becomes easy for the player to acquire a large number of prize balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54A and 54B, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specified area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is the first specified prize in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  In FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time between rounds Int1 is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long operation time TL). Be done. Therefore, it is not used for relative comparison of the lengths of each time in FIG. 54, but the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed according to the temporal relationship described below.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). The operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930, which is performed when a big hit game is given, will be described below.

<When operating with the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  The MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation presentation) is finished. The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is Is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a long time.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for the long operation time TL, and the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again after the long operation time TL. The control is performed to cause the interference member 6930 to operate for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state for the long operation time TL. During this time, it is not possible to win a defined number of balls in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53 (b)). And in this embodiment, since the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, the interference member 6930 is not waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Since it is in the retracted state, it is substantially impossible to win a prescribed number of balls, and the round game R of the first round ends when the first operation time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 can not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can not obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852 and 6910 are controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the big hit game is ended with the lapse of the time.

<When operating with the fourteenth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  The MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation presentation) is finished. The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is Is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a long time.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state for a minute time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the minute time, the interference member 6930 is held again in the retracted state. As described above, the solenoid 6910 is controlled to drive the interference member 6930 for a short time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  In this embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state only for a very short time, it is in the retracted state in most of the time, so as shown in FIG. 53 (a), It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, since the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the restriction member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852 and 6910 are controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the big hit game is ended with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time that is expected to be three or more and less than six in the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is disposed on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball blocks the line of sight of the player, making it difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to check the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, since the change due to the extension of the interference member 6930 is limited to the fact that the third and subsequent balls move slightly in the storage channel 1231, it is recognized to the player whether or not the change by the interference member 6930 has occurred. The game can be made fun by making the first specified winning opening 1000a win a ball and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without making the player feel uncomfortable by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can.

  Then, the balls are stored near the inlet of the storage channel 1231, and the first round of round game R is not completed to give a sense of discomfort for the first time, and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is actually counted. It is possible to create a new playability of recognizing the difference in jackpot type for the first time.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (the change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify the change of the situation of the game board 13 in an easy-to-recognize mode from the given sense of incongruity, and allow the player to recognize the difference in jackpot type. Therefore, the attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 is dropped as it is, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured to allow the ball disposed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 to flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 according to the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, except for the configuration of the front cover 7200, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall 1220, the housing 1230, the detection sensor 1240, and the drop delay plate 3250). And a second falling delay plate 7260 newly disclosed in this embodiment.

  The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extended on the back side of the thin plate member 1210 so as to extend between the end surface 3251 b and the housing portion 1230, and descends as the upper surface 7261 separates from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second falling delay plate 7260 is extended rearward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the second drop delay plate 7260, the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is less than the diameter of the sphere near the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second falling delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 57) relative to the movement trajectory of the balls rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the falling delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the balls rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second falling delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member which changes whether or not the ball comes into contact with the ball depending on the path of arrival of the ball. That is explained below.

  58 (a) and 58 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 7000 in a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). In FIG. 58 (a), the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state in a state where the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3 is illustrated, and in FIG. 58 (b) The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, the ball is covered with the front inclination of the plate portion 1310 which occurs at the time of operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. Go down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it will abut on the second falling delay plate 7260 in the process of falling down, flow down to the falling delay plate 3250 along the inclination of the upper surface, and then roll on the upper surface of the falling delay plate 3250 to fall again at the falling position Pf3. To reach.

  The distance between the second falling delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the second falling delay plate 7260 and the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball. Can be prevented from vertically falling on the back side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the balls rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 are on the main body member 3100 side along the rear inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250. Flow down while in contact with the

  At this time, the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball is disposed below the second drop delay plate 7260, so that the extension length of the second drop delay plate 7260 to the back side is greater than the movement trajectory of the ball. The upper surface 7261 can receive a ball falling from above while holding it on the front side.

  The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not abut on the second falling delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and drops as it is after reaching the dropping position Pf3. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without a break.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball is subjected to the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball is not received depending on which side the ball is closer to the second drop delay plate 7260.

  In this embodiment, two balls are connected in a row to roll on the top surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 while maintaining the action of causing the balls rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 to smoothly fall to the position facing the end surface 3251 b. Even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the falling of the ball disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, even when two balls are in a row, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed in front of the detection sensor 1240, it is a case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. Also, the ball can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, after the ball rolls the upper surface 7261 of the second drop delay plate 7260 to the left, it resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, the ball can be maintained on the near side of the opening / closing plate 1300 substantially over the time it takes to roll over the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 and pass over it. Thereby, the number of wasted balls (balls which flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first out port 66) which may occur during the interval time can be reduced.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

  59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away to make the opening and closing plate 8300 visible, and a part of the side wall 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIGS. 59 and 61, the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (rising attitude), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the opening state (hanging attitude). In FIGS. 60 and 62, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (immersion posture). The state after becoming) is illustrated. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the drawing is the front (front) side, and the rear side of the drawing is the rear (rear) side. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper side (upper side), the lower side is the lower side (lower side), the right side is the right side (right side), and the left side is the left side Each side will be described. Furthermore, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, the opening / closing plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 is approximately 4 etc. between the shaft portion 1320, the loaded portion 1330, and the both shaft portions 1320 described in the above embodiments. A plate portion 8310 is formed into a plate shape in three sections of the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) in a front view thereof.

  That is, in the present embodiment, a gap is generated between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. It will be set up.

  In addition, since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening and closing plate 8300 is shortened as compared with the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular recess 1122 can also be shortened. In the present embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in the minimum necessary range for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the covering front plate 8200 and plays a role of a rolling surface of a ball guided to the detection sensor 1240. The configuration of the covering front plate 8200 is the same as that of the covering front plate 1200 described in the above embodiment except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. I omit explanation.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-like member that protrudes toward the main body member 1100 from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and the protruding end portion (rear side end portion) thereof is a support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100. Abut on the main body member 1100 in such a manner as to close the open end (front side end portion). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right side shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward as it goes to the right such that the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) is in a surface position with the upper surface (rolling surface) of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state. The lower surface is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. The arc on which the shape of the lower surface is based is formed as an arc whose radius is shorter than the radius (longest radius, that is, the radius of the movement locus of the upper end of the facing surface 8341b) of the movement locus (arc) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 Be done. As a result, the upper corner portion of the opposing surface 8341b abuts on the fixed receiving portion 8250 in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 moves (rotations) the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. It is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion (the extension length to the left) of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is designed as a length such that a ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 does not get on the rolling surface as it is. Ru. That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is disposed to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, even if the ball may collide with the fixed receiving portion 8250 when the ball falls in the vertical direction from the inclined surface 1237, the center of gravity of the ball is on the left of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 There is almost no event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240, and the ball spills from the fixed receiving portion 8250 to the left and falls toward the first out port 66.

  In addition, when the ball spilled to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 closes the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is directed to rotate clockwise in a front view). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state change of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 to the open state due to the load given from the ball.

  In addition, from the configuration on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of the nails, the second ball entrance 640, etc., see FIG. 2), the ball having a speed downward to the right to the fixed receiving portion 8250 It is extremely unlikely that a jumping event will occur.

  Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having a rolling surface is disposed on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not have the effect of facilitating the guiding of the ball to the detection sensor 1240 excessively. Configured

  The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the flow of the balls rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) while opening and closing the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 in a rotational operation. The details of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 will be described below.

  The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and the receiving plate 8341 disposed on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and the receiving plate 8341 extend toward the rotation shaft Relative rotation of the rod-like connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 disposed on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and configured to be able to abut the power transmission member 1400, the linking portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 It is a rod-like member to be connected, and mainly includes a pivot support rod portion 8344 rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110.

  In this embodiment, in the shaft support bar portion 8344, the supported portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 has a circular cross-sectional shape, and a support portion for supporting the connecting portion 8342 on the front side and a load receiving portion 8343 on the rear side. A supporting portion to support is formed in a D-shaped cross section (a shape that is not circular). A fitting portion (a hole or a recess) having a shape corresponding to the D shape is formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the load receiving portion 8343. In the use state (see FIG. 59), the support portion and the fitting portion are fitted By being put together, the connecting portion 8342 and the load receiving portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

  The load-bearing portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is pivotally supported by the shaft support bar portion 8344 and is a curved curved upper surface that contacts the power transmission member 1400, and a load-loaded portion 8343 And a center of gravity portion 8343b including the center of gravity position of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps with the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 during operation of the power transmission member 1400, and is extended when the extending portion 1420 is moved downward (tilted). The extension portion 1420 and the right end which starts to be in contact with each other have a substantially parallel surface with respect to the contact start line FL1 including the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start to contact.

  A smooth curved surface is formed in such a manner that the radius of rotation gradually shortens from the right end to the left end which is the contact end point with the extension portion 1420, so the extension portion 1420 and the load-loaded portion Load transfer to and from 8343 can be made smooth (with low dynamic friction). Accordingly, the followability of the load receiving portion 8343 with respect to the extension portion 1420 can be improved.

  The center-of-gravity portion 8343 b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in a closed state (immersion position) when no load is generated from the power transmission member 1400. That is, since the center-of-gravity position of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is included in the center-of-gravity portion 8343b, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (immersion posture) by rotation by its own weight. Then, when the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 abuts on the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250, further rotation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (immersion posture). Be done.

  The connection portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at the left end of the receiving plate 8341 (ie, the portion adjacent to the opening / closing plate 8300 and in which a load may occur). Thereby, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is the opening / closing plate 8300 Even if it collides with it, the possibility that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be damaged can be reduced.

  In addition, the connection part 8342 should just be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the axial support rod part 8344, and the configuration mode is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support bar portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support bar portion 8344 may be connected (ie, two The left and right ends of the support plate 8341 may be supported by a bar), and the two bars in that case may be connected and reinforced by a planar plate along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support bar 8344. Also good.

  The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-like portion having a longitudinal width substantially the same as the width of the plate portion 8310 of the opening and closing plate 8300, and is continuous with the flat rolling plane 8341a and the left end of the rolling plane 8341a. And an opposing surface 8341b disposed opposite to the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening and closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

  The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a flat plane parallel to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (rising attitude) in the open state (projecting attitude).

  The opposing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and the width in the short direction (the thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is approximately equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. This makes it possible to enlarge the load receiving surface at the time of contact between the opposing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged by the load at the time of contact (cracking or chipping It is possible to make it easy to avoid the occurrence or breakage.

  Here, the facing surface 8341 b is disposed on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of the plane passing through the shaft support bar portion 8344 and orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the movement trajectory LC1 of the facing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is a rolling plane in the open state. It will expand upward (radially outside of the shaft support portion 8344) than 8341a. This makes it easy to push the ball (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240. The details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, an operation aspect and an operation sequence of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the restriction member 1600 by the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described.

  63 and 64, operations of the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in time series. Further, FIG. 65 illustrates a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 and a time-dependent change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). 63 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63 (c).

  FIG. 64 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). 64 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64 (c).

  In FIGS. 63 and 64, in order to facilitate understanding, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600 and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), and the illustration of the other components is omitted, and the open / close plate 8300 and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 are closed (FIG. The state change from a) and FIG. 63 (b) to the open state (see FIG. 64 (c) and FIG. 64 (d)) is illustrated in time series.

  That is, in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (state where the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20 (c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1 with the tip member 1520 displaced. 64A and 64B, the tip member 1520 is displaced so as to be separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second auxiliary distance h2a in the state of being separated by h2a. 64 (c) and 64 (d), the position where the tip member 1520 is displaced and is separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is displaced) Excited State of being arranged in a final arrival position) of the focus is illustrated, respectively.

  When tip member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from reference line O1 by auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63 (c)), power transmission member 1400 makes the lower surface of extension portion 1420 an abutment start line FL1. It is the state and agreement to be matched. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts receiving a load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)). The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state until the state shown in FIG. 63 (c) and FIG. 63 (d) is reached).

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 65, in the column of the tip member 1520, the distances h1, h2, h2a, h3 and h4 are shown in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600 are driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating faster than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and ends earlier. .

  Further, the restricting member 1600 starts the operation toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts the operation toward the open state, and enters the storage state simultaneously with the opening / closing plate 8300 becoming the open state. As shown in FIG. 65 where the respective timing charts are illustrated symmetrically, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the respective members operate in the reverse order of the case where they are driven (excited).

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a. The state in which the ball can enter the ball is maintained (see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Therefore, in a period in which the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the movement trajectory LC1 of the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is configured to expand above the rolling plane 8341a, and the ball P81 is detected at the timing when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240. The plane of the center of the sphere P82 which flows down with the sphere P81 on the upstream side of the plane is a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the axis portion 1320 and passing the center of the axial support bar portion 8344 It is disposed closer to the detection sensor 1240 than the passing plane) (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state, the ball P82 can be given a load directed to the right (direction to push it into the detection sensor 1240) at the upper end of the opposing surface 8341b.

  Thereby, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the sphere P81 is a detection sensor on the premise that a sphere is formed (the state of the sphere upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the conditions, see FIG. 59, spheres P81 and P82). When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled by being detected by 1240 (for example, when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240, when a predetermined number of entering balls in the round game R is detected) Even if only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the over-winning (so-called over-winning. In other words, the prescribed number of round games R (this number In the embodiment, it is configured to allow the detection sensor 1240 to detect more than ten balls) (passing through the first specified winning opening 1000a)). Can.

  In this embodiment, while the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arc track to apply a load to the ball P82, after the load is pushed to the detection sensor 1240 side by the load, it rolls on the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along the circular arc trajectory, the ball P82 flaps when passing through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the ball P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of stagnation, rebounding, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the sphere is configured to be able to be stored on the downstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (storage flow channel 1231), and as described in each of the above embodiments, the detection sensor is used by the ball stored in the storage flow channel 1231. It is configured to be able to regulate passage of 1240 balls. Therefore, when the storage channel 1231 is full of balls, the ball P82 is not allowed to enter the storage channel 1231 by being restricted by the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, and the auxiliary opening / closing operation is performed. After the member 8340 is closed, it spills and flows down to the first out port 66.

  On the other hand, if a gap is generated in the storage flow passage 1231, only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can allow the extra winning. Therefore, the arrangement of the balls downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the balls in the storage channel 1231) can change the ease of occurrence of the over-winning, so Control can be performed by adjusting the flow of the ball in the passage 1231.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is smooth in a manner that the rotation radius gradually decreases from the contact start portion (right end) with the power transmission member 1400 toward the contact end portion (left end). A curve was made to be formed. This enables load transfer to occur in a state where dynamic friction is small. Accordingly, the followability of the load receiving portion 8343 with respect to the extension portion 1420 can be improved.

  In the state where a ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (first specified winning hole 1000a), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is limited to only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When changing from the open state to the closed state (rotation), a load directed from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (first specified winning hole 1000a) is applied. Thus, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (when operating to the closed state), a limited number (one in the present embodiment) of balls enter the detection sensor 1240 (first specified winning opening 1000a). It can be made easy to ball. This can increase the possibility of the occurrence of a limited number of overruns.

  In addition, the possibility of the occurrence of the over-winning varies with the storage condition of the balls in the storage channel 1231. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the over-winning occurs, depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored items, etc.) of the balls in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state). Furthermore, the arrangement state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 or the operation mode of the interference member 6930. That is, by controlling the driving (excitation) mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, it is possible to achieve the equalization of the number of the prize balls due to the over-winning.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  66 and 68, the state after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (rising attitude), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the opening state (hanging attitude) 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted attitude), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (engaged attitude). The state after becoming is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. Briefly described, the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment corresponds to one in which the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment is replaced.

  As in the above embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front side overhanging end of the pressing portion 1422 and the front side overhanging end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are identical to be orthogonal to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400. It is arranged on a plane. Therefore, even when the time difference forming portion 5423 pushes the engagement portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 8300 (even in the state before being pushed by the pressing portion 1422, the opening and closing plate 8300 is opened. The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

  The thin plate member 9110 is extended to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with a length capable of guiding the ball to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 which is bored with a size through which the ball can pass and the auxiliary entrance port 9111 A rolling plate 9112 is mainly provided.

  The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is a through hole disposed on the left of the discharge port 1150 in a front view, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) balls are dispensed by detecting passage of the ball. It is a prize ball mouth. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 may be a ball entrance (for example, an out port) in which the payout of the winning balls does not occur.

  The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate on which a ball flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the covering front plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary entrance hole 9111 ( D) formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward. Furthermore, the rolling plate 9112 is formed in such a manner as to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary entry port 9111, and on the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111 is formed as an inclined surface in which the upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side. Ru.

  That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided to the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111 along the slope, and then passes through the auxiliary entry port 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three winning balls are paid out to the player.

  The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed such that it does not pick up a ball which rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 and flows down the free falling ball FK1. That is, in the state where the first variable winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 regardless of how much right strike continues.

  On the other hand, the opening and closing plate 8300 having an upper surface which is inclined downward toward the right is driven even slightly (for example, it is excited for only 0.1 seconds and the opening and closing plate 8300 is rotated toward the open state) When the ball flows down the loaded flow down path FK2 in which the loaded ball flows down, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and may pass through the auxiliary entrance port 9111. That is, in the present embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 8300 is driven, the ball in contact with the opening and closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary entrance hole 9111 besides the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Here, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 is different from that described above in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

  70 and 71, operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 are illustrated in time series. Further, FIG. 72 shows a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the restriction member 1600.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). 70 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70 (c).

  71 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71 (c).

  In FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600 and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed for easy understanding. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), and the illustration of the other components is omitted, and the open / close plate 8300 and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 are closed (FIG. The state change from a) and FIG. 70 (b) to the open state (see FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 71 (d)) is illustrated in time series.

  That is, in FIG. 70 (a) and FIG. 70 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (state where the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 70 (c) and 70 (d), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. 71A and 71B, the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 71 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced, and is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) State is shown, respectively.

  When the tip end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first auxiliary distance h1a (see FIG. 70C), the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400 and the restriction are restricted. This is the same as the state where contact with the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the restriction member 1600 starts receiving the load from the opening and closing plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b)). c) and until the state shown in FIG. 70 (d), the restricting member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharged state).

  In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, the open / close plate 8300 is opened in a state where the tip end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71A). The state (raising position) is set, and the regulating member 1600 is set in the storage state. Then, in a state where the tip end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71A) which has been in the closed state is opened (see FIG. 71 (c)).

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the opening and closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (rising posture) The member 1600 is maintained in the storage state.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600 are driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening and closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340. After the operation is completed, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts the operation.

  Further, the restriction member 1600 starts operation toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operation toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time as the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened. As shown in FIG. 72, the respective timing charts are illustrated symmetrically, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the respective members operate in the reverse order of the case where they are driven (excited).

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 starts driving from the non-excitation state, only the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operation, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 does not start operation yet. Therefore, by shortening the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing the short opening), the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be changed while maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 73, in the column of the tip member 1520, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  In FIG. 73, a case where the period for driving (excitation) the solenoid 1510 is half of the time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) required for the switching plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state is illustrated. (Ie, the case where it is driven (excited) for only 0.05 seconds is illustrated).

  In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and the operation of raising only the opening / closing plate 8300 to the intermediate state is repeated. According to this operation, a load can be applied to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300. Therefore, the flow-down path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening and closing plate 8300 is driven The path FK1 can be switched to the load down path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, by continuing the firing of the ball by the right strike, the ball can be made to pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111 and it can be configured to pay out the prize ball to the player.

  With this configuration, it is possible to configure, for example, a game characteristic in which a prize ball is paid out by a small hit game. In the small hit game, by driving (excitation) the solenoid 1510 with the opening pattern shown in FIG. 73, the flow-down path of the ball which has reached the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the opening and closing plate 8300 operates. A ball can be guided to the entrance 9111 to cause payout of a winning ball.

  The small hit game solenoid 1510 can be driven a plurality of times consecutively, so the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of points in time. For example, since one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) 36 times when the drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds in total. be able to.

  Further, by setting the interval of driving (excitation), it is possible to easily apply a load to the ball through the opening and closing plate 8300. For example, if the ball is fired at 0.6 second intervals, then 0.6 × X (number of arrivals of the sphere) = 0.5 × X + 0.1 × X =, so solenoid 1510 has an interval of 0.5 seconds. By driving (excitation), it is possible to apply a load to the balls via the opening and closing plate 8300 at a rate of one in about five balls regardless of the timing of driving (excitation) start.

  In this case, about seven balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 in one small hitting game, and about 21 winning balls can be paid out to the player.

  The period of the small hitting game in this case is 0.5 seconds interval × 36 times = about 18 seconds. As described above, by prolonging the time of one small hitting game, it is possible to prevent the situation that the holding ball of the special symbol is lost (broken) by the end of the small hitting game. Thereby, a small hit game can be generated without interruption.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 disposed above the auxiliary entrance 9111 is maintained in the closed state, so that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is operated (above the auxiliary entrance 9111). The ball falling to the side of the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 (that is, the ball flowing down in the load flow down path FK2) is bounced under load from the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, or auxiliary opening and closing It can be prevented that the rolling detection surface 8341 a of the member 8340 is guided by the detection sensor 1240.

  Referring back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a. The state in which the ball can enter the ball is maintained as described above in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, even in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily carry out an over winning with a limited number of balls.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the control member 1600 is controlled to change to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed, When the storage channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the premature discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 by mistake, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an over winning.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 71A). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be changed while maintaining the state (open state) in which the ball can be placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 74, in the column of the tip member 1520, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, h4 are shown in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is 1⁄4 of the time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) required for the switching plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. The case where the drive (excitation) is released for only 0.025 seconds is illustrated. In the following, this mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as "1/4 release".

  In this case, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the restriction member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the sphere in the storage channel 1231), and only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls riding on the upper surfaces of the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, several balls arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 (the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 and the opening and closing plate 8300 The ball disposed at the boundary of (mainly, the ball disposed at the outside of the motion trajectory LC1) can flow downward toward the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 (see FIG. 66).

  Thus, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 8300 still passes the detection sensor 1240 when the opening and closing plate 8300 is still in the open state (if 15 pieces of award balls are paid out), The detection sensor 1240 can be configured to pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111 without passing (when payout of three winning balls occurs).

  In this case, since the time until the specified number of balls pass through the detection sensor 1240 is delayed, the time for the round game R can be extended without causing ball loss.

  Note that the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with projections or depressions, or a longitudinally long rib may be provided on the front side of the thin plate member 9110 at a position where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 contacts. Alternatively, the flow velocity of the ball may be reduced, and the balls may be connected on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. As a result, the possibility of a ball being placed at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300 can be increased when 1⁄4 cancellation of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is performed. The function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved by releasing the drive (excitation) by 1⁄4.

  Further, the timing and the number of executions of the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set to a plurality of types by being associated with the jackpot type.

  For example, if firing of the balls occurs at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1⁄4 of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled during 9.0 seconds required for the 15 balls to reach the opening and closing plate 8300. Occurs approximately five times, that is, one quarter release of the actuation (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs once in 1.8 seconds, thereby assisting approximately five balls during the round game R It can be guided to the entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player can be made the same as in the case where only one ball is over-winning in the first specified winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

  Also, by doubling this interval, ie, once every 3.6 seconds, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs, approximately 5 balls are executed while executing round game R twice. It can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player can be made the same as in the case where only one ball is over-wined in the first specified winning opening 1000a while the round game R is performed twice.

  In addition, in order to satisfy 5 times in 9.0 seconds, it is not necessary to set equal intervals of 1.8 seconds each. For example, the solenoid 1510 may be added five times in 9.0 seconds in a mode of sequentially adding 0.2 seconds to each of 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.2 seconds and so on. It may cause a 1/4 release of Further, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 may be generated at disjointed timings. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which 1⁄4 of the solenoid 1510 is released.

  Also, for example, by making the timing to execute 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 dense in the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 by continuing to fire the ball from the start of the round game R Playability can be configured to increase the probability of being played.

  In this case, stopping the firing of the ball at the interval between rounds may cause the ball not to reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing at which 1⁄4 of the solenoid 1510 is released. Can be suppressed.

  That is, it is possible to start the next round game R in the state that the hit ball has reached near the first variable winning device 9000 if the ball is hit in the interval between rounds, and the assistance is inserted. Since it is possible to increase the probability that the ball is guided to the ball mouth 9111 and as a result it is possible to increase the number of paid out balls, it is possible for the player to keep hitting the ball vigorously in the interval between rounds. it can.

  In addition, for example, by concentrating the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 in the second half of the round game R, winning of a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) (first specification) is made halfway through the round game R It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which the ball is intermittently fired so as not to cause the winning of the winning opening 1000a).

  In this case, in the second half of the round game R, the direction in which the round game R is extended until 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed causes payout of the winning balls due to the ball passing through the auxiliary entrance port 9111. Since it is possible to cause the player to increase the number of payouts, it is possible to cause the player to execute a loose jackpot game such that the ball is fired intermittently intermittently.

  In this case, a difference is made in the number of times the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs in the second half of the round game R (for example, there are 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). Since it is possible to differentiate the additional winning balls obtained as a result of the loose jackpot game, the player's attention to the flow mode of the balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 is maintained at a high level. can do.

  On the other hand, the ball may be continued to be fired, and a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of balls may be made to win the first specified winning hole 1000a before the release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs. . In this case, an increase in payout of the winning balls due to the passage of the balls to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can not be expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the big hit game end You can advance the timing of receiving the lottery later.

  As described above, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim for the payout of the winning balls by the auxiliary entrance 9111 or to ignore it and terminate the round game R early.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The ball that collides with the opening and closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening and closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary insertion hole 9111 by being given a load directed to the auxiliary insertion hole 9111 did. As a result, even in the case of an operation mode in which the period during which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state is short, it is possible to easily pay out the winning balls. Can be motivated to execute.

  The ball reached the upstream of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at a specific timing by executing 1/4 release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while continuing the state in which the opening / closing plate 8300 guides the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Made to flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111. Thereby, it is possible to provide variations in the progress mode of the round game R in the jackpot game and the mode of payout of the winning balls.

  For example, even if the number of passing balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can receive an extra winning ball by paying out the winning ball by entering the auxiliary entry hole 9111. It is possible to obtain prize balls (in this embodiment, the number of prize balls exceeding 150) to be paid out when a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the specified winning hole 1000a.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the solenoid 10182 of the middle discharge device 10180 is de-energized, and the state in which the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 reaches the lowermost end is illustrated. Is driven (excitation), and a state in which the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 can be discharged halfway is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the first variable winning device 10000 includes the case where it is possible to discharge the ball from the midway position of the storage channel 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the covering front plate 10200. Except for differences from the embodiment, the configuration described in the above embodiment is combined. Briefly described, the movable parts (that is, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600, the interference device 6900) except the intermediate discharge device 10180 have the configuration in the eighth embodiment. Is used as it is.

  In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging the sphere at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the covering front plate 10200 is extended in a box shape opened toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage portion 10230 including the storage channel 1231, the protruding portion 1235, and the inclined surface 1237. .

  The housing portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed in such a manner that the lower wall portion of the box bulging downward, and a through hole 10233 drilled in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232.

  The bulging portion 10232 is bulging with a volume equal to or greater than that of the sphere whose flow is restricted downward by the interference member 6930, and a through hole 10233 having a cross-sectional area equal to or larger than the sphere connected to the storage channel 1231 in that portion. Is formed. In this way, the ball staying at a position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to be dropped downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

  The through hole 10233 is a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally in the horizontal direction under the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231, and a vertical hole spatially connected with the horizontal hole 10233a and extending downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b and an inclined surface 10233c which is inclined downward toward the back as an upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b.

  The lateral holes 10233a are disposed on the upper side of the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right end portions, and are disposed below the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 in the vicinity of the right end. It is comprised in the aspect approached into the upper side of the plane (plane of a fixed inclination) in alignment with the extension of a lower base.

  The main body member 10100 has substantially the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board in addition to the one described as the configuration of the main body member 1100 in the above embodiment. A horizontal hole 10111 to be drilled, a discharge port 10112 to which a ball sent to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c is able to pass so as to pass therethrough, and a thin plate member 10110 is arranged to move along the horizontal hole 10111 And an intermediate ejector 10180 having a portion.

  The middle discharging device 10180 is mainly inserted into the lateral holes 10111 and 10233a, and the movable member 10181 which can be moved to the left and right, and a solenoid 10182 which generates a driving force to move the movable member 10181 to the left and right. Prepare.

  The movable member 10181 excites the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening in the storage channel 1231 (an opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the non-excitation (non-drive) state of the solenoid 10182. In the (driven) state, the state is switched to the open state (see FIG. 77) which allows passage of the sphere through the opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage channel 1231.

  The movable member 10181 is maintained in a non-contact state with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not mounted. Thereby, the occurrence of friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232 can be avoided, and the movement resistance can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the closed state, the movable member 10181 is supported by the upper surface and the left and right end portions of the bulging portion 10232 abutting vertically. Thereby, in the closed state of the movable member 10181, even when the ball gets on the upper surface of the movable member 10181, it is possible to prevent the movable member 10181 from hanging down excessively, and the ball in the storage channel 1231 The flow of water can be smoothed.

  The movable member 10181 is formed as an inclined surface which is an upper surface and which is inclined downward toward the left, and which is an inclined upper surface 10181a functioning as a rolling surface on which a ball rolls in a closed state, and a lower surface An inclined lower surface 10181 b formed at the left end and inclined downward toward the right is mainly provided.

  The inclined upper surface 10181a is a state before the ball rides, and the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 at the top and bottom (the movable member 10181 is floating), and the right end portion is adjacent It is disposed slightly below the lower bottom surface of the flow path 1231. As a result, when the ball transfers from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a, the load (resistance) that the ball receives can be reduced.

  In addition, the inclined upper surface 10181a is a state after the ball is on, and in the state where the movable member 10181 is in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the upper and lower direction (the movable member 10181 is sunk), The bottom surface of the flow path 1231 and the surface position are formed. Thereby, when the ball transfers from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231, the load (resistance) that the ball receives can be reduced.

  The shape of the above-described inclined upper surface 10181 a is not the same shape as the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 because the degree of inclination is loose. However, since the difference is slight, the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2, as in the above embodiment also in this embodiment. It is assumed to be seconds.

  The inclined lower surface 10181 b makes it easy to get on and off the bulging portion 10232 even when the ball gets on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state and the movable member 10181 starts to fall forward. It is an inclined surface provided in As a result, the movement of the tip of the movable member 10181 is restricted to the inner surface of the vertical hole 10233b, so that the problem of stopping in that state can be prevented, and the flow of the sphere of the storage channel 1231 is maintained smooth. be able to.

  When the intermediate discharging device 10180 is in the open state (see FIG. 77), the ball on the upstream side including the third storage ball counted from the downstream end flows down the vertical hole 10233b and loads from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is sent to the back side, and is sent to the ball discharge passage (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

  In the present embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112 a that detects passage of a ball, and is configured to be able to determine the number of balls having passed through the discharge port 10112. Then, the ball entering the first specified winning hole 1000a is a detection means for detecting the ball discharged from the detection sensor 10112a or the discharge port 1150 (for example, the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, FIG. Passage is detected by reference), and control is performed to determine whether the number of balls entered matches the number of discharged balls.

  According to the present embodiment, the storage flow path when the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the first specified winning opening 1000a due to the operation mode of the intermediate discharging device 10180 in the round game R, It is possible to switch between when the tank 1231 is full and when the storage channel 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, in order to facilitate understanding, it is assumed that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state.

  78 (a) to 78 (d) are diagrams showing an example of the change of the state of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the round game R and the change of time of the state of the movable member 10181. In FIG. 78 (a), the first specified winning opening 1000a is in the open state (also shown as "open" in the figure. Note that the closed state of the first specified winning opening 1000a is also shown as "closed" in the figure. If the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also shown as “closed” in the figure. The same is true in the following figures) over the period in which the same applies in the subsequent figures. In 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also shown as "open" in the figure, and the same in the subsequent figures) throughout the period in which the first specified winning hole 1000a is in the open state. The time change of the case is illustrated respectively.

  Further, in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the first predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment) elapses after the first specified winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state. After the predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state, and the time change when maintained as it is is shown in FIG. 78 (d), the first specified winning opening 1000a is opened. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in this embodiment) after the state change starts, and then the movable member 10181 closes after a second predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment) Time change when changing to the state and keeping as it is is illustrated respectively.

  In this manner, the driving of the movable member 10181 (the driving of the solenoid 10182) is linked (correlated) to the combination of what round game R is to be executed and what the jackpot type is. It is possible to execute in a kind of drive mode.

  For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78A, since the movable member 10181 is always closed during the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is discharged as in the above embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the balls are not discharged from the middle position of the storage flow channel 1231, the storage flow channel 1231 can be obtained by entering a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls into the first specified winning hole 1000a. It will be full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be made impossible).

  Also, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (b), since the movable member 10181 is always in the open state during the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. Before reaching the discharge port 1150, it falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. That is, even if a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, the storage channel 1231 will not be full. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate (make it possible) an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R.

  In FIG. 78 (b), after excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled as the end of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is reached after 2 seconds (period required for the ball to pass through the storage channel 1231). Since it changes to the open state, it is possible to drop the first specified winning opening 1000a toward the through hole 10233 including the ball that passed last (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released). Therefore, the ball having passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a can be configured not to flow down to the outlet 1150 at all.

  For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the open state 1.0 second after the start of the round game R, and 3.0 seconds after that, the movable member 10181 Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if the balls can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, the prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) The storage channel 1231 will not be full even if the ball of the (a) ball enters the first specified winning hole 1000a. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate (make it possible) an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R.

  In order to arrange the ball above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, taking into consideration the time for the ball to flow down the storage channel 1231, about 2.5 from the start of the round game R It is necessary for the ball to pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a before the lapse of seconds.

  In this embodiment, the time required for the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specified winning hole 1000a (the shortest time, about 2.5 seconds) Time, shorter than about 4 seconds). Therefore, it is not in time to launch the ball from the start of the round game R.

  Therefore, in order to prevent the storage channel 1231 from being full, it is necessary to continue the firing of the ball also in the interval between rounds before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode of stopping the firing of the ball in the interval between rounds.

  In addition, the effect by the display device or the like is configured such that the player can not easily grasp the information about whether or not the round game R in which the driving mode shown in FIG. Therefore, regardless of whether or not it is a round game R driven in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the game mode to stop the firing of the ball in the interval between the rounds just before that round game R is suppressed Can.

  Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is brought into the open state, and 2.0 seconds elapses thereafter. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change to the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed while the round game R continues, but when the round game R ends, the control is skipped and the movable member 10181 is forced to be in the closed state Can be switched.

  In the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), for example, when the first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) When round balls R have passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a, all the balls that have passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a are stored because the round game R has ended before the movable member 10181 is opened. It is stored in 1231 and the storage channel 1231 becomes full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be made impossible).

  On the other hand, for example, when the second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls is the first specific winning combination When passing through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the end of the round game R, and the ball falls toward the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112, so that the storage channel 1231 is full. It does not become tongue. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate (make it possible) an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R.

  Therefore, according to the drive mode of FIG. 78 (d), the prescribed number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is determined depending on whether the time taken for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or more than the reference time T11s. It is possible to switch whether or not the excess prize winning occurs.

  In the case of this driving mode, it is preferable to execute the round game R for a long time, in order to emphasize the payout number of the winning balls in the round game R. That is, it is preferable to stop the firing of the balls intermittently so that the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls does not enter the first specified winning opening 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds may be promoted.

  On the other hand, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), as described above, it is possible to aim for the occurrence of overruns by continuously firing the ball at intervals between rounds.

  In this way, driving modes in which the preferred ball firing modes conflict with each other are distributed to the round games R of the jackpot game (by controlling to make the driving modes different depending on the jackpot type even in the same round), A player's concentration on jackpot game can be improved as compared with the case where the jackpot game can be always executed in the same manner of launch (the profit obtained by the player is similar).

  According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the restriction member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is determined according to the operation mode of the movable member 10181 It can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the reservoir channel 1231 is filled with ten balls and the case where the reservoir channel 1231 is not filled even if ten balls are loaded.

  In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, seven storage channels 1231 (9 when two balls are already disposed downstream of the interference member 6930, see FIG. 75). It is possible to switch between the case where the tank is filled by entering the ball and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not filled even if 7 (or 9) balls are inserted.

  Although the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 in an extended state in response to the movable member 10181 being in the open state, the ball rides on the momentum and passes (jumps over) the upper part of the through hole 10233 in the left and right direction. It can be prevented.

  The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the one described above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by the operation of the operation button 300.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  By setting the movable member 10181 in the open state, the sphere can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. As a result, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specified winning opening 1000a.

  That is, the number of balls entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a and the number of stored channels of the storage channel 1231 are the same while the first specified winning hole 1000a is kept open, and the first specified winning hole 1000a is entered. It is possible to configure the case where the number of balls and the number of stored channels of the storage channel 1231 are different. As a result, the possibility of occurrence of an overcoming winning on the first specified winning opening 1000a can be changed by the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 in the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of installation front board 11200.

  As shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of this embodiment, the shape of the opening and closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream side portion of the fall delay plate 3250 is omitted, The second variable winning device 3000 has the same configuration as that of the third embodiment except that the additional winning opening 11183 and the like are added. Therefore, the same elements as those of the embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the main body member 11100, in addition to the configuration already described in the above embodiments, a thin plate member 11110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board is separated by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of a ball. A pair of left and right projecting thin plate member 1110 is provided with a projecting rib 11111, a guide hole 11112 which is formed as a long long hole and guides movement of the opening / closing means 11190 described later, and extends to the left of the guide hole 11112 And a guide recess 11113 configured as a bottomed recess to be formed.

  The main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow passage of a ball, and an opening / closing unit 11190 that changes the winning probability of the ball to the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening / closing means 11190 will be described later.

  In the drop delay plate 3250 formed on the covering front plate 11200 in the present embodiment, only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position farther from the side wall 1220 than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side is maintained. The left portion of the cutting plane SP12 is omitted.

  The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position where the ball which has rolled on the inclined surface 1237 and reached the drop delay plate 3250 does not reach alone. That is, the ball that has rolled on the inclined surface 1237 and reached the drop delay plate 3250 flows downward to the right along the slope of the drop delay plate 3250 (in the direction approaching the detection sensor 1240) unless external force is applied. Do.

  On the other hand, when a load is given to the ball and the ball is thrown to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls to the second additional winning opening 11183 side with high probability. This falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening / closing means 11190 to be newly described in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening through which three winning balls are paid out by detecting passage of a ball.

  The opening and closing plate 11300 has an inclined surface 11340 left after being scraped off in a shape that is inclined so as to approach the left shaft 1320 from the rotation front end toward the rotation shaft in the left half.

  The position where the speed in the left-right direction becomes zero after the inclined surface 11340 lands on the falling delay plate 3250 to the right of the cutting surface SP12 at the end on the rotating tip side (final arrival position FP12, figure It is placed to the right of the center of the sphere that reached 82 (see (a)).

  Therefore, when the open / close plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state when there is a ball at a position where the velocity in the left-right direction is 0 (final arrival position FP12, see FIG. 82A), The ball is loaded. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIG. In FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (c), the change of the state of the first variable winning device 11000 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 82 (a), the opening and closing plate 11300 is closed. The final reaching position FP12 of the ball rolling on the surface 1237 and landing on the fall delay plate 3250 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 82 (b), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened from the state shown in FIG. The state after the change is illustrated, and in FIG. 82 (c), a state in which the ball falls from the state illustrated in FIG. 82 (b) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the ball disposed at the final arrival position FP12 abuts on the inclined surface 11340 as the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state, and is given a leftward load. The ball given a leftward load is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the fall delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

  On the other hand, when the ball does not reach the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when the ball slightly descends from the final arrival position FP12 and is disposed at the position illustrated by a solid line in FIG. 82A), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened. Even when changed to the state, the inclined surface 11340 does not abut the ball, and the ball has a component directed to the right because the opening / closing plate 11300 rotates (the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal) Direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 side. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the opening and closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, depending on the position on the front side of the opening and closing plate 11300, whether the ball is directed to the detection sensor 1240 , Can go to the second additional winning opening 11183.

  The payout of the winning balls by passing the ball through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an excess winning ball exceeding the winning balls scheduled for the jackpot game for the player, so the ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183 The more money there is, the more profit the player will earn.

  The open / close plate is compared with the case where the firing of the ball is stopped by continuing the firing of the ball toward the first specified winning opening 1000a while the opening / closing plate 11300 maintains the closed state (interval between rounds). Since the situation that the ball is placed at the final arrival position FP12 can be easily generated at the timing when the 11300 changes to the open state, promoting the game mode of continuing the firing of the ball over the inter-round interval period it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the player stops the firing of the ball during the interval interval between rounds.

  In addition, since entering the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183 is on the condition that the opening and closing plate 11300 is changed to the open state, the state where the opening and closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game) In a state other than the above, it is configured that entering the second additional winning opening 11183 is unlikely to occur even if the right hitting is continued.

  Thus, in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation in which the right-handed instruction effect is not executed), the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 even if right-handed It is possible to configure so that it is difficult for the player to obtain the accompanying benefits. That is, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be functioned as a winning opening which makes it easy for the ball to enter in a situation (small hit game or big hit game) where driving of the opening / closing plate 11300 occurs.

  Subsequently, the opening / closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIGS. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000, and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) show the arrangement of the projecting ribs 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 and the second additional winning opening 11183. It is a front schematic diagram of projecting rib 11111, opening-and-closing means 11190, and the 2nd addition winning opening 11183 which show typically. In FIG. 85 (a) to FIG. 85 (c), the time change of the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening / closing means 11190 is a movable means which is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moved to the left and right in conjunction with the movement of the tip member 1520 and is supported by the guide hole 11112 in the inserted state. Main body support portion 11191, a transmission portion 11192 extending upward from the back side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and supported by the tip member 1520, and extending leftward from the front side portion of the main body support portion 11191 An extending portion 11193, a first projecting portion 11194 projecting toward the front side at the left end of the extending portion 11193, and an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the ball on the right side of the first projecting portion 11194 And a second protruding portion 11195 protruding in the same shape as the first protruding portion 11194.

  An assembling method of the opening and closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically expanded so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portion is slightly longer than the main body support 11191. It is formed as a long hole as horizontal.

  Therefore, after the transmission part 11192 is projected to the back side through this enlarged part, the opening / closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and thereafter the drive device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100 and the transmission part 11192 is supported by the tip member 1520 Thus, the opening / closing means 11190 can be assembled in an interlocking manner with the tip member 1520. In the movable range of the solenoid 1510, the transmission part 11192 does not reach the enlarged part at the right end of the guide hole 11112 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), so that the problem of the opening / closing means 11190 coming off the guide hole 11112 is prevented can do.

  The extension 11193 is formed with a thickness sufficient to completely receive the guide recess 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the front side of the opening and closing means 11190 from colliding with the extending portion 11193, and the flowing path of the ball changes in the front and back direction, or the extending portion 11193 It is possible to prevent damage.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates that are inclined downward toward the left in a front view. In this embodiment, when the ball on the drop delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, it falls between the projecting ribs 11111 and enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by the opening / closing means 11190. It is switched whether or not to. This will be described in detail.

  FIG. 85 (a) shows a state where the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 and the projecting rib 11111 on the right side are disposed on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

  When the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (a), the ball abuts on the second projecting portion 11195 and flows leftward. As a result, since it flows off from the second additional prize winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional prize winning opening 11183 can be lowered.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows the state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the middle position of the movement range (see FIG. 20 (c)). That is, this corresponds immediately after the opening and closing plate 11300 is closed.

  In this case, the upper end portion of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed to the left of the vertical line passing through the middle position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111, and the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 is the second additional prize. It is disposed to the right of the center line of the mouth 11183.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (b), the ball abuts on the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the right, and abuts on the second projecting portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the flowing ball flows down toward the second additional winning hole 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning hole 11183 can be increased.

  In FIG. 85 (c), the state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the right end position of the movement range is shown (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the open / close plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state as in FIG. 85 (b).

  In this case, the upper end portion of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed to the right of the vertical line passing through the middle position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (c), the ball abuts on the first projecting portion 11194 and flows leftward. Since the flowing ball deviates from the second additional winning hole 11183 and flows down, the probability of entering the second additional winning hole 11183 can be lowered.

  That is, while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open or closed state, the opening / closing means 11190 keeps the probability of the ball entering the second additional winning opening 11183 low and keeps the second additional prize on the way. It is configured such that the probability of the ball entering the mouth 11183 is high.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing means 11190 interlocks with the state of the opening / closing plate 1300 to change the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183. Here, the difference in the drive control of the solenoid 1510 will explain the case where the ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning hole 11183 and the case where it can not be expected.

  The phenomenon that the ball flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the drop delay plate 3250 occurs when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82B and 82C).

  Therefore, in the drive pattern (operation pattern with low ball entry probability) in which the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the drive (excitation) state, when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the projecting rib 11111, the tip member 1520 Similar to the arrangement of the above, the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position. Since the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained since the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the ball which has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional prize hole 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

  On the other hand, in the drive pattern (operation pattern with high ball entry probability) in which the drive (excitation) is canceled once (the open / close plate 11300 is short-opened) immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) When the ball that has flowed to the left passes through the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end position, but thereafter the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released. The biasing force of the return spring moves the opening / closing means 11190 toward the right end position. As a result, the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a load facing right from the first protruding portion 11194 and flows down along the second protruding portion 11195, so the ball is moved to the second additional winning opening 11183. It can flow down.

  Thus, by providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 11300, the same timing (for example, timing when the inclined surface 11340 contacts the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82 (b)) It is possible to change the probability of the ball flowing to the left entering the second additional winning opening 11183.

  In the operation pattern with a high ball entry probability, the timing for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In this embodiment, the timing at which the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 by the load from the opening and closing plate 11300 passes through the projecting rib 11111 and reaches between the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 Is controlled to release the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

  In addition, the 2nd additional winning a prize mouth 11183 may be constituted as a ball entrance which starts change of special symbol 2 by ball entering of a ball. In this case, since the number of balls reserved for the special symbol 2 can be increased by the ball reaching the opening and closing plate 11300 during the interval interval between rounds, it is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit game. Regardless, the fluctuation associated with the holding of the special symbol 1 is started, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the phenomenon of giving the player a disadvantage.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Depending on where on the front side of the opening and closing plate 11300 the ball is arranged at the timing when the opening and closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, whether the ball goes to the detection sensor 1240 (enters the ball), the second additional winning opening 11183 In addition to being able to switch whether to head (enter), continuing the firing of the ball during the interval between rounds makes it easier for the ball to flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183. As a result, since it is easier to increase the number of paid-out balls by continuing the firing of the balls during the inter-round interval period, it is possible to promote the game mode of continuing the firing of the balls during the inter-round interval period. It is easy to do.

  While the state of the opening and closing plate 11300 is maintained, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to reach the ball even if the ball arrives. Thus, the second additional winning opening 11183 can function as a winning opening in which the ball can easily enter in a state in which the drive of the opening / closing plate 11300 (small hit game or big hit game) occurs.

  While it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening and closing means 11190 is maintained, it is easy for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 in the middle of the state change of the opening and closing means 11190 In addition to being configured as described above, a ball that receives a load from the open / close plate 11300 when the open / close plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state is sent to the second additional prize opening 11183 It was configured to flow down to 11183. Thereby, the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 11300 after the opening and closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (round game R is started) Can change.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140, a first control example will be described. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away to make the opening and closing plate 1300 visible, and a part of the side wall 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. It is illustrated by. Further, FIG. 86 (a) shows a schematic view showing the shielding state of the first variable winning device 6000, and FIG. 86 (b) shows the inside from the shielding state in which the inside is hard to see (though it is difficult to see). The schematic diagram which shows the permeation | transmission state of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus 6000 at the time of the permeation | transmission production | presentation which makes variable into the visibility which can be visually recognized is performed is shown in figure. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 by the thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the storage channel 1231. Configured (the permeability of the thin plate member 1210 is configured to be low).

  In addition, even when trying to look into the interior of the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is bent and formed as a flow channel, and the downstream side can not be visually recognized. It is configured such that the number of balls stored in can not be grasped. In addition, since the arrangement position of the interference device 6900 is downstream of the bending portion, the movable state of the interference device 6900 can not be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the thin plate member 1210 is extended on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 86 (a)) of the detection sensor 1240 in the opening direction (see FIG. 14) to limit the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 In addition, it is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to make it difficult to grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the shielding state of the first variable winning device 6000. it can.

  In the variable winning device 6000 configured in this manner, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, success of the timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B)). As shown in FIG. 86 (b), the covering front plate 1200 is configured by a half mirror so as to switch to a transmission state in which the inside is visible. As a result, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

  A light sensor for detecting light incident from the outside may be provided behind the covering front plate 1200. In this case, using the characteristics of the half mirror that makes the inside visible when irradiated with strong light from the outside, the fraudulent act of irradiating the strong light to the covering front plate 1200 and trying to look inside is performed. , And the output of the light sensor. Therefore, by setting an error command corresponding to the change of the output of the light sensor and controlling the continuation of the game to be difficult, it is possible to suppress the cheating.

  In this control example, the configuration to switch to the transmission state is used by irradiating the covering front plate 1200 with light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. For example, a part of the covering front plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means can be moved so that the incident angle of light irradiated to the covering front plate 1200 is switched from the light emitting means (LED) constantly lit. It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside is visible only when the movable part is positioned at a predetermined position.

  In addition, the covering front plate 1200 may be formed of a transparent color that allows the inside to be visually recognized, and the surface may be configured to be subjected to processing (for example, emboss processing) to diffusely reflect the irradiated light. Thereby, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the first variable winning device 6000 by the light emitted from various lamps, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, various types When the lamp is not lit), the inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the store clerk can easily check the inside of the variable winning device 6000.

  In the case of using such a configuration, a shielding wall is provided to shield the first variable winning device 6000 from being irradiated with light emitted from various lamps, and the shielding wall is made variable between the shielding state and the shielding state. A configuration may be provided. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the inside of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 even while a game is being performed.

  In addition, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating light to the first variable winning device 6000 and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 A state (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which a visible state (a state in which light is not irradiated) may be switched.

  Furthermore, a movable member for decoration is provided on the covering front plate 1200 from which the inside can be visually recognized, and by controlling the operation of the movable member, the state where the inside of the storage channel 1231 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is A state where it can move at a position not overlapping the storage flow path 1231) and a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage flow path 1231 (a state where the movable movable member for decoration is moved at an overlapping position so as to cover the storage flow path 1231) You may make it switch.

  Moreover, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 86A, the covering front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage channel 1231, and it is ensured that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it has an effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in an attitude in which normal gaming is performed.

  For example, it may be difficult to visually recognize only the lower half (downstream side of the bent portion) of the storage channel 1231, and the visibility of the upper half may be ensured (even if the formation of the upper half half mirror is omitted). Alternatively, in a similar manner, it may be difficult to visually recognize only a portion overlapping with the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 in a front view. Thus, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be built at low cost.

  Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be secured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half may be omitted), and the upper half may be made less visible. In this case, while the lower limit of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the balls remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231, the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 It can be difficult to grasp the exact number.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to set the timing to stop the firing when the player temporarily stops the firing of the ball in order to reduce the dead ball (a ball that does not enter the winning opening). In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, if the storage channel 1231 is full (10 balls are stored), it is not possible to expect further ball entry Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to reduce wasted balls by stopping the firing of the balls at that timing.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000 in the round game R of the predetermined number of times does not necessarily match the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the variable winning prize device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can not be accurately known. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231.

  That is, only with the configuration of this control example, while the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 is secured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half is omitted), the configuration that makes the upper half less visible is effective. It becomes difficult for the player to easily set the timing for stopping the firing of the ball. As a result, the player's attention and concentration to the firing of the ball in the jackpot game can be improved, and the player can be prevented from playing casually.

  As a feature of the present control example shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), in addition to the change in the above-mentioned viewing state, the operation timing of the interference member 6930 is operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Although the timing which can be set by can be mentioned, the details will be described later.

  Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by it. To be executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is constituted by ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least one second.

  In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a predetermined period (one second or more), it is determined whether the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot) It can be suppressed that it is overlooked). In addition, if the combination of big hit symbols (the combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the disassembly and there is a holding ball, the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after 1 second of stop display . In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time. Moreover, when both the holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the holding ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the lottery based on the holding ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in the state where the holding ball is not present, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters for either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the ball into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 despite the fact that the player continuously launches the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game at all because the player quits playing the game. to cause.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is accepted. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of balls held, which is the number of balls (parking balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

  In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the present pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols for which the lottery is easy to be executed (one of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2) are different according to the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol for which a lottery is easily performed in the current gaming state is performed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol whose lottery is difficult to be executed in the current gaming state is executed.

  Here, it is a big attention item for the player that the lottery of the special symbol which is difficult to be executed is executed. For example, in the normal state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 2 in which the lottery is difficult to be executed is executed, and when the lottery result is the jackpot, the player is compared with the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1 There is a possibility that the expectation of the profit to be obtained may be high. In addition, for example, in the high probability state of the special symbol lottery of special symbol 1 which is difficult to execute the lottery is executed, when the lottery result is the jackpot, compared with the case where it becomes the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 The expectation of the profit obtained by the player may be low.

  Therefore, in the small area Ds3, the game is performed by performing the variable display only when the drawing of the special symbol for which the drawing is difficult to be performed in the current gaming state is performed (by dividing it from the variable display in the main display area Dm) It is easy to attract the attention of the player, and the player can be drawn to the variable display.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display region Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbols displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed in the right small region Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a hachimaki in this control example) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character The notice effect is performed by making it appear or the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing variable display based on the drawing of the special symbol 1; If the ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the drawing of the special symbol 2 is being performed, the number of entrances is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first While being indicated by the symbol display device 37, it is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number symbol) indicates the number of balls held for the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed on the lower half (second symbol) The holding ball number pattern) indicates the number of holding balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 87 exemplifies a case in which four first reserved symbols are displayed, and the second reserved symbol is displayed zero (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-parking balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of holding balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or the area divided into four is different by the number of holding balls (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, timing effects (operation effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this control example, based on an operation on the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1), an effect associated with the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) is performed. In addition, as an effect related to the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, for example, an effect of changing the visibility of the inside of the storage channel 1231, a discharge mode of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, and the like An effect to be changed is exemplified. And, these effects are configured such that the contents of the effects change depending on the degree of the difference between the predetermined reference operation timing and the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, according to the timing effect (operation effect), by executing the operation with good timing, the effect is configured such that the profit obtained by the player is maximized. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the notice effect performed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is performed, and FIG. 88 (b) to FIG. 89 are It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing production (operation production). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (the operation button 300) are changed based on the operation of the operation means The display contents of the 3 symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the third symbol display device 81, the number-of-rounds display portion 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a mode showing that round game R in the third round is in progress. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, a display of “Aim for the right” is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the gaming method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls acquired based on the winning of the ball in the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 1000a. Be done. The number-of-earnings display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning hole 1000a, and then is moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally the small area Ds2 is displayed. It is added as an acquisition indication.

  In the number-of-rounds display portion 714, the display regarding the section of the game currently being executed (the number of rounds or the interval) is largely displayed on the left, and the display regarding the section of the game started after the section of the game currently being executed is on the right It is displayed small.

  Also, four circles are displayed side by side below the number-of-rounds display. In this circle, the circle to be filled is switched depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is filled (see FIG. 88 (a), corresponding to the insufficient display), and stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of balls to be played is four or more and less than seven, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven When the number is less than 9 or more, the second circle from the right is filled (see FIG. 92A, corresponding to the insufficient display), and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10 In the case, the right end circle is filled (see FIG. 92 (b), corresponding to full display).

  In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) is started from the next round, and a guidance display for notifying the game effect of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used for timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In this effect area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and a sub display area Ds4 in which a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88B) is displayed corresponding to the button display mode 715 Below the sub-display area Ds4, there is provided a sub-display area Ds5 which is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and displays information on the player's operation.

  The sub display area Ds4, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 (b), is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled from right to left, and the display pointer 719 is a display mode indicating operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at timing matched with the bar display portion 717, a success effect (see FIG. 88B described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on (see FIG. 86 (b)) in relation to the success effect being executed in the fourth round game R. In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the inside of the covering front plate 1200 is difficult to visually recognize when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, while the transmission lamp It is comprised by the half mirror so that it switches to the permeation | transmission state which the inside can recognize visually by lighting 227ba-227be. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flow-down condition (the storage channel 1231) of the ball flowing down near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)). It is possible to make the player grasp the storage mode).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 89, in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R, some of the transmission lamps 227ba of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be light. Thus, while it is not possible to visually recognize the storage mode of the sphere arranged in the vicinity of the interference device 6900 (the lower half of the storage channel 1231), the sphere is arranged in the vicinity of the detection sensor 1240 (the upper half of the storage channel 1231) The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), while the advance notice effect is being executed, the characters “standby” are scrolled and displayed in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5 from right to left.

  Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display portion 717, the screen center is displayed. The characters “good” are displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, as a result, the text “Attention to the attacker!” Is displayed near the display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub display area Ds5. The letters "good" are displayed as well.

  In this case, the player can easily notice the display by distributing the character "good" to the third symbol display device 81, and the attacker who noticed the display can attach an attacker (the first variable winning device 6000). It can be made easy to make it pay attention to). Then, the player can be made to notice that the storage spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 can be visually recognized, and the player who noticed that is the number of stored players. In response, suitable launch ball adjustments can be made.

  The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719c does not coincide with the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect), and The characters "bad" are displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the character "bad" is displayed in the sub display area Ds5 as in the result display mode 720. In this case, the characters "Attention to the attacker!" Are not displayed.

  In this case, the player can easily notice the display by distributing the characters "bad" on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the player is not allowed to visually recognize the storage ball stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 by not displaying the character of “Attention to the attacker!” Since it is possible to suppress paying attention to the winning device 6000), it is possible to maintain the ability of the player to pay attention to the effects of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of confidence with respect to the display of the character "It pays attention to the attacker!"

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 89, when the result display mode 720 is displayed, a part of the transmission lamps 227ba are on. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the round game R of the fourth round, after the display pointer 719 passes the bar display portion 717, the operation of the operation button 300 is performed even after 3 seconds. If it is not performed, it is controlled so as to keep all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be turned off, so in the round game R after that (from the fourth round to the sixth round) of the reservoir channel 1231 It is configured to be extremely difficult to view the inside.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, and FIG. 90 (b) to FIG. ) Is a schematic view showing an example of display contents during timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (the operation button 300) are changed based on the operation of the operation means The display contents of the 3 symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the third symbol display device 81, the above-described number-of-rounds display portion 714 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a mode indicating that it is in the interval between rounds just before the fifth round game R. In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, a display of “Aim for the right” is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the gaming method.

  At the center of the screen, an operation instruction display consisting of the characters “press!” Prompting the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used for timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In the sub display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, a band display part 716 which is a display mode indicating an operation timing as in the bar display part 717 is displayed. The band display unit 716 is adjacent to the first band portion 716a where the character of “safety” is displayed on the right side of the bar display portion 717, and the bar display portion 716a is provided adjacent to the first band portion 716a. A second band portion 716b in which the character “high” is displayed overlapping with the upper and lower portions 717 and a third band portion 716c in which the character “failed” is displayed on the left of the second band portion 716b .

  As described above, in the sub display area Ds4, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left. In this control example, depending on which position of the band display unit 716 the display pointer 719d is on by operating the operation button 300 (operation means), it is controlled to change the profit obtained by the player.

  For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the first band portion 716a, a relief effect (see FIG. 91A described later) is performed. In this case, while the advantageous event that it is possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol occurs after the end of the big hit game, the payout of the prize ball in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly reduced (specified number (In this control example, the number of winning balls decreases as the player can not enter the ball 10), and an adverse event occurs in which the duration of the round game R for the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds) .

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the second band portion 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90B described later) is executed. In this case, an advantageous event occurs that it is possible to acquire a privilege to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and the prescribed number (10) of balls in the round game R of the fifth round While there is an advantageous event that it is possible to enter the special winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round of round games R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), no adverse event occurs.

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is located above the third band portion 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not performed, a failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, while the disadvantageous event that it is not possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game occurs, the specified number (10) of balls in the fifth round game R An advantageous event occurs in that the player can enter the special winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Since the maximum benefit can be obtained by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b overlapping with the bar display portion 717 at the top and bottom, as shown in FIG. And even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without a sense of discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band 716b in the vertical direction The letters “highest! V earned!” (Highest effect) are displayed as a result display mode 720 at the center of the screen, and that the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. Ru. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to obtain the maximum profit, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b overlapping with the bar display portion 717 at the top and bottom, control is performed so that the maximum profit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round of round game R) displayed in FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 89 (effect in the interval between rounds is started immediately Also, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without discomfort.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), since the guidance display indicates “Don't let go of your mind even after the end of the round”, the interval between rounds after the end of the round game R of the fourth round (Figure Also in 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. As a result, the player is not aware of the display of the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90 (b), and the possibility of inconvenience caused by the inability to operate the operation button 300 (operation means) can be lowered. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at such a timing that the display pointer 719e coincides with the first band 716a in the upper and lower direction. While the letter (reliable effect) of "reliable! V with acquisition!" Is displayed at the center of the screen as the result display manner 720, the operation of the operation button 300 makes the display manner of the button display manner 715 variable. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a profit that can be relieved with some disadvantages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, with some disadvantages, as mentioned above, the payout of the prize balls in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly reduced (the prescribed number (10 in this control example) can not be entered. It means that the duration of the round game R of the 5th round will be the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719f coincides with the third band 716c in the vertical direction The letters “Failure! V not! Next expectation!” Are displayed at the center of the screen as a result display mode 720, and the display mode of the button display mode 715 can be changed by operating the operation button 300. Displayed by As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a large amount of disadvantage will occur.

  In addition, as mentioned above, it is a disadvantage that it can not acquire the privilege transitioned to the high probability state of a special symbol after the end of a jackpot game, as mentioned above. Also, in this case, as described above, the specified number (10) of balls can be entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a in the fifth round of round game R, and the continuation of the fifth round of round game R Since the time can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the timing of the end of the jackpot game can be advanced compared to the case shown in FIG. 91 (a), and the drawing of the special symbol can be executed early. Since it is possible, the transition timing to the next jackpot game can be facilitated earlier.

  As described above, in this control example, there is a profit obtained by the player based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, the player's willingness to operate the operation button 300 (operation means) can be improved.

  Next, display in the round game R of the sixth round will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b). FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying that the third round game R is being executed by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in FIG. 92 (a), it is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display in case a jackpot type is "big hit L" or "big hit N", and in FIG. 92 (b), jackpot type is "big hit K", It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k."

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (a), the jackpot type is won by the jackpot of "jackpot L" or "jackpot N", that is, it is elected in the sixth round jackpot. The letter "Big win" is displayed.

  Also, in the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot type wins the jackpot of "big hit K", "big hit M" or "big hit k", ie, 6 round big hit The character of "big hit" is displayed to indicate that the player has won, and in the sixth round of the round game R, the interference device 6900 is executed with an operation pattern (twentyth operation pattern) advantageous to the player The character of "+ chance" is displayed as the over prize possibility increase informing mode 721 for notifying that, and accordingly, the character of "striking right!" Is displayed on the guidance display portion in the small area Ds3.

  If the jackpot type is "jackpot K", "jackpot M" or "jackpot k" jackpot, in the sixth round of round game R, by continuing without stopping the firing of the ball, more than the specified number of balls entered The interference device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence (see FIG. 99 (a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving payouts of balls exceeding the prescribed number by continuing the firing of the balls according to the display of FIG. 92 (b).

  Thus, in addition to the aspect informing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, by notifying the mode of informing the operation status of the interference device 6900 in the big hit on the display screen in the round game R, A display mode suitable for round game R of various patterns can be displayed. In this control example, by continuing or stopping the firing of the ball according to this display, the player is likely to receive the maximum benefit scheduled for each jackpot type as the benefit given to the player. Controlled by Therefore, the player can make it easy to obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

  In this control example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is made to differ based on the operation content for the player to be executed for the timing effect (operation effect), but in addition to that, for example, the timing effect Operation history (operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) in an operation effect (for example, a mini game effect in a big hit game or a reach effect in special symbol fluctuation) executed other than (operation effect) The presentation mode of the timing presentation (operation presentation) may be configured to be different based on the number of times, the content of the operation, and the operation result). As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly with respect to various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, the timing effect is not limited to the result of the operation on the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, for example, based on the clocking period clocked by the clock means (RTC) or the game period in which the player played the game. You may comprise so that the presentation mode of (operation presentation) may be switched.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the change with respect to FIG. 4 is demonstrated, and description is abbreviate | omitted in the same part.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram for explaining a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  Selection of jackpot random number counter C1 to be used for lottery of jackpot (and jackpot) and selection of jackpot type (jackpot symbol) for setting of display of jackpot lottery and first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 Used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, the stop type counter C3 used to select the stop type, the change type counter CS1 used to select the change pattern, and the first hit random number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

  Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In addition, the small hitting type counter C5 is used for the selection of the small hitting type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated periodically in the main processing (see FIG. 117) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value is stored in the RAM 203 for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a where the counter value is stored for winning for the first entrance 64 and the winning for the second entrance 640. Special symbol 2 holding ball storage 203b is provided.

  In this control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, each counter value is a special symbol when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable display or the special symbol is not being played in the big hit game of the special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the first holding ball storage area 203a and the second ball entry port 640 has a winning game ball, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) Various settings and control processes are performed. Similarly, various counter values stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b are moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, and various kinds for displaying the special symbol 2 in a variable manner Setting and control processing are performed.

  On the other hand, during a period when it is not possible to draw a special symbol such as during variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the big hit game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 etc. In the case of winning in the ball opening 640, when the number of holdings for the winning entrance (starting opening) is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the winning is achieved. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entered ball entrance is stored. In addition, when the number of pending items for the winning entrance is the upper limit value (four in this control example) or more, acquisition of each counter value etc. is not performed but a winning ball (five in the present control example) Only the winning balls are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in this control example), and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in this control example) There is. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is specified in the first hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94 (a)) of the main control unit 110, and the first hit random number counter C1. When the value matches with the value of the jackpot random number defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the drawing of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, when the gaming state is in the low probability state, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0” in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. If it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is within the range of “1 to 4” in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 If it is in the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined to be a jackpot.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that is the big hit of the special symbol For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 that is the big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "0" is the first hit random number table as described above It is stored in 202a (refer FIG. 94 (a)). As described above, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values is 320, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is “1/320”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is the big hit of the special symbol, and the random value "1-4" is the first hit random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. As described above, since the total number of random number values to be the big hit is 4 among the total number of random number values to be 320, the probability to be the big hit of the special symbol is “1/80”.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)) The Rukoto. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach is generated, it differs from the symbol to which reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "reach out" (for example, a range of 90 to 99) at which the symbol stops and "complete out" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt processing in this control example), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is the special value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in a definite variation state of a special symbol, a jackpot is easily generated, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 The table of (1) is selected, and "complete out" is likely to be selected, and "reach out" is narrowed to 90 to 99, making "reach out" difficult to select. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 A table for low probability time is selected, it becomes difficult to select "completely out", and the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach out" becomes wide as 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done.

  In this control example, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 117) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and for each, the variation pattern selection table is set according to the pass / fail judgment result. It is done.

  In the present control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. Are acquired and stored in the execution area of the normal symbol of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the normal symbol is specified in the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 94 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. In this control example, in the second random number table 202c, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random number values that become the hit of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 9 It is ". Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 5 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability to be hit of the normal symbol at low probability of the normal symbol is “1 / 48 ".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time reduction state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability to be hit by a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2" . As described above, in this control example, the random number value corresponding to the normal symbol is largely different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the collision probability is significantly different. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is hit are also different between the low probability time and the high probability time of the normal symbol . For this reason, since the ease of entering the second entrance 640 is largely different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), A player can play a game by aiming at the first ball entrance 64.

  In the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the through gate (normal entry ball opening) 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. In 2), the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the second ball entry port 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate (normal ball entry port) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the high probability state of the regular symbol, the variation display of the normal symbol is 1 second in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2) If the value of the second random number counter C4 that has been executed and acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as the symbol), and the second entry port 640 is opened for “one second × two times”. In this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric character combination may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the game characteristics.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, "0 to 239"), and it is performed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 117), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 116) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this control example. In addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c described above, the ROM 202 further includes a first type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area. 202e and an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided at least.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (refer to FIG. 94 (b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per unit is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), “big hit K” is defined in association with the special symbol 1 in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C 2 is “0 to 24”. This "big hit K" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit K" is 25, so "big hit K" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit K", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the end of the big hit, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST 80 times). Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of the expected ball (expected ball) that the player can acquire from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of “25 to 49”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit L”. This "big hit L" is a big hit of 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value to be "big hit L" is 25, so "big hit L" is determined when it becomes big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit L", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and transition to a high probability state of 80 times (ST 80 times) after the big hit is similar to "big hit K", but as described later, In terms of gaming efficiency (payout ball number / time required for a big hit game), it is a disadvantageous big hit type compared to “big hit K”.

  In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of "50 to 74", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with "big hit M". This "big hit M" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit M" is 25, so "big hit M" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit M", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

  In addition, for the special symbol 1, “big hit N” is defined in association with the range of “75 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C 2. This "big hit N" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, 25 counter values are "big hit N", so "big hit N" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit N", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and it is similar to "big hit M" that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the big hit ends, but as described later The jackpot M is disadvantageous in that the maximum payout number is small (the possibility of over winning is low).

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the jackpot k is defined in association with the range (entire range) of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99". This "big hit k" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit k" is 100, so "big hit k" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The proportion is 100%.

  In this "big hit k", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, whether to shift to a high probability state of 80 times short (ST 80 times) or whether 100 times short state of a normal symbol is given It changes according to the game mode of the player in the jackpot game. The game mode of the player is not limited at all, and a ball may be allowed to pass through a predetermined entrance, or a predetermined operation means may be operated. I will mention later.

  In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds for the jackpot game, but the special bonus 2 (the time saving state or the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is more advantageous when the jackpot is given It is defined that (it becomes easy to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the game proceeds to a high probability state in which the player who is more likely to win the game by winning the special symbol 2 wins against the game winning by the lottery of the special symbol 1. The configuration is easier. Therefore, once the continuous shooting mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the lottery of special symbol 2 is performed by entering the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed Becomes easy to be executed, and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the detailed contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. The opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the big hit game, using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 6 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set to the opening / closing plate 1300 and “retraction state” is set to the interference member 6930 as scenario contents. In the operation scenario 1, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage of the operation It is controlled to return to the state (a state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the interference member is in the retracted state).

  The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario with a maximum of 10 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario content and “retraction state” is set in the interference member 6930. In the operation scenario 2, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 10 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage It is controlled to return to the state.

  In the operation scenario 3, “open (opened state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (opened state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario contents, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state” This is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which 1.0 second → overhang state 0.1 second → evacuation state is set. In the operation scenario 3, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is ended by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 3, unlike the operation scenario 1 and the operation scenario 2 described above, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that the storage channel 1231 is opened. It is possible to discharge the remaining balls, but the details will be described later. In addition, since closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 second, four balls can be discharged from the reservoir channel 1231 (as described above, 0.2 second is required for discharging one ball).

  Among the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, the spheres discharged while the closed (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and 18.0 seconds later (the fifth round) The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closing position 20.0 seconds after the start of the game R).

  This “after 2.0 seconds” is later than the timing at which the third ball counting from the downstream passes through the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball is a numerical value set as a time point before the time when it passes the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the outlet 1150 just before the end of 0.8 seconds in which the closing (closing state) of the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained (from the start of the fifth round game R 1.). It is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass the communication path 4810 from the discharge port 1150 (0 seconds elapsed) (2.0 seconds elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R). .

  In the operation scenario 4, “open (open state) 0.2 sec → closed (closed state) 0.8 sec → open (open state)” is set as the scenario content in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state” This is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which 1.0 seconds → overhang state 24.0 seconds → retraction state is set. In the operation scenario 4, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage of the operation It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 4, the open / close plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed) similarly to the operation scenario 3 described above, so that the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 Can be discharged, the details will be described later. In addition, since closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 second, four balls can be discharged from the reservoir channel 1231 (as described above, 0.2 second is required for discharging one ball). Among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls discharged while the closing (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 as described above. is there.

  The “projected state 24.0 seconds” in this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the projected state at least until the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as described later, it is impossible for the specified number (10 in this control example) of the spheres to pass the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Because the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state is It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific region 4830.

  In the operation scenario 5, “open (opened state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → opened (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario contents, and the retracted state is set to the interference member 6930 This is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which 0.2 seconds → overhang state 0.2 seconds → save state 2.6 seconds → overhang state 20 seconds → save state is set. In the operation scenario 5, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 5, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that one sphere left in the storage channel 1231 is discharged as described later. In addition, it is an operation scenario that restricts the flow of the balls by the interference member 6930 and limits the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to eight (see FIG. 53 (b), the interference member 6930 It corresponds to the state that there is one ball downstream of).

  In this case, it is possible to restrict passage of the sphere through the detection sensor 1240 in a state where the number of spheres passing the detection sensor 1240 is less than the prescribed number (9 in this control example). The passage of the sphere to the detection sensor 1240 can be enabled based on the displacement of the sensor 1240, so that the passage of the sphere to the detection sensor 1240 can be generated in a state where a plurality of spheres are arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to generate an over-sized winning (so-called "over winning").

  In the operation scenario 6, “open (opened state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → opened (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario contents, as in the operation scenario 5. In the operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds, in the interference member 6930, “Retraction state 0.2 seconds → overhang state 2.6 seconds → retraction state 0.2 seconds → overhang state 0.2 seconds → retraction state” is set is there. In the operation scenario 6, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is ended by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 6, although the opening and closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), the opening and closing plate 1300 is restricted because the ball is restricted from flowing down to the interference member 6930. This is an operational scenario in which the ball is not ejected from the outlet 1150 while maintaining the closure (closed state). Further, after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (see FIG. 53 (see FIG. a) See) The round game R ends based on the detection of the tenth ball in the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not possible to make it easy to generate an over winning.

  As described above, by dividing and storing the operation scenario based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit given to the player by the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 currently being executed is provided. It can be easily determined.

  In each operation scenario, the opening / closing plate 1300 is forcibly closed by entering a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls into the first specified winning hole 1000a (see FIGS. 8 and 9). (Operation scenario ends), but the interference member 6930 is a round game R even when the specified number of balls enter the first specified winning opening 1000a in the middle of the operation scenario. The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the end of the inter-round interval after the end of, and is controlled to change to the save state (the operation scenario ends) simultaneously with the end of the inter-round interval.

  FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f. The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information of what jackpot type and which round game R for which each scenario type set in advance corresponds.

  When executing operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 in the MPU of the main control unit 110, information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening and closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f Reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e, the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved.

  The opening and closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202 f is configured to be able to set a corresponding operation scenario based on the combination of the jackpot type and the number of round games R in the round game. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

  In this control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is movably controlled according to the start timing of the round game R of the big hit game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the operation scenario, the setting order is stored in advance in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario that changes in order each time the operation scenario ends from power on (or predetermined operation start timing). It may be controlled. Thus, the correspondence between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, so that it is possible for the player to make it difficult to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

  Referring to FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), an open / close plate corresponding to the jackpot type The operation modes of 1300 (first specified winning hole 1000a), interference member 6930 and distribution device 4850 (specified area 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

  In FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), the first specified winning hole 1000a is in the open state. Also indicated as "open", the closed state of the first specified winning hole 1000a is also indicated as "closed", the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as "tension", the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as "retraction", The state in which the sphere can flow into the area 4830 (that is, the state in which the distribution operation member 4851 is disposed in the open position) is also indicated as "open", and the state in which the sphere can not flow into the specific area 4830 (that is, the distribution operation member) The state where the 4851 is placed in the closed position) is also shown as "closed".

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the first specified winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round round game R to the fourth round round game R is Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game round R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  Further, as described above, the drive mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the jackpot type (see FIG. 96A). That is, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round (the ball is open to the specific area 4830 so as to be allowed to pass), and 18.0 seconds later (5 The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closing position (20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the round) (the ball is closed so as not to pass the specific area 4830).

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96 (a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot K (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to the present operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game round R (0.2 seconds × 10 In the fourth round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 does not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game. In addition, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, so one second after the start of the fifth round game R The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the control member 1600 is in the discharging state) immediately after the start of the fifth round game R Since the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball is opened to the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, since the storage channel 1231 is formed in a shape capable of storing the restricted number of balls (10 in this control example), the fifth round game R and the first specified winning opening 1000a are divided into 10 balls. It can be ended by entering the ball individually. Therefore, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged in the round game R of the fifth round while the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830 (20.0 seconds), so the first specification By continuing to fire the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give the player an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to what can be done, the fifth round of round game R can be finished in a short time (it is finished by winning a prescribed number (10 in this control example)), so time efficiency against the number of payout balls in the jackpot game You can raise it.

  In addition, since the timing when the ball passes the specific area 4830 is after the end of the round game R of the fifth round, it is unclear whether the ball passes the specific area 4830 over the fifth round game R As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000 a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot L (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the sixteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at an interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, so 0.2 seconds × 5 In the fourth round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game R. For example, in the round game R of the fourth round, when five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the number of storage is left in the storage channel.

  Here, since the progression of the round game R of the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the cases will be separately described below.

  First, when 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round round game R, the fifth round game R starts with 5 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 Be done.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where five balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, advantageous benefits (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after discharge One ball remains in 1231. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of additionally enterable balls in the storage channel 1231 is nine (the number of balls less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example)), so five rounds The round game R does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1, has elapsed, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  In FIG. 96 (b), as a representative example, the time change when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game round R is illustrated.

  Second, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round round game R, the fifth round game R starts with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231 Be done.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, advantageous benefits (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game.

  Thirdly, in the fourth round of round game R, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is from 0 to 8, 5 is obtained from the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. The round game R of the 5th round is started in the state by which the number of balls (0 to 3 balls) pulled is stored.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  In addition, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, so one second after the start of the fifth round game R The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, the distribution operation is performed in a state where the ball can not pass through the specific area 4830 while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the whole sphere (0 to 3). Since the member 4851 is maintained, there is no event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game. In addition, 19 seconds have passed since the start of the fifth round game R, provided that the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the fifth round game R If the number of balls (10 in this control example) is entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a in advance, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 cause an event of passing through the specific area 4830 As the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the player is given an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). be able to.

  Summarizing the first to third cases described above, if there are 10 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the event of the ball passing through the specific area 4830 is made early On the other hand, the time efficiency to the number of paid-out balls in the fifth round round game is reduced (in the first case), and the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round round game R are 9 In the case of one, it is possible to cause an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 at an early stage, and time efficiency for the number of payout balls in the round game of the fifth round is increased (in the second case), the fourth round When there are 0 to 8 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R, an event in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round game R In, go up is time-efficient for the payout prize ball number of 5 round round game (third case).

  Therefore, in the case of performing control with the same operation pattern, it is possible to change the timing at which the player gains a profit and the size of the obtained profit for each game mode of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, as described above, in the fourth round game R, by setting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to nine, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized. . Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, the information on the standard of the number stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)). As a result, the power of attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved, and the player's gaze can be guided.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 97 (a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot M (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the seventeenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to the present operation pattern, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are ejected at the upper limit of nine in the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round of round game R (0.2 seconds 9 balls = 1.8 seconds), balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game round R may remain at one upper limit in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game round There is sex. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is newly added in the fifth round of round game R. The ball that has entered the ball is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 in 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round of round game R, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 is in a period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the control member 1600 is discharged). The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and an event of passing the specific area 4830 does not occur immediately after the ball can be opened to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, the interference member 6930 is in an extended state until 1.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round of round game R and 25.0 seconds have elapsed, and the flow of the ball is restricted (FIG. 86). (Refer to (a)), the storage channel 1231 can not store a limited number of spheres (10 in this control example) (a maximum of 9 can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930) The spheres are not stored and can be stored at a maximum of 7). Therefore, the 5th round game can not be ended until 25.0 seconds have passed after the start of the 5th round game R, and then 10 balls are entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a. When the predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) elapses, the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  Therefore, while it is possible to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the fifth round), it is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fifth round Can not eject the ball. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specified winning hole 1000a, there is no event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, the ball is configured to be incapable of passing through the specific area 4830, so that an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) is given to the player. In addition to the inability, the fifth round round game R becomes longer, so time efficiency against the number of prize balls in the jackpot game can not be increased (can be lowered).

  FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000 a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 97 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the eighteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the eighteenth operation pattern is the seventeenth operation except that the length of the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is different. Since the pattern is the same as the pattern, the description of the portions common to the above description is omitted.

  The difference between the eighteenth operation pattern and the seventeenth operation pattern is whether residual balls remaining without being discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 are generated in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round.

  That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the inter-round interval is set to the fourth inter-round interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds). When ten pieces are stored, one remaining ball is generated.

  On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, since the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time between the rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds), the number of discharged pieces is 10 at maximum, and the number of stored pieces 1231 is 10 pieces (maximum Even if it is stored, it can be discharged all over the world, and there are no remaining balls.

  In this case, in the seventeenth operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, it is specified immediately after the start of the fifth game round game R On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected, usually, big hit). Since there is no ball (remaining ball) to be discharged, the player can grasp that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R (Expected Unusual Win).

  Therefore, it is possible to change the player's sense of expectation depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 while substantially sharing the benefit that the player can obtain.

  In addition, as described above, the sixteenth operation pattern (see FIG. 16) in which the profit obtained by the player is larger than the jackpot of the jackpot type of the jackpot M, and the remaining balls occur at the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round. Since the difference from 96 (b) can be grasped by the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231, the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specified area 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the nineteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R for the fourth round, the fifth round game R for the fifth round, interposing the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The round game R of the fifth round is started in the operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)) described above.

  First, according to the present operation pattern, it is changed by the operation of the player how many balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round.

  That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) according to the above-described timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhang state. Since the discharge of the ball thereafter is restricted, the ball disposed on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 will remain in the storage channel 1231. The operation on the operation button 300 is controlled such that only the timing at which it is first pressed in the inter-round interval is determined to be valid, and the subsequent pressing is invalidated, the details will be described later.

  Here, since the progression of the round game R in the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage flow channel 1231, the power of attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved. The case will be separately described below.

  First, the case where there are many balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when there are five or more) will be described. That is, it is a case where round game R of the 5th round is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91A).

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the fifth round of round game R is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage flow channel 1231, the balls can pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Since the passage is made, it is possible to give an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after discharge One or more balls remain in 1231. Therefore, in the fifth round of round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (the number of balls less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the round does not end until 30.0 seconds which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1 elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  That is, in the first case, there occurs an advantageous event that it is possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of the prize ball in the fifth round game R is slightly less (The number of winning balls decreases as the player can not enter the specified number (10 in this control example)), and the duration of the round game R for the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds). Events occur.

  Secondly, the case where there are four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, it is a case where round game R of the 5th round is started in a state where four balls are stored in storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90B).

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, advantageous benefits (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game. In addition, it is limited after lapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fifth round from the control aspect of the interference member 6930 that the sphere of the specified number will enter the first specified winning combination hole 1000a. .

  That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs that it is possible to acquire a privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and the prescribed number (10) in the fifth round game R While there is an advantageous event that the ball can enter the first specified winning hole 1000a and the duration of the fifth round of round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the disadvantageous event is It does not occur.

  Third, the case where there are few balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when there are three or less) will be described. That is, it is a case where the round game R of the 5th round is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91 (b)).

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  In addition, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, so one second after the start of the fifth round game R The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, the distribution operation is performed in a state where the ball can not pass through the specific area 4830 while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the whole sphere (0 to 3). Since the member 4851 is maintained, there is no event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 Although all the balls that have been shot are discharged, the interference member 6930 maintains the overhanging state until 1.0 seconds after 1.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round of round game R, so it is prescribed during that time The number (10 in this control example) of balls can not be entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a. In addition, when 20.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round of round games R, the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball can not pass the specific area 4830.

  Therefore, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R of the fifth round is configured not to cause an event of passing through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a (it can be ended without waiting for the lapse of 30.0 seconds which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1).

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game. In addition, it is limited after lapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fifth round from the control aspect of the interference member 6930 that the sphere of the specified number will enter the first specified winning combination hole 1000a. .

  That is, in the third case, while the disadvantageous event that it is not possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game occurs, the prescribed number (10 pieces) of in the fifth round game R An advantageous event occurs such that the ball can enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when there are five or more spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, while an event that the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 can be generated at an early stage, If the time efficiency for the round game payout prize number decreases (in the first case) and there are four balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is caused early The ball passes through the specific area 4830 if there are three or less balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 (in the second case) because the time efficiency to the number of paid-out balls in the fifth round of round games increases. While the event does not occur, the time efficiency for the number of paid-out balls in the fifth round game is increased (in the third case). Then, which case is applied changes depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  That is, since the profit obtained by the player can be changed by the timing at which the operation button 300 is operated, it is possible to improve the attention power to the timing effect (operation effect) and to participate in the timing effect (operation effect). You can increase your motivation.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99 (a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M or k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, an upper limit is placed on entering the first specified winning hole 1000a in the sixth round of round game R (entering the number of balls exceeding the prescribed number (10 in this control example)). It can be easily generated by one. Details will be described below.

  The interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set as the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 being zero.

  Immediately after the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is brought into the overhang state, but returns immediately to the retreat state (see FIG. 95A). Therefore, from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the ball that first enters the first specified winning opening 1000a by 1.0 seconds has passed without being restricted by the interference member 6930, 2 It reaches the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, a position in contact with the regulating member 1600) in 0 seconds.

  The ball that entered the ball first is discharged 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round when the first specified winning hole 1000a is closed (the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened). . Here, since the period during which the first specified winning hole 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one upper limit.

  At 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts opening. Therefore, the sphere disposed on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing downward by the interference member 6930 from this point on.

  The internal shape of the storage channel 1231 is formed such that a maximum of two spheres can be stored downstream of the interference member 6930 and a maximum of seven spheres can be stored upstream of the interference member 6930 in the overhang state of the interference member 6930 (see FIG. See 86 (b)).

  After 3.0 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, so it stays on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 It will be.

  On the other hand, as described above, when one sphere disposed at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the sphere disposed downstream of the interference member 6930 in the storage channel 1231 becomes Less than one. Therefore, the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight at maximum. Since the total with the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is nine and becomes less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example), the prescribed number of spheres is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the overhang state Can not be entered into the first specified winning combination 1000a, it is not possible to end the round game R of the sixth round.

  During this time, since the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86 (b)), the player continues to strike the right according to the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92 (b)). A plurality of balls can be aligned on the top surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 (a so-called "grape" can be generated).

  When the interference member 6930 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state, it flows down along the inclination of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to follow later that the sphere whose flow is restricted inside the storage channel 1231 flow down. (Like an avalanche). The opening / closing plate 1300 starts to move toward the closed state as the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specified winning hole 1000a due to the flow of the balls, but the number of discharges corresponds to the number of discharges. Then, since a gap for one ball is generated in the storage channel 1231, the momentum of the inflow of the balls into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operation.

  Therefore, before the opening / closing plate 1300 closes the first specified winning opening 1000a, an event may occur in which a ball carrying momentum enters the first specified winning opening 1000a. In this case, an upper limit of one excess is exceeded. It is possible to generate a prize.

  In addition, when the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 at the timing 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the downstream of the interference member 6930 after 3.0 seconds has elapsed The number of balls placed in does not change. Therefore, in this case, the number of balls remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 does not occur, the above-described void does not occur inside the storage channel 1231, and it is configured that the effect of causing the over winning can not be exhibited. Ru.

  FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning hole 1000 a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the 21st operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the twenty-first operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, an extra ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a (a ball with a number exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example) is generated) in the round game R of the sixth round It can be difficult. Details will be described below.

  The interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set as the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 being zero.

  Immediately after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is maintained for 2.6 seconds in the overhang state (see FIG. 95A). Therefore, the ball that has first entered the first specified winning opening 1000a by the time 1.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game R of the sixth round is restricted to flow down to the interference member 6930.

  When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the ball restricted from flowing down resumes flowing, but 0.2 seconds (the time required for the flow of the storage channel 1231 to be 2.0 seconds / reservable number 10 pieces) In), only the length of one ball is enough for the balls to flow down. Therefore, the ball that has resumed flowing down is the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, by the time the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating (opening of the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). It can not reach the position where it abuts on the regulating member 1600). Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the balls are not discharged from the storage flow passage 1231 at the timing 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round.

  At 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts opening, but returns to the retracted state immediately. Therefore, after that, the balls arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 are not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and the balls are stored in order in the storage channel 1231.

  With the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls entering the first specified winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the twentieth operation pattern), the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed. Change to At this time, the number of balls stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is ten, and the storage flow channel 1231 is full, so that more balls are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23A), the number of balls entering the first specified winning hole 1000a is a prescribed number (in this control example, 10). Limited), and it is not possible to cause over wins.

  Therefore, even if a ball is disposed on the upstream side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at the end of the sixth round of the jackpot game R, the ball does not lead to the player's benefit. Therefore, in the sixth round game R in the jackpot game of the jackpot type jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 does not strongly prompt the continuation of the firing of the ball (see FIG. 92A). To be executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state with reference to the start of the round game R in the sixth round, and the interference member It is difficult to occur when over winning is likely to occur in the round game R of the sixth round while performing common control with the timing at which 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state (see FIG. 99 (a)). The case (see FIG. 99 (b)) can be generated.

  This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the sixth round game R in the present jackpot game is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or whether it is controlled by the twenty first operation pattern. Since it is possible, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball is fired that is suitable for the operation pattern while predicting the operation pattern. This makes it possible to prevent the player from unintentionally digesting the jackpot game.

  As described above, when the first specified winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specified winning opening 1000a is short-opened (open for 0.2 seconds), Two balls do not remain downstream of the interference member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specified winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twenty-first pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specified winning opening 1000a is opened for a short time (open for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain downstream of.

  Therefore, it is controlled by the 21st operation pattern whether the sixth round game R is controlled by the 20th operation pattern by confirming how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930 The interference member 6930 is retracted for a predetermined period of time (for example, the interference member 6930 is retracted 23.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round). It may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize in 0 seconds before).

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 holding ball Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , Closing flag 203q, count start flag 203qa, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V prize winning counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning quantity counter 203w, discharged quantity counter 203x, other memory area 203z It is.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter The values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning combination), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data includes four holding areas (hold Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas. In the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the respective counter values acquired based on the start winning for the second ball entry port 640 are stored. About the storing method etc. of a counter value, since it is the same as that of special symbol 1 reservation ball storing area 203a, it omits about the detailed explanation.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is obtained from four hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth). Among the vacant areas of the area (area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to a winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so it is the same as the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 suspension ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack winning data stored in another reserve area into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the fluctuation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111). reference). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102 (b)) is noise Even if the main control unit 110 shifts from the actual number of balls held by the main control unit 110 due to the influence of the .

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) of the number of holding balls each time the number of holding balls changes. Send ball number command for display for display. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times.

  The initial value of this special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is set to zero, and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. One by one is added (see S410 in FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command similar to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter that counts up to.

  The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See S704 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 114: No) ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of the remaining special symbol in the probability variation state of the special symbol. That is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a natural number, it is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is in the low probability status of the special symbol. In this control example, since the definite variation state of the special symbol usually involves the time shortening status of the normal symbol, the numerical value of the probability variation counter 203g corresponds to the remaining short time period (the number of times of variation of the special symbol).

  When the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game, the probability change counter 203g sets 80 at the end of the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the definite variation state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

  Further, the probability variation counter 203 g is a big hit by drawing a special symbol, and is set to 0 when the start of the big hit is set (see S 219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, in a state where the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability change counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power supply interruption occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is configured to be backed up.

  The time saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining short time (the number of times the special symbol changes) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At this time, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the big hit game, 100 is set at the end of the big hit game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in the present control example, when the jackpot game is not set to the definite change state, 100 time saving states are given.

  In this control example, although the case where the time saving state is given regardless of the jackpot type has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, all or one of the jackpot types ("big hit K", "big hit L" and "big hit k") that can flow the ball to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode When a ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game in the unit, control may be performed so as not to provide a time saving state.

  In this case, the game was not performed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the ball was not fired or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification of the display device. Because the loss due to) is excessively large (does not shift to the special symbol's definite change state that was originally intended to be transferred, and the time saving state is not given), it is possible to improve the motivation for playing the game in the appropriate game mode it can.

  In the operation scenario storage area 203i, when the operation control (see S1004 in FIG. 117) of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) is started, the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f (FIG. )) This is an area for reading and storing the operation scenario from. Operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

  The operation counter 203 j is a counter for determining the timing at which the interference member 6930 is movably controlled in the storage valve operation process (see S 1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set to the operation counter 203 j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

  The exit flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state, and indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state (see FIG. 53B) if it is on. If it is off, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

  The exit flag 203k is determined to be an operation start timing when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected in the effective period in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125) (S1403 in FIG. 19: Yes) If it is set (S1408 in FIG. 125: Yes), the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed by being set to ON and set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). When the) ends, it is set to OFF (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start counting of the remaining ball timer 203n described later.

  The remaining ball timer 203 n is a timer that is counted to identify a normal range in the jackpot control process (see S 1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203 n reaches the upper limit (the value corresponding to 1 second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor If the number of spheres detected at 4860 (see FIG. 51) does not match the total number of spheres detected by the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51), the difference between the numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

  The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharges discharged from the discharge port 1150 across each round. If it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121) (S1231 in FIG. 121: No), an error command is set.

  The closing flag 203 q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000 a is put in the closed state, and is a flag set to ON in the winning process (see S 1112 in FIG. 123) (FIG. 123). S1278), which is used to start the counting of the closing counter 203r described later. Then, the closing flag 203 q is set to off based on the fact that the closing counter 203 r has reached a predetermined value or more in the V winning process (see S 1009 in FIG. 129).

  The count start flag 203 qa is set to on in the fifth round game R based on the closing flag 203 q being set to on, and is used to start the counting of the closing counter 203 r. Then, the count start flag 203 qa is based on the fact that the closing counter 203 r has reached the upper limit value (the value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) in the V pay process (see S 1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

  The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 at a normal timing in the V pay process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). Is a counter to The closing counter 203r is incremented by one each time the V winning process is executed.

  In the control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as an interval period after the round game R in accordance with various timings. The closing counter 203r is used to determine abnormality in the timing of V winning in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

  In the V flag 203s, the ball is in a specific area 4830 (FIG. 51) at a predetermined timing (within a set value, a predetermined period after the first specified winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is closed in this control example). This flag is set to ON when it is detected that the vehicle has passed through. The V flag 203s is set to OFF after the value of the probability change counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

  The V prize winning counter 203t is a counter decremented by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V prize winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V prize winning counter 203t is for determining that the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 has normally passed through the specific area 4830 in a state where the distribution operation member 4851 is disposed at the open position. In the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123), a numerical value (in the present control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set as the closing flag 203q is turned on.

  The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until setting a notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) based on the predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). .

  The winning number counter 203 w is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won in the first specified winning opening 1000 a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S 1112 in FIG. 123).

  The number-of-discharges counter 203 x is a counter that counts the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203 w and the discharging number counter 203 x is determined every time the remaining ball timer 203 n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormality processing (see S 1113 in FIG. 124).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. A large opening solenoid (for closing or opening the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the first specified winning opening 1000a) A solenoid 209 comprising a solenoid 1510) or a solenoid for driving a motorized part, and a solenoid 6910 for driving the interference member 6930 are connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands or commands for these via the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and The operation button 300 operated by the user is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208 and signals output from the operation button 300 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253. Perform various processing.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and indicates the rough fluctuation contents (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) Is used to determine the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The opening and closing plate and interference member operation scenario 222b is provided to allow the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation status of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110. The opening / closing plate stored in the ROM 202 of the control unit 110, the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and the opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario table 202f is an area in which information stored in the operation scenario table 202f is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a change start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. A flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a probability change state flag 223i, a short time state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, and an operation flag 223p The effect temporary storage area 223r, the first operation effect flag 223wa, the second operation effect flag 223wb, the first input flag 223wc, the second input flag 223wd, the effect executing flag 223x, and the pressing period information storage area 223y And other memory area 223z There has been provided with at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to the holding ball number of the variation effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is the second special symbol ( Corresponds to the number of holding balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

  As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e Can not get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c The number of holding balls is to be managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls in the variable display is added by entering balls into first entrance 64 and second entrance 640, or when the main controller 110 selects a special symbol When the variable display in is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, the number of holding balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e The command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball reception is used from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. Also, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c after storage, a display holding ball number command for the display control device 114 Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number-of-holding balls number pattern corresponding to the value of the number-of-holding balls counter 223c in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. While the value is changed. Accordingly, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when the command set when the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 increases or decreases. Counter, which is used to synchronize the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control unit 110 and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control unit 113. is there. The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the number of holding balls of the special symbol mentioned above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since it is the same, it omits about the explanation.

  The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223g is configured of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main processing (see FIG. 131) is executed. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined with reference to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, the values of the different counters are different. Used. Thereby, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that it is possible to suppress the bias of the effect pattern to be set. The effect pattern may be set using the values calculated after performing different processing on the values acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the first place of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tenth place of the acquired value, and the other selection indicates one of the acquired value It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by doubling the value of the third digit by the value obtained by multiplying the fifth digit by ten, and to refer to the first digit of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the effect pattern to be set while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game, and when the round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( When the jackpot ending command is received, the value of the counter is reset to 0 (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display command related to the display during the big hit game is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

  The probability change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probability change state of the special symbol. If this probability variation state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if off, it indicates that the probability probability state of the special symbol is. The probability variation state flag 223i is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control unit 110.

  In this control example, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more in this control example, it is considered as an aspect indicating that a probability variation game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203h If it is one or more, it is a mode indicating that a time saving game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is a mode indicating that a normal game is being played.

  It is determined whether or not the present is a definite variation state of the special symbol according to the state of this definite variation state flag 223i, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navi image displayed in the special symbol oddity state, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when executing the right-handed game in the normal state To determine the

  The time saving state counter 223 j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal time saving state of a symbol. At this time, if the short state counter 223 j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol, and if off, it indicates that the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the short state counter 223 j is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. At this time, according to the state of the short state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the right-handed navi image displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol is displayed, or whether or not the right-handed warning image is displayed in the normal state.

  The storage state flag 223 k is a flag for determining the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 86A), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 The setting is made based on the detection result of If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and if it is off, less than the storage number of balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 Indicates that.

  The storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (four in this control example) in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137). When it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number (see S2807 in FIG. 137), the storage channel 1231 is set to OFF (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, an intermediate number display is executed on the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (FIG. 88 (FIG. 88). (A) is executed.

  The storage upper limit flag 223 m is a flag for determining that the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in this control example), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 The setting based on the detection result of the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 is made. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the sphere of the upper limit number is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and if it is off, the sphere of the upper limit number is not stored in the storage flow path 1231 Show.

  The storage upper limit flag 223 m is set to ON when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is the upper limit number in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) (see S2814 in FIG. 137) When it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the upper limit number, it is set to be off (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, the full tank display (see FIG. 92B) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, the dissatisfaction display (FIG. 92 (a)) is executed.

  The storage counter 223 n is a counter for counting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the passage of the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and the discharge of the ball from the outlet 1150 is the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 (or dedicated The value of the storage counter 223n is configured to be decremented by 1 when detected by the

  The operation flag 223p is a flag that determines whether the operation button 300 has been operated. If the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 is operated, and if off, it indicates that the operation button 300 is not operated. The operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination processing (S2218 in FIG. 132: Yes), and is set to OFF in button input monitoring and effect processing (see S3007 in FIG. 139). .

  The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect content until the effect is executed, and for example, an effect mode of timing effect (operation effect) to be executed during a big hit The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored during the period from the setting timing (third round) to the timing (time fourth) at which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the big hit. The effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and a round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the big hit internal effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134) is executed. Is read out (S2537 in FIG. 134).

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether or not to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means (the operation button 300). If it is on, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if off, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

  In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the fact that the round game R of the fourth round is started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa is the second operation effect flag 223wb. In contrast, it is set that the round game R of the 4 round surface of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k is started, respectively. Then, the effect information read out from the effect temporary storage area changes according to the setting of the first operation effect flag 223 wa and the second operation effect flag 223 wb.

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF after the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

  The first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are flags for limiting the number of times of operation of the operation button 300 during the corresponding effect (in the present control example, limiting to one time), and the respective operations The first operation is performed during the period, or it is set to ON by exceeding the operation period, and the input of the operation button 300 thereafter is invalidated. In addition, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to off after the fifth round of round game R is started and the effect executing flag 223x is set to off (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

  The effect under execution flag 223 x is a flag for determining whether the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed if it is on, and it should be off For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect executing flag 223x is referred to when it is determined whether the operation on the operation means (the operation button 300) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect).

  The round during which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started in the large hitting middle effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134) of this effect executing flag 223x (S2532 in FIG. 134: Yes), and the effect round command for display is displayed. After setting, it is set to on (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is ended, it is set to OFF (S2542 in FIG. 134).

  The pressing period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). .

  In this pressing period information storage area 223y, a successful pressing period is set in correspondence with the set display pointer (effect pointer). The success pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring and rendering process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the success pressing period.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initial setting process to be executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program is set.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance are started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by the fluctuation effect when entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. Display on 81

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and if it is "big hit of special symbol", "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the change production, and if it is "out of special symbol", "×" symbol is after the change production stop Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball entering into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image alternates with the third symbol display device The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a town, a sea, the sky and the like are displayed. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored as a back surface image in the back surface image area 235c.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is a big hit (big hit K etc. In the case of), the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specified winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is opened, and the round effect is This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back surface image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) and light in the image as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present control example, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 104) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 105 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 105).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231. Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. Set to off.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected, and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. The simplified command determination process and the simplified display setting process are executed so that the image upon power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing and display setting processing is performed.

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Because there is no resident target image data, the resident image transfer setting processing for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, it is necessary for the drawing processing. The normal image transfer setting process for transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later (see FIG. 106) in which the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame, the pointer The update process is executed, and the value of the pointer 233 f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 106) is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 106, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 235. Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set, and the image controller 237 is set. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a.

  On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 107 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 319, 99, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in association with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210) A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If S has not passed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot is K, the jackpot L, the jackpot M, the jackpot N, or the jackpot k is determined.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when becoming big hit K, blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when it is big hit L, red LED is turned on. In the case of the jackpot M, N or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and in the case of the jack off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specified winning opening is set based on the big hit type (S217), and then the start of the big hit is set (S218) . Specifically, the operation scenario indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, the first specified winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for 1 to 4 rounds, a predetermined period (until 30 seconds pass, or until 10 balls are won), and in 5 and 6 rounds It is shown that the first specified winning combination port 1000a is set to be opened in a corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95 (b)). When the process of S218 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), the state command setting process for determining whether or not the time saving state is finished is executed (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

  In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 109, the state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and various kinds of probability change counter 203g and hour / minute counter 203h. The game state is determined based on the value of the counter, and the state command is set (S234, S238).

  In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes) The value of the counter 203g is decremented by one, and the value of the counter 203h is decremented by one (S232). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S233: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating that it is in the normal gaming state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S235). If it is determined that the value 203h is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S235: No), the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203 h is 0 (S 237), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S 237: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating that it is in the normal gaming state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b And each value of stop classification selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302). If it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301; Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, four random numbers from "1 to 4" are set as random number values for the big win of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is made common in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, according to the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 It may be a different random value. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values to be the jackpot may be made different. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability gaming state Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is hit or not is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes the hit match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes) , A jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the 5 types of special symbols (big hit Of K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot types (jackk K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k) . Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit K, big hit L, big hit M, big hit N and big hit k) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

  As the fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, “disengagement (for long time)”, “disengagement (for short time),” “chance out”, “disengagement” There are a variety of "normal reach", "outside super reach", and "outside chance reach". In addition, as the variation patterns of various jackpots, various “shared normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared chance reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is out of reach or completely out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 117), these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Will be sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and determines whether or not the first ball entry 64 or the second ball entry 640 has a prize (start prize). When there is a start winning, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters, and performing a suspension process of the value.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the free holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The processes of S407 to S412 differ from each other only in that the process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are performed with the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are identical, their detailed description is omitted. Further, when each process of S407 to S412 is finished, the pre-reading process is executed (S413), and the present process is finished.

  Next, the prefetching process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S413). This pre-reading process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 If there is no new winning combination (S501: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first winning slot 64 or the second entering slot 640 has a new winning (S501: Yes), whether the gaming state at the start of the change is a definite variation state of the special symbol or not If it is determined (S502) and the special symbol is in a definite variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  If it is determined in the process of S502 that the gaming state is not a definite variation of special symbol (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Migrate to

  In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 which are the judgment results of the big hit are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and the process ends.

  Next, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640 It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S608: Yes), the second acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a regular symbol is per formed is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202 c 2 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607. And, based on the second random number table for low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 10 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202c1 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S609 or S610 is the hit of the normal symbol (S611), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S611: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S613: Yes), the motorized role attached to the second entry port 640 The opening period of the object 640a is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S614), and the process proceeds to the processing of S617. In the process of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the open period of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds and The number of times of release is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to the process of S617.

  In the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S617.

  In the process of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to one second (S618), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with “30 seconds → 1 second” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further Since the open period of the second ball entry port 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623).

  In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as

  When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device is ended when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol It determines (S624).

  If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. If the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, then the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is performed. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S614 or S615 end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is judged whether or not the passing of the ball in the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 has occurred, and the passing of the ball has occurred. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the normal entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704).

  Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is of the empty hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 Of these, the first area is stored (S 705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93) in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 116, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S910 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S910.

  As described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. 117, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S912) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the process of S912, the process proceeds to the process of S913.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power supply recovery is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a definite variation state, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the number of time reductions of the normal symbol.

  A state command is generated according to the value of the time saving counter 203 h or the value of the probability variation counter 203 g and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, recognition of the game state can be made to coincide between the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, even though the symbol is in the low probability state, the right-handed navigation (see, for example, the small area Ds3 in FIG. 88A) may be displayed, or conversely, the symbol is in the high probability state. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of a right strike warning image (not shown) when the player strikes a right. That is, the gaming state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

  When the process of S913 ends, a rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S914). Then, the interruption is permitted (S915), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating process of S1013 and S1014 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001).

  Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command.

  Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) or the start winning process (see FIG. 111) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or A jackpot control process is performed to open or close the first specified winning opening 1000a of the variable winning device 6000 (S1004).

  In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the first specified winning opening 1000a is set in accordance with the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) for each round of the jackpot state. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized item opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (refer to FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, in the first symbol display device 37 End the fluctuation display being executed and stop the stop symbol (the first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110). Display (light on).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit.

  Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S612 or the processing of S616 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( Turn on).

  After the process of S1007 is performed, a storage control process is performed (S1008). The storage control process (S1008), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, executes a process for setting retraction and extension of the interference member 6930. Next, when the process of S1008 ends, V winning process is executed (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, other processes are executed (S1010).

  When the process of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S1012: No), during the time to the predetermined time, ie, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main process, (1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1013, S1014).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1011, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 115 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1015 is executed.

  First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1017), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S1011 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001.

  That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed or the first specification It is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 1000 a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1103 that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). When it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

  The operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). Thereafter, the process ends and returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) for each round and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 are set.

  As described above, since each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Such problems can be suppressed.

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the process of S1105 ends, a number-of-rounds command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this processing ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the opening and closing process is executed (S1108).

  Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening / closing process (S1108). In the opening / closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 matching the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the big hit control process (S1004) is returned. , End this process.

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the closing time of the opening and closing plate 1300 after six rounds are finished, and the waiting time which is the balling time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage channel 1231 and the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800) It is required, and in this control example, when 3 seconds has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is judged whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as ball clogging has occurred, or the player causes the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 to be illegally stopped by a strong magnet or the like. There is a possibility that the error command is set (S1232), and then the ending command is set (S1233).

  The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command corresponding to the display mode of the selected error notification is transmitted to the display control device 114. When an error command is received by the display control device 114, an error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, the characters "Ejection error, call a hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and control is performed to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) is strongly emitted in red, or the audio output device 226 A loud clerk (in this control example, the sound of the bell of a black telephone) is output by (see FIG. 4) or the like, and the hall clerk is controlled so as to notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, an ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1233 is completed, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set on (that is, whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234) and set on (that is, the specific area 4830). If the ball passes through (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 80, and the value of the time counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to OFF. (S1236), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1234 that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the hour / midday counter 203h is selected. It sets to 100 (S1237), returns to jackpot control processing (S1004), and ends this processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set to the probability variation counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether a ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set a probability change. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the jackpot game is over.

  Furthermore, if it is possible to pass the ball in the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, since the probability change gaming state is awarded after the jackpot game, whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game You can play games with an interest.

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No) This processing ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control processing (S1004).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S1252). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is performed in the fourth round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1253 that the end timing of the fourth round is not reached (S1253: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the 0.5 second counter in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during the two seconds of the interval time which is the brushing time after the end of the fourth round, and the voice of "press" Is output.

  Therefore, the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player must operate the operation button 300 in the interval time after the fourth round, and attention is drawn to the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal. The number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made less visible. Thereby, it can be suppressed that whether or not a sphere passes through the specific region 4830 is identified from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, by performing the above-described control to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round, it can be difficult to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830, The player can play the game expecting that the probability change gaming state is provided (provided) until the end of the big hit game (and even after the end of the big hit game).

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is provided across the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and four rounds It may be performed continuously from the eyes.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1252 that the value of the notification counter 203u is larger than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is decremented by 1 and updated (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203 u after update is 0 (S1256). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), a notification command is set (S1257). Thereafter, this process ends. In response to the notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 performs setting of an audio output of "press".

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, the winning process is performed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 123, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1271). The round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened to when it is closed to the end of the interval period. If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1271: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether it has passed the detection sensor 1240 of the first specified winning opening 1000a. If it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specified winning opening 1000a has passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1273). Thereafter, the processing of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 has not passed (S1272: No), the processing of S1274 is executed.

  In the process of S1274, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203 w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203 q is on (S 1277), and it is determined that the closing flag 203 q is on. (S1277: Yes), the process ends and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1277 that the closing flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set on (S1278), and then the set value of the V prize effective counter 203t ( In this control example, a numerical value range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more is set (S1279), and thereafter, the opening and closing plate of the first specified winning opening 1000a The closing of 1300 (the state change of the closing state) is set (S1280), and then a numerical value (in the present control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set to the V prize winning counter 203t (S1281). The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball is in the flash time after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Thereafter, the present process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V prize winning counter 203t fluctuates based on the number of stored balls. Thereby, when only three spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 (controlled so that the spheres do not pass in the specific region 4830), the flow of the spheres is caused by the contamination etc. in the storage channel 1231. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in a delayed manner, the passage of the specific area 4830 can be invalidated outside the range of the setting value of the V pay counter 203t.

  Thereby, when the display effect which is different depending on the storage number of the storage channel 1231 is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the degree of expectation that the display effect shows (the degree of payout of the award ball, the end of the big hit game It is possible to prevent the difference between the degree of possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol and the like) and the actual game result later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1274 that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether a round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether the opening / closing plate 1300 is halfway closed based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, if it is determined that it is the timing to close halfway (S1276: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed, and if it is determined that it is not the timing to close halfway (S1276: No), this processing is executed. The process ends and returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing for monitoring whether or not the specific area 4830 has been illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1301). When it is out of the round effective period (S1301: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is within the round effective period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the outlet 1150 (S1302). It should be noted that whether the gaming ball has passed through the outlet 1150 is determined by whether the passing of the gaming ball is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51). To be done.

  If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203x is incremented by one and updated (S1303). Thereafter, the process of S1304 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: No), the processing of S1304 is executed.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated since it is in the period of the balling time (S1305). The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the upper limit (in this control example, various interval times) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is determined (S1306: Yes), the number of spheres detected by the number of discharged areas (see the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) It is determined whether or not the total number of balls and the number of balls detected in the above match the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203w) (S1307).

  If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the processing of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), a value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the processing of S1309 is executed. Do.

  In the process of S1309, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309). If it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: No), the processing of S1312 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is the start timing of ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). If the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the processing of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set because there is an abnormality in discharging the ball (S1311), and the process of S1312 is executed.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, the game ball is left illegally in the storage channel 1231 or the probability variation determination unit 4800, and even if the jackpot type of the jackpot to be acquired later is the jackpot type M, N, the game region is allowed to pass through the specific area 4830 Can be suppressed.

  In this way, by controlling the ball discharge error to be notified at the start timing of the ending effect, error notification is performed even when there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of discharges in the round game R of each round. Can play the game. Thereby, the game characteristic that the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is partially restricted in the interval between rounds, and the next round is started with the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 can be realized .

  In addition, even when there is a difference between the number of balls and the number of discharged balls in each round of round games R, since it is possible to execute the game without giving an error notification, the interval between rounds is 2 seconds (stored It is possible to set a period shorter than the period required to exhaust the spheres stored in the flow path 1231 globally.

  In addition, the setting method of the ball discharge error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, set a value that can occur normally as the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of discharged items, and if the number difference is within the range of the value, do not set the error command, the difference of the number If the value is out of the range of the value, control may be made to set an error command. In this case, it can be determined that a ball discharge error has occurred without waiting for the start timing of the ending effect, so that the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected early. Thereby, when the error of ball discharge is caused by the wrongdoing, early detection of the wrongdoing can be achieved.

  In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1313). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203 w and the discharged number counter 203 x are respectively reset to initial values (S 1314), and then this process is ended.

  Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117) and is for setting the state of the interference member 6930.

  As described above, the interference member 6930 changes its state in response to the player operating the operation button 300 according to the situation (S1403 to S1407), and the state changes at a preset timing (S1403 to S1407). The storage control process (S1008) includes both of them.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 is It means that it is in the evacuation state. Next, it is determined whether it is a valid period of the operation of the operation button 300 (S1402).

  If it is determined that it is the valid period (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether the player has pressed (operated) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (ie, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept as it is. This process is ended as it is in order to save.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S1403: Yes), upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404) of the operation counter. In upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter (S1404), processing is performed to set an upper limit value different depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the upper limit value of the operation counter.

  That is, in the upper limit setting process 1 of the operation counter (S1404), pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected after the interval period between rounds is started from the interval period between rounds (ie, the pressing detection signal is The period to be detected is subtracted, and a value indicating the remaining period is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state, the exit flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the extension state (the extension state based on the operation of the operation button 300; In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that it is in the ejection state 1), the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1407), and this processing is ended and storage control is performed. It returns to a process (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the valid period (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). If it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), upper limit value setting processing 2 of the operation counter is executed (S1409). Here, upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the contents of upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409) of the operation counter. In upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409) of the operation counter, processing is performed to set an upper limit value preset by the operation scenario as the upper limit value of the operation counter.

  That is, in the upper limit setting process 2 (S1409) of the operation counter, first, it is determined whether it is a change timing to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1431). If it is determined that it is not the change timing to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 (S1431: No), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the change timing to the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value from the operation scenario (the interference member 6930 is maintained in the overhanging state based on the operation scenario) The value corresponding to the period to be stored is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state, the exit flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the extension state (the extension state based on the operation scenario, the extension state In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that it has become 2), a storage state command corresponding to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear surface image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the overhang state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command.

  That is, for example, it is set to a mode in which the character of "passing ball stored" is displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87A). This allows the player to easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the storage state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is on (S1401: Yes), a storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, the storage valve operation process (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage valve operation process (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

  In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not shown, when the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

  When it is determined in the process of S1443 that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to OFF (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to OFF (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S1443, even when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this process ends.

  When the process of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, is on) (S1413: No), this process is ended. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1413 that the exit flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), this means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this, the storage state command corresponding to the retreat state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs, to the display control device 114, a display rear surface image change command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the evacuation state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command.

  By executing the storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set in accordance with the operation situation of the operation button 300. As a result, it is possible to switch between the state in which the flow-down of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930 and the state in which the restriction is released and the flow-down of the ball is permitted.

  Further, this storage control process can drive the interference member 6930 at any timing other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, the member that operates according to the operation status of the operation button 300 and the member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be configured of the same member.

  Next, the V winning processing (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) is a process for executing control in the main process (see FIG. 117) to monitor the flow of the ball after the first specified winning hole 1000a is closed. .

  In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203 qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203 qa is not on (ie, off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether the closing flag 203 q is on (S1502). If it is determined that the closing flag 203 q is on (S 1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current execution is the fifth round (S 1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing flag 203 q is not on (that is, off) in the process of S1502 (S1502: No), and it is determined that what is currently being executed is not the fifth round in the process of S1503. If it is determined (S1503: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), this means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 for opening and closing the specific area 4830 operates. Then, in order to determine whether the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830 is occurring normally, the closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 (S1505), and then the V prize winning counter 203t is similarly decremented by 1 Update.

  Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if it is the predetermined value (S1507) (Yes), the closing flag 203 q is turned off and set (S 1508), and then the process proceeds to S 1509. On the other hand, if it is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1509.

  In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit (4.0 seconds). If the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit (S1509: Yes), this means that the value of the V prize winning counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to OFF (S1510), The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to the process of S1512. On the other hand, when the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S1512.

  As described above, since the count start flag 203 qa is turned off after the closing counter 203 r reaches the upper limit value (that is, after 4.0 seconds have elapsed since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed), The process of S1512 is not performed. That is, execution of the process of S1512 is limited to 4.0 seconds after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

  In the process of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the passage of the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). If it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V prize winning counter 203t falls within the set value range (S1513).

  In the process of S1513, when it is determined that the value of the V prize winning counter 203t falls within the set value range (S1513: Yes), this means that the ball has normally passed through the specific area 4830. The V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and the process ends.

  Immediately after the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, the V prize winning counter 203t is set to a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds, and is subtracted therefrom. As described above, the set value of the V prize winning counter 203t is set as the timing at which the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 passes the specific area 4830, and in this control example, it is 3.0 seconds. Hereinafter, it is set as a numerical range corresponding to (3-0.2 × number of stored spheres) seconds or more.

  Therefore, for example, when the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V prize effective counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the value is out of the range of the setting value. In this case, it is suspected that the ball will stay near the lower end of the communication passage 4810 (clogging or will stop due to clogged ball) and the ball will start to flow immediately after the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. It is controlled to notify an error.

  Also, for example, when the ball passes the specific area 4830 after a long time has elapsed since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V prize effective counter 203 is less than (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds), It is out of the range of setting value. In this case, a problem occurs (such as ball biting, or retention due to a ball being clogged) in the flow-down mode at the time of discharge of the ball from the storage flow channel 1231, and the discharge timing of the ball from the storage flow channel 1231 (the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed) Since it is suspected that the ball has begun to be ejected late from the timing at which it becomes a state, it is controlled to notify an error just in case.

  In addition, as cheating to hold the ball, cheating by holding a ball with a strong magnet or cheating a ball bonded with a thread onto the game area and manipulating the ball by the player operating the ball are assumed . In the pachinko machine 10, for the fraud caused by the magnet, a magnetic sensor (not shown) may be disposed in the vicinity of the storage channel 1231, or the magnetic force may not reach the storage channel 1231 or the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. It copes by spacing apart and arrange | positioning behind the glass unit 16 (refer FIG. 1), or thickening the glass unit 16. As shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the yarn is attached to the communication passage 4810 via the storage flow passage 1231 when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entering prevention portion 1331 against the fraud caused by the ball to which the yarn is adhered. And the portion which holds the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7), which is a side wall of the housing portion 1230, and the thread is fixed and the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. The yarn is fixed by being pinched by the outlet 1150. Therefore, even if the player manipulates the yarn, the load can not be transmitted to the ball in the communication passage 4810. For example, the yarn held by the player is released at an arbitrary timing, Even if the ball is aimed to pass the specific area 4830 illegally, as described above, since the yarn is fixed in places, it is easy to prevent the ball from passing the specific area 4830 illegally. Can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V prize winning counter 203t does not fall within the set value range (S1513: No), an error or some defect is suspected, so an error command is set. (S1515), and the process ends. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

  In this control example, the setting value of the V prize winning counter 203t is set based on the number of stored storage channels 1231 to determine the occurrence of fraud or failure, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, the occurrence of fraud or failure may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of balls from the storage channel 1231, or the occurrence of fraud or failure may be detected by detecting a period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. The determination may be made, and if the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the required number (less than four), occurrence of fraud or failure based on the detection of passage of the sphere in the specific area 4830 You may judge.

  In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V pay effectiveness counter 203t is within the set value, but it is not always necessary. It is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the value of the V prize effective counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON, and the game can not be made until the error due to the error command is eliminated. You may control it. Although the elimination of the error command is executed by turning off the power, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may need to be cleared.

  In this case, if the timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830 is shifted due to a defect of the pachinko machine 10, not the player's fraud, after the fact that it is detected, the player has no problem in the high probability state of the special symbol. It is possible to play a game.

  On the other hand, if the player's injustice is the cause, after the fact is discovered, the game of the injustice player is first stopped, the hall clerk clears the RAM 203, and the special symbol low probability state Force control to become This makes it possible to prevent an extra waiting time before another customer starts playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 for which the fraud has been made.

  In this control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, control is performed so that the ball can not be fired, or an error is notified when the ball is fired and the clerk is made aware of it. Such that the balls are controlled so that the balls are not paid out even if they enter the winning opening (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped), the balls are fired or the balls are not It is controlled so as not to be playable by a control mode such as being controlled to turn off the power based on entry to the mouth.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 130, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S2120 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current startup process (see FIG. 131). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S2117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2117 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S2120 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 to start initialization of the RAM 223. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. (From S2003) is judged to be data destruction in the RAM 223 (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S2120 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current start-up process is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the full-range storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is performed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2117 is performed, the process of S2008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Set permission (S2012), and shift to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S2008 when the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, because the power-on processing was started after the power was completely shut off, and the processing of S2008 to S2006 via the processing of S2004. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability change state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control unit 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. By updating the probability variation state flag 223i based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with each other. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  The reason for skipping S2009 clear processing is that when the processing from S2004 to S2006 leads to the processing of S2008, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S2101 has been executed (S2101), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S2101: No), the processing proceeds to S2111 without performing the processing of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process concerning S2102 to S2110 that mainly relates to display (effect) and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec) to determine whether 1 msec has elapsed or not. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111, the variation display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 in a short cycle. The process of S2111 is executed in a short cycle, so that it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S2112 is executed in a short cycle. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay. Further, by executing the process of S2113 in a short cycle, settings relating to the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be performed without delay based on the storage state.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S2102) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S2104).

  The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed in accordance with the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring and effect process monitors an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect, and an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. Is a process to set to In this process, when the player's operation of the operation button 300 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the button input monitoring and rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed in time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2110 is completed, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S2111). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S2112. In the process of S2112, the variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the fluctuation effect, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the processing returns to S2101 and the main processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the command determination processing (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for

  In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is It is determined whether it has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main control unit 110 is the first special symbol and the second special It is outputted corresponding to each of the symbols.

  If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is received from the received variation pattern command. Are extracted (S2203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified as the variation pattern type of the special symbol in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each type of special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol) In the case of notifying the start of the variation display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the special symbol to the display control device 114 in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) which is stored in the form (When setting a variation pattern command for display of a special symbol)

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

  Next, the stop type (complete out, reach out, small hit, small hit, large hit K, L, M, N, k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process is terminated. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of stop of the change effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S2204 that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), a display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and the process ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command Of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the variable sphere of the second special symbol is extracted, corresponding to the extracted counter value, provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 The counter value is updated (S2210), and the process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the starting winning combination is performed. Every time there is a special symbol 1 hold of the main control unit 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c by the processing of S2210. It can be adjusted to the values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, respectively.

  Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, if the holding ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  If it is determined in the process of S2209 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). When it is determined in the process of S2212 that a winning information command has been received (S2212: Yes), a winning information command reception process is executed (S2213).

  In the winning information command reception process (S2213), the setting of various flags and the setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol being held, before the fluctuation of the special symbol being held is started (that is, the special symbol being executed before the fluctuation of the special symbol of the object) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol to which the prize information command has been transmitted, and to the player by using the lottery result of one special symbol using the variable display periods of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestive notification can be made, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that a winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), a display notification command is set (S2215), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2214 that the notification command has not been received (S2214: No), the storage device related command (S1414, see FIG. 125) corresponding to the save state or the overhang state is supported. It is determined whether the storage status command to be stored (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216) If it is determined that the storage device related command has been received in S2216 (S2216: Yes), the corresponding display rear image is changed A command is set (S2217), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2216 that no storage device related command has been received (S2216: No), it is next determined whether an operation command has been received (S2218). When it is determined in the process of S2218 that the operation command has been received (the operation of the operation button 300 has been operated (depressed)) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. Do. The operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received (S2220).

  If it is determined in the process of S2220 that a hit related command has been received (S2220: Yes), a hit related process is executed (S2221), and this process ends. The detailed contents of the hit related processing (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2220 that the hit related command has not been received (S2220: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S2222), and this process is ended.

  In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command Are set to transmit the display control device 114 to the display control device 114. For example, the ball entry command set based on the ball entering each ball entry port provided on the game board 13 Is received, the process of accumulating the number of balls is executed for each type of ball entrance into which the ball has entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process (S2221). This hit related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process that is executed when a hit related command is received from the device 110.

  When the hit related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big hit opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined in the process of S2503 that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot middle effect processing is executed ( S2505), this processing ends.

  The jackpot effect process (S2505) is a process for selecting an aspect of round effect (effect of round game R and effect of inter-round interval), and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2503 that the hit related command received this time is not the round number command (S2503: No), it is next determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main control unit 110 when each round at the jackpot is completed. If it is determined in the process of S2506 that the interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of finished rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( S2507), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the big hit ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this process is ended. Also, in the processing of S2508, even when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this processing ends.

  Here, the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505). In this jackpot middle effect processing (S2505), in addition to the jackpot game effect for celebrating the jackpot as the effect to be executed during the jackpot, the player visually recognizes the inside of the storage channel 1231 by operating the operation button 300. The first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) to be enabled and the second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) for changing the state of the interference member 6930 by operating the operation button 300 by the player The effect mode and the presence / absence of the effect are set, and the effects are executed after the continuous emission effect which promotes the continuation of the emission of the ball even after entering the number of balls.

  When the jackpot middle effect process (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect executing flag 223x is on (S2531). If it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2531: No), next, whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the third round of the big hit (S 2532).

  If it is determined in the process of S2532 that the command is the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

  In the process of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534), and if it is judged that the jackpot k is (S2534: Yes), the second operation presentation flag 223wb is turned on. (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not k (S2534: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S2536.

  That is, if it is a big hit k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON, but if it is a big hit other than the big hit k (big hit K, L, M, N) , And only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to on.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the effect round command setting process for display will be described (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the effect round command setting process for display (S2536), first, it is determined whether the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as the information that can be read out from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), this processing is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot effect processing (S2505).

  In the first display mode, as the effect round command for display, in the round game R of the third round, display that there is an operation effect in the next round and that there is an operation effect also in the interval period after the end of the next round (see FIG. In the interval period after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the operation effect is displayed (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

  In addition, the display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot L or M (S2553) ), When it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information readable from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this processing is ended And return to the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505).

  In the second display mode, as the effect round command for display, there is an operation effect in the next round in the round game R of the third round (see FIG. 88 (a)), and the number of stored balls in the fourth round game Information is set to be displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)), and in the interval period after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed. Be done.

  Here, information about the number of stored balls is prepared so as to be displayable, and based on the operation button 300 being operated at the success timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing when the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display unit 717). Control so that the display is performed.

  In addition, the display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2553 that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, it is jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), information that can be read out from the effect temporary storage area 223r The third display mode is set (S2555), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot effect processing (S2505).

  In the third display mode, as the effect round command for display, in the third round of round game R, a character prompting that there is an operation effect in the next round and promotion of the ball directed to the first specified winning opening 1000a is displayed It is set as shown in FIG. 88, and is set so that a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is displayed in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the fourth round.

  In addition, the display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  As described above, the displays of the round game R of the third round and the round game R of the fourth round are collectively set as a presentation effect round command.

  Referring back to FIG. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read out from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and a display effect round command for display effect of the round game R of the third round and the round game R of the fourth round is set (S2537), The effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF (S2539), and this processing is ended.

  Although the details are not illustrated, in the process of S2539, when the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to OFF, the process is skipped. doing. This can prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S 2532 that the command is not the round number command indicating the third round (S 2532: No), it is next determined whether the round number command received this time is the fourth round of the jackpot ( S2540).

  If it is determined in the process of S2540 that the command is the round number command indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round is reached is set. Then, since the display mode of the fourth round is already selected as described above, the present process is ended to avoid selecting another display mode redundantly, and the process returns to the hit related process (S2221).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2540 that the round number command received this time is not the fourth round of the big hit (S2540: No), then the round number command received this time is the fifth round of the big hit It is determined whether or not (S2541).

  When it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect executing flag 223x is set to OFF (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag described later The input flag 223wd is set to off (S2543), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the process proceeds to S2544.

  In the process of S2544, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the sixth round of the jackpot (S2544). If it is determined in the process of S2544 that it is a round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M or k (S2545: Yes), a continuous emission round command for display is set (S2546), the present process is ended, and the process is returned to the hit related process (S2221) .

  The display continuous firing round command is set to be a display including a display (see small area Ds3 in FIG. 92B) prompting to continue without stopping the firing of the ball as the display effect round command. . This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94 (b)) in which over winning can be expected in the round game R of the sixth round. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of over-winning by continuing the firing of the ball according to the display.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2544 that the command is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or the process of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M or k (ie jackpot L, If it is determined that it is N) (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and the process ends.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the round number command of the first, second and fifth rounds and the sixth round when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, N is received, the round number command for display is set by the processing of S2547. Ru. On the other hand, when another round number command is received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. As described above, by changing the display of the round game R according to the jackpot type or the number of rounds, the jackpot game can be progressed without making the player get bored.

  The various display round number commands etc. (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the MPU 221 In the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) to be executed by the H.264, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number commands, display effect round commands, display continuous emission round commands), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect Do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the current round number is determined by the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current number of rounds in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223 h may be omitted.

  Also, although the fourth round display mode is also selected when the third round command is acquired, other configurations may be used, for example, the third round command is acquired The control equivalent to the control performed when being executed may be repeatedly performed even when the fourth round number command is acquired. Also, for example, when the third round number command is acquired, only the display mode is set, and when the fourth round number command is acquired, selection of the display mode is performed. It is good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the next round (three rounds) before the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed is performed. In the round of, the notice effect is performed to notice that the timing effect (operation effect) is to be performed (see FIG. 88A). Then, timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  As such, since the advance notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is known in advance that the effect of causing the player to operate the operation button 300 is executed. it can. Moreover, since the advance notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the problem is that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance effect is executed. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is performed in a predetermined number of rounds during a big hit, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the storage channel 1231. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are stored, timing effect (operation effect) may be performed in the next round. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in which balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 more positively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S2112). This variation display setting process (S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) is a first special symbol based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation display effect. Alternatively, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (complete removal, reach removal, jackpot), processing for setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. The respective processes of S2702 to S2705 are executed.

  More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), and then the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (S2703), and the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding Based on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c), winning information included in the command storage area The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2706.

  In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2706 that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132) In the process of S2206 (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S 2710), and this processing ends.

  Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring processing (S2113) is one of the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 51). Is a process for determining that the

  Here, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage channel 1231 is provided as part of a storage device capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 balls can be stored. It is composed of

  A detection sensor 1240 is disposed at the upstream end of the storage flow channel 1231, and the detection sensor 1240 detects the entry of the ball into the storage flow channel 1231. Further, the sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage flow channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed the first specified winning opening 1000a (that is, whether the passage of the ball has been detected by the detection sensor 1240) (S2801), and the first specified winning opening If the ball has passed through 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

  In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the outlet 1150 (that is, whether the passage of the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870) (S2803). When it is determined that the has passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

  In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is on. It is determined whether it is (S2806). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (ie, off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set on (S2807), and a display intermediate number command is set (S2808) And the process of S2812. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2806 that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2812.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2805 that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2805) S2809). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S2810), a display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. . On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2809 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2812.

  In the process of S2812, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on It is determined (S2813). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (ie, off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set on (S2814), and a display full command is set (S2815) ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2813 that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2813: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2812 that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816) ). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set off (S2817), a display dissatisfaction command is set (S2818), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2816 that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, off) (S2816: No), the process ends.

  As described above, settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed based on detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform effects based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231.

  In the above description, the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 by the number of ball entry based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharge based on the detection result of the specific area detection sensor 4860 and the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 The number of is calculated, but it is not limited to this.

  For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a ball is disposed at an arbitrary position of the storage channel 1231, and the ball is stored downstream based on the passage of a predetermined period in a state where the ball is detected by the sensor. It may be determined that there is. As an example, when a sensor is disposed at a position where the third ball from the downstream stops, the sensor enables three balls including two balls disposed downstream thereof to be stored in the storage channel 1231. Can be determined.

  In addition, even if the open / close plate 1300 is closed, if the detection of the ball by the sensor is continued, it can be suspected that the ball is illegally held, and thus an error notification is made. Can be found early. That is, a sensor that detects a sphere can be used both for detecting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and for detecting fraud.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the lamp output processing (S2103) will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this lamp output processing (S2103). This lamp output processing (S2103) is one of main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command to be transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is a process for

  Here, in the present control example, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, the decorative lamp 227a (described above which is used for effects provided throughout the pachinko machine 10 The inside of the covering front plate 1200 is provided for the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the electric decorative parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) and the storage channel 1231. A transmitting lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for making the transmitting state visible to the player is provided, and other lamps 227z.

  When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether it is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) that is clocked by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. If it is determined in S2901 that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process moves to S2905.

  When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, control is performed so that all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be light (in intensity).

  Here, in the present control example, the covering front plate 1200 is provided so as to make it possible to configure a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage channel 1231 and the operation state of the interference member 6930 in the normal gaming state. There is. As described above, the covering front plate 1200 is configured to be changed from the shielding state to the transmitting state by irradiating a predetermined light (light of the transmitting lamp) from the back surface.

  Then, during the predetermined period (the predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after the game machine is powered on, the transmitting lamp is turned on regardless of the gaming state. Thereby, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, that is, at the timing when a clerk checks the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the covering front plate 1200 can be easily visually identified. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the present time is not within a predetermined period (30 seconds) (after a predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) since the start processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed ( S2901: No) Next, it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 has detected passage of a sphere (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball which has passed the detection sensor 1240 ( The process proceeds to S2903) and S2906.

  In this case, the transmission lamp lighting command in this case is a transmission lamp 227b for a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the sphere to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage flow channel 1231. Is set to light, and while the permeation state is maintained while the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, the permeation state can be released after the sphere is stopped. It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (shielded from the transmission state) on condition that the sphere has passed through the outlet 1150 or that the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 detects the passage of the sphere. It may be configured to change to the state). Thus, the covering front plate 1200 can be maintained in a transparent state throughout the period in which the spheres remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 does not detect passage of the sphere (S2902: No), next, it is determined whether the transmission lamp related command has been set (S2904), and the transmission lamp related command is set. If it is (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command designated in advance is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, when the transmission lamp related command is not set (S2904: No), the process directly shifts to the processing of S2906.

  The setting of the lamp-related command for transmission is mainly performed by the sphere number confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG.

  Referring back to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the process of S2906, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (playing state) (S2906), and this process is ended. Note that the decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current gaming state, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring and rendering process (S2107). In this button input monitoring and effect process (2107), the input whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform corresponding effects. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, setting of an operation button effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated, or various flags based on the content of the operation Settings are made.

  Specifically, first, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period when the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a pressing success period, Set a transparent lamp lighting command to execute lamp lighting based on the determination result, or set a display command to display the ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect) accompanying it (See FIG. 140). Second, in the interval period after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period when the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the pressing success period or the pressing success period It is determined whether or not the depression failure period, and a display command for displaying an effect (a large success effect, a success effect, a failure effect) based on the result is set.

  When the button input monitoring and effect process (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect in-progress flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), next, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S3002) . If it is determined in step S3002 that the jackpot k is determined (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003). If it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not jackpot k (ie, jackpot K, L, M, N) in the processing of S3002 (S3002: No) or in the processing of S3003, it is not during the interval (that is, round game When it is determined that R is in progress (S3003: No), a ball number confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 140, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the ball number confirmation process (S3004). This ball number confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring and effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. is there.

  This ball number confirmation process (S3004) monitors the input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the rendering effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the operation content, or a transmission lamp lighting command for performing lamp lighting is set, The display command for displaying the ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect) accompanying it is set.

  When the ball number check process (S3004) is executed, it is first determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes) Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasping related command have already been set, the present processing ends, and the processing returns to the button input monitoring and rendering processing (S2107).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3101 that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, off) (S3101: No), it is then determined whether the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected. (S3102). When the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the sphere number grasping period (S3103).

  Here, the ball number grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 matches at least a part with the bar display portion 717 in the above-described timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B). In this sphere number grasping period, the length can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the bar display unit 717.

  In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 cm, the operation speed thereof is 20 cm / s, and the width of the bar display portion 717 is 1 cm. In this case, since the sphere number grasping period is the same as the time for the display pointer 719 to move 4 cm, it is 0.2 s.

  If it is determined in the process of S3103 that the ball number period is within (S3103: Yes), a display ball number grasp success command is set (S3104), and a transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set (S3105) And the process of S3111.

  Here, when the command for determining the number of balls for display success is set, a display prompting the user to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (for example, the character display of “notice to the attacker !!”) is the third symbol display While being executed in the device 81, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set such that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least over the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3103, it is determined that the operation is not within the sphere number period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at the timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 deviate (see FIG. 89)) (S3103: No), a display ball number grasping failure command is set (S3106), a transmission lamp lighting command (middle / long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display prompting the grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

  In addition, the transmission lamp lighting commands (middle and long) are set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is turned on at least over the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3102 that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether the limit time (3 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fourth round in this control example) has passed (S3108). If it is determined that the limit time has elapsed (S3108: Yes), the display ball number grasping impossible command is set (S3109), the transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the limit time has not passed (it is less than 3 seconds from the start of the fourth round of round game R), this process is ended, and the button input monitoring and effect process (S2107) Return to).

  Here, when the display ball number grasping impossible command is set, the display prompting the grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed either, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 does not change either (see FIG. 88A).

  In addition, the transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the round game R thereafter.

  As described above, in the present control example, the player can be obtained from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b when the operation button 300 is operated rather than the operation button 300 is operated. It is controlled to increase profits. In addition, when operating the operation button 300, the third symbol display device 81 performs the operation during the ball number grasping period (0.2 seconds in this control example), rather than performing the operation at other timings. It is controlled so that the profit which a player can obtain from the display in and the lighting aspect of lamp | ramp 227b for permeation | transmission becomes large.

  Therefore, the player can improve the operation desire to operate the operation button 300 during the round game R of the fourth round, and can concentrate on the operation. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is about to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the limit time), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. (S3101), only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is validated in the ball number confirmation process (S3004).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully set the timing for operating the operation button 300 while avoiding the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly. In addition, since the player can suppress the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 300 by executing the display (the alerting display) prompting this on the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the operation button 300 is performed. The number of times can be prevented from exceeding the number of times of service at an early stage, and the durability of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  When the process of S3111 ends, the present process ends, and the process returns to the button input monitoring and effect process (S2107).

  Referring back to FIG. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). If it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005: Yes), the display operation button related effect command has already been set, so this process is ended and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) Return to

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3005 that the second input flag 223wd is not on (ie, off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). If the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132), an effect for changing the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (see FIGS. 90 and 91) Means that the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 has been performed (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, this means that the state change of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state is performed.

  If it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set off (S3007), and the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round game R is rounded After subtracting the value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the interval by 0.2, it is determined whether the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by further subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of balls left on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 in the storage channel 1231.

  Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4 when the display pointer 719d is at a position where at least a part of the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band 716b in the timing effect (operation effect). Control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90 (b)). Here, during a period in which the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b, at least a part of the positions coincide with each other, the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band portion 716b. , Can adjust the length.

  In this control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 cm, and the width of the second band portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 cm. Since the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 0.2 seconds, the time required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band 716b is 0.1 seconds. The operating speed of the display pointer 719 is 72 cm / s. After setting in this manner, the display pointer 719 is controlled such that the left end thereof reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds of At the timing, the right end passes the left end of the second band 716b). In this control example, by performing control in this manner, it is possible to limit the period in which the display pointer 719 matches at least a part of the second band portion 716b to 0.1 seconds.

  When it is determined in the process of S3008 that the number of remaining balls is 4 (S3008: Yes), a display operation button large success presentation command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button large success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90 (b)).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3008 that the number of remaining balls is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the reason that the number of remaining balls in S3010 is 5 or more is the operation of the operation button 300 when all of the display pointers 719d are at the positions above and below the first band portion 716a in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91 (a)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too early) before 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period.

  If it is determined in the process of S3010 that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), a display operation button success presentation command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a moderate profit (that is, a profit that is neither the highest nor the lowest) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The display shown is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. If the limit time (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), a display operation button failure presentation command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, the reason that the number of remaining balls in S3010 is 3 or less is the operation of the operation button 300 when all the display pointers 719d are in the upper and lower positions coincident with the third band 716c in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too late) after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period or the case where the operation button 300 is not performed.

  Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (See FIG. 91 (b)).

  As described above, in the present control example, the profit obtained by the player is larger when the operation button 300 is operated than when the operation button 300 is not operated, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 also changes accordingly. To be controlled. Moreover, when operating the operation button 300, the operation is performed at the timing when the number of remaining balls is 4 (from 0.7 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the interval period starts). It is controlled so as to obtain the highest profit and to obtain the medium profit if it is earlier than the timing and the minimum profit if it is later than the timing.

  Therefore, the player can improve the operation desire to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the round game R of the fourth round, and the operation mode of the operation button 300 can be selected.

  That is, when the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, he can obtain a medium profit without danger by pressing the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period (stablely In profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the best profit, any delay in the operation will not give you a moderate profit and you will get the lowest profit. The benefits are unstable and volatile.

  As described above, by making the operation mode of the operation button 300 different, the player can select one that can stably obtain a moderate profit or one that is unstable but can obtain the highest profit. be able to.

  Accordingly, the operation of the operation button 300 can be concentrated. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is about to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the limit time), and while the second input flag 223wd is set to ON, the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) Since the process is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is validated in the button input monitoring and rendering process (S2107).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully set the timing for operating the operation button 300 while avoiding the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly. In addition, since the player can suppress the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 300 by executing the display (the alerting display) prompting this on the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the operation button 300 is performed. The number of times can be prevented from exceeding the number of times of service at an early stage, and the durability of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The visibility inside the storage channel 1231 was changed according to the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. As a result, it is possible to change the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900.

  In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to remove the line of sight from the storage channel 1231 and pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) and participate in the timing effect (operation effect) I configured to play. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game ends while the line of sight of the player is concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

  Furthermore, as a result of the player operating the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect), when the storage channel 1231 is in the transmission state, attention is paid to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is disposed. Configured to prompt you to do so. As a result, it is possible to urge the player's gaze focused on the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) to be transferred to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

  In the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), a circle is displayed so that the number range of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. This makes it easy for the player to predict the internal state of the storage channel 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and makes it easy to determine how many more balls should be fired by the specified number of winnings. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the ball emission mode.

  As timing effects (operation effects) performed by the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), different qualities (in the present control example, regarding the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and payout of award balls) When the timing effect (operation effect) for giving a profit directly linked to the) is continuously executed, the operation timing for giving the highest profit for the player is grasped as the same timing (similar timing) for the player. Configured to be. As a result, even when the transition from the previous timing effect (operation effect) to the later timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, the player can perform the operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  Depending on the jackpot type, in a predetermined round game R (round game R in the sixth round), when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (the 20th operation pattern, the operation scenario 5) and when it is not discharged (the 21st Operation pattern, operation scenario 6). Thereby, it is possible to prescribe the presence or absence of the occurrence of excess winning in the predetermined round game R by the jackpot type.

  By changing the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the fourth and fifth rounds) according to the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period It comprised so that a state (the number of storing balls) might change. Thereby, even if the mode of the state change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth 1000a in the round game R, the interference member 6930, and the specific field 4830 is the same, the progress mode of the round game can be changed.

  A predetermined number of round games R (in the present control example, round game R in the fourth round), a number (in this example of control, nine balls) of balls different from the prescribed number (in this control example, 10) By ending in the state of entering the specific winning a prize opening 1000a, it is configured such that the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (in this control example, the fifth round game R) is maximized. did. This makes it possible to suppress the player from unintentionally digesting the jackpot game.

  In the configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific region 4830 as the first specified winning opening 1000a is in the closed state, while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state, the specified number of first specified winning openings 1000a The ball was configured to be unable to enter the ball. Thereby, the operation mode of the interference member 6930 can define the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specified winning opening 1000a The timing and the timing of the end of the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to define the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R.

  In the open state of the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is configured to be easily retained in a state in which the ball is aligned on the upstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the retained ball is in the state where the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed. It is configured to flow downward toward the first specified winning hole 1000a at changing timing. As a result, it is possible to collect a plurality of staying balls collectively in the first specified winning opening 1000a and make it possible to enter the ball, and it is possible to increase the possibility of occurrence of an over winning.

  In addition, it is possible to define the number of overtime winnings. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excess winnings from becoming excessive and to prevent the game characteristic from being disturbed.

  Furthermore, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the over-winning can be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 disposed downstream of the first specified winning hole 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is predefined based on the jackpot type. Ru. As a result, even if the ball is similarly retained on the upstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where the over winning occurs and the case where the over winning does not occur based on the jackpot type.

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, a benefit obtained by the player in the round game R (for example, the visibility of the inside of the storage channel 1231, the number of discharged balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, or It was comprised so that the presence or absence of generation | occurrence | production of the ball entering into the specific area 4830, and the maximum number of balls in round game R) change. This makes it possible to improve the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect).

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the display device (the third symbol is configured so that the two types of profits that the player can obtain seesaw, and the player can grasp the aspect of the profits that the player can obtain It comprised so that it might display on the display apparatus 81). As a result, the player who visually recognizes the display on the display device can obtain the profit corresponding to the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit desired to be obtained preferentially. Because of this, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in timing presentation (operation presentation).

  Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, with reference to FIG. 141, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 141, for the special symbol 1, the “big hit P” is defined in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 49”. This "big hit P" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit P" is 50, so "big hit P" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 50% (50/100).

  In this "big hit P", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, control is performed so that at least one jackpot is determined before shifting to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of the expected ball (expected ball) that the player can acquire from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of "50 to 99", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with "big hit Q". This "big hit Q" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit Q" is 50, so "big hit Q" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 50% (50/100).

  In this "big hit Q", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit m" is defined in association with the range (entire range) of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99". This "big hit m" is a big hit of 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit m" is 100, so "big hit m" is determined when it becomes big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The proportion is 100%.

  In this "big hit m", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, control is performed so that at least one jackpot is determined before shifting to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of the expected ball (expected ball) that the player can acquire from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds for the jackpot game, but the bonus (high probability state of the normal symbol or high probability state of the special symbol) given after the big hit ends is the special symbol 2 Is specified to be advantageous (it becomes easy to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the game proceeds to a high probability state in which the player who is more likely to win the game by winning the special symbol 2 wins against the game winning by the lottery of the special symbol 1. The configuration is easier. Therefore, once the continuous shooting mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the lottery of special symbol 2 is performed by entering the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed Becomes easy to be executed, and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, in the sixth round game R, control of different operation patterns corresponding to the jackpot type is described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described above in the ninth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing time change of the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 in the twenty-second operation pattern, and FIG. 142 (b) is an opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing in the twenty-third operation pattern. FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the twenty-fourth operation pattern.

  In this control example, in the sixth round game R of the jackpot P, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the twenty-second operation pattern, and in the sixth round game R of the jackpot Q, the twenty-third The opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are driven in the operation pattern, and the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are driven in the twenty-fourth operation pattern in the sixth round round game R with a big hit m.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the twenty-second operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulation member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and the start of the round game R is started. After the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example), the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state.

  In addition, the interference member 6930 returns to the evacuation state at the end of the round game R (skipped when the round game R ends before the standby time TK). Here, in the round game R, passage of a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls is detected at the first specified winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example) It ends when 30 seconds have passed.

  In the round game R of the sixth round of the jackpot P in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are drive-controlled in the twenty-second operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) before the waiting time TK elapses. When the ball of the ball enters the first specified winning combination port 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

  On the other hand, when the specified number of balls does not enter the first specified winning hole 1000 a before the waiting time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, and ten balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231. Since it lose | eliminates, it becomes impossible to enter the ball | bowl of the defined number into the 1st specific winning a prize mouth 1000a, and the time which round game R requires takes the maximum value (30 seconds) of 1st operation time T1.

  The waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) does not stop the firing of the ball in the interval between the rounds from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, even after the start of the round game R of the sixth round By continuing the firing, the predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls is set as a sufficiently reachable period for the first specified winning opening 1000a. In the present control example, the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  On the other hand, for example, when the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds from the end of the fifth round game R and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the fired ball From the balance with the time (about 4.0 seconds) to reach the first specified winning a prize opening 1000a, a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls is determined by the elapse of the waiting time TK. It can not pass 1000a.

  Therefore, the sixth round game R when the ball is stopped firing at the interval between the rounds immediately before the sixth round game R is compared with the case where the ball continues to be fired at the interval between the rounds. Can be configured to increase the time required for As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode of stopping the firing of the ball in the inter-round interval.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the twenty-third operation pattern, while the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), before the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, opens and closes on one side). That is, control for canceling driving (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is performed a plurality of times.

  In addition, it is the same as the twenty-second operation pattern that the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state after the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R .

  According to this operation pattern, all the balls on the opening and closing plate 8300 do not enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, but some of the balls flow downward to the auxiliary entrance hole 9111. It is possible to make it difficult for the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls to pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a before the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses rather than the operation pattern. .

  Therefore, with high probability, it is possible to set the round game R of the sixth round for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the twenty-second operation pattern, since it is possible to receive the payout of the winning balls by entering the auxiliary entrance 9111, the number of payout balls is more than that of the twenty-third operation pattern. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, while the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), before and after the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, opens and closes on one side). That is, control for canceling driving (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is performed a plurality of times.

  It is to be noted that, after the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state is the twenty-second and twenty-third operation patterns. It is similar to the operation pattern.

  In this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening and closing plate 8300 enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, but some of the balls flow downward to the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similar to the twenty-third operation pattern, it is possible to lower the probability that the round game R ends when the specified number (10 in this control example) of the balls passes the first specified winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, with high probability, it is possible to set the round game R of the sixth round for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the twenty-third operation pattern, since the ball can be made to enter the auxiliary entrance port 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, in a longer period than the twenty-third operation pattern. Over time, it is possible to generate the payout of the winning balls resulting from the entry into the auxiliary entrance 9111. Therefore, it is possible to generate more award balls as compared with the twenty-third operation pattern.

  In this operation pattern, even after the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, control is performed such that one-side opening / closing occurs. That is, even after the storage channel 1231 is filled with the spheres (full) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-side opening / closing still occurs, so placement of the spheres The ball can be easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at one side opening / closing time as compared with the case where is not specified.

  Next, display in the round game R of the sixth round will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b). FIG. 143 (a) and FIG. 143 (b) are schematic diagrams which show an example of the display content alert | reported that 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performing round game R of the 6th round.

  In FIG. 143 (a), an example of the display of the round game R in the sixth round when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", or the sixth round game in the case of "big hit m" The schematic diagram which showed an example of the display before progress of standby time TK in R is illustrated, and in FIG. 143 (b), the standby time TK in the round game R in the 6th round in the case of jackpot type "big hit m" The schematic diagram which showed an example of the display after progress is shown in figure.

  That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is "big hit" In the case of “m”, after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained, the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) after the waiting time TK elapses. A display command is set such that the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the number-of-rounds display portion 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is in the round game R of the sixth round. A sub-round display portion 714b is displayed at the upper left of the screen in a mode, and below the number-of-rounds display portion 714 to indicate that it is a period in which additional prize balls can be expected in the round game R.

  In FIG. 143 (a), the number-of-rounds display portion 714 is light-emitting (brightly displayed), while the sub-round display portion 714b is unlit (displayed darkly), and in FIG. 143 (b), the number of rounds is displayed reversely. While the portion 714 is turned off (displayed dark), the sub-round display portion 714b is displayed light (displayed brightly).

  That is, in this control example, the round game R is executed by the display of the mode shown in FIG. 143 (a) in the period in which the payout of the prize ball accompanying the entry to the first specified winning combination 1000a is main. In addition to informing the player that the payout of the winning balls accompanying the entry into the first specified winning opening 1000a can not be expected after the elapse of the waiting time TK, but due to the entry into the auxiliary entry slot 9111 It is possible to make the player recognize that the period in which the payout of the winning balls can be expected is continued.

  Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the substantial profit that the player can obtain by entering the ball. That is, as described above, the payout of the winning balls due to the entry of one ball into the auxiliary entry port 9111 is three as described above, which is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specified winning hole 1000a. It is. This change in the number of winning balls with respect to the number of balls entered can be easily recognized by the player.

  In addition, the ball flows to the auxiliary entry port 9111 only when the ball is disposed between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 within a short time that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened, Whenever the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened, the ball does not necessarily flow to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111.

  Therefore, the ball entering frequency of the ball into the auxiliary entrance port 9111 during the light emission display (bright display) of the sub-round display unit 714b is the light emission display (bright display) of the round number display unit 714. This is lower than the ball entering frequency to the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  As described above, according to the present control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the benefit obtained by the player (the change of the winning balls paid out by entering one ball, the ball, the ball Can be notified at the same time that a change has occurred in the

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 143 (b), the character of “+ chance” is displayed as the above-described over winning possibility increase notification mode 721. In this control example, this character “+ chance” may cause the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by firing a ball, and the ball may be awarded by entering the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111. In response to being able to receive a payout of

  As described above, in this control example, control is performed to pay out additional winning balls due to the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 in the round game R. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls (150 in this control example) to be paid out to the player as the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specified winning opening 1000a. More than the number of prize balls (excess balls) can be paid out.

  In particular, in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, there is a high possibility of entering the auxiliary entrance port 9111 even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, and compared to the other twenty-second and twenty-third operation patterns, The number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the drive mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

  That is, in the twenty-second operation pattern to the twenty-fourth operation pattern in this control example, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player, while keeping the driving mode of the interference member 6930 the same.

  In addition, the maximum number of times of entering the auxiliary entry port 9111 corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 performs the opening / closing operation in the round game R. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

  According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the inter-round interval period, the time required for the next round game R is likely to be longer when stopping the firing of the ball than when the firing of the ball is continued in the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the inter-round interval period.

  The number of award balls to be paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed by the driving mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (that is, depending on whether the above-mentioned "one side opening / closing" occurs). . In other words, whether the ball reaching the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 passes through the first specified winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary entrance hole 9111 downstream thereof, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member It can be switched according to the driving mode of 8340.

  Thus, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and the timing at which the ball is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be divided. Therefore, for example, during the round game R, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the time. In this case, the balls having reached the movable object to be circulated are distributed in the order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the reached balls are guided to the winning opening (a winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary entrance 9111). Thus, the power of attention in the vicinity of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved.

  That is, the ball is fired at a timing when the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111, and the ball is stopped at other timings, whereby the number of fired balls relative to the number of paid-out balls can be reduced.

  On the other hand, it was configured to vary the timing at which the ball should be fired to aim for winning in the auxiliary entrance 9111 based on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to request the player to change the firing mode of the ball for each big hit game, so it is easy to prevent the player from playing the big hit game casually. In addition, making it hard to grasp the jackpot type can prevent the occurrence of the capture method in advance, and a certain player (experienced player) receives an excessive profit (for example, the number of balls paid out rather than the number of fired balls). Can be prevented from occurring.

  The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is disposed at a position where the ball is not guided (it is difficult to be guided) when the opening / closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excitation). As a result, the player's concentration on the game can be improved as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are not driven.

  In the round game R, the player can easily grasp the change in the expected value of the number of balls paid out with respect to the number of balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (the third symbol display device 81) So configured. In this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to arbitrarily select whether to continue or stop the ball from the display of the display device while the same round game R continues.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148, a third control example will be described. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening and closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening and closing plate In addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

  This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when it becomes a small hit based on the entry of the gaming ball to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is

  The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the first hit random number table 202a indicates whether the value of the first hit random number counter C3 acquired by the game ball entering the first entrance 64 is a big hit or not. It is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit or not, and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the first winning random number counter C3 is obtained. It is a table in which a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the purpose is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202 a 1 is determined to be a random value in the first special symbol lottery based on entering the first entrance 64 into a random number. It is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if “0”, it is determined that a big hit is made. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 319", it is determined that the value is out.

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), is a random value (determination value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the jackpot has occurred. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “1 to 318”, and if “1 to 318”, it is determined that the small hit is made. In addition, when it is determined that "319", it is determined that it is out.

  Thus, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In the first random number counter C3, at the time of the drawing of the first special symbol based on entering the first entrance 64, the random number for the first special symbol is 1 random number, and the total number of random numbers is Among 320, since the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 1, the probability to be a jackpot of the first special symbol is "1/320". In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be small per unit is 3, the probability to be a small per unit of the first special symbol is "3/320".

  On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on entering the second winning opening 640, the random number that will be the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, while the total number of random numbers is 320, the jackpot and Since the total number of random number values is 1, the probability of becoming a jackpot of the second special symbol is "1/320". In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be small hits is 318, the probability to be small hits of the second special symbol is "318/320".

  In the same manner as each embodiment or each control example described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol is hit, the variation display on the second symbol display device is ended, and then the stop symbol (the second symbol) is "○". The symbol is lit and displayed, and the motor-operated accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  The motorized accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds in the middle of the hour, but only 0.2 seconds in the middle of the hour. Therefore, even when the time is not short, even if the value of the second random number counter C5 is a hit, it is difficult to win the game ball to the second winning opening 640. In this way, it is possible to suppress the game in which the player attempts to enter the second winning opening 640 despite the fact that the player is not shorting time (does not show the big hit with time reduction).

  FIG. 146 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored as described above, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 is each It is specified in association with the jackpot type and the type of winning opening that has become the lottery trigger for the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning combination is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49" A jackpot R is associated with and defined (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

  When the jackpot R is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99", the jackpot S is defined in association with it (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

  When the jackpot S is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is ended becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls, but can not obtain a time-saving benefit after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot based on the drawing of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), it is possible to make the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game time-saving state with a probability of 50%. During the short hours, you will aim to gain more jackpots by the small hit game described later.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is a big hit in the range of "0 to 9" n is associated and specified (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). The jackpot n gives the player the same benefit as the jackpot R described above.

  That is, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "10 to 99", the jackpot p is associated and defined (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). While the jackpot p gives the player the same prize ball payout as the jackpot n described above, a difference is made in the number of times of variation of the time-saving game.

  That is, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the time saving state (four times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is absorbed four times. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot that occurs in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640) shifts to the time saving state with the establishment of 100%. Therefore, the possibility of acquiring the next jackpot in a short time after the end of the jackpot game is increased, as compared with the case where the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is achieved.

  As mentioned above, during the short time of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electrically operated part 640a when the normal symbol is hit It is set to be longer (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make the ball enter the second winning opening 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. And if it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2, since it will be in a time-saving state after the big hit ends, it will be easier to obtain the big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 more.

  Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the special symbol which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and tends to be a big hit G when becoming a big hit is likely to be repeated. It becomes easy to acquire a lot of prize balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the present control example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are related, and the sphere is the specific area 4830 (in the present control example, the next big hit is due to the passing of the balls. Although it is determined whether or not to pass through the area to be determined (see FIG. 51), the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

  The small hitting type selection table 202g is a small hitting based on the first entrance 64, a special symbol 1 small hitting selection table 202g1 for selecting a small hitting type, and a small hitting based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 147 (b), when the small hitting based on the first entrance 64, the value of the small hitting type counter C6 is “0 to 1”, the small hitting A is selected, “2 to 99 In the case of "", small hit B is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), when the small winnings based on the second winning opening 640, the small hitting A is selected if the value of the first type counter C6 is "0 to 9", "10 In the case of ̃99 ”, the small hitting B is selected.

  In this control example, the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hitting type (see FIG. 148). Although the details will be described later, the small hitting A is a small hitting provided with a high probability of a big hitting by passing the gaming ball through the specific area 4830, and the small hitting B is a small hitting with a high probability of not giving a big hit. .

  Further, in the present control example, the jackpot provided after the small jack A and the small jack B is configured to be the jackpot G (16R time short-lived jackpot).

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the classification of the jackpot given after that is determined according to the classification of the small hitting, it is a case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hitting as the other specification. Also, determine the type of jackpot by the jackpot selection table (acquire the jackpot right only), and then execute the jackpot that acquired the right just before the gaming ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the small jackpot game thereafter May be By doing this, it is possible for the player to select the small hit that passes the specific area 4830, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 148 shows a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 at the small hitting A, and a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 (see FIG. 51) at the small hitting B It is. The operation of the distribution device 4850 is the same for small hits A and small hits B.

  In FIG. 148, the deviation of the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the timing of driving of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and it is illustrated as starting operation at the same point.

  First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept open over 1.0 seconds from the start of the small hit, and when 1.0 seconds elapses, the drive of the solenoid 1510 ( Excitation is canceled. 0.2 seconds after the release of the excitation, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, and the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

  Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In small hit B, solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) to keep open / close plate 1300 open for 1.8 seconds from the start of small hit, and when 1.8 seconds elapses, drive (energized) solenoid 1510 ) Is released.

  Thus, while the small hitting game time itself is the same (1.8 seconds), the small hitting A and the small hitting B differ in whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hitting game. .

  In this control example, when the small hitting game is started immediately after the end of the small hitting game, that is, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol remains and the small hitting game occurs continuously, between the small hitting games The period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to 0.4 seconds at the minimum. Therefore, in the above-mentioned mode, when small hitting games occur continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), discharge is performed from the discharge port 1150 between small hitting games The number of balls to be played is limited to two. Therefore, the ball which entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small hit game may remain in the storage channel 1231 even during the next small hit game.

  The operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The sorting device 4850 maintains the sorting operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the solenoid 1510 was driven (excited) at the start of the small hitting game, and 2.0 seconds have elapsed. The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. In addition, the sorting device 4850 moves the sorting operation member 4851 to the open position for 3.2 seconds after 3.2 seconds have passed since the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) at the start of the small hitting game. When 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in such a manner as to return the distribution operation member 4851 to the closed position again.

  That is, the distribution operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for one small hit game. The first movement corresponds to one second (corresponding to the time taken for the ball passing through the discharge port 1150 to reach the distribution operation member 4851) after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed in the small hitting A. .

  From this, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven with the small hitting A, when the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 in advance, the ball is passed to the specific area 4830 when the first distribution operation member 4851 is moved. It can be done. On the other hand, since the probability that the small hitting A occurs is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to frequently cause passing the sphere to the specific area 4830 at this timing.

  The second movement of the distribution operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hitting game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball that has passed the discharge port 1150 passes the distribution operation member 4851) Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is a mode in which the ball is not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small hitting game is two.

  That is, according to this control example, when only the small hitting B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the ball does not pass the specific area 4830 unless the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. It can be configured as follows.

  Thereby, when only the small hitting B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the timing when the ball passes the specific area 4830 can be limited when the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, it is possible to obtain a paid-out award ball collected in the time-saving game by the award ball paid out by the game in which the ball is continuously put into the second entrance 640 so that the number of held balls does not become zero.

  On the other hand, while it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 while continuing to put the ball in the second entrance 640, in order to acquire the next jackpot (to pass the ball to the specific area 4830) , It is necessary for the player to create a timing to set the number of holding balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time saving game. In this way, in the time saving game, if the number of remaining short times decreases, it is possible to configure the timing for setting the number of holding balls to 0 frequently so that the profit obtained by the player can be increased.

  In addition, according to the setting of the movement of the 2nd time, if the number of balls discharged | emitted from the storage flow path 123 is three, although a ball | bowl passes through the specific area | region 4830, it is not restricted to this. That is, the fourth ball may be set in a case where the number of discharged pieces is larger than the number (two pieces) discharged in the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hitting game, for example, the fourth ball is the specific area 4830 The second movement may be set at the passing timing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hitting game). In addition, the shortest interval for small hitting games may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of discharged pieces is one), and in this case, the second movement is more than the number of pieces discharged (one). It may be set, for example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hitting game).

  In addition, since the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is about 1, 2 on average in one small hitting game, the storage channel 1231 is performed before the small hitting game in which the number of holding balls becomes 0. By storing the ball on the surface, it is possible to increase the possibility of the ball passing through the specific area 4830. Therefore, it is possible to select the timing for setting the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 to 0 by the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 which is increased / decreased each time a small hit game. Thereby, the power of attention to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In the present control example, the longer the duration of the time saving game, the more the award winning balls due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. Here, by setting the number of winning balls in the second entrance 640, it is possible to allow the player to select whether to shorten or lengthen the time saving game period.

  For example, if the number of winning balls in the second entrance 640 is one, there is no profit (the number of paid-out balls) that the player can obtain by subtraction of the number of firings (0). Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to shorten the time-saving game period.

  On the other hand, if the number of winning balls in the second entrance 640 is two or more (for example, five), there is a benefit (the number of winning balls) which the player can obtain by subtraction of the number of firings (one). that's all). Therefore, it may be advantageous for the player to reduce the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and extend the time saving game period.

  In this control example, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 for one small hitting game is set to 1.8 seconds from the opening to the closing of the first opening, so to the first specified winning opening 1000a in one small hitting game. The number of balls entered is 3 or 4 but it is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hitting game with an opening pattern such that the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) are obtained during one small hitting game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specified winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, the ball is the lower end of the opening and closing plate 1300 when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed even if the opening time of the opening and closing plate 1300 is short. It is possible to extend the time until it falls downward more than that, and to guide the ball to the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  In this control example, since the ball is controlled to be able to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the period from opening to closing is a small hitting game (small hitting A, small hitting B) of 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0 When repeated at intervals of 4 seconds, the number of small hitting games against the number of shootable balls is 11 balls / 3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be fired during 3 small hit games.

  Here, in order to generate a small hit game, it is necessary to cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so when the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 is 0, such as at the time of right strike start In order to generate three small hitting games, it is necessary to cause three balls to enter the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, the remaining eight balls are deviated from the second entrance ball port 640 and headed to the first specified winning hole 1000a. In three small hits, for example, when all small hits are the above-mentioned small hits B, six balls are discharged by passing three small hits. Therefore, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231 after three small hitting games. Therefore, the expected number of balls additionally remaining in the storage channel 1231 when firing the balls continuously is two for three small hit games.

  In addition, the ball which has passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game concerned is not discharged if it does not reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specified winning hole 1000a, and even if it is considered that opening in a small hitting game is completed in 1.8 seconds, the corresponding small hitting game is the first It may occur that the opening of the next small hitting game is started before the ball which has passed through the specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, when the balls start to be stored in the storage channel 1231 (when the number is 0, it is the first time), a small hit game in which the number is not 0 (for example, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231) The balls can be made more likely to remain in the storage channel 1231 as compared to when the balls are additionally increased in the small hit game to be executed and the continuation time).

  On the other hand, if the number of holding balls in the second entrance 640 is not zero, the number of remaining holding balls and the number of remaining balls in the second entrance 640 are new. If the number of balls having entered the second entrance 640 exceeds three, three small hitting games can be executed at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls heading to the first specified winning hole 1000a during the three small hitting games is eight or more, and more balls can be directed to the storage channel 1231, and for the small hitting three times It is possible to additionally leave more than two spheres in the reservoir channel 1231.

  As described above, in this control example, the small hit game generated based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and then as many balls as possible are selected. (1) It is controlled that the player who enters the specified winning combination port 1000a and leaves the ball in the storage channel 1231 is profitable for the player. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 does not contribute to the occurrence of the small hitting game (when the number of holding balls is full (4 in this control example)), the ball in the second ball entrance 640 Entering the ball is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of the number of winning balls and the viewpoint of increasing the number of balls additionally left in the storage channel 1231 (to the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game) May be disadvantageous to the player).

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the power of attention to the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game.

  Here, in the present control example, when aiming to pass the sphere to the specific region 4830, more than two spheres are stored at the stage where the number of holding balls of the second entrance 640 becomes zero. It needs to be stored in the channel 1231. That is, on the basis of (when looking at) the number of balls more than twice the number of holding balls of the second entrance 640, if the number of holding balls is not reduced, the balls flow into the specific region 4830 It is configured to be difficult to do. Thereby, in addition to the power of attention to the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2, the power of attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In this control example, the game area adjustment (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which the ball easily passes through the normal ball entry port 67 during the right-handed game and a large number of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 Even in the adjustment where it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entry ball opening 640 and many balls easily face the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is possible to reduce the loss given to the player.

  That is, for example, in the case of adjustment in which many balls enter the second ball entry port 640 during right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231 and generation of small hitting game B continues. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, since the ball can pass to the specific area 4830 if the small hitting game A selected in the establishment of 10% is generated, the ball enters the specific area 4830 It is possible to aim for many prize balls to be paid out by causing many balls to enter the second entrance 640 in the meantime.

  In addition, for example, when it is adjusted that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game and it is easy for many balls to face the first specified winning opening 1000a, the ball is present at the second entrance 640. Because it is difficult to enter, it is possible to enter most of the right-handed gaming balls into the storage channel 1231, and additionally, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640 is zero. Because it is easy to maintain it, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 early, it is possible to end the short time game early, and a period in which a loss occurs due to the ball being difficult to enter the second entrance 640 (that is, Period) can be shortened.

  In this control example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the first specified winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hitting game, it is preferable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hit game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, a second specified winning opening 2255a different from the first specified winning opening 1000a may be set as a winning opening used in the jackpot game.

  In this case, the storage channel 1231 may not necessarily be joined, and for example, the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a may constitute an independent storage channel, The second specified winning hole 2255a may not constitute the storage channel (is discharged to the ball discharge channel).

  Note that this control example exemplifies one means of the technical idea relating to a gaming machine that “a player can select (aim to hit) the timing at which a ball is made to flow into the specific area 4830”, and other means for the same purpose May be used.

  For example, when the small hit (small hit A in this control example) for driving (exciting) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode in which the ball easily flows into (flows into) the specific area 4830, the ball hardly flows into the specific area 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in this control example) for driving (excitation) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode (in which it does not flow) is selected according to the small hit type By controlling the notification to the user, and controlling the ball fired after grasping the contents of the notification to include the case where it can pass the specific area 4830, the timing at which the ball flows into the specific area 4830 is a game It may be possible for the person to make a choice. According to this, it is possible to allow "a game mode of avoiding the ball entering the specific area 4830 by not firing the ball at a predetermined timing".

  In addition, the means of alerting | reporting is not limited at all. For example, notification may be made by the display of the third symbol display device 81, or may be made by voice.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage channel 1231 is configured as a channel extending on a flat surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured such that the right side of the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-rear direction. That is, the detection sensor 1240 may extend in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 and extend in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and may be configured as a flow path extending in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150 again.

  The flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a flow path shape in which the extending direction is switched from the left and right to the front and back (rotated by 90 degrees on the vertical axis) by using the shape of the storage flow path 1231. It is formed by uniting two substantially symmetrical light transmitting two members having a recess forming one side surface of the flow path on the opposite side from the left and right.

  In the storage channel 1231 including the channel extending in the front and back direction, the direction of the channel is different from that of the above embodiment, but the number of balls that can be stored downstream of the first specified winning hole 1000a is a prescribed number (in this embodiment, 10). Are designed to be That is, also in the present embodiment, the same game characteristics as the game characteristics described in each of the above embodiments can be configured.

  Also for the storage channel 1231 including a channel extending in the front and back direction, the solenoid 6910 enters the channel in a driven (excited) state, and an overhanging state for restricting the flow of balls in the channel; In the state where the drive (excitation) is released, an interference member is disposed which is retractable from the flow path and switchable to a retracted state which allows the flow of the ball in the flow path.

  Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow passage is the same as that of the sixth embodiment. That is, among the balls stored on the downstream side of the first specified winning hole 1000a, a flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second ball counted from the lowermost ball restricted to flow down by the restriction member 1600 It enters inside and is arranged to be able to regulate the flow-down of the third ball, and in the overhanging state of the interference member, seven pieces at the upstream side of the interference member and at the downstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a Spheres can be stored.

  The flow path extending in the back and forth direction is formed such that the third and subsequent balls are stored behind the second ball, counting from the lowermost ball restricted from flowing downward by the restriction member 1600. Therefore, when the second sphere is disposed, the sphere is disposed on the front side of the interference member, so the interference member is hidden by the sphere. That is, the state of the interference member can be made difficult to grasp by the ball.

  Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the whole sphere can not be seen visually, and the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the sighting object is because the flow path itself extends to the back side. When the reservoir channel 1231 includes a channel extending back and forth due to a reason such as being far away, a state in which ten spheres are stored in the reservoir channel 1231 by retracting the interference member, and the interference member And the state in which nine spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 are difficult to grasp from the arrangement of the spheres. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even if the first variable winning device 1000 is directly viewed.

  In the case where such a feature is provided, for example, the number of balls entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a may be displayed by the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the person who looks at the third symbol display device 81 grasps the number of balls entering the first specified winning hole 1000a, rather than visually recognizing the storage channel 1231 having poor identifiability of the number of stored balls. Since it can be configured to be easy, the power of attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved relative to the power of attention to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be easily removed from the first variable winning device 1000.

  Although the case where the number of the balls discharged | emitted from the storage flow path 1231 was controlled by the working length of the control member 1600 was demonstrated in said each embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port restricting member for opening and closing the second discharge port can be provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port You may In this case, even if the operating length of the second discharge port restricting member is not strictly controlled, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged. Therefore, the number of discharged balls can be changed between when the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and when the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, when the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be simultaneously opened, it is possible to shorten the time required to discharge the ball all over the ball and to shorten the interval.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is rotated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is moved up and down, the ball can be guided to the first specified winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the upper position, and when it is arranged at the lower position, the ball is arranged from the first specified winning opening 1000a. You may make a difference. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the ball between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200 when raising the ball, the raising operation of the ball can be made smoother.

  Although the above-mentioned each embodiment explained the case where the ball stored by storage channel 1231 was discharged from single outlet 1710, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, an additional outlet may be disposed at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed by discharging from the discharge port 1710 or discharging from the additional discharge port. That is, it becomes difficult to discharge the ball clogged to the side of the discharge port 1710 from the additional discharge port. Further, by discharging both of the discharge ports simultaneously, the ball discharge efficiency can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right of transition to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of the balls discharged, regardless of the discharge speed (interval) of the balls.

  Although the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation may be started simultaneously. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  Although each said embodiment demonstrated the case where the resistance of the ball | bowl's ball entry changes, by whether the space | interval which a ball | bowl will enter into the storage flow path 1231 (whether the storage flow path 1231 is full). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, depending on whether or not the number of balls stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is close to the full state, a predetermined ball entering the storage flow channel 1231 may be decelerated. In this case, even when the specified number (count number) of the round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage flow channel 1231, it is possible to suppress winnings equal to or more than the specified number. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while reducing the number of winnings of the prescribed number or more, as compared with the case of decelerating the ball regardless of the stored number. In addition, you may accelerate not only deceleration. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than the specified number of winnings.

  Although each said embodiment demonstrated the case where ball | bowl is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the ball entering the 1st specified winning a prize mouth 1000a is controlled by the storage ball, it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electric operated member may be provided that operates by a predetermined amount each time a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and that makes it easy to restrict the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the inter-round interval can be shortened as compared with the case where the storage balls are discharged at one time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the specified number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be possible to store a specified number of +1 balls. In this case, it is possible to limit the number of balls passing the specified first special winning opening 1000a beyond the specified number to one per round game R. In this case, the round in which the 11th ball easily passes and the round in which the 11th ball is restricted may be switched in each round.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball can not be held at the front position of the first specified winning opening 1000a (it falls), so there are no two balls winning simultaneously However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be held only for one ball, and may have a possibility of passing through the first specified winning opening 1000a until the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Also, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 has a plurality of inlets and a single outlet, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the channels may branch off toward the outlet on the way. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can be left in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the balls are discharged from.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the storable number of balls when entering from the first specified winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed number of winnings (count number) in the round game R of the big hit game, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of storable balls when entering a ball from the first specified winning opening 1000a is less than the prescribed number of winnings (count number) in the round game R, and the number of storable balls when entering the second specified winning hole 2255a May be equal to or more than the predetermined winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure the game characteristic that the round time is inevitably extended when entering the ball from the first specified winning hole 1000a while discharging the ball all the time at the interval between rounds.

  Although the said 3rd Embodiment demonstrated the case where the ball which flowed down below the opening / closing plate 1300 was lifted above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300 again, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the ball may be lifted by a fixed action movable character capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the movement of the ball can entertain the player.

  Although the case where the delay member (falling delay plate 3250) is disposed below the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described in the third embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening and closing plate 1300 may be formed to slide in a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be disposed above the opening and closing board 1300. The ball may not be in contact with the rib when the sliding plate 1300 is in the open state, and the ball may be in contact with the rib in the closed state. Thereby, also at the upper side of the opening and closing plate 1300, the flow-down speed of the ball can be changed to delay the flow-down.

  In addition, as a method which does not contact | abut a ball | bowl with a rib, bringing a ball | bowl back and forth either side by inclination of the front-back direction, and arranging a rib on the opposite side is mentioned.

  In the third embodiment described above, the falling of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be disposed on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be formed of a flow path curved through the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300. In this case, the ball passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300 so that the ball once it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize by the opening and closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. Flow can be used to produce effects, and since the area to delay the ball is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round is started even when the interval is long Enough sections can be secured.

  The inlet is preferably below the opening and closing plate 1300, and the outlet is preferably above the opening and closing plate 1300. In addition, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the inlet be narrowed by a part of the opening and closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of the ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening and closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

  In the third embodiment described above, the ball is decelerated by moving the opposing surface 3251a of the extending plate portion 3251 further from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to be gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravity acceleration in the direction of flow of the ball decreases, and the ball can be decelerated.

  Also, the change in acceleration and deceleration may be reversed. In the case where the ball accelerates as it goes downstream, it is possible to prevent the formation of an array on the drop delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment described above, the drop delay plate 3250 is disposed below the opening and closing plate 1300, so that only the ball passing through the opening and closing plate 1300 is in contact with the opening and closing plate 1300. It is not limited to For example, in the open / closed state, the ball enters the pocket in which the winning opening is disposed, and in the closed state the ball rolls on the upper surface of the open / close plate. A rib may be disposed that can be abutted when reaching the downstream side on the plate. A ball that enters the pocket as it is does not abut the rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, the ball can be prevented from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted at the drop position Pf3 and the ball is dropped vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, a through hole is formed through which the ball passing the detection sensor 1240 can pass, and the ball is discharged from the through hole You may In this case, the ball can be disposed above the opening / closing plate 1300 even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has fallen just before the detection sensor 1240 and landed on the fall delay plate 3250 is However, the ball that has dropped to the second drop delay plate 7260 due to a similar drop flows once to the left (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then drops to the drop delay plate 3250 again. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the ball is delayed below the opening and closing plate 1300 and the path in which the ball flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the flow path in which the balls entered from the second entrance 640 and the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down merges into the storage flow path 1231 and the number of balls is related to each other However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, balls may be made to flow into the storage channel 1231 by automatic supply. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the case is described in which the benefit obtained by the player decreases as the number of lottery times until the big hit is increased in the high probability state, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the larger the number of lottery times until the jackpot is won, the more profit the player can obtain. In this case, the jackpot obtained in a short time is less profitable, and since it takes a long time to increase the jackpot obtained, the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be equalized.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is changed has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an operation member may be provided that operates in the storage flow channel 1231 in accordance with the number of stored products and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow channel 1231. In this case, since the operation member moves according to the number of storages regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort because the operation timing of the operation member is different from normal.

  Although the said 6th Embodiment demonstrated the case where the number of balls which can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes, when the interference member 6930 forms a projecting state, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the portion forming the storage channel 1231 (especially, the U-shaped portion) is moved in the extending direction (left and right direction) of the channel to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231 It is good. In this case, even if the player moves in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether the player has moved or not because of the small amount of movement. Therefore, it is possible to form a game that the player can notice the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 It can be improved.

  The movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the possibility of movement may be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, the interference member 6930 protrudes in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the reservoir channel 1231 can be seven. Also, the pattern for forming the overhanging state after the spheres are stored and the pattern for forming the overhanging state before the balls start to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between the round in which the stored number is 7 and the round in which the stored number is 9 by a single member.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changeable to the overhanging state while discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing of discharging the ball and the timing of bringing the interference member 6930 into the overhanging state, it is possible to form the modes of discharging the ball in a plurality of patterns.

  In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is viewed supplementarily, but it is not limited thereto. For example, only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may open and close, and the opening and closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping a ball from vertically above, so as to prevent the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 from passing to the left. In this case, a limited number of overruns can be permitted based on the alignment pattern.

  In addition, for example, for each round game R, the opening and closing mode of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may be switched depending on whether it is a long time opening or a short opening repeatedly. In this case, at the end of the round game R, whether it is detected and closed by the detection sensor 1240 or closed as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a specified number of balls are balls that have passed the detection sensor 1240 while closing. It is possible to switch whether round game R ends and the next opening does not occur by being detected. In this case, since the possibility of occurrence of overruns is lower in the case of repeated short openings compared to the case of long-term opening, the possibility of occurrence of overruns should be made different depending on the operation pattern. Can.

  In the eighth embodiment, although the case where the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are driven by the same drive device has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, dedicated drive devices may be provided, and may be independently driven and controlled.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner to rise forward and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 faces to the left Although the case where it was constituted so that it might rotate in a mode which approaches opening and closing plate 8300 from the upper part was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, an axis in the front and rear direction), and the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 face each other (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). You may operate it. In this case, an effect can be performed such that the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 sandwich the ball with the change in state.

  Although the case where the opening and closing plate 8300 has the ball entry preventing portion 1331 has been described in the eighth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening and closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 can be made to correspond as a member for restricting the guidance of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. In addition, for example, the front surface portion of the ball insertion preventing portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed on the back surface side. In this case, it is possible to extend the period from when the opening / closing plate 8300 is closed toward the closed state until the passage of the ball of the detection sensor 1240 is disabled.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 have been described as members for permitting passage of the ball to the first specified winning opening 1000a, but the members are not necessarily limited thereto. There is not. For example, by omitting the ball entry preventing portion 1331, the allowance of passage of the ball to the first specified winning hole 1000a can be switched to the last by the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the opening and closing plate 8300 It may be interpreted that the ball is thrown toward 9111 or the first out port 66. That is, the opening and closing plate 8300 only serves to guide the ball to the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specified winning hole 1000a is switched according to the state of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 It may be interpreted as being In this case, the attentional power of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be improved as compared to the attentional power to the opening / closing plate 8300.

  In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of movable members on the upstream side of the first specified winning hole 1000a, and a driving mode for operating one member to move the ball to the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable member is a single member (for example, the opening and closing plate 1300), and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be in an extended state corresponding to the timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. Sphere discharge from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or by setting a period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed short (time required for one sphere to be discharged from the outlet 1150 (In other words, less than 0.2 seconds), it may be suppressed that the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231).

  In the ninth embodiment, the case has been described where the auxiliary entrance 9111 is configured as a general winning opening, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to the lottery of special symbols. In this case, the special symbol 2 is configured to be able to acquire the lottery of the special symbol 2 by entering the ball into the auxiliary entrance port 9111 based on the control in which the special symbol 2 fluctuates prior to the special symbol 1, thereby making the jackpot game Immediately after the end, it is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

  In the ninth embodiment, the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state changes in a state in which the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which the rolling ball does not collide with the gaming ball) and a state in which the rolling plate 9112 protrudes in the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in collision with the gaming ball) It may constitute as a movable plate by which drive control is carried out. In this case, various operation patterns are exemplified. For example, it may be a constant operation from power on or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the jackpot game.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depends on the restoration mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the return operation of the power transmission member 5400, a damper may be provided to apply a load to the power transmission member 5400 after the auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed. In this case, since the period in which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state can be extended after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state, the control of opening on one side can be facilitated.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the ball entry to the auxiliary entry port 9111 is switched on the premise that the opening / closing plate 8300 changes state toward the open state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the ball may enter the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 at a predetermined rate during a period in which the opening / closing plate 8300 maintains the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant motion may be disposed, and the ball may collide with the movable object to cause the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111.

  In the tenth embodiment, the ball is discharged from the middle of the storage flow passage 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181, and the number of balls that can be accommodated in the storage flow passage 1231 can pass through the first specified winning opening 1000a. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage channel 1231 may be variable. In this case, since the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of balls having passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a, confusion of the player can be prevented.

  In the first control example described above, the area around the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300, and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit area need not be in the vicinity of the first variable winning device 6000, but may be a wide area (center frame 86 or the like) including the first variable winning device 6000.

  In addition, various means is illustrated as a means of a change of the lighting aspect of the lamp | ramp 227b for permeation | transmission. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is disposed in the audio lamp control device 113, and data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rise of the clock pulse, and corresponds to the transmitted data at the fall of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when turning off the light, data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. Also, it may be a combination with a latch.

  In addition, a plurality of lighting pattern tables may be simplified in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining the lighting pattern table and the above-described clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or may be controlled using a serial port driver.

  The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting method (lighting method in which a difference in light and dark is caused by changing a time interval between lighting and turning off) or a high and low voltage.

  In the first control example, although the case where the transmission lamp 227b is kept on when the operation effect is successful is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on only for a short period (instantly). In this case, the attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. In addition, based on the success of the operation effect, for example, it may be notified that the remaining number of balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231 should not be lit, instead of lighting the lamp.

  In the first control example, five or more balls are stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930, and the interference member 6930 is retracted by operation of the operation button 300, thereby causing the balls to flow into the specific region 4830 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is four or less and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the general winning opening is disposed at a position where the balls can pass through. You may. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called "holding device".

  Although the case where the number of balls to be caused to enter the storage channel 1231 is notified by display in the round game R in which the operation effect has been performed has been described in the first control example, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the number of balls to be caused to enter the reservoir channel 1231 in a round game after the round in which the operation effect is performed may be advanced by one round ahead of the round in which the operation effect is performed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from being excessively accumulated in the reservoir channel 1231 before the notification.

  In addition, when notifying the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, the time that is not sufficient to reach that number (continues to shoot the balls It is desirable to execute notification in a time that is insufficient in the Thereby, even if firing of the ball is continued from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the ball is excessively entering the storage flow passage 1231 at the execution timing of the notification.

  In the first control example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 or the number of displayed images may be controlled based on a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol required until the jackpot, the score accumulated by the number of times of playing, etc. are exemplified. In this case, for example, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is large, or when the privilege is high, the degree of difficulty of the operation effect is controlled to be low, and the burden required by the player until the jackpot (number of times of variation, As the number of times of game play is larger, the profit obtained by the player can be more easily increased by the operation effect.

  Here, as the difficulty level, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself, the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect, and the like are exemplified. As a case where the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation production is high, for example, execution timing of the operation production and the notification which accompanies the second half of round game R (the period progress which can enter the sphere of specified number into the storage channel 1231 It is illustrated that it is arranged at the back). In this case, at the timing of notification, a situation may occur where the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231.

  Further, the degree of difficulty of the operation effect itself may be associated with the degree of difficulty of profit acquisition after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to succeed the operation itself, but since the time lapse until the operation timing is long, as the number to be allowed to enter the reservoir channel 1231 by then There is a possibility that more balls than the indicated number may enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is fast, it is difficult to succeed the operation itself, but since the time lapse until the operation timing is short, the number of balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231 by then It is possible to prevent more than the number of balls notified as being entered.

  In addition, since the continuation time of the remaining round games R differs depending on the difference in the execution timing of the notification, the display effect to be adopted may be switchably controlled in correspondence with the continuation time of the remaining round games R. For example, when the duration of the remaining round game R is short, the display effect is configured with a video that can be ended in a short period, and when the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, the video is displayed with a long duration You may constitute an effect. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem that the loading of the moving image is not ended in the remaining time of the round game R, and the round game R is ended without being displayed.

  In the first control example described above, nine cases where the number to enter the reservoir channel 1231 is less than the prescribed number have been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an extremely small number of balls (for example, two balls) may be made to enter the storage channel 1231 so as to increase the profit obtained by the player. In this case, it is possible to urge the player to stop the firing of the ball at the start of the round when the notification is given. In addition, at the same time, notification such as "Stop launching" may be performed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  In the first control example, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted for a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation button 300 with the state in the vicinity of the interference member 6930 (flowing state of the ball) as a standard, and to improve the attention power for the operation effect.

  In the first control example, the timing at which the error command is set at S1515 is the timing at which the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 is performed, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. If the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 even after the setting, discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, another movable object for restricting the passage of the ball in the discharge port 1150 is disposed, and when the power is turned on, it is driven (excited) so as to allow passage of the ball in the discharge port 1150, and an error command is generated. May be controlled to change its state so as to restrict passage of the ball. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls remaining in the storage flow passage 1231 from being discharged from the storage flow passage 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated. When an error command is set by decelerating due to contamination or the like, the disadvantage caused to the player can be reduced. After that, the error command can be canceled by turning the power off, and the game can be resumed from the state where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (the state immediately before the error command is set) by turning the power on again. .

  The control of the movable object is not limited to the control by the presence or absence of the setting of the error command. For example, control may be performed so as to change the state when the power is turned on or off. In this case, for example, when the game can not be continued due to a sudden power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231.

  The control of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, it is not necessary to be able to resume the game from the state immediately before the error command is set, even if it is found that the setting of the error command is based on the cheating and clears the RAM 203. It is also possible to control the movement of the movable object and discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 before resuming the game.

  In addition, the aspect of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, a driving device may be separately provided, and the means for preventing the discharge of the ball may use the restriction member 1600, or the interference member 6930 may be maintained in a stretched state as processing when the power is off. The interference member 6930 may be employed as the movable member.

  In the first control example, the control flow is configured based on how many rounds have been started in the jackpot middle effect processing S2505, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect, such as the start of a round game R where a ball can pass through the specific area 4830, the start of a round game R where an operation effect is started, etc. The flow may be configured. In this case, even if the number of rounds of effecting to be performed is changed due to a specification change or the like, significant change in control flow can be made unnecessary, so the burden of specification change can be reduced. it can.

  Also, the control flow is configured such that the flag turned on in the control flow when it is determined to be the third round in the jackpot middle effect processing S2505 is turned off in the control flow when it is determined to be the fifth round. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flag may be controlled to be turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the round of the fourth round of the round game R. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing the specification when adopting a four-round jackpot game.

  In the second control example, although the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 by the drive control of opening and closing only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by using the opening and closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in a closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary ball entry port The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can be made to flow down to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 without dividing the board for guiding the ball to the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Further, in this case, by setting the period for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state to less than 0.2 seconds, the discharge port 1150 is again discharged (in the state of being discharged) again before the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. You can regulate the passage of the ball. Therefore, the balls can be made to flow down to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 without reducing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second control example described above, the display mode of the number-of-rounds display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b is controlled to be switched based on the elapse of the waiting time TK, but It is not limited. For example, control may be performed so as to be switched based on the number of balls having passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a. In this case, the display is switched based on the fact that nine balls stored in the first specified winning hole 1000a become full (the storage channel 1231 becomes full in the overhang state of the interference member 6930), It is possible to make the player grasp the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage channel 1231 is full.

  It should be noted that the determination of the number inside the storage channel 1231 may be made by the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or by separately providing a contact sensor in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls can be directly detected. You may

  Although the case where the character of "+ chance" is displayed as the excess prize possibility increase informing mode 721 at the predetermined timing of the predetermined jackpot type has been described in the second control example, it is not necessarily limited thereto. There is not. For example, regardless of the jackpot type, during the period when the ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 may be controlled to be able to display the character of "+ chance" as the over prize possibility increase notification mode 721, or auxiliary ON It may be controlled to be able to display the character of “+ chance” of the over prize possibility increase informing aspect 721 as over display during a period in which the ball mouth 9111 can not enter the ball. For example, when the number-of-rounds display portion 714 is displayed brightly, the characters “+ chance” may be displayed.

  In addition, the character of "+ chance" may be displayed continuously for a certain period as the overcoming prize possibility increase notification mode 721, or may be displayed so that the display and the non-display can be switched in a short period. It is good.

  In the second control example described above, it is configured to control whether or not the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens on one side based on the jackpot type and the time passage from the jackpot start, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the occurrence frequency or occurrence timing of one-side opening may be changed based on the jackpot type or the time lapse from the start of the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the emission mode of emitting the ball by aiming the ball to reach the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (reduce the effect of the emission mode).

  In the third control example, while the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the case where the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 continue to be discharged has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by employing the interference member 6930 and controlling the overhanging state at a predetermined timing, the case where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. This can complicate the player's selection of the ball launch mode, thereby preventing the player from playing casually.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points not allowed to win more than the target number>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. The game is characterized by further comprising ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for the ball to pass through the ball entry port when it is detected by the detection unit that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port for a predetermined period. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member unexpectedly, extra balls are generated between the start of the operation of the operating member and the falling of the balls from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of spheres may pass through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make the balls after the predetermined number of balls difficult to pass the detecting means by the ball entering preventing means. Therefore, regardless of the strength of the ball in the state of being disposed upstream of the ball entrance, the ease of passage when the ball passes through the ball entrance is determined by the number of balls within a predetermined number and the predetermined number of balls It can be changed with the following spheres. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that a predetermined number or more of spheres pass through the detection port.

  As means for preventing ball entry, means for changing the ease of passage of the ball entrance according to the detection result of the detection means, or the one for which the ease of passage of the ball entrance at all times is constant, etc. Is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the ball entering preventing means includes a containing means for containing the ball that has passed through the ball entry port, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball comes out from the containing means, and an outlet thereof. A discharge switching means is switched between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball can not pass the discharge port, and the storage means is between the entrance and the discharge port. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is formed with a volume in which the predetermined number of balls are accommodated at a maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the accommodation means is formed with a volume for accommodating a predetermined number of balls at maximum between the ball entrance and the outlet, so discharge switching When the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the storage means, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent the predetermined number of balls from passing through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the predetermined number of balls from passing through the ball entrance.

  A game machine A3 characterized in that, in the game machine A2, the ball switching means is formed so as to be maintainable in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the ball entry port while the sphere is being discharged from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching means and the ball switching means may be simultaneous or different.

  A game machine A4 characterized in that the game machine A2 or A3 includes a drive means which is shared by the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the shared driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the discharge switching means starts the state change from the first state after the ball change-in means starts the state change from the second state to the first state. In the aspect of starting state change toward two states, the state change start is ordered, and these state changes are completed substantially simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible that the ball entering the storage means after the entry switching means is in the first state is discharged from the discharge port. Since it is possible to cause the ball switching means to start operation from the second state before completing the discharge of the ball from the discharge port while preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the discharge from the discharge port As compared with the case where the ball entering switching means is started to operate after the completion of the game, it is possible to reduce the number of balls passing through the game area and going to the out port, without passing through the ball entering switching means.

  The ordering of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching means, or a dedicated driving means is provided for each switching means to control the same timing. It is good.

  A game machine A6, comprising changing means for changing the maximum storage number of the storage means in any one of the game machines A2 to A5.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodated accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that it is temporarily (for example, specified round) predetermined It is possible to make it possible to form a state in which more balls than the number are housed in the housing means. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  Further, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine in which the predetermined number of numerical values have been changed by using the same shape accommodation means (it is possible to cope with the specification difference). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed as compared with the case of forming the shape for each specification.

  In the gaming machine A6, the ball entry port is communicated with the first ball entry port and the containing means downstream of the first ball entry port, and the ball having flowed down the game area is allowed to pass, and And a second entrance into which the passage is switched by the entry switching means, and the entry of the ball from the first entry into the receiving means, and the entry from the second entry. In the case where the ball enters the means, the maximum number of accommodating means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets which ball entrance allows the passage of the ball. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first ball entrance and the ball entering from the second ball entry can both be stored in the storage means Therefore, the space required can be reduced as compared to the case where separate accommodation means are provided for each.

  In the gaming machine A6, the change means includes an interference means capable of extending to the inside of the storage means, and the interference means interferes with a ball extended to the inside of the storage means, and the storage means A game machine A8 characterized in that the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means is changed in the case of being evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, changing the volume inside the storing means to change the number of balls stored without changing the ball entering path of the balls into the storing means Therefore, it is possible to switch the number of accommodated units without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the storage means, and is characterized in that a ball can be arranged on the front side at the time of retraction. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retraction can be hidden by a ball disposed in the front. Thereby, the operation of the interference means can be made inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And a ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for the ball to pass through the ball entry port in a state in which it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port for a predetermined period. A game machine comprising: storage means for storing the ball having passed through the ball entry port; and a visual recognition means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the ball stored in the storage means. AK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the visibility of the downstream of the detection port does not change, so the effect of the effect by the ball passing through the detection port becomes insufficient, and the power of attention may decrease. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AK1, it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls contained in the containing means by the visually difficult means, so different effects are produced depending on the number of balls contained in the containing means. In the case of adopting a mechanism that produces a <RTIgt; A </ RTI> <RTIgt; A, </ RTI> the player's anticipation of the resulting effect may reduce the likelihood that it matches the resulting effect. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the effect.

In the gaming machine AK1, when the ball comes out of the storage means, a discharge port through which the ball passes, a first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and a second state in which the ball can not pass through the discharge port And the storage means is formed with a volume in which the predetermined number of balls are stored at a maximum between the ball entrance and the discharge port. Machine AK2
According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1, the balls can be stored in the storage means, so that the period in which the effects by the balls can be maintained can be extended.

  In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, a gaming machine AK3 characterized in that it is configured to change the operation of the visual recognition difficulty means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition can be improved.

  In addition, as an aspect of predetermined conditions, it is not limited at all. For example, as the predetermined condition, it may be adopted that it is detected that the player operates the operation means operable by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the magnitude of the degree of deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means or the like and the actual manipulation timing is detected, and the degree of change of the operation of the visual recognition difficulty means is changed according to the magnitude. Also good. For example, when the degree of deviation is smaller than when the degree of deviation is large, the visibility of the sphere accommodated in the accommodation means may be changed. In this case, the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. Also, the reverse is also possible.

  Also, for example, it may be adopted that the ball has passed through a predetermined ball entry as the predetermined condition. In this case, for example, the degree of the change in the action of the visual difficulty-impairing means may be changed according to the number of balls having passed through the predetermined entrance in a predetermined period. For example, as the number of balls passing through the ball entrance increases, the visibility of the balls contained in the containing means may be changed. In this case, the player can be motivated to fire more balls. Also, the reverse is also possible. In this case, since it is possible to make the adjustment of the firing strength of the ball intense, it is possible to suppress a dumb game.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over wins>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entrance when the ball switching means is in the second state, as compared to when the ball switching means is in the first state. A game machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably dropped to the out port, can the ball be hit so that the ball does not fall off from the operating member? Depending on whether or not (the level of the player's launch technology), there has been a problem that some of the actual balls are generated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side position of the ball entry port can not be guided to the ball entry port By delaying the flow of the ball, the ball can be easily arranged at the upstream side position of the ball entrance until the ball switching means is switched to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is at the upstream position of the ball entry port, the ball is guided to the ball entry port. As a result, since the influence of the player's launch technology on the actual appearance of the ball can be reduced, it is possible to configure a beginner-friendly game machine.

  In addition, the aspect of a delay means is not limited. For example, it may be formed by a laterally long member that supports the ball from below, and may be a drop restricting means that restricts falling to the end, or may be a convex means formed by a projection that decelerates the ball by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, in the state where the ball is disposed downstream, the delay means is characterized in that the degree of delay is increased as compared with the case where the ball is disposed upstream.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball rises in a state where the ball is disposed downstream of the delaying means, so the attention power of the balls flowing down along the delaying means Can be improved.

  The aspect of the degree of delay is not limited at all. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that the distance of the ball disposed on the downstream side of the ball disposed on the upstream side increases with the opening direction of the ball entrance. A game machine B3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delaying means is arranged such that the distance between the opening direction of the ball entrance and the ball increases in the case of being disposed downstream of the delaying means. Is formed, and it is possible to suppress direct entry into the ball entrance when the ball rushes down the delay means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the ball entering switching means includes raising means for raising the game area when changing from the second state to the first state, and the delay means comprises the first means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the gaming machine B4 is disposed lower than the raising means in the state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed lower than the rising means in the first state, so that the balls are switched from the ball entering switching means The ball can be delayed after being made visible to the player as if it has fallen. This can improve the attention to the ball.

  The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the gaming machine B5 is provided on the upstream side of the flow-down path of the ball than the elevating means, and restricts the upward movement of the ball and guides the ball in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the rising restriction means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Can prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

  In the gaming machine B5, the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the rise restricting means is capable of entering the ball and has a relief entrance for giving a predetermined benefit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball is given a load when the ascending means rises and flies away from it as a profit other than the profit generated when the ball passes through the ball entrance The player can be given a benefit that occurs when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even when the ball deviates from the flow-down path to the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the lowering of attention power, and it is possible to improve the player's interest by the movement of the ball.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the delay means is provided with a variable action portion having a different action to be given to a ball depending on the difference in the mode of arrival to the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be differentiated depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. This makes it possible to select different balls for different actions.

  In addition, the aspect of the difference in the aspect of reach | attainment is not limited. For example, it may be a difference in arrival position of the ball with reference to the ball entrance, or a difference in flow direction of the ball until reaching the delay means.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action unit delays the flow of the ball reaching the delay means at a position spaced apart from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or more A game machine B8 characterized in that it does not act on the ball reaching the delay means at the position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, the variable action unit delays the flow of the ball by the variable action portion to a ball close to the ball entrance and the state switching of the ball switching means is not in time. On the other hand, it is possible to maintain an appropriate gaming speed by setting the variable action unit not to act on a ball far from the ball entry port and sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball entry switching means.

<Point BK that makes use of the ball reached at the interval>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And while the ball switching means is in the second state or compared with the ball reaching the ball switching means while the ball switching means is in the first state, or from the second state A gaming machine BK1 comprising a profit granting means which easily gives a player a profit by means of a ball reaching the ball entry switching means while changing to the first state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably dropped to the out port, can the ball be hit so that the ball does not fall off from the operating member? Depending on whether it is high (low or high of the player's launch technology), the player actually has to be careful to play since there is a slight increase in ball appearance, and there is a problem that the interest may decrease.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, by adopting the profit giving means, it becomes easy for the player to give a profit to the player by the ball reached while the ball entering switching means changes its state Since it is possible to incorporate chances into the large and small of profits, it is possible to remove the prudence from the game and to improve the interest.

  In addition, the aspect of the profit provided to the player by the profit giving means is not limited at all. For example, the winning balls may be paid out, the lottery of a predetermined symbol may be performed, the right to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game may be acquired, or the determination of the next jackpot may be made.

  For example, when the aspect of the profit given to the player by the profit giving means is a lottery of the special symbol 2, the ball of the special symbol 2 is made to reach the entering switching means at a predetermined timing during the big hit game. The number of holding balls can be increased to a predetermined upper limit. Thereby, when transitioning to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, since the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 being held is started Can. Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player, the jackpot is unintentionally obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player is reduced. can do.

  A game machine BK2 characterized in that, in the game machine BK1, a ball is thrown to the profit giving means by a load given from the ball entering switching means.

  According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the ball is thrown to the profit giving means when the ball entry switching means is stopped.

  In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the gaming machine BK3 is characterized in that the profit that can be given to the player by the profit giving means is not less than the loss that can occur while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. .

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the ability of the player to pay attention to the profit giving means can be improved, and the game is played so that the profit given by the profit giving means can be obtained. Can be driven to

  A gaming machine BK4 according to any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, wherein the profit giving means is controlled to be able to select a plurality of types of periods maintained in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, a plurality of types of periods in which the profit giving means is maintained in the second state are selected. The timing of the change to the second state can make it difficult to launch the ball. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball to the profit giving means, it is possible to configure the playability that the ball must be continued to be fired.

<Points to adjust the game of jackpot game>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, a ball capable of passing through the ball inlet in relation to the number of balls passing through the ball inlet during a period in which the first state is formed before that A game machine C1 characterized by comprising a number changer capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the ball switching means sets the number of balls passing through the ball entrance in the state where the ball switching means forms the first state by the number changing means. In the case where one state is formed, the ball entry port can be changed in association with the number of balls passed through, so that in the series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state Adjustments can be made.

  The method of adjusting the profit is not limited. For example, when the ball entry switching means has previously formed the first state, the ball enters the ball when the ball entry switching means has subsequently formed the first state due to passing through the ball entrance through a large number of balls. It may be a mode that suppresses the number of players who can enter the ball, or the player's benefit (not limited to withdrawal, if the ball entry switching means then forms the first state due to the same event). For example, it may be a mode in which the acquisition of the right to transition to a high probability state may be increased.

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes an accommodating means for accommodating the ball passing through the ball entry port, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball comes out from the accommodating means, and an outlet for the ball. And the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes. A game machine C2 comprising: operation mode switching means capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the storage means according to the difference in the operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the number of balls stored in the storing means can be changed by the operation mode switching means so that the balls can be left in the storing means. And the number of remaining balls can be made variable. This makes it possible to change the number of balls required to fill the containing means with the balls, and to physically change the maximum number of balls passing through the entrance.

  In addition, the aspect of the difference in an operation aspect is not limited at all. For example, the operation period may be made different, or in the case where a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, it may be exemplified which discharge switching means is disposed at which discharge switching means is operated (operation target) or the like.

  In the gaming machine C2, a gaming machine C3 characterized in that the number changing means comprises an interval maintaining means for maintaining an ejection interval of balls from the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the discharge occurs regardless of the number of balls contained in the containing means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be defined in accordance with the length of the period in which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed in accordance with the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  In addition, as an aspect of a space | interval maintenance means, it does not specifically limit. For example, the flow path may be formed so that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately before the discharge port from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened. It is good also as a means provided with a rib which is provided with a convex and which gives a load to the ball to decelerate the ball.

  In the gaming machine C3, the space maintaining means includes a projecting portion which protrudes from an inner side surface of the accommodating means in the flow-down path of the ball in the vicinity of the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the projecting portion is projected to the inflow path, so that the ball coming down is brought into contact with the projecting portion and decelerated. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow-down velocity from being greatly changed by the sphere and the distance from the outlet is close, and it is possible to equalize the flow-down velocity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine C4, the storage means includes a discharge path for causing the balls to flow continuously in a predetermined flow-down direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protrusions alternate with each other from the facing surface that constitutes the discharge path. The game machine C5 is characterized by being projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the projecting portions are alternately projected from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the balls are collided with the balls flowing down the discharge path. It is possible to cause the protrusion to collide with each other at predetermined intervals while being displaced in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined flowing direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the storage means includes a rolling discharge plate portion connected to the discharge path and rolling a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolling the rolling discharge plate portion A game machine C6 characterized in that the flow-down speed of the ball is set to be larger than the flow-down speed of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate flow down faster than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so the balls stored in the storage means Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) of discharging the balls from the discharge port can be kept constant.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the ball entry port is provided with a start port for making a big hit determination of a special symbol by passing a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, it is possible to associate the number of big hit determinations of the special symbol with the number of balls entered into the ball entrance. Thereby, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed by the number of times of determination of the special symbol required to obtain the big hit.

  The gaming machine C7 includes starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not the ball having passed the starting opening enters the storage means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the ball entering switching means. A game machine C8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

  By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port can discharge the ball from the first discharge port (under the same conditions) or the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. The number of remaining balls may be arranged at a changeable position.

  In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so the flow-down speed of the balls flowing down the storage means is changed. Even in this case, the number of balls discharged from the storage means can be maintained.

  In addition, arrangement | positioning of a 1st discharge port and a 2nd discharge port is not limited at all. For example, one may be disposed at the lower end of the accommodation means and the other may be disposed at an intermediate position of the accommodation means, or both may be disposed at the lower end and a branch flow channel for distributing spheres upstream thereof. You may

  Further, the operation modes of the first discharge port and the second discharge port are not limited. For example, one may be opened one by one or both may be opened. When both are open, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the containing means can be shortened compared to the case where the balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thus, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the out port during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  The first discharge port may be disposed at the lower end portion of the storage unit, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is used as the storage means regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls stored in the storage means varies, the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls can be easily kept constant. In addition, even if the ball hitting and the like are reduced, the state in which the ball remains inside the housing means can be easily formed.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be disposed on the downstream side branched at the lower end portion of the storage unit.

  In this case, since it is possible to switch which discharge port the ball discharged last is discharged from the state in which the same number of balls are stored in the storage means by the operation mode of the discharge switching means, the balls are discharged From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the ball. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player is changed depending on which discharge port the ball discharged last is discharged from, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow of the ball.

<Directing as if the round had switched during the round>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. In the open state switching means configured to be able to switch between a period in which the ball easily passes through the ball entry hole and a period in which it is difficult to pass when the ball switching means maintains the first state. A game machine CK1 characterized by.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the ball entering mode to the big winning opening in each round is the same, there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the big winning opening. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, while the ball entering switching means maintains the first state, the attention force for the ball entering aspect of the ball into the ball entrance can be improved by the switching means during the open state .

  The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of the movable object disposed on the upstream side of the detection means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection means. It is good.

  In the gaming machine CK1, a gaming machine CK2 comprising: notification means for notifying a change in a profit given to a player while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state.

  According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, it is determined that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state. The person can understand. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

  In addition, the aspect of alerting | reporting of an alerting | reporting means is not limited at all. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, notification may be made to put a break in the middle of the round game R (switch the screen or output a sound), or turn off the display of the number of rounds As a sub-round, it may be informed as if a new round game R has been started. In any case, assuming that the start timing of the round game R and the timing of notification by the notification means are game breaks, the number of times the jackpot exceeds the maximum number of rounds of control letters (for example, 16 rounds) By setting (for example, a break of 20 times), it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  The gaming machine CK2 is configured to be able to easily give a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that balls exceeding the number allowed to pass through the ball entrance are guided to the ball switching means. A game machine CK3 characterized by comprising conditional profit giving means.

  According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CK2, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from becoming useless balls when firing more balls than can pass through the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to link the interest improvement to the player by the effect and the substantial benefit (the payout of the winning balls).

  It should be noted that a notification may be issued to continue the launch so that the player does not stop the launch by visually recognizing that the ball has stopped passing through the entrance. Various modes are illustrated as a mode of information in this case. For example, it may be a direct notification such as "continue launching", or may be a notification suggesting the number of firings in an euphemistic manner such as "if you put 5 pieces, chances are large", or "some things can be seen through a sphere" In this case (in this case, it is not visible when there is no sphere, and when there is a sphere, it emits a light beam that displays visibly a certain figure or picture in the vicinity of the entering switching means and at a predetermined position where the sphere accumulates) Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the game of the jackpot game every round>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. A switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state in response to passage of the specified number of balls through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state; A game machine DK1 comprising: adjustment means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entry into the ball entrance based on a prescribed number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, since the excess ball into the ball entry can be adjusted by the adjustment means, the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the ball entry can be changed in a short time. While doing it, it can be leveled in a long time.

  In addition, it is not limited at all as an aspect of adjustment of excess ball entry. For example, it may be adjusted so that equal excess entering balls can be expected each time on the basis of a prescribed number of passing through the entrance during the first state. ) The second excess entry sphere occurring when the first state is entered at other (multiple or single) timing is reduced relative to the first excess entry sphere occurring when the first state is entered at the timing. Adjustment may be made to balance the first excess ball entry and the second excess ball entry, or the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state is short and long (big hit game and small hit In the game), the number of occurrences of excessive ball entry may be distinguished and adjusted to balance them.

  In addition, ball entering switching means may be comprised by single arrangement | positioning, and may be comprised by multiple arrangement | positioning.

  The gaming machine DK1 includes load applying means configured to be capable of applying a load directed to the detection means to a ball disposed at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detection means in the process of switching drive by the switching drive means. A game machine DK2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DK1, the ball disposed on the upstream side of the detection means can be configured to be easily detected by the detection means by the action of the load applying means.

  The number of balls to which a load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, one or more may be used.

  In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the start of the switching drive, an after-driving ball entering switchable between a permitted state permitting passage of the ball to the ball entrance and a restricted state restricting the passage of the ball. A game machine DK3 characterized by comprising state switching means.

  According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass to the ball entrance regardless of the flow of the ball to the ball entrance or the operation speed of the ball switching means Since it can be defined by the ball entry state switching means after driving, it is possible to make it easy to adjust the degree of excessive ball entry to the ball entry port.

  In any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, a load given from the ball to the ball entry switching means is imparted in a direction along a direction in which the ball entry switching means is driven at the time of the switching drive. Machine DK4.

  According to the gaming machine DK4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball switching means is prevented from being changed to the second state by the load from the ball. .

  In addition, as an addition aspect of the load from a ball, for example, it is comprised so that a ball entering switching means may be driven by the mode which falls downward (droops) by switching drive, and the dead weight of a ball is given to a ball entering switching means The case is illustrated.

<Points to adjust the game of the jackpot game every round>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. Switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state in response to passage of the specified number of balls through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state; A post-drive ball entry state switching means capable of forming a permitted state permitting passage of the ball to the ball entry port and a restricted state restricting the passage of the ball after the switching drive by the switching drive means is started; A game machine D1 characterized by comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the ball entry state switching means after driving switches whether or not the ball can enter after the entrance is closed by the switching drive means, extra balls can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls can be equalized throughout the jackpot game.

  In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the drive entry ball state switching means forms the restricted state in the first ball entry port. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the second entrance slot forms the permissible state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is determined when the ball passes through the first ball entry and when the ball passes through the second ball entry. Since it is switched whether or not it is possible to enter the ball, it is possible to improve the power of attention as to which entry opening means the entry switching means opens.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance is provided with a fall hole on the near side of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is on the near side of the opening of the first entrance. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that a ball arranged on the upstream side is dropped to the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entrance, the ball is dropped while the ball switching means maintains the second state. Can be dropped away from the ball entrance. This makes it possible to prevent the balls exceeding the specified number from passing through the first ball entrance.

<Point where balls merge from multiple winning openings to storage channel>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. An accommodation means for accommodating up to a predetermined number of balls having passed through the ball entry port; and a ball accommodated in the accommodation means based on the switching of the ball entering switching means to the second state from the accommodation means A game machine EK1 comprising discharge means for discharging, wherein the ball entry switching means can be switched to the first state before the end of the discharge action by the discharge means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, since the discharging action by the discharging means is configured to be able to end except the ball finished in the containing means, the number of balls that can enter the ball entrance in each round is related It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in winning balls throughout the jackpot game.

  In addition, since the ball can be stored in the storage means over a period in which the state of the ball switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of balls that can pass through the ball entrance while the ball switching means is maintained in the first state More spheres can be accommodated in the accommodation means. As a result, since it is possible to inform the user of an indication of the frequency of entering the ball, it is possible to show the player the gaming efficiency of the gaming machine currently playing.

  In addition, the means which shows gaming efficiency is not limited at all. For example, the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls shot (number of balls / number of balls fired) may be used, and every time the ball switching means is in the first state, the number of balls continuously entered the ball entrance It may be an indicator indicating whether the ball is passed.

  In addition, the number of the ball inlet, the ball switching means, and the housing means may be plural or not only one. In this case, the ball switching means and the housing means may be provided corresponding to each ball entrance, and the state change of each ball switching means may occur in order, or each ball switching means It may be configured to change states partially simultaneously.

  In the game machine EK1, a game machine EK2 characterized in that whether or not the discharging action ends with leaving the ball stored in the storage means is adjustable by the discharge mode of the ball.

  According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to enhance participation in the game of firing the gaming ball toward the ball entrance.

  In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the ball entry comprises at least a first ball entry and a second ball entry, and the balls having passed through the first ball entry or the second ball entry merge A game machine EK3 characterized in that the accommodation means is formed.

  According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the balls passing through the first ball entry or the second ball entry merge in the interior of the housing means capable of housing the balls up to a predetermined number. Thus, the number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the first ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the number of balls passing through the first ball entry and the second ball entry (the number of payouts accompanying the ball) throughout the entire game.

  A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. The housing means is provided with housing means for housing up to a predetermined number of balls having passed through the ball entrance, the ball entrance comprising at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the first ball entrance Alternatively, the storage means is formed in such a manner that the balls having passed through the second ball entrance merge to form a game machine E1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls having passed through the first ball entry or the second ball entry merge in the inside of the accommodating means capable of accommodating the balls up to a predetermined number, so that the first ball entering The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the number of balls passing through the first ball entry and the second ball entry (the number of payouts accompanying the ball) throughout the entire game.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the storage means is empty, the number of balls that can be stored in the storage means by passing through the first ball entrance and the storage by passing through the second ball entrance. A game machine E2 characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first ball entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance are different. It is possible to improve the player's ability to pay attention to whether or not the entrance of the ball is opened.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance is set smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second ball entrance, and in the closed state of each ball entrance, a predetermined upper limit number of balls are ejected The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number which can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is opened during the opening when the second ball entrance is opened a plurality of times. Game machine E3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the ball passing through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and the second entrance after opening the first entrance The ball passed can differ from the actual benefit given to the player.

  That is, when passing through the second ball entry before opening the first ball entry, even if more balls than the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entry passed through the second ball entry, it exceeded The minute is not discharged, and the number of balls minus the residual portion is accommodated from the first entrance, so eventually the same number as the second entrance can be accommodated from the first entrance If the player passes the number of players, only the same profit can be obtained.

  On the other hand, when passing through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, if the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance has passed through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can gain additional benefits as it is not

  In addition, the setting of the number which can accommodate a game ball is performed in various aspects. For example, it can carry out by setting of the length and the thickness of the channel in which the game ball is accommodated. In addition, the change of the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to the number of winning balls, for example, changing the substantial profit given to the player depending on whether or not the ball can pass the specific area. Can.

<Point where interference member overhangs>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And an interference means disposed in the flow-down path of the ball having passed through the ball entry port, and capable of switching between an extended state capable of interfering with the ball and a retracted state not interfering with the ball. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the interference means is disposed in the flow-down path of the ball which has passed through the ball entrance, the interference means is maintained in the overhanging state, from the ball entrance to the interference means The ball can be clogged in the path of the ball to prevent further balls from passing through the ball entrance. In this way, it is possible to adjust the winning balls through the entire jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  A gaming machine F2 comprising: parking means for holding a ball in front of the interference means in the retreat state of the interference means in the game machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state in a state in which the ball is parked in front of the interference means. In comparison to, the action can be hidden by a sphere. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the operation.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the balls passing through the detecting means are passed. A game machine F3 characterized in that an aspect of a state change of the interference means is changeable.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, since the mode of the state change of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured with a plurality of types, while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of benefits from the number of storage>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. The operation means disposed in the flow-down path of the ball having passed through the ball entry port and capable of operating with a plurality of movement patterns, and changing the profit that can be obtained by the player based on the movement pattern of the movement means A game machine FK1 characterized in that it is configured.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the big winning opening, which may reduce attention to the downstream of the big winning opening. There was a problem that there was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operating means is disposed downstream of the entrance, and the operating pattern of the operating means is configured to be able to change the profit that can be obtained by the player. Can improve the power of downstream attention.

  In the game machine FK1, a game machine FK2 comprising operation means operable by a player, wherein the operation pattern of the operation means is configured to be changeable by the player operating the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine FK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK1, the player can change the operation pattern of the operating means by operating the operating means, thereby improving the player's willingness to operate the operating means It can be done.

  In the gaming machine FK2, a first benefit and a second benefit are set as the benefit given to the player based on the game ball passing through the entrance, and the first operation mode of the operation means is used to set the first operation. A game machine FK3 characterized in that an aspect of acquisition of a benefit and the second benefit changes.

  According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player is directly changed by the operation mode of the operation means, so that the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. it can.

  The modes of the first benefit and the second benefit are not limited at all. For example, the first benefit may be set as payout of a prize ball, and the second benefit may be set as finalization of a probability change state after a big hit game (as a gaming machine with V positive variation), or the second benefit may be set as a jackpot determination (It may be set as a small hit game in the 1 type 2 type blender).

  The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, for example, the benefits given to the player in the first benefit and the second benefit are the payouts of the winning balls, and the number of paid balls in the first benefit is lower than that in the first benefit. If the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is greater, or the benefits granted to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot gaming state, compared to the number of rounds of jackpot gaming in the 1st benefit The case where the number of rounds in the second benefit is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another thing having a different nature, for example, the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is an award while the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the transition to the jackpot gaming state. In the case of the payout of the ball, and the fact that the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the clear indication of the gaming state, the payout awarded to the player in the second benefit is the maximum earned balls And the like are exemplified.

  In addition, as something which is in a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first benefit relates to the game state after the end of the big hit game (or the profit of the player such as the number of fluctuations until the next big hit) In contrast to the disclosure of the information), the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (or the information related to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) The case of destruction is exemplified.

<Point 1 to make it difficult to predict whether or not to win a V from the behavior of the attacker
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means In the game machine having the profit switching means switched on, in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entering switching means in the first state are the same, when the ball can pass through the profit giving means, and the profit It is possible to switch to the case where the ball can not pass through the application means. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case of flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route, and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route is to prevent the ball from entering the big winning opening in the first place Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it can not maintain the attention to the ball heading to the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of letting you notice the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the ball can pass through the profit giving means and the ball passes through the profit giving means in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, it does not block the ball entering the ball entrance. In this way, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the ball entrance.

  The gaming machine G1 is provided on the upstream side of the profit switching means, and is provided with a stopping means which is switched between a stopping state for stopping a ball passing through the detecting means and a passing state for passing a ball passing through the detecting means. When the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the retaining means is switched from the suspended state to the passing state, and the ball flowing down to the downstream of the retaining means is switched to the profit A game machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the balls are profited at any timing by temporarily stopping the balls passing through the ball entrance by the holding means disposed upstream of the profit switching means. It can prevent reaching the switching means. This prevents the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing no matter how the ball passes through the ball entrance while the ball switching means is in the first state. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that it comprises period changing means for changing a period in which the ball flowing down through the stopping means can reach the profit switching means after switching the stopping means to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the period changeable means allows the ball to pass through the stopping means and then the time period in which the profit switching means can be reached changes. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the playability of the game, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  The period changing means may be means for changing the flow-down speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or may be means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state to when the ball starts to flow down. The means for changing the number of balls staying in the stopping means may be used.

  In the game machine G3, a game machine G4 characterized in that the period changing means is capable of switching the number of balls to be held by the stopping means in accordance with a profit given to a player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted by the number of balls parked in the parking means, so the ball paid attention to the balls parked in the parking means The power can be improved.

  In addition, the means to switch the number of balls to be retained by the retaining means is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to change the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, after shortening the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state extremely short and then immediately shortening the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that, Since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream side of the retaining means is extremely small, even if new balls do not enter from the ball entry port, a large number of balls are staying in the retaining means.

  On the other hand, in the case where the period for setting the ball entry switching means to the first state is made extremely short immediately after taking a sufficiently long period for passing the stopping means in the passing state, In addition to the fact that the majority of the balls flow down to the downstream of the stopping means, since the balls do not newly enter from the ball entrance, it means that almost no balls are staying in the stopping means.

  As described above, by changing the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period in which the ball entering switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter, the stopping means is stopped in the stopping means regardless of the firing mode. The number of balls can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ball entering switching means comprises setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of types of closing maintaining periods maintained in the second state, and a predetermined period from the end of the closing maintaining period. A game machine G5 characterized in that the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means sets a plurality of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. Since the period from when it passes through to when the profit switching means is switched to the first state is formed by a plurality of types, the balls pass through the profit giving means even if the number of balls to be held by the holding means is the same. It is possible to formably control the case of passing and the case of not passing. Therefore, the attention to the flow of the ball can be continuously improved.

  In addition, for example, the ball entry switching means is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow passage of the specified number of balls in the ball entry port, and a period for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the second state immediately thereafter When the setting means selects the closing maintaining period in the form of extremely shortening (the ball passing through the stopping means is shorter than reaching the profit switching means), the ball entering switching means is in the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means by counting from time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means becomes the passing state to when the profit switching means becomes the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it can be arbitrarily determined whether or not the ball that has passed through the retaining means passes the profit giving means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls to be parked in the parking means and the mode (for example, timing) of parking, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the balls having passed the parking means pass the profit giving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entering switching means is generated not by the first operation caused by the specified number of balls entering the ball entrance but by the second operation caused by the passage of the prescribed time. A game machine G6 characterized by comprising intentional selection means for intentionally selecting so as to make it possible.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching unit is limited to the operation at a preset time by the operation of the intention selection unit. It is possible to eliminate the switching randomness due to the passage mode of the ball at the entrance. Thereby, while the profit switching means is in the first state, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter the ball.

  In addition, as an intentional selection means, it is illustrated that a ball does not pass through a ball entrance by passage of a smaller number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally clogging (preventing passage) the ball passing through the ball entrance.

  A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means In the gaming machine having the profit switching means switched on, the notification based on the judgment result of the flow-down mode judging means for judging whether the flow-down mode of the ball to the profit giving means is normal and the flow-down mode judging means And a notification means for performing the game GK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that a player who tries to obtain a profit of fraud arises not a little due to the fraudulent act of applying a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before reaching the distribution unit. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, when the abnormality is determined, the notification means notifies of the abnormality, so that it is possible to suppress the cheating. That is, there is a high possibility that the user will not be able to obtain an illegal profit through notification even if the ball is illegally obstructing the flow of the ball, so a person who intends to profit illegally (hereinafter referred to as “cheating person” or The effect of deterrence against "injustice" can be exerted.

  In addition, the aspect of determination of abnormality is not limited at all. For example, after the profit switching means is switched to the first state, the timing at which the ball is discharged may be set, and the notification may be performed by not detecting the discharge of the ball even at that timing. In this case, since notification can be performed before the ball passes the profit switching means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to complain.

  In the game machine GK1, the flow-down mode determination means performs the determination based on the number of balls disposed between the ball entrance and the profit provision means.

  According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether the flow-down mode of the ball is abnormal, not depending on the degree of accumulation of gaming balls from the entrance to the profit giving means. it can.

  In the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, a gaming machine GK3 comprising arrangement restraining means for restraining a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit giving means after the notification means executes a notice.

  According to the gaming machine GK3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, a change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when resuming the game when an unexpected error occurs. Loss can be minimized.

<Point 2, making it difficult to predict whether or not to win a V from the action of the attacker, there is a paka>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means A gaming machine comprising: a profit switching means switched at a mode in which a ball reaches the profit switching means is changeable by an operation mode of the ball entering switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case of flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route, and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route is to prevent the ball from entering the big winning opening in the first place Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it can not maintain the attention to the ball heading to the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of letting you notice the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to change the mode in which the balls reach the profit switching means by the operation mode of the ball switching means while maintaining the state in which the balls can pass through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control how to bring the ball to the profit switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the number of balls related to the time during which the ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1, the player is guided in what manner the ball is guided to the profit switching means from the length at which the ball switching means is maintained in the second state. Thus, the player's attention to the operation of the ball entry switching means can be improved.

  The gaming machine H1 or H2 is characterized in that a starting state in which ball feeding to the profit switching means is started is established while the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine H1 or H2, the ball is thrown to the profit switching means only in the start state, and the operation of the ball entering switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it is possible to set the first state again, it is possible to form the game characteristic that throwing of the ball to the profit switching means is not necessarily started even if the operation is started from the first state. As a result, since it becomes necessary to directly confirm whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, the power of paying attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

  A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means A gaming machine provided with profit switching means switched at a state change means configured to be in a state changeable state by detecting passage of a ball, and the state change means To the profit switching means based on the frequency of ball passage Gaming machine HK1, characterized in that it is configured to be switchable, the number of balls that can be spherical.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case of flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route, and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route is to prevent the ball from entering the big winning opening in the first place Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it can not maintain the attention to the ball heading to the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of letting you notice the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine HK1, the number of balls capable of being sent to the profit switching means is switchable based on the passage frequency of the balls to the state changing means, so the ball entering mode to the profit switching means Can be changed. Thereby, the attention power with respect to the behavior of the ball which has passed through the ball entrance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine HK1, when the ball entering frequency to the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, the upper limit of the number of balls to be thrown to the profit switching means is set in a predetermined period. Machine HK2.

  According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to break away from the gaming nature in which it is better to let the state changing means pass the ball.

  In the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the gaming machine HK3 is characterized in that the ball which has passed through the ball entrance in the plurality of opening and closing of the ball switching means is put together to the profit switching means. .

  According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, entering the ball into the entrance at the time of opening and closing of the entering switching means can be related to the throwing mode to the entering ball switching means Therefore, the variation of the ball sending mode can be increased as compared with the case where the ball sending mode to the ball entering switching means is independent at one opening and closing of the ball entering switching means.

  In addition, how to count the number of opening and closing of ball entering switching means is not limited at all. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the ball entry switching means, or may be counted by the number of occurrences of combinations of operations of the ball entry switching means (for example, preset operation patterns such as small hitting games).

  Operation means operable by the player, a storage state for temporarily storing the ball entering the ball switching means, and a passage state for releasing the storage of the ball and allowing it to flow toward the profit providing means A game machine HP1 comprising: temporary storage means which can be switched according to the present invention, and the state of the temporary storage means can be switched by the operation of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine HP1, since the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the operation of the operation means.

  In the gaming machine HP1, a gaming machine HP2 characterized in that a profit given to a player is selected from a first benefit or a second benefit according to the operation timing of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HP1, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operation means.

  The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, for example, the benefits given to the player in the first benefit and the second benefit are the payouts of the winning balls, and the number of paid balls in the first benefit is lower than that in the first benefit. If the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is greater, or the benefits granted to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot gaming state, compared to the number of rounds of jackpot gaming in the 1st benefit The case where the number of rounds in the second benefit is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another thing having a different nature, for example, the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is an award while the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the transition to the jackpot gaming state. In the case of the payout of the ball, and the fact that the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the clear indication of the gaming state, the payout awarded to the player in the second benefit is the maximum earned balls And the like are exemplified.

  In addition, as something which is in a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first benefit relates to the game state after the end of the big hit game (or the profit of the player such as the number of fluctuations until the next big hit) In contrast to the disclosure of the information), the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (or the information related to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) The case of destruction is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine HP2, passage of the ball in the ball entrance when the ball switching means is in the first state is restricted based on the fact that the first benefit is selected. Game machine HP3.

  According to the gaming machine HP3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first benefit, the ball is prevented from passing through the entrance regardless of the state of the entrance switching means. It is possible to eliminate the need to temporarily stop the firing of the ball (to perform a so-called “stop”) in anticipation of timing when the player does not want to pass the ball to the entrance because it can it can. In this case, the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the ball entry switching means, so that the desired game can be smoothly performed.

  In the gaming machine HP3, a gaming machine HP4 that is controlled to be able to continue playing regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detection means based on the selection of the first benefit.

  According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine HP3, by making the detection means clogged, it is possible to realize the gaming property of restricting the ball.

  Game machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, In any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3 and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Game machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. . Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 third symbol display device (part of notification means)
110 Main control unit (part of change means, part of period change means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means, part of flow mode determination means)
300 operation button (operation means)
640 2nd ball entrance (part of ball entrance, starting opening, part of state change means)
640a Electric role (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specified winning a prize mouth (a part of the ball entry, the first ball entry)
1140 Protruding part (part of spacing maintaining means, projecting part)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entering prevention means, part of number changing means)
1210 Thin plate member (means for visual difficulty)
1231 Reservoir channel (part of ball entering prevention means, part of number changing means, part of driven ball entry state switching means, housing means, discharging path, part of adjusting means)
1231a Guide surface (part of space maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of space maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Protruding part (part of spacing maintaining means, projecting part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening and closing plate (part of ball switching means)
1310 Plate (lifting means)
1331 throwing prevention part (a part of entering prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Regulating member (part of ball entering preventing means, part of number changing means, discharging switching means, stopping means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
2251 Second storage channel (part of ball entering prevention means, part of number changing means, part of after-driving ball entering state switching means, containing means, discharging path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a Second specified winning combination (a part of the ball entrance, the second ball entrance)
2840 Slide plate (part of ball switching means)
3181 additional winning combination (relief opening)
3182 Curved extension plate (lift control means)
3250 Falling delay plate (part of delaying means)
3251b end face (part of falling hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit giving means)
4850 Distribution device (Profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit giving means)
5900 Ball adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (Interference means, part of period change means, part of adjustment means. Part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, part of operation means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Opening and closing plate (part of ball switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening / closing member (part of ball entering switching means, part of switching means during open state, part of adjusting means, part of load applying means, part of ball entering state switching means after driving)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit giving means, part of conditional profit giving means)
10180 Intermediate discharge device (part of operation means)
11183 2nd additional winning a prize mouth (a part of ball entry)
11190 Opening and closing means (part of driving ball entry state switching means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation member of the big winning opening operates with the predetermined number of balls passing through the detection opening as a trigger, and the predetermined number or more of balls pass through the detection opening of the detecting means. There is a game machine which prevents that (patent document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-181572

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the visibility of the downstream of the big winning opening does not change, so the effect of the effect by the ball passing through the big winning opening becomes insufficient, and the power of attention may be reduced. There was a problem of that.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the attention power of a ball that has passed through a large winning opening.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a game area in which the balls flow down, a ball entrance through which the balls flowed down the ball pass, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Entry switching means for switching between a first state capable of guiding to the entry ball opening and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can not be guided to the entrance; In the gaming machine provided with detection means for detecting ball entry, the ball passes through the ball entry port in a state where it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port during a predetermined period. A ball entry preventing means is provided which makes the ball entry difficult, and the ball entry preventing means is provided with a containing means for containing the ball that has passed through the ball inlet, and it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls contained in the containing means. Means for making it difficult to

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the attentional power of the ball which has passed through the ball entrance.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XII-XII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XII-XII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is a first It is a rear view of a variable winning prize apparatus, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXId-XXId line of Drawing 21 (c). (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is a figure showing time change of the first specified winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a figure showing time change of the first specified winning opening in the second operation pattern FIG. 14C is a diagram showing time change of the first specified winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXVIII-XXVIII line of Drawing 27 (c). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hitting classification counter and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specification winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specification winning a prize mouth in the 4th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specification winning a prize mouth and the 5th in the 5th operation pattern. 2 is a diagram showing a time change of the specified winning combination. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 3rd embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXXII-XXXII line | wire of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXXIVa-XXXIVa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus, (c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of Drawing 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball | bowl which reached | attained the 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the game board in a 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hitting classification counter and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the sixth operation pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the seventh operation pattern It is the figure which showed the change. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the eighth operation pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the ninth operation pattern It is the figure which showed the change. It is a figure showing time change of the 1st specified winning a prize mouth and a specific field in the 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial rear view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hitting classification counter and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specification winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specification winning a prize mouth in the 11th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specification winning a prize mouth in the 12th operation pattern, and the 2 is a diagram showing a time change of the specified winning combination. It is a partial front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the LII-LII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is a figure showing time change of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the thirteenth operation pattern, (b) is a time measurement of the first specified winning opening and the specified area in the fourteenth operation pattern It is the figure which showed the change. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of Drawing 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of Drawing 35 (b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a), (c) is a first FIG. 63 is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (a), and (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable winning apparatus, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LXIVd-LXIVd line of FIG.64 (c). It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of a 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus along the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a), and (c) is a first FIG. 70 is a rear view of the variable winning device, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a), (c) is a first FIG. 71 is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line LXXId-LXXId in FIG. 71 (c). It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a figure showing change of time (time) of a change of a drive (excitation) state of a solenoid of a drive, a tip member, an opening and closing plate, an auxiliary opening and closing member, and a regulation member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (d) is a figure showing an example of change of the state of the first specified winning opening in round game R and time change of the state of the movable member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 11th embodiment. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79. FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (c) are front schematic views of a projecting rib, an opening / closing means, and a second additional winning opening schematically showing the arrangement of the projecting rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in the 1st example of control. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in the notice production performed in the round before timing production (operation production) is performed, Comprising: (b) is timing production (operation production) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in the inside. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing production (operation production). (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of the timing production (operation production) in the interval between rounds in front of the round game R of the 5th round, and (b) is during timing production (operation production) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing presentation (operation presentation). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content alerting | reporting with the 3rd symbol display apparatus that the round game of the 6th round is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table It is. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specified winning opening, interference member and specific area in the 15th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specified winning opening in the 16th operation pattern, interference It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specified winning opening in a 17th operation pattern, an interference member, and a specific field, and (b) is the 1st specified winning opening in an 18th operation pattern, interference It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. It is a figure showing time change of the 1st specified winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in the 19th operation pattern. (A) is a figure showing time change of the 1st specification winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in the 20th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specification winning a prize mouth in a 21st operation pattern, interference It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. It is a model figure explaining the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the block diagram which showed the content of RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed typically an example of the fluctuation display data table among display data tables. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing. It is the flowchart which showed the state command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed special symbol fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing. It is a flowchart which shows through gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows main processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot control processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of jackpot operation setting processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of opening and closing processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of ending processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of information processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of winning a prize processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of abnormal treatment. It is a flowchart which shows storage control processing. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the upper limit setting process 2 of the operation | movement counter. It is the flowchart which showed the content of storage valve operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows V prize-winning processing. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed main processing. It is the flowchart which showed command decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit related processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot inside production processing. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the production round command setting processing for display. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation indicator setting processing. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp | ramp output process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of button input monitoring and presentation processing. It is a flow chart which shows ball number check processing. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 1st contact classification selection table 202b in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure showing time change of the opening and closing plate and the auxiliary opening and closing member in the 22nd operation pattern, and (b) shows time change of the opening and closing plate and the auxiliary opening and closing member in the 23rd operation pattern It is a figure and (c) is a figure showing time change of the opening and closing board in a 24th operation pattern, and an auxiliary opening-and-closing member. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content alerting | reporting with the 3rd symbol display apparatus that the round game of the 6th round is performed. It is the model which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st contact classification selection table. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection table. It is the figure which showed the time change of the opening / closing board in the small hitting A, the solenoid and the distribution apparatus, and the opening / closing board in the small hitting B, the solenoid, and the distribution apparatus.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. 1 to 23. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Ball balls are played by balls (hereinafter, also referred to as game balls or pachinko balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls and a windmill, as well as rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. It is attached to the back side of 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is being fixed by the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting between the rails (a winning opening etc. is disposed and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed in response to the winning of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and the ball enters the ordinary ball entry port 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal design (the 2nd design) is done. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit If it is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. In this pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is 1/320 probability, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot has a probability of 1/60. In addition, for convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the ball to the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as “lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the row for entering the ball to the second ball entry 640 The lottery of special symbols to be played is referred to as the "special symbol 2 lottery".

  When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or 10 balls are won The operation to be released is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time.

  In addition, as a jackpot type of the special symbol, six kinds of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c" are provided (FIG. 22) reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a is different depending on the jackpot type, and is configured to change the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 1000.

  When a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is for each type of entrance. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81, up to four times each. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls reserved for the first entrance 64 (number of balls reserved for special symbol 1), or the number of balls reserved for the second entrance 640 (specially selected) If the number of balls held for symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 both remain, the lottery based on the holding balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the success or failure of the normal symbol is determined. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be easy. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol is facilitated.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37 While being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the normal ball entry port 67 remains, the lottery of the next normal symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is It is started.

  In the present embodiment, as an added value after the end of the big hit, a definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the definite variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the definite variation state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of times of drawing of the special symbol. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), pachinko machine 10 from the end of the jackpot until it becomes the next jackpot There may be a transition to a high probability state of special symbol (due to special variation of symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of other jackpot types (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), it is configured to be a time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times.

  In addition, the lottery number of the special symbol to which the definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol mentioned above is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  In addition, the number of drawing times of the special symbol which is a time-shortened state of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (due to probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state It is the state of the game which is easy to shift. In the high probability state of the special symbol in this embodiment (during the definite variation of the special symbol), the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640 is included. . On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbol" refers to the time when the special symbol is not in a certain variation, and the jackpot probability is a normal condition, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol.

  In addition, the time saving state (during time) of the normal symbol refers to a gaming state in which the ball is likely to be won to the second ball entry port 640 because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased. In addition, the normal state refers to the state of the game which is not even during the special symbol oddity or the regular symbol time reduction (the jackpot probability also does not increase the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol (the second symbol)).

  During special symbols or during regular symbol shorting, not only is the probability of hitting the symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A long time is set in comparison with. When the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball reaches the second entrance 640 as compared to the case where the motorized role 640a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, it becomes easy to perform the lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the electric role thing 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time shortening of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time thereof The number of times of opening the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit may be configured to be larger than that in the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) does not change during the time variation of the special symbol or the time symbol of the normal symbol, and the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, At least one of the opening times of the motorized accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened during the special symbol odd variation or the normal symbol time change, the ordinary symbol ( Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be up compared to the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a seven-segment display 37b on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is being executed. To display the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol as the stop symbol after the end of the variation, or the ball entered in the first ball entrance 64 The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the entrance The number of balls is held for a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times is limited to four times It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, its big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) according to the jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is shown.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 as a trigger, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display unit 37, the third symbol The third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and the second symbol as a variable display triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is configured of ten main symbols attached with the numbers "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. A jackpot is generated after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even number "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is added A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit A" or "big hit a", any number among all the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number A variation display is performed in which the main symbols to which the symbol is added are aligned. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a display (right-handed navi) for prompting the user to shoot a ball by aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric symbol 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball to the right of the game board 13 is released. The ball can be made easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting (right hitting). Moreover, although it mentions later for details, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 Compared to the case where it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball, it is easy to be a big hit (big hit a) that can obtain the largest profit. Therefore, in the definite variation state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot, and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player by executing the right hitting. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to a definite pattern or the normal symbol is set to a short time, the ball can not enter the second ball entry port 640 unless the player strikes the right, so the special is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol variation state or the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the definite variation state of the special symbol or the short symbol state of the normal symbol, the player displays the definite variation state of the special symbol or the short symbol state of the normal symbol by displaying a specific image (right-handed navi). To ensure that the benefits of being

  In the right-handed navi, characters such as “Aim for the right!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three arrows pointing to the right are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely obtain the benefit from the definite variation state of the special symbol and the time shortening state of the normal symbol.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In this warning image, it is determined that the player is performing a right strike even though it is not a period in which the player should strike a ball to the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 (a right strike). It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case where it is detected. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player has made a right-handed strike in the normal state (in a state where neither special symbol oddity nor ordinary symbol short time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the motorized accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily released in the normal state (the ball is unlikely to enter the second ball entry port 640 even if the right strike is performed). For this reason, if the player strikes the right in the normal state, the chances of receiving a special symbol lottery will be reduced as compared to the case of striking the ball at the first entrance 64 by striking the left. That is, when the player strikes the right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting a left-handed hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

  If it is determined that the player is hitting the right in the normal state, the character "Warning" and "Playing with the left!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Letters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made to notice that he should not hit the right (should hit the left). Also, by checking the presence of the right strike warning screen, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine whether there is a player who is executing an unusual game method of performing a right strike in the normal state.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not right strike is performed, for example, the ball is inserted into a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) to which the ball can flow when the right strike is performed. Judging by whether or not the ball.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, the right strike warning image is displayed, It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right The hit warning image may be displayed. As a result, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of the fraud only by confirming the presence or absence of the right strike warning image. Also, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specified winning hole 1000a, a signal indicating that fraud is being made to the hall computer It may be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine the presence or absence of the possibility that the fraud is being performed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud is being performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is, for example, a case where entering the first specified winning opening 1000a is detected despite the fact that it is not a special gaming state (big hit state).

  If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the character "Warning" is displayed in a large size at the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom of the screen, the words "Please call a gate error clerk" are displayed. With these characters, it is possible for the player to determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the store clerk or the like in the hall can be requested to repair etc. quickly.

  The second symbol display device 83 has a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) each time a ball passes through a normal entrance (through gate) 67. Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation display of the second symbol, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (variable time) is set so that the game state is shorter than in the normal state, during the definite change of the special symbol, or during the short time of the normal symbol. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during a certain symbol of the special symbol and during the short pattern of the normal symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is in a certain variation, and the normal symbol is in time.

  In addition, to the second ball entrance 640 by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting or increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized role 640a during the definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the special symbol or during the time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electrically operated accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entry ball gate (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball flows down the right side of the game board A part of is made passable. When the ball passes the normal ball entry (through gate) 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes normally through (the through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp 84 Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol other than the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, and is set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) You may. Further, the number of assembled ordinary ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 where balls can be won is disposed. When a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main ball is turned on due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640 where balls can be won is disposed. When a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  In addition, each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball hits the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 are configured the same. However, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second win the ball at the second entrance 640 is different, for example, the first entry The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won on the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is hit on the second entrance 640 may be five.

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role part 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role part 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol of "o" as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal ball entry (through gate) 67, the motorized role combination The object 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to win the second ball entry port 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the symbol usually is high compared to that in the normal state, and the time it takes to display the variation of the symbol is short, so the variation of the symbol is normal. It becomes easy to display the symbol of "○" in display. Thus, the number of times the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, the time during which the motorized jack 640a is opened also becomes longer than during the normal state, during the special symbol oddity and during the normal symbol time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entry port 640, as compared to the normal state, during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part such as that provided at the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can be won.

  Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state in the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball hits the second entrance 640. is there. However, the probability of becoming the big hit (big hit A, big hit a) in which the largest profit (expulsion) is obtained as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot is the case where the ball wins the second entrance ball entrance 640 Is set higher than when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64.

  During normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so to the first entrance 64 without the motorized entry. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the winning to the first entrance 64 provides many opportunities for winning a big hit, and the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim to become a player.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the electric role part 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in the open state during the definite variation of the special symbol and the time symbol of the normal symbol. Because it is in a state where it is easy to win the second entry ball opening 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second entry ball opening 640 (so-called "right-handed" ), It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a big hit by winning the second ball entry 640 while making the motorized role 640a open by passing the normal ball entry (through gate) 67. It becomes.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  The first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640) of the first ball entrance 64, and the first specific winning device is opened in the left-right direction at the substantially central portion thereof. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if it becomes a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol made due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol for the big hit. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specified winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first specified winning opening 1000a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specified winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specified winning hole 1000a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger value (game value in the present embodiment) as a game value (game value) 15 balls are awarded based on the winning of one ball.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an open / close plate 1300 forming an open state for guiding a ball to the first specified winning opening 1000 a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 for operating the open / close plate 1300. Have. The first specified winning combination port 1000a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to raise and lower the opening and closing plate 1300 to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the first specified winning opening 1000a. Act to repeat alternately.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  In the game board 13, a first out port 66 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 1000a and 640, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a big hit lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result on the second symbol display device Do.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the first specified winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side as Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 enters the second entry port 640 of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable frontal device unit 80 by the player performing a right-handed strike by the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof. The ball is not introduced, and almost all of the sphere which has flowed downstream thereof is guided to the flow path forming portion.

  6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning apparatus 1000 has a main body member 1100 configured of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covering front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covering front plate And a power transmission member 1400 for rotatably loading the opening and closing plate 1300 by rotation and pivotally supported on the back side of the main body member 1100, and the power transmission member The power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 are covered from the rear side to the drive device 1500 which drives 1400, the regulation member 1600 which regulates the discharge of the ball in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, And a rear cover 1700 which is fastened and fixed.

  The main body member 1100 is a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and the thin plate member 1110 is recessed from the front toward the back side and the shaft 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 A ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and a housing portion 1120 which is partially housed and partially formed through, a holding hole 1130 which is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side in front view of the housing portion 1120 A projecting portion 1140 which is provided to project according to the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging a ball from the front to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation for supporting the power transmission member 1400 by protruding to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 The supporting portion 1160 and the supporting claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 at the upper portion of the discharge port 1150 are mainly Provided.

  The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is housed, and a rectangular recess 1122 which is recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121 and its rectangle A through hole is formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to a straight line connecting a pair of support concave portions 1121 in order to move the load bearing portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the concave portion 1122 to the front and back of the thin plate member 1110 And 1123 mainly.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the covering front plate 1200. Ru. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

  The surface area of the rectangular recess 1122 is larger than that of the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the depth of the recess is slightly larger than that of the plate portion 1310. Thus, the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122 in the posture (closed state) in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is inclined, and the opening and closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding on the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The projecting portion 1140 is projected to a position where it abuts on a ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by coming into contact with the protrusion 1140. In the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200, the same projecting portion 1235 is disposed at a position not overlapping with the projecting portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 is provided with a shaft portion 1161 for rotatably supporting the power transmission member 1400, and a projecting height equal to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in a rib shape.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotation tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a predetermined distance or more. That is, during operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angular range in contact with the rotary tip 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 is a thin plate member 1210 disposed a predetermined distance away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 to the back side. 1220, a storage portion 1230 extending in a box shape opened toward the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side in the left-right direction of the side wall 1220, and disposed at the upper end of the storage portion 1230 And a detection sensor 1240.

  A flow passage which is a hole in which the ball flows up and down by the thin plate member 1210, the right side wall of the side wall 1220, the left side wall of the housing 1230, and the thin plate 1110 of the main body 1100. The department is composed.

  The housing portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and is protruded toward the back side in a storage flow passage 1231 whose inside is formed with a width in which a ball can flow down and a middle belly portion of the storage flow passage 1231 It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in a front view.

  The storage channel 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens on the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 to pass the ball Form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage flow channel 1231 is formed is made of a light transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the rear side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front and rear direction And the surface 1231b.

  The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal surface is made larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal surface of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b.

  The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 is protruded to a position where it can contact the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231, and decelerates the ball by coming into contact with the ball.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left in the front view. Thus, the ball landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled leftward and guided to the flow path forming portion.

  The detection sensor 1240 has a through hole as the first specified winning hole 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specified winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage and the number of winnings is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between when rolling the ball toward the detection sensor 1240 and when dropping the ball downward without contacting the ball, due to the difference in posture, and the horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310 And a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the end in the short side direction of the plate portion 1310, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portions 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view And a load receiving portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 is provided with a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the rising position (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the rising position (open state) along which the short direction is along the front and rear direction The distance between the front plate 1200 and the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of a sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 is provided with a chamfered portion 1312 which is chamfered into an arc shape in cross section at an upper corner of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised posture (open state).

  The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length capable of mounting five balls in a row.

  The load receiving portion 1330 is an arc-shaped ball entry preventing portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmitting portion 1332 extending to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intervening transmitting portion An engagement portion 1333 protruding from the side 1332 in the rear view right side (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is disposed) is mainly provided.

  The engagement portion 1333 is extended to a position that interferes with the movement trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, not the corner but the chamfered portion 1333a contacts the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disc-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending in the axial radial direction from the main body portion 1410.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protruding pin 1412 protruding from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

  The projecting pin 1412 is a portion engaged with the distal end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the projecting pin 1412 is displaced with linear operation of the distal end member 1520 by switching of the excitation of the drive device 1500, and power transmission is performed. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 has a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an extending tip portion from an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411, and a pressing portion 1422 protruding from the rotating tip portion 1421 to the front side. Equipped with

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 which linearly moves the movable member by switching of the excitation, and a front end member 1520 of a front view H shape (shape having a recess respectively at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510 , Mainly.

  The tip end member 1520 is configured such that the upper recess thereof can accommodate the projecting pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, while the power transmission member 1400 rotates, a recess is formed in a shape that allows the projecting pin 1412 to be accommodated inside (see FIG. 20).

  The restricting member 1600 has a rod-like shaft 1610 pivotally supported by the support claw 1170, an extension 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft 1610 with a thickness equal to the diameter of the shaft 1610, and a main body A surface on the side of the member 1100 is mainly provided with an extending portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 which is formed in a surface position and is thicker than the extending portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening and closing plate 1300, and receives the pressing load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 when the opening and closing plate is in the raised posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150 (the ball is discharged in an overlapping manner with the discharge port 1150) in the inclined posture (the posture in which the end opposite to the shaft 1610 is disposed at the lower position, storage state). In a manner that can be narrowed to an extent not

  The restricting member 1600 is biased by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the raised posture (the posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, the discharging state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes an outlet 1710 which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the outlet 1150 passes. The ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000 taken along line IX-IX of FIG. 8 and 9, the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122 to cover the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be made to follow the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval where balls can pass, in the state shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. By guiding the ball in between, the ball can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and irregular winning (for example, even if not guided by the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball that hit a nail or the like is blown away in the lateral direction Passing through 1240) can be prevented.

  Although details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300, the sphere is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the sphere is not stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XI-XI of FIG. 10 and 11, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated. Further, in FIG. 11, the outline of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the ball. As a result, the balls guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are prevented from falling.

  A ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls along the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 along the slope, and the detection sensor 1240 from the right end And enter the reservoir channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the ball is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the covering front plate 1200. Therefore, compared to the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to an extent that the plate portion 1310 abuts on the covering front plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost necessary for the opening and closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  Further, by reducing the movement trajectory of the tip of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the short direction, interference between the ball passing through the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the opening and closing plate 1300 can be avoided easily when the opening and closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although the details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state in the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere which has passed the detection sensor 1240 is the storage channel Stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of the present embodiment is formed to have a length capable of storing spheres with the predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) as the upper limit. When ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the tenth ball stops at a position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball is a plug, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere tries to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In the present embodiment, the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state triggered by the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240, whereby the ball remaining on the open / close plate 1300 flows downward to the open / close plate 1300 The spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged by switching the restriction member 1600 to the discharge state with the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state in which the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but remains at a position where it does not pass through the detection sensor 1240 Do.

  When the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but the tenth sphere receives the load from the entering prevention unit 1331 in the middle of the switching and the stored flow It is pushed into the inside of the passage 1231 (see FIG. 21 (b)). That is, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a mode in which the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed, and on the way to the closing state of the opening and closing plate 1300 Block the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while in contact with the ball (while rubbing), so that the timing at which the tenth ball passes the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates deviates. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Therefore, it is not necessary to set a limitation in a period from detection of the specified number of eyes by the detection sensor 1240 to change of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state, and it can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening and closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after waiting for the tenth ball to abut on the ninth ball (after the center of the ball is disposed on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the entering prevention unit 1331 In order to operate the opening and closing plate 1300, the opening and closing plate 1300 is controlled to open and close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of balls passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball (delay) only for the 11th ball. That is, in the first to tenth spheres, it is possible to pass the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progressing speed of the special game state, as compared to the case of delaying the passage of the ball on the whole sphere.

  For example, in the case of a structure in which winning of the subsequent ball is delayed by decelerating the ball passing the detection sensor 1240 once at the passing position, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, Since each of the 10th to 10th balls decelerates the balls even when rolling on the rolling surface 1311 partially in a row, the time until the 10th ball passes the detection sensor 1240 And the game was delayed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration for decelerating the first ball to the tenth ball is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. For example, even if the balls flow in series, since it is possible to pass the detection sensor 1240 with the flow down speed, it is possible to speed up the game.

  In addition, most of the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state has passed due to repair such as ball clogging, and even when the game is started at the end of that period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is not There is nothing to slow down the meaning, so more balls can be entered.

  Also, with regard to the 11th ball, even if it flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 at a high speed (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening and closing plate 1300 starts the tilting operation), regardless of the speed The 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th ball.

  The arrangement of the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12, the ball | bowl stored in the storage flow path 1231 is illustrated.

  Here, a mechanism will be described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are arranged the same each time. First, the ball P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided by the rearward inclined guide surface 1231a at the lowermost part of the storage channel 1231 and is disposed at a position that contacts the front of the regulating member 1600. Ru.

  The sphere P1 is weighted by the subsequent arrival of the entering sphere P2 at the lower end, and settles in the configuration illustrated in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side (the right side in FIG. 12) of the sphere P1 in a front view. That is, depending on how much the pachinko machine 10 is arranged in the back and forth direction, it may be closer to the covering front plate 1200 side or may be closer to the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, the projecting portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the projecting end of the projecting portion 1140 abuts on the ball P2, so that the ball P2 is a main body member in a state of contacting the ball P1. It does not abut the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The ball P2 is weighted by subsequently arriving at a position where the entering ball P3 abuts the ball P2. Here, in the present embodiment, even if the protruding portion 1235 disposed on the covering front plate 1200 is at any position in the front-rear direction of the ball P2, the ball P2 and the protruding portion 1235 are on the right side. And the ball P3 enters and is disposed at a position where the ball P3 can not abut the thin plate member 1210 of the front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the ball P2 in the longitudinal direction, the center position of the ball P3 is disposed on the back side of the center position of the ball P2, and the ball P3 is on the back side of the ball P2 (FIG. It will come in contact with). Therefore, the ball P2 is moved to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the ball P3. Thereby, the ball P2 settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the ball P3 receives the load from the ball P4 which subsequently enters the ball, under the same conditions as the condition in which the ball P2 receives the load from the ball P3 (except that the back and forth direction is reversed), Settle to the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the n-th ball into the reservoir channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load directed from the (n + 1) -th ball to the front and rear direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the fixing of the arrangement of the spheres is not performed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but the projecting portion 1140 is provided at a predetermined location while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere. This is realized by arranging 1235. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the balls are stored in a fixed arrangement each time the act of storing the balls in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the storage quantity of each time can be unified.

  Discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the ball P1 is discharged and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the ball P2 is discharged and the ball P3 is at the position of the ball P2 in FIG. It is illustrated that it is placed at

  As described later, with the excitation of the solenoid 1510 released and the opening / closing plate 1300 being closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, and the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. At the time of discharge of the ball. The ball (ball P1 in FIG. 12) disposed at the lowermost end is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the subsequent ball (ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are discharged in order.

  Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the extending portion (the flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage channel 1231, Since the flow velocity of the ball P2 is larger than the flow-down speed of the ball P2, a gap is generated between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load given from the ball P2 to the ball P1 can be minimized at the time of discharging the ball P1, the velocity at the time of discharging the ball P1 is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored following the ball P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the subsequent spheres P2, P3 and P4 flow downward (downward in FIG. 12) along the slope of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 abut on the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the balls P3 and P4 are turned in the directions DP3 and DP4 having longitudinal components, and decelerate while passing through the positions of the leading balls P2 and P3 respectively.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by contacting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the ball stored earlier is retained. Relocate to where it was and decelerate.

  Thereby, a gap is generated between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load given from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 can be minimized when discharging the sphere P2. The velocity at the time of discharge of the ball P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored following the ball P2.

  That is, since the subsequent spheres flow down the storage channel 1231 for a long distance, the larger the number of stored spheres, the more the ball accelerates due to the gravity of the subsequent spheres, and the discharge mode of the sphere P2 Although there is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like may change, the change of the discharge mode is determined by the action of the above-mentioned protruding portions 1140 and 1235 (the ball to be discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and its subsequent Space between the ball and the ball to suppress the load due to gravity).

  Thereafter, the spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231 by repeating the flow from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13 (a) to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13 (b). As described above, by creating a gap between the ball discharged by rolling the rolling surface 1231b and the ball following the ball, the ball discharged is discharged without receiving the weight of the ball following it Therefore, regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the discharge mode (the speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) of the balls can be made uniform.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to equalize the discharge mode (the speed at the time of discharge, the discharge interval, and the like) of the balls by the protruding portions 1140 and 1235. In the present embodiment, the ball discharging mode is a mode that requires approximately 0.2 seconds for one ball to be discharged. Therefore, the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged by maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning apparatus on line XVI-XVI of FIG. It is a sectional view of 1000. In FIGS. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in the non-excitation state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300. It is spaced apart.

  Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive a load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the discharge state by the biasing force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 overhangs in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or less than the projection area of the sphere. This can physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning apparatus on line XIX-XIX of FIG. It is a sectional view of 1000. In FIGS. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The interposed transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. In this state, the extending portion 1620 of the regulation member 1600 receives a load from the intervention transmission portion 1332 and the posture of the regulation member 1600 Switches to the inclined posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and an urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the restriction member 1600. In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring And the structure capable of suppressing the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state. The large biasing force of the torsion spring makes it possible to immediately switch the regulating member 1600 to the discharge state, which leads to the effect that it is possible to quickly discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. The adopted structure will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the engagement portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed on the operation trajectory E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening and closing plate 1300 starts operation from the closed state, while the opening and closing plate 1300 is open. When the power transmission member 1400 is switched to the position shown in FIG. The movement locus E1 is illustrated as an outline of a movement locus of a portion including the pressing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but a surface forming the rotation direction. The axis direction is perpendicular to the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, although the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) for biasing the regulating member 1600 is in the direction of pushing back the opening / closing plate 1300 toward the closed state, this biasing force is a power regardless of how large the biasing force is. It can not be applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening and closing plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening and closing plate 1300. Therefore, it can be unnecessary to keep applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the switching plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 is excited so as to generate a driving force that can switch the regulating member 1600 to the storage state against the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage is reduced. Also, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even if a variable load is applied to the opening and closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the restriction member 1600 can be maintained in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, as the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of a ball is exemplified. That is, for example, since the open / close plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311, when the ball lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball and the number of balls changes frequently. A variable load is given to 1300. Also, for example, the load is applied to the restriction member 1600 from the ball stored in the storage flow passage 1231, in particular, the ball disposed at the lowermost end of the storage flow passage 1231; And give a fluctuating load.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600 interlock with each other, so the restriction member 1600 can not be discharged while maintaining the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300. Therefore, even if the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state improperly, it is physically possible that the sphere (more than 10 spheres in this embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 passes the detection sensor 1240 It can prevent. Thereby, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be illegally maintained in the open state, and it is possible to prevent the fraud that increases the number of prize balls to be acquired.

  FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600 in chronological order. FIG. 20 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a). 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a view of FIG. 21 (a). 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (d) is XXId of FIG. 21 (c). It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus 1000 in -XXId line | wire.

  In FIGS. 20 and 21, only the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. The other components are not shown, and the state of the opening / closing plate 1300 changing from the open state to the closed state is shown in time series.

  That is, in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (state where the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is In FIG. 20C, the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1 corresponds to FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2 from the reference line O1. A state in which the position 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the first specified winning hole 1000a disposed on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line as a reference, and the outline of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as the cross section used in the illustration is an imaginary line. It is illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b) without interfering with the ball.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, although the power transmission member 1400 rotates, the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the posture as it is. In FIG. 20 (c), the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 abut.

  Thus, power can be applied to the power transmission member 1400 before the opening and closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, the rotation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is started simultaneously with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the restricting member 1600 maintains the discharge state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state. And an intermediate state (see FIG. 21B).

  In the middle state of the opening and closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the ball flows down to the front side (right side of FIG. 21 (b)) of the opening and closing plate 1300 by projecting the plate portion 1310 to the front side. The balls can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the ball acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21 (b)), but the power transmission is achieved by moving the tip member 1520 in the rear view right (FIG. 21 (a) right). Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 through the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing plate 1300 from rotating by the weight of the ball.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening and closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), the ball can be prevented from passing downward on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 while enabling discharge of the ball from the outlet 1150. .

  Thus, during the time taken to discharge the balls from the storage channel 1231, the problem of maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharge state, and the problem of shortening the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 which is opposite to it (shortening the interval) In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the plate portion 1310 is extended to an intermediate position while pinching the ball between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200 while continuing the discharge of the ball. , Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in a posture that prevents the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is at a position separated below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. Can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the restricting member 1600 is in the discharging state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000 .

  As shown in FIG. 21 (d), at the same time when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 interlock with each other by the operation of the tip end member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the restriction member 1600.

  Although the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state has been described in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is grasped by going back to FIGS. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21 (d) changes to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, since the load receiving portion 1330 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed in the movement direction of the restricting member 1600, the restricting member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the load receiving portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharging state after the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated, the opening and closing plate 1300 can not be maintained in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharging state. Can. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent occurrence of an irregular winning that the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts to be discharged.

  Also, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 if the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still opened and the ball abuts on the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In this embodiment, it can be impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open / close plate 1300 is in the process of changing from the open state to the closed state, the rotating front end 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward. When the ball abuts, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 which works in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the ball. Therefore, when the ball abuts on the rolling surface 1311, the weight of the ball causes the plate portion 1310 to move downward, so the ball can not be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. This can prevent the occurrence of irregular winnings.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110, and FIG. 22 (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. If the value of the first hit random number counter acquired based on the start winning combination matches any of the determination values defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22 (b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type , And is specified in association with the type of the entrance that became the lottery trigger of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19" A jackpot A is associated with and defined (see 202b1 in FIG. 22 (b)).

  In the case of the jackpot A, the 15 round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 payout balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49", the jackpot B is associated and defined (refer to 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  If the jackpot is B, eight rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 1200 winning balls.

  In the range of “50 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot C is associated and defined (refer to 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot C, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 600 winning balls.

  As described above, the first variable winning device 1000 is the first operation pattern in any case when it is a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64). Works with Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be won by the player appears as a difference due to the number of rounds, and as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls for payout increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

  In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), it is possible to win 15 rounds of jackpots with a probability of 20%, but to be 4 rounds of jackpots with a probability of 50% So basically, you can not expect a large number of balls. On the other hand, since the 4 round jackpot game is finished in a short time as compared to the 15 round jackpot game, it is possible to start the launch of the ball to aim for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202 b 4 in FIG. 22 (b)).

  If the jackpot becomes a, as in the jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 payout balls.

  In the range of "80 to 89", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the big hit b (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot b, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with the second operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that of the jackpot a.

  In the range of "90 to 99", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the big hit c (see 202b6 in FIG. 22 (b)).

  In the case of the jackpot c, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with the third operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time taken for the jackpot game is longer than the jackpot a, and is awarded for each round The time it takes to play balls and jackpots fluctuates.

  As described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is made (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the jackpot type. Due to the difference in the operation pattern, while making the jackpot round number unchanged, it is possible to change the time required for the jackpot game while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In this embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c), the time required for the big hit game can be extended as compared with the case where the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when a jackpot number (small jackpot b and jackpot c) having a small number of payouts is obtained, the timing for striking the next jackpot and hitting the ball will be delayed compared to the case of jackpot a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency is obtained when the player is obtained by the jackpot game by the difference in jackpot type. It is possible to make a difference in the number of payouts included.

  In this way, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), jackpot (jackpot a) that can receive a large amount of time-efficient payout, time-efficiently paid out Also, it is possible to provide a small jackpot (jackpot b, jackpot c), and to increase the player's profit obtained when the jackpot a is won. Thereby, while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a, the difference in the number of payouts when playing continuously for a predetermined time (the maximum value of the total number of winning balls and the minimum value of the total number of winning balls It is possible to configure a gaming machine capable of increasing the difference).

  As mentioned above, during the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state, the special symbol's definite variation state of the special symbol that is likely to be the big hit of the special symbol and likely to be the big hit a (maximum hit ball) when the big hit is repeated is repeated. This facilitates the player's winning of a large number of winning balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22 (c)). Moreover, in the high probability state of a normal symbol, "5-204" is prescribed | regulated as a determination value used as a hit of a normal symbol (refer 202 c 2 of FIG.22 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to It is determined whether or not it is a hit. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a time measurement of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23C is a view showing a change, and FIG. 23C is a view showing a time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 performed when a big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the open / close plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, a round game R of the first round is started.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as the time in which the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged as a whole sphere. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored storage channels. Be done. Therefore, it takes 2 seconds to adjust to discharge 10 balls.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  In the first operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round. Therefore, even after the second round, a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a, so the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be advanced quickly.

  Similarly, round game R of the third round to the 15th round at maximum is repeated between rounds R between the rounds with the first interval time Int 1 between the rounds R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced at the same time to open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated based on the second operation pattern. When the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, a round game R of the first round is started.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the second round is started.

  The inter-round second interval time Int2 is set as a time capable of at least partially discharging the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored storage channels. Be done. Therefore, since the number of the balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, if ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds There are still five spheres remaining in the reservoir channel 1231.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the balls of the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the second round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls can not pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends for the first time after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  Similarly, round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated between second round time interval Int2 between rounds between rounds R similarly, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts are compared between the first actuation pattern and the second actuation pattern in the 15 round jackpot game. In addition, the ball can be fired at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds.

  First, when performing a big hit game in the first operation pattern, the time required for ten balls to pass through the first specified winning opening 1000a is at least 6 seconds. If the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time Int1 between the rounds, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) x 15R + ED (11s). Further, the number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10 C × 15 R).

  On the other hand, when playing a big hit game in the second operation pattern, although 10 balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a in the first round, only 5 balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) x 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the number of payouts is 1,200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only up to 5 balls can be won in round games R after the second round.

  Therefore, when playing a big hit game with the second operation pattern, while it takes three or more times longer than playing a big hit game with the first operation pattern, the payout balls become about half, and the time efficiency of winning balls is obtained Is dramatically worse.

  This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the case of playing a jackpot game in the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rare value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a, improve the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot, and improve the interest for the jackpot game.

  In addition, although 2nd interval time Int2 between rounds was set to 1.0 second, it is not limited to this, It can set to various numerical values, and it is possible to change it at each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between the rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds It is also possible.

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between the rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, for example, only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, so for example, the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round When ten pieces are stored, the round game R is started with eight balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, so the number of payouts is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, so for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If it has been stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  Moreover, it is also possible to set the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds to 2.0 seconds (or more). In this case, there are no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the immediately following round game R, and ten balls can be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, so a large number (150) of awards It can be desired to shorten the ball and the progress time of the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated based on the third operation pattern. When the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, a round game R of the first round is started.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  By discharging the balls in the first interval time Int1 between the rounds, a state is formed in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the second round. (In the present embodiment, ten pachinko balls can be passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a, can be paid out the ball of that minute, and the first operation time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to receive the payout of the winning balls in the same manner as the first operation pattern while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the 10th round are repeated between the rounds R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  When the round game R of the 10th round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds passes, After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the eleventh round is started.

  In the eleventh round, the timer 15 starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied in the round game R of the 11th round, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eleventh round is ended.

  Similarly, round games R of the 12th round to the 15th round are repeated between the rounds R with the second interval time Int2 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  By discharging the balls during the second interval time Int2 between the rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R after the eleventh round. Therefore, after the 11th round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls can not pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends for the first time after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  In addition, the number of winning balls to be paid out in each round game is also reduced compared to the tenth round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller compared to the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15) and the payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game It can be changed (by the timing) depending on what round game the player is playing.

  In the third operation pattern, although the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final stage has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, there may be a mode in which the number of payouts initially is small, but the number of payouts increases toward the final stage, or a mode in which there is a peak of the number of payouts in the middle round.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to the present operation pattern, by changing the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game depending on what round of the round game R is played, the jackpot game is given speed, and the player's interest is improved. It can be done.

  In the case of playing a jackpot game in the third operation pattern, the player is expected to pay out in the first operation pattern since there is no change from the first operation pattern up to the round game R in the tenth round. It is possible to play the jackpot game with the feeling of expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time between rounds Int2 set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to any numerical value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in a certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to all 1.5 seconds, and in another certain jackpot type, the second inter-round time of the third operation pattern The setting such as setting the interval time Int2 to be 0.5 seconds in the odd round and 1.0 seconds in the even round can be performed in advance.

  That is, by further dividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games different in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the 11th round, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the end of the jackpot game, and the attention to jackpot game can be improved.

  Also, the change in the degree of payout may be associated with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when playing a jackpot game in the third operation pattern, the liquid crystal screen displays the figure of the character that is running, and the beginning of the remaining stamina of that character (the first round) is displayed The character being run runs well and, in conjunction with that, many prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the character's stamina is lost (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run, gets out of the way, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  As described above, by making the degree of payout of the winning balls correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, the player can easily empathize with the liquid crystal effect, thereby improving the player's interest in the jackpot game be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game with the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced on the basis of the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so the jackpot game is predetermined. It is possible to progress over time for presentation time. In other words, for example, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the time of the big hit game by the ball winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a being performed unexpectedly at high speed It is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image to be loop-reproduced over a predetermined effect time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before completely viewing the jackpot effect.

  In addition, when performing a big hit game with a 2nd operation pattern or a 3rd operation pattern, the presentation displayed on a liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (such as "do your best") is set so that the cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate is more likely to be displayed as the jackpot game time becomes longer. As a result, the jackpot game with the second actuation pattern or the third actuation pattern can be progressed without stressing (or rather willing) the player.

  On the other hand, it may be displayed as an aspect of giving stress to the player. For example, it will be described that the running character is displayed during the jackpot game, and the character is displayed as a break in the rest area in the interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, the interval between the rounds is set every time the ball is won by the specified number, and the character can complete the run without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the specified number of winnings is not satisfied and the inter-round interval does not occur unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited for Therefore, it is possible to perform effects in which fatigue accumulates without any gap with the game mode (in the effect mode in which time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is originally short It is possible to have the effect that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the character that is exhausted and to give stress to the player, so it is possible to enhance the player's improving mind that he / she recovers at the next big hit.

  In addition, when the same display is performed, the character may perform hydration in accordance with the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently supply water, the number of times of supplying water (the number of prizes) is the first after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern. Since the period during which the character runs (the period of the jackpot game) also increases as it decreases compared to the operation pattern, the amount of water that can be supplied is insufficient compared to the sweat coming out of the character, and the character becomes tired more and more It is possible to perform the effect to be played (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode) without causing a difference from the game mode. In this way, it is possible to make the character's appearance correspond to the profit obtained by the player (payout ball including time efficiency), and what is the jackpot won by the player (medium hit) Can be made easy for the player to grasp through the effects of the entire jackpot game).

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed, but the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment is a ball that can be stored inside It is configured that the number of can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, the arrangement of the balls stored in a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 when the ball enters from the second specified winning hole 2255a is shown by a hidden line.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 is provided with an opening / closing plate 1300 similar to that of the first embodiment, a power transmission member 1400 and a drive device 1500, and a body member slightly different from the first embodiment. 2100, a covering front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further, a second variable winning apparatus 2800 newly disclosed in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 includes a second specified winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a basis for payout in the case of a big hit game passes.

  The second specified winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, when the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a or the second specified winning opening 2255a, which is normally closed, has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) The action of opening the ball is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until or until 10 balls are won. Although the details will be described later, the opening operation is enabled in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 1000a and the second specified winning hole 2255a, and therefore, a greater amount of winning balls are paid out than in the normal time.

  The main body member 2100 is added to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, storage portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support portion 1160 and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. And a slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is similarly a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and in which the second detection sensor 2255 can be inserted. And a drive guide rib 2183 in which a pair of wall portions are arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and linearly extended in the left-right direction, and a pair of drive guide ribs along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 The transmission guide rib 2184 having a wall extending in parallel and extending in a straight line extending in the vertical direction, and a shaft 21 supporting the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800 And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is an elongated hole for guiding the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 disposed in the covering front plate 2200 is inserted.

  The ribs 2183 and 2184 are ribs for guiding the sliding motion of the interposing rod 2850 and the transmitting rod 2860 interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected in the upper right direction of the containing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the containing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the covering front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second storage unit 2250 is provided.

  The second housing portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of a thin plate formed in a plane position with the thin plate member 1210, and has an opening facing upward and a terminal end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The second detection channel 2251 and the second detection channel 2251 are disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture in which the opening is aligned in the extending direction of the second storage channel 2251 near the storage channel 2251 and the upper end portion of the second storage channel 2251 The sensor 2255 is closed between the front plate of the second accommodation portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the left side of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left And an inclined surface 2257.

  In the case where the second storage flow path 2251 passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and the sphere is accommodated inside the second accommodation portion 2250, when the outlet 1150 is closed and the sphere is stored, the number of stored spheres is It is configured to be 14 at maximum.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device having a second specified winning opening 2255a and producing the same function as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the ball enters the housing 1230 by switching the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is switched to the housing through the second housing 2250 by switching the second variable winning device 2800. When entering the ball 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects a sphere.

  The inclined surface 2257 allows the ball to flow down to the side where the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are configured to be directed to the flow path forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 Ru. Therefore, during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the first specified winning opening 1000a is in the open state or the second specified winning opening 2255a is in the opening state, the player can open any one of the specified winning openings 1000a and 2255a. If the game is in the state, it is possible to receive a large amount of winning balls by playing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is disposed in the second storage channel 2251 with a margin for arranging one sphere on the upstream side. Therefore, a plurality of spheres flow in series in the second storage channel 2251 at a timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (a timing at which the remaining number of balls passes the second detection sensor 2255 to reach a specified number). , A specified number of balls or more can enter the ball.

  In addition to the configuration (shaft portion 1610, extending portion 1620, and ball receiving portion 1630) included in the restricting member 1600 of the first embodiment, the restricting member 2600 further extends the shaft portion 1610 to the left, and the extending portion 1620 And a second extending portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 in a plane direction view of the second embodiment.

  The second extension portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the second restricting member 2600 performs the switching operation of the second variable winning device 2800 and the switching member 1300 of the second variable winning device 2800. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

  The second variable winning device 2800 has a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 which slides in the lateral direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a middle abdomen while one end thereof is supported by the tip member 2820 And a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and protruding from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100, and a tip of the transmission member 2830. A rod-like interposition rod 2850 fixed at one end to member 2820 and slidably disposed inside drive guide rib 2183, and one end disposed at a position where it can abut on interposition rod 2850, and a transmission guide rib The other end is extended along the inner side of the 2184 and the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600. A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The interpositional rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183 and is restricted from moving in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured in such a manner that they move closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 increases (the distance between the drive guide ribs 2183 decreases). Movement in the back and forth direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184, and is restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured in such a manner that they move closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 increases (the distance between the two is reduced). Movement in the back and forth direction is restricted.

  The end surfaces of the interposing rod 2850 and the transmission rod 2860 in contact with each other are inclined to face each other. As a result, the transmission of the force from the intervening rod 2850 to the transmission rod 2860 can be smoothly performed.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is formed in a circular arc shape in which the opposing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod 2860 is curved, and the regulating member 2600 is directed to the discharging state. The biasing force of a biasing torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod 2860 via the opposing surface 2641. Thus, the transmission rod 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a ball can not enter the ball in both of the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for making it possible to enter the ball into the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

  In FIG. 27A to FIG. 27C, the operations of the restricting member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in time series. FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), the configuration unnecessary for the description is omitted for ease of understanding, and the slide plate 2840 changes its state from the closed state to the open state. The situation is shown in chronological order.

  The state in which the solenoid 2810 is de-energized in FIG. 27A and the tip member 2820 is disposed at the most distant position from the solenoid 2810 is immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited in FIG. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the tip member 2820 is disposed at the middle position of the movement range is disposed in the state where the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (final reach position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). The respective states are illustrated respectively. Note that, in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. , And the open state which enables the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulating member 2600 is in the discharging state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excitation state, the restriction member 2600 can be prevented from being in the storage state by the action of the second variable winning device 2800. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, a control aspect (for example, the control aspect of the first embodiment) that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains non-excitation) Thus, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

  Further, when the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 or the second storage flow path 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, displacement of the tip member 2820 causes displacement of the slide plate 2840 via the transmission member 2830 and displacement of the transmission rod 2860 via the intervening rod 2850. Do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposing rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are in contact with each other is slightly separated in the state of FIG. The motion of the rod 2860 is initiated substantially simultaneously.

  The lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 applies a load in the push-down direction to the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 as the transmission rod portion 2860 is lowered and displaced by being pushed by the end portion of the intervening rod portion 2850. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is slightly pushed down to be in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, when the tip end member 2830 is moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the interposition rod portion 2850 to maintain the regulating member 2600 in the storage state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the intervening rod portion 2850 slides to the extent that the inclined surface passes through the transmitting rod portion 2860 while facing the transmitting rod portion 2860 side, whereby the intervening rod portion from the transmitting rod portion 2860 The load applied towards 2850 can flow in a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the bar 2850.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposing rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposing rod portion 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 through the regulating member 2600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip end member 2820 through the restriction member 2600 from fluctuating, and therefore the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840, which changes in state due to the displacement of the tip end member 2820, in the open state. It is possible to prevent the driving force of the vehicle from fluctuating. Thereby, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction generated by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod 2860 to change the state of the regulating member 2600. Therefore, the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. Thereby, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the restricting member 2600 is possible, so that it is possible to suppress deviation between the control value of the number of discharges designated every interval time between rounds in the big hit game and the actual number of discharges. It is possible to stabilize the number of discharged products.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27 (c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the movement direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod 2860. Thus, the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown), which biases the restricting member 2600 toward the disposition in the discharge state, effectively acts on the transmission rod 2860.

  Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the restriction by the interposition rod 2850 is released, the biasing force of the torsion spring Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol in the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit. It is specified in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  In addition, the jackpot classification that is specified in correspondence with the value of the first hit classification counter C2 in the case of becoming a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery drawing based on entering the first ball entrance 64), The description is omitted because it is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and in the following, in the present embodiment, a case of winning a big win in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entry 640) explain.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29" A jackpot d is associated with and specified (see 202 b 21 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot d, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with a fourth operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of the number obtained by adding the limited increase amount to about 2250 winning balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 99", the jackpot e is associated and specified (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot e, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed with the fifth operation pattern (described in detail later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the winning balls to be paid out to the player are paid out by adding the limited increment to the 2250 winning balls, but the difficulty level of increasing the number of payouts is compared with the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the number of payouts is increased, the time taken for the jackpot game is configured to greatly exceed the case of the jackpot d.

  As described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is made (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the jackpot type. Due to the difference in the operation pattern, it is possible to change the time required for the jackpot game while making the number of payout rounds unchanged while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (1-7 round game R round). When the first variable winning device 2000 is allowed to receive balls of the specified number or more, an extra payout is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (round game R of the eighth round) and the progress of the eighth round It is configured to maximize the time it takes. On the other hand, in a round game R after a specific round game R, the player can acquire the balls for the increased amount paid out by causing the first variable winning device 2000 to receive the balls of the specified number or more. Configured as.

  In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, as a profit including time efficiency, the gaming method by which the player can obtain the highest profit is stopped by the specified number of winnings until the eighth round, and the round games R after the ninth round. The goal is to increase the number of payouts by aiming for more than the prescribed number of winnings. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put in the first variable winning device 2000 more balls by a prescribed number of rounds, depending on what round game R it is, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an open pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30 (b) is a view showing the fifth in the fifth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the clocking change of 1 specific winning a prize mouth 1000a and 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the timer 28 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the solenoid 2810 to move the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. The slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds is closed. Drive control, and after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, start round game R of the second round.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the outlet 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the number of balls (for example, 11 or 12) exceeding 10 in each round game R may be made to win the second specified winning opening 2255a at the timing of passing of the second specified winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time between rounds Int1 is 10 pieces, so more than 10 balls were won in the second specified winning hole 2255a in each round game R At the start of the immediately following round game R, the number of balls exceeded is left in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of stored pieces when entering the ball from the second storage flow path 2251 side is 14 pieces, so in the big hit game of the big hit d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds Limited to 4 through the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to limit the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over winning) that can be acquired by a player who plays a jackpot game of jackpot d to 60 (= 15 × 4 C). As a result, it is possible to prevent a large change in the number of payouts due to the difference in the game mode (timing of launch, interval of launch, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can equally enjoy the profit regardless of the player's experience value.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the 15th maximum round are repeated between the rounds R between the rounds with the first interval time Int 1 between the rounds R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to be displaced at the same time so as to open and close the second specified winning opening 2255a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 2810 is such that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the timer 28 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the solenoid 2810 to move the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. The slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the outlet 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the number of balls (for example, 11 or 12) exceeding 10 in each round game R may be made to win the second specified winning opening 2255a at the timing of passing of the second specified winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time between rounds Int1 is 10 pieces, so more than 10 balls were won in the second specified winning hole 2255a in each round game R At the start of the immediately following round game R, the number of balls exceeded is left in the storage channel 1231.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the seventh round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds similarly between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to displace and open and close the second specified winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds has elapsed, and the first interval time Int1 between the rounds After the lapse of, the round game R of the eighth round is started.

  In the eighth round, the timer 15 starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the round game R of the eighth round, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is ended.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, when balls exceeding the specified number have passed the second specified winning combination 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the round game R of the eighth round Since the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, in the eighth round game round R, perform only up to the number of winnings after subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number in the seventh round) from the specified number Because it can not be done, the payout of the prize ball including the eighth round is equalized to the payout of the prize balls for the specified number up to the eighth round. In addition, since it is not possible to win a prescribed number of pachinko balls in round game R of the eighth round, wait 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, before proceeding to the next round. It will move to the game.

  As a result, the player suffers from the feeling that the extra prize balls paid out by the seventh round are lost and the time loss that the eighth round game R is prolonged more than necessary. You will receive Thus, by the seventh round, it is possible to play a game carefully so as not to win balls exceeding a prescribed number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning of balls exceeding the prescribed number, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

  In addition, if there is no winning over the specified number by the seventh round, the balls of the specified number can be passed through the 1 specified winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the payout of the specified number of balls is received It is possible to end the eighth round game R without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, it is possible to receive the payout of the specified number of winning balls while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Therefore, in the jackpot game of the jackpot e, intentionally stopping the number of winnings exceeding the prescribed number until the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the seventh round can be maintained high.

  In addition, when the jackpot game R of the eighth round is finished, the timer means controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds, and the first interval between rounds After the lapse of time Int1, a round game R of the ninth round is started. In addition, at the time of the start of round game R of the 9th round, it can be considered as a state where a ball does not remain in storage channel 1231.

  In the ninth round, the solenoid 2810 starts to measure the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. To drive the slide plate 2840 for a long time.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round is ended.

  Similarly, after the round game R between the 10th round and the 15th round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds between each round game R, the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specified winning hole 2255a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is such that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed until the timer means passes the first interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds). The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the round game R after the ninth round, the opening and closing plate 1300 does not open and close, so the winning balls paid out by the ball that has won the second specified winning opening 2255a beyond the specified number after the ninth round The player can receive it without being deducted.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game of jackpot e is performed, the jackpot game R is suppressed so that the winning of the second specified winning opening 2255a exceeding the prescribed number in the jackpot game R does not occur until the seventh round, and the jackpot game R of the ninth round onward is stipulated. Aim to win the second specified winning combination 2255a exceeding the number is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the largest profit when considering profits including time efficiency.

  That is, in the round game R of each round, when the balls exceeding the specified number are put into the second specified winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains a profit and a case where the player suffers a loss. In this way, different game characteristics can be provided for each round of the jackpot game, and the alertness of the player who performs the jackpot game can be improved (the random jackpot game can be prevented from being performed) .

  In addition, according to the present operation pattern, the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by winning the ball exceeding the prescribed number in the second specified winning hole 2255a, substantially after the ninth round. It can be restricted. This makes it possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to the difference in the game mode (the timing of launch, the interval of launch, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the payout balls from significantly changing. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can equally enjoy the profit regardless of the player's experience value.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the ball reached the flow path forming portion when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed and the ball which has flowed down to the downstream of the opening and closing plate 1300 when open is dropped as it is. The first variable winning device 3000 is configured to delay the falling of the ball when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, and to win a part of the balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the provided front plate 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes the same opening / closing plate 1300 as the first embodiment, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the regulation member 1600, and the rear cover 1700. A body member 3100 and a covering front plate 3200 slightly different from the one embodiment are provided. In FIG. 32, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

  The main body member 3100 is added to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, storage portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support portion 1160 and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. The additional winning opening 3181 disposed in a manner to be connected to the front left side wall of the covering front plate 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the front left side wall of the additional winning opening 3181 And a curved extension plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

  The additional winning opening 3181 is a ball entry port that discharges the ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the gaming board 13, and the upper limit of 15 is obtained by the ball entering the additional winning hole 3181 The number of winning balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, eleven balls are set to be dispensed.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate for restricting the passage of the balls flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the vertical direction in the game area equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and is extended in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 . In addition, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed to be inclined downward as going from the mid-part to the left in front view, and to be inclined downward from the mid-part to the right in front view.

  In addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall 1220, the housing 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) included in the front cover 1200 of the first embodiment, the front cover 3200 is between the side wall 1220 and the housing 1230. In the region of the sheet member 1210 and extending from the back surface to the back surface of the thin plate member 1210.

  The fall delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening and closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening and closing plate 1300, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. An extending plate portion 3251 extending vertically from the rear surface of the thin plate member 1210, and connecting between the upper surface of the extending plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and having a curved upper surface And the formed rolling arc portion 3252.

  The fall delay plate 3250 has a long shape on the left and right, and slows down so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including bounding and falling due to rolling) half the length of the plate Are formed. The opening and closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that the ball flows down in 1 second or less when the ball flows down a distance half the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extending plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the separation width from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. An end surface 3251b is formed on the opposite surface 3251a and a surface facing the side wall 1220 of the housing 1230 and opposite to the housing 1230 and spaced apart from the housing 1230 by a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the sphere at the portion vertically below the center of the sphere in the state where the sphere is disposed most upstream (left in FIG. 32) It is considered as below, in the part which is switched over the radius of the sphere at the middle position (the middle position in the left and right direction in FIG. 32) and is arranged vertically below the center of the sphere in the most downstream side (right in FIG. 32) More than the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 is configured such that a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251a follows the longitudinal direction and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 3200. (A tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction follows the surface direction of the thin plate member 1210 (a direction in which it is extended)).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 in the axial direction is set larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  When the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball which has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covering front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side, the path from the rolling arc portion 3252 rightward to the dropping position Pf3, which is a position just before the ball falls Flow down through.

  In this embodiment, the distance between the opposing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is less than the diameter of the ball. The ball is prevented from falling through the rolling arc portion 3252. Therefore, the ball drops from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, the aspect of the flow of the ball on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. Note that FIG. 34 (b) illustrates a sphere disposed at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34 (c) illustrates a sphere disposed at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 34B and 34C, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and abuts on the plate portion 1310. The length of the flow down to the contact portion of the ball with the drop delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion in the axial direction and the center of the ball) is shortened as it flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34B, the diameter length r1 up to the portion where the ball abuts on the falling delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the ball. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34C, the diameter length r2 up to the portion where the ball abuts on the falling delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the ball.

  The diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of rotation of the sphere when the sphere rotates with the axis along the longitudinal direction as the axis of rotation. In other words, if the rotation speed of the ball is the same, the rolling speed of the ball decreases (the ball is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 become shorter. According to the present embodiment, the opposing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases as it goes downstream. Therefore, the radius of rotation of the ball is gradually shortened as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

  Further, the extending plate portion 3251 is extended along the rotation axis of the opening and closing plate 1300, and in FIG. 34 showing the axial direction view thereof, as compared with the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in), the ball is displaced downward. That is, the more the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250, the more the ball can be separated from the first specified winning opening 1000a, so the ball flowing down the drop delay plate 3250 can be deviated from the first specified winning hole 1000a. it can.

  Thereby, even if the ball entry preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and as it is directed toward the first specified winning opening 1000a. It is possible to prevent the situation of winning by jumping.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is moved upward to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 will be described. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is a first variable winning device 3000 along line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35 (a) shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, and FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) show the opened state of the opening / closing plate 1300. FIG. 35 (c) shows the opening / closing plate 1300. The outlines of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state of the above are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. Moreover, in FIG. 35 (a) and FIG.35 (b), an example of the ball which entered into the flow-path formation part of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus 3000 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that has landed on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 goes to the right in front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. In the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept in the closed state, it falls after reaching the dropping position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the extending plate portion 3251 described above, and the rolling time of the ball can be maintained long, and the attention power to the ball can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the opening and closing plate 1300 moves upward (rotational movement) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 is rotated. It smoothly moves upward along the arc shape of the movable arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the ball contacts at the start of movement of the ball is directed in the front and back direction, the movement of the ball at the start of operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be smoothened. it can.

  When the ball moves upward and rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down, the flow-down direction shown in FIG. 35A is parallel to the flow-down direction. Therefore, compared with the case where the flow-down direction of the ball changes in a completely different direction before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, the sense of discomfort of the player who visually recognizes the movement of the ball before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is alleviated. it can.

  As described above, the open / close state of the open / close plate 1300 is raised by raising the open / close plate 1300 from the state where the ball is disposed below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see phantom line in FIG. 35C). By being pushed back above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (backflowing), winning of the first specified winning opening 1000a becomes possible. That is, the ball, which is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and in a state in which winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a is impossible once, can be made possible to win the first specified winning opening 1000a by upward movement. Since it is possible to return, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In other words, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), there is still a possibility that the ball passes through the detection sensor 1240, so the state in which the ball is disposed upstream of the detection sensor 1240 is illustrated. It can be said that That is, by the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the open / close plate 1300 is closed.

  Also, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specified winning hole 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction close to the first specified winning hole 1000a. The player can be made to feel anticipation that the player may win a prize in the first specified winning combination hole 1000a, and the player's attention can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the closed state, the falling of the ball that has reached the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then the rolling surface 1311 is changed when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the open state. By revitalizing the above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball reached in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the big hit game will win the first specified winning hole 1000 a in the next round game Thus, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening and closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the ball being disposed on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. That is, as in the conventional game machine, in a structure in which the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening and closing plate, the ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing plate and the glass plate by the operation of the opening and closing plate. There is a problem that the opening of the board is obstructed, which may cause a loss to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening and closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained substantially constant (limit) can do. Therefore, as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely, the ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing plate 1300 and the glass plate The risk of the operation of the plate 1300 being blocked can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the ball is slightly sandwiched between the glass plate and the open / close plate 1300 while the open / close plate 1300 is in the open state. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position of.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the flow-down mode of the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. In FIG. 36 (a), the flow-down mode of the two balls reaching the first variable winning device 3000 when the ball is released is shown in time series, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball The ball when two balls are connected in a row to reach the first variable winning device 3000 by performing a special striking method (so-called "twist strike") to strike the ball weakly and strike the second ball strongly. The flow-down aspect of is illustrated in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is released and the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval, the ball is used. When the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be disposed on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 flows down the fall delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the opening / closing plate 1300 is next opened. Can.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls are in a row and reach the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed by the ball P1 winning the first specified winning opening 1000a. At the time of switching to the state, since the ball P2 is disposed near the position (drop position Pf3) immediately before the detection sensor 1240, it can not wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened next, and the ball P2 It falls from the board 3250.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down in a row due to a special hitting method, two balls flow down at a predetermined interval due to hitting (normal hitting method). The user can more easily receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time into a state in which the ball can enter the first specified winning opening 1000a). This makes it possible to suppress a game due to a special strike method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. In FIG. 37, the state immediately after the open / close plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state is illustrated, and a ball which bounces upward by colliding with the open / close plate 1300 is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300, no bounce occurs as shown in FIG. 37, and the ball landed on the open / close plate 1300 is rebounded during the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. Only the ball bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow-down mode of the bouncing ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Be done. Therefore, the bouncing ball allows the player to receive a payout of the winning ball. Therefore, the ball reaching the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing that the opening / closing plate 1300 switches to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player can not obtain a profit. It can be prevented.

  In addition, even when a ball is won in the additional winning opening 3181, since it is possible to win a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a separately from it, additional winning The payout by winning in the mouth 3181 becomes a prize ball (a profit for the additional portion) to be paid out beyond the specified number. That is, depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at a special timing that the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, a difference can be made in the profit obtained by the player. The ability to pay attention to the flowing balls can be improved.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where a special symbol of a definite variation state (high probability state) is given as an added value after the big hit regardless of the difference in the flow-down mode of the ball entering the first variable winning device 1000 However, the first variable winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a probability variation determination unit that makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right of transition to a definite variation state (high probability state) of a special symbol according to the difference in the flow-down mode of the ball. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown enlarged. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, the transmission window is formed on the game board 13 in the lower part of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability fluctuation of being disposed on the back side of the game board 13 The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering front plate 1200, the opening and closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability change determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 is a flow passage through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows down, and is a communication passage 4810 extending vertically downward and a bifurcated flow communicated with the lower end of the communication passage 4810. The probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, which is a channel, and the specific region 4830 disposed in communication with the flow channel on the left side in the front view of the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 and the channel in the right side A non-specific area 4840, a sorting device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with the gaming ball at a branch portion of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 detecting passage of the gaming ball in the specific area 4830, and And a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 for detecting passage of gaming balls in the specific area 4540.

  The communication passage 4810 is formed to have a length of approximately one second until the ball entering from the discharge port reaches the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed to protrude inside the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and causes the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830 (to form an open state) and to flow down to the nonspecific area 4840 (close state). A distribution operation member 4851 operable between the closed position and the closed position, and a solenoid 4852 for driving the distribution operation member 4851 are mainly included.

  It is only in the special round (the fifth round in this embodiment) in the jackpot game that the probability variation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right of transition to the special symbol's probability variation state (high probability state). In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in the open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in the closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to a special symbol oddity state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily made to win the second ball entry port 640.

  In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of a fraction.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol oddity state (high probability state) is given until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 50 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is 50 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination.

  In the present embodiment, five types of "big hit D", "big hit E", "big hit F", "big hit G", and "big hit f" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols (see FIG. 40). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 differ depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 indicates each jackpot type and the special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29" A jackpot D is associated with and defined (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot D, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  In the range of “30 to 49”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the big hit E (see 202b in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot E, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can rarely obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the high probability state.

  A jackpot F is associated with a range of “50 to 79” as the value of the first hit type counter C2 and defined (refer to 202 b 43 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot F, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  In the range of “80 to 99”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the jackpot G (see 202b 44 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot G, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls and can rarely obtain the right to shift the special symbol into the high probability state.

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 50% probability that the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) Can be obtained with certainty. On the other hand, even in the remaining 50%, it is rare to be able to obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94", The jackpot f is associated and specified (see 202b 45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot f, as with the jackpot D, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed with the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  A jackpot g is associated with the range of “95 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 and defined (see 202 b 45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of a jackpot g, a five round jackpot game is executed in a tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and can rarely obtain the right of transition to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  As described above, the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 are the sixth with a probability of 95% when it is a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640). Operate with the operation pattern. At this time, since the right to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) can be obtained almost certainly, the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64) It is advantageous for the player as compared to the case of winning a jackpot. Therefore, in order to obtain a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), in the special symbol oddity state (high probability state), the player plays the right game Do.

  During the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the variation time of the normal symbol shortens (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a increases when the normal symbol hits (1 It is set as second × 2). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol state of variation, it is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and if it is a big hit, it will be a large hit f (almost certainly the transition to the special symbol of high probability state) Because it is easy to repeat the probability change state of the special symbol which is likely to be a jackpot that can acquire the right of the player, it is easy for the player to acquire a large number of prize balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the open patterns of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specified area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is the first specified prize in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

  The MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are controlled so as to be held, and the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the third round is started.

  In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a prescribed number of pachinko balls have won) are satisfied in the third round of round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the third round is ended.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the timer means starts measuring the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to carry out the first specified prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the port 1000 a to cause the open / close plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the solenoid is held to close the distribution operation member 4851 again. The control unit 4852 drives and controls the distribution operation member 4851 for a short time. This predetermined time is set as a time that does not allow passage of the ball to the specific area 4830.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko ball wins) is satisfied in the fourth round round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls can not be entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a maximum interval of 0.6 seconds, it takes 6 seconds for the specified number of shots to be fired. That is, normally, it is only possible to enter about 5 balls into the first specified winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately five winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, so the sense of discomfort given to the player is suppressed by the time of the fourth round game R being shorter than the other rounds. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  In the second opening time OP2, when the number of spheres discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is less than seven (when the number of stored balls is up to six), all the balls discharged are probability fluctuation determination flow paths 4820 If the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 balls or more (when the number of balls stored is 7 or more), at least one of the balls discharged is It is set as a time shorter than the time when the ball of the part passes through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so even if the fourth round round game ends in the second operation time T2, The spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily made seven or more. Accordingly, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in the present operation pattern, it is not necessary to set the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round game R The opening and closing plate 1300 can be operated without discomfort. This will be described below.

  In the prior art, when the specified number of balls are won in the first specified winning opening 1000a before the start of the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 and the round game R is ended, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Although there is a risk that the ball can not be won in the first specified winning hole 1000a, and the player can not acquire the right to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to keep the opening and closing plate 1300 closed while the distribution operation member 4851 was kept closed before the operation (in one round, it was opened twice).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is a game characteristic that switches whether or not the ball won in the first specified winning opening 1000a by the round game R in the round immediately before the fifth round can be entered into the specific area 4830 Even when the ball can not enter the first specified winning hole 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state Since the ball heading to the specific area 4830 has already won a prize in the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol in the definite variation state (high probability state) without any problem.

  Therefore, in the present operation pattern, even when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round game R, the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 is performed by opening the opening / closing plate 1300. On the other hand, while preventing the player from having a sense of incongruity, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the player can not acquire the right of transition to the definite symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol by the prize mode. can do.

  In addition, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round round game R is held in the storage channel 1231 for the first operation time T1, so the first round in the fifth round round game R It is possible to prevent the ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. In this way, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol by the mode of winning to the first specified winning opening 1000a in the round game R in the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem of changing whether or not it can be done.

<When operating with the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 3rd round, description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed, and the round After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the timer means starts measuring the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to carry out the first specified prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the port 1000 a to cause the open / close plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the solenoid is held to close the distribution operation member 4851 again. The control unit 4852 drives and controls the distribution operation member 4851 for a short time. This short time operation is set as an operation which does not allow passage of the ball to the specific area 4830.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko ball wins) is satisfied in the fourth round round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls can not be entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a maximum interval of 0.6 seconds, it takes 6 seconds for the specified number of shots to be fired. That is, normally, it is only possible to enter about 5 balls into the first specified winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, ten balls (full balls) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled by approximately 5 winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced in the closed state with the balls winning in 3 seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231 .

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  In this operation pattern, the number of balls discharged from the outlet 1150 at the interval immediately before the fifth round of round game R is about five, so for some rare reasons, eight or more balls in three seconds are the first specific prizes As long as the ball 1000 does not win, all the balls to be discharged pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and the distributing member 4851 is displaced.

  Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere does not remain in the probability variation determination channel 4820, and therefore the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can not obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of round games R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern, and thus, in this operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern The same effect as the effect in

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the balls can be stored near the fullness of the storage channel 1231 during the round game R of the fourth round. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right of transition to the special symbol's probability change state (high probability state) by the difference in the degree of storage of the ball, so that the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231. It can improve the attention to the ball. Thereby, the power of attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter the round game R in the fourth round, it is possible to almost certainly obtain the right to shift to a special symbol in the definite variation state (high probability state) Although it is possible, because the time for round game R is short, the player who is accustomed to the game fails to acquire the right to transition to a special symbol in a state of high probability (high probability state) even in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

  That is, an unfamiliar player is more likely to play a game while hitting a jackpot during a big hit game, while a person who is used to playing a game is likely to avoid hitting to avoid wasting balls between rounds in a big hit, and to strike easily between rounds. Is the difference resulting from

  More specifically, in the case of a game of abstinence, a plurality of balls always flow down near the opening / closing plate 1300, and a ball is awarded to the first specified winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the round game R of the fourth round. As it occurs, if there are 3 seconds, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can obtain the right to shift to a special symbol in a certain variable state (high probability state) without any problem.

  On the other hand, when starting to launch after the fourth round of round game R starts, if you stop rounding so that the ball does not run down in the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval period, the dead ball is indeed Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach around the opening / closing plate 1300 until a while (for example, after 2 seconds has not elapsed) from the start of the fourth round game round R. Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to obtain the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state). Therefore, even players who are accustomed to playing games can be made to launch in the middle of a big hit game.

  As described above, the sixth operation pattern inherently involves the possibility that the benefits obtained by the player familiar with the game may be reduced due to the launch mode. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, the player can be encouraged to play in the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

  In addition, on the other hand, it is possible to provide a jackpot game requiring concentration, which can not be tasted by other pachinko machines 10, to a player who still stops rounds after grasping the above-mentioned risk. . That is, the number of wasted balls is reduced by performing a round stop operation such that the ball is back-calculated to start flowing out so that the ball flows into the first specified winning hole 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specified winning hole 1000a in the fourth round. While, you can also get the right to transition to a special symbol in a state of high probability (high probability state). In this case, the final round game is stopped before the end of the third round game R, and the launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, while considering the randomness of the flow-down of the ball entering the round game R in the third round, it is necessary to have a high-level calculation of starting launch while predicting the ball entry timing. Therefore, when the timing at which the ball which has started striking has reached the vicinity of the first specified winning opening 1000a is as calculated, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is the first specified prize in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 3rd round, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is started to measure the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, when round end condition (round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) elapses or a prescribed number of pachinko ball wins) is satisfied in the fourth round round game R, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since it is not possible to win the specified number of balls in the first round of round game R in the fourth round of round game R, the fourth round of round game R is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. End with the passage of

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. The opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, when seven or more balls are discharged from the outlet 1150 (storage In the case where the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than at least a part of the ejected balls from passing through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so the fourth round round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven or more, the distributing operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining balls can be made to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can obtain the right to shift to the special symbol in the definite variation state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of round games R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern, and thus, in this operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern The same effect as the effect in

<When operating with the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 3rd round, description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the drive mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed, and the round After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is started to measure the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the 4th round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of 1st operation time T1) lapsed or specified number of pachinko ball winnings) is satisfied, The opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is ended.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since it is not possible to win the specified number of balls in the first round of round game R in the fourth round of round game R, the fourth round of round game R is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. End with the passage of

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. Is controlled to hold the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. This short time operation is set as an operation which does not allow passage of the ball to the specific area 4830.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, when seven or more balls are discharged from the outlet 1150 (storage In the case where the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than at least a part of the ejected balls from passing through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

  In the present operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so the specified number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 1000a in the fourth round round game R It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the round game R of the fourth round without waiting until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, as in the case where the fourth round of round games R is ended by winning a prescribed number of rounds, if the fourth round of round games R is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1 in many cases, Immediately after that, after the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, the displacement of the distribution operation member 4851 occurs.

  On the other hand, if seven or more balls are ejected at the interval immediately after the sorting operation member 4851 ends waiting for the fourth round of round game R to the maximum value of the first operation time T1. A sphere can be allowed to flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not rush the defined number of winnings, but by making the specified number of balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a win near the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the player has a special symbol. It is possible to obtain the right of transition to a definite change state (high probability state).

  Also, as another method, by ending the fifth round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the balls discharged in the interval immediately after the fifth round game R can be made a specific area. The player can also acquire the right of transition to the special symbol's probability change state (high probability state) by flowing down.

  In this manner, according to the present operation pattern, the player is given a special symbol in a definite variation state (high probability state) according to the player's discretion (selection of timing of winning of the ball to the first specified winning opening 1000a, etc.). Whether or not the right to transition can be obtained can be differentiated.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round game round R is designated. When the operation time is designated (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player keeps the special symbol no matter how the game is performed by continuing the ball entering the first specified winning hole 1000a. Since the right of transition to the definite change state (high probability state) of can be acquired, it is possible to play the game with ease.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player selects the operation time by himself according to the game mode (when the specified number of balls are made to win the first specified winning opening 1000a In some cases, it is possible to obtain the right to shift to a special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) by selecting. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to play the round game R intensively, to improve the ability to pay attention to the balls flowing down the game area and to give the player an uplifting feeling to acquire a definite change state by himself. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  As a feature of the sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern, the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is shorter than usual, and the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, and the fourth round game When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift to a special symbol's indeterminate state (high probability state). That is, in the case where the number of winning balls obtained in the fourth round of round game R is small, it is possible to realize the game characteristic that it is easy to acquire the right of transition to the definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the interval immediately after the third round of round game R is set to such a length that the balls of the storage channel 1231 are discharged all over the ball, the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) is given. Hard to get. That is, in the case where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state), it is possible to realize the game characteristic that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. As a result, since it is possible to prepare more balls for the player to hit in the normal state to be continued later, it is possible to easily suppress the player's cash investment.

  These differences can be grasped by whether or not the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fourth round, so the player predicts the state after the end of the jackpot game at the start of the fourth round game R can do. And, even in the case of the operation pattern where it is difficult to acquire the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state), the right of the transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) by the form of ball entry. It is possible to obtain

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player in the jackpot game by forcing the player to make a selection. That is, the game mode that makes it easy to obtain the right to shift to a special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state) is exactly the opposite.

  Specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round of round game R, as many balls as possible to the first specified winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. While winning the prize increases the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to a special symbol (high probability state) (it is beneficial to win many balls from the start of the fourth round), while In the case of the operation pattern of 9, in the fourth round of the round game R, wait for the specified number of balls to reach the end of 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and extend the period of the round game R This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to a special symbol's state of probability (a state of high probability) (there is a benefit in curbing ball winning at the start of the fourth round).

  Thus, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the special symbol's probability change state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball is won in the round game R (game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, the player can be prevented from getting bored, and concentration on the game can be maintained.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specified area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the tenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the 6th operation | movement pattern mentioned above until completion | finish of round game R of 4th round, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, a round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. Is controlled to hold the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  In the present operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the elapse of the second opening time OP2 operates for a short time, basically, the ball can not flow down to the specific region 4830.

  In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state during the fifth round round game R, if the round game can be ended early, the ball that has won the first specified winning opening 1000a in the fifth round is flowed to the specific area 4830 However, in this operation pattern, the round game R of the fifth round starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 in this operation pattern. As a result, the player can not enter the specified number of balls and can not finish the fifth round game at an early stage. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specified winning combination port 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round can not flow down to the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time between the rounds Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of round game R has the same portion as the above-described sixth operation pattern, even in this operation pattern, The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of 6 can be achieved.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specified winning hole 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round. Since the patterns of the other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player visually recognizing the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000.

  In the tenth actuation pattern, in relation to the sixth actuation pattern and the seventh actuation pattern, even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round game round R, the ball is allowed to flow down the specific region 4830 It differs in that it can not do.

  That is, by mixing the present operation pattern, even if the player can fully store the balls in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the player is not relieved, and the discharged balls are in the specific area. It can be prompted to confirm whether it passes 4830 or not. That is, in the big hit game, the step (first step) as to whether or not the ball can be stored in the storage channel 1231 and the distribution operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes It can be divided into the step (second step) as to whether or not it is possible to make another place pay attention to each step. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually and to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, although the case has been described where it is possible to obtain the ball corresponding to the jackpot type regardless of the progress mode of the game in the special symbol oddity state (high probability state), the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment The 5000 includes a ball adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for the player to acquire more balls, as the number of times of fluctuation before acquiring a jackpot in the special symbol state (high probability state) is smaller. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 has a main body member 2100 and a covering front plate 2200, as in the second embodiment. In addition to the provision of the opening / closing plate 1300, the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and a new in this embodiment, The ball adjustment apparatus 5900 mainly performs adjustment of a ball by making the ball which entered the second ball entry port 640 enter the storage channel 1231 via the communication hole 5920, and is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward from the lower end of the rotation tip 1421 of the extension portion 1420 along the shape of the rotation tip 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the lower end of the time difference forming portion 5423 is extended to a position where the time difference forming portion 5423 contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state in the non-excitation state of the solenoid 1510.

  In the second variable winning device 5800, in addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the interposition rod portion 5850 having a slightly added shape and the slide operation in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear surface view of the transmission rod portion 2860 are enabled. It is arranged to be able to abut on the movable closing member 5931 of the ball adjusting device 5900 by being pushed down to the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (L-shaped portion in rear view added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 in the second embodiment). A pressing operation unit 5870 is provided.

  The ball adjusting device 5900 is formed by penetrating through the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the down flow passage forming portion 5910 which makes the ball entered into the second ball inlet 640 flow down. Communication holes 5920 disposed in a mode (opening diameter, arrangement) capable of flowing balls into the flow path 1231 and opening / closing members 5930 for opening / closing the communication holes 5920 in conjunction with the drive of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 Prepare for The down flow passage forming portion 5910 is disposed in such a manner as to pass through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, but is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. The illustration of the middle part is omitted.

  The down flow passage forming portion 5910 is a branched flow path in which the ball entering the second inlet port 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is disposed opposite to the communication hole 5920 and the ball to the communication hole 5920 Adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 enter the second ball inlet 640 further after the specified number (30 in this embodiment) is exceeded And an extra ball discharge channel 5915 for discharging the balls into a ball discharge channel (not shown).

  The adjustment channel 5911 is formed as a decelerating channel 5912 formed as a reverse-view reverse C-shaped channel curved in a half turn around the lower end and the second inlet port 640 from the upper end of the decelerating channel 5912 And a falling channel 5913 extending vertically in the back direction.

  The shape of the decelerating flow path 5912 reduces the load of the balls discharged from the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent balls staying in the decelerating flow path 5912 toward the opening of the communication hole 5920 regardless of the number of staying balls. be able to. That is, when the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is loaded by the weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, the decelerating flow path 5912 has a gentle slope near the communication hole 5920 (a slope close to horizontal). Because of this, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Accordingly, regardless of the number of staying balls, the speed at which the ball immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load given from the ball to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

  Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the flowing ball is free from deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when the ball enters the second entrance ball port 640 in a row, the front ball is decelerated earlier compared to the later ball, and the later ball is mistaken by blocking the later flow of the ball. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the extra sphere discharge channel 5915.

  In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay sequentially from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying balls is 30, the upper end portion of the 30th ball is the excess ball discharge flow path 5915 The flow path length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, after the 31st ball, it enters the extra ball discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, after the end of the jackpot game, transition to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, it is assumed that the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, and the player can aim for the next big win while suppressing the ball loss by advancing the game by the right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball having entered the second entry port 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, it stays in the adjustment channel 5911 as it approaches the end of the high probability state from the start of the high probability state. The ball increases.

  When the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, the opening and closing member 5930 is disposed at a position projecting to the inside of the communication hole 5920 and closes the opening below the outer diameter of the ball, while any solenoid 1510 or 2810 is excited. At the same time, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position for retracting to the outside of the communication hole 5920, and the movable closing member 5931 and the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 are connected together. A connection rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a slide rail portion 5933 which is disposed at the tip of the connection rod portion 5932 and supports the movable closing member 5931 so as to be vertically movable relative to the connection rod portion 5932 The connection rod portion 5932 is provided with one end to apply an upward biasing force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 taken along line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. In FIG. 46 (a), a state in which the communication hole 5920 is opened is illustrated, and in FIG. 46 (b), a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and spheres can flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231 and stay there, the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231 The fourth ball AP 54 is held at a position where it does not get out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the big hit game, since a plurality of balls IP 51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) having passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a or the second specified winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage channel 1231, the communication hole The ball AP 54 held at a position where it does not drop out of 5920 is filled up with the space IP 51 for entering the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the ball kept at the position where it does not get out of the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 thereafter and is maintained at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharging state, the movable closing member 5931 extends from the overhang adjusting channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231. Inflow of balls is regulated.

  When the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 is finished, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. 46 (a) again, and the ball AP54 which has been held at the position not coming off the communication hole 5920 earlier The balls up to the point flow into the reservoir channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is defined by a maximum of three per one opening of the communication hole 5920. Ru.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the case where the jackpot game progresses by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47A to 47C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. In FIG. 47A to FIG. 47C, the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600 and the opening and closing member 5930 by the drive of the solenoid 1510 is illustrated in time series.

  In FIG. 47 (b), the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 is the back side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47A). The state where the time difference forming portion 5423 is arranged above the engaging portion 1333 is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass.

  When the state of FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state of FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920 while the engagement of the opening / closing plate 1300 Since the portion 1333 still abuts against the time lag forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction, and the movement of the opening and closing plate 1300 is restricted, the regulating member 2600 maintains the storage state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the restricting member 2600 is in the discharging state, and the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, since the communication hole 5920 can be closed before discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started in driving the solenoid 1510, the force of discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is linked to the adjustment flow path The ball can be prevented from flowing from 5911.

  48 (a) and 48 (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. In FIG. 48A and FIG. 48B, the operation of the restriction member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by the drive of the solenoid 2810 is illustrated in time series. The state in which the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited is illustrated in FIG. 48 (a), and the state in which the solenoid 2810 is excited is illustrated in FIG. 48 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 5931 is depressed by the depressing portion 5870, whereby the communication hole 5920 is opened. Thus, the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the biasing force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Therefore, the communication hole 5920 is opened by exciting either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810, and the ball can flow into the storage flow passage 1231, while the communication hole 5920 is opened by de-excitation. It is closed and the inflow to the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

  In the big hit game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled by the above-described mechanism, a certain number of balls (three at the maximum in this embodiment) flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

  In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes It is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is 1 with a probability of one. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, after the end of the big hit game, the special symbol oddity state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is finished 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is 30 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily made to win the second ball entry port 640.

  In this embodiment, three types of "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a are different depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Configured

  FIG. 49 is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type, and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99" A jackpot H is associated with and defined (see 202b 51 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of a big hit in the lottery of special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is a big hit h within the range of “0 to 19”. Are defined in association with each other (see 202b 52 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of jackpot H or jackpot h, a 15 round jackpot game is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls, can win a prescribed number of balls regardless of the timing of winning a big hit, and can receive a payout of a prescribed upper limit.

  In the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second ball entry 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of the jackpot i, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of payout balls and the time taken for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is won.

  That is, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), while expecting the payout of the specified number of winning balls regardless of the timing of the big hit, In the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entry ball slot 640), according to the number of entering the second entry ball slot 640 until the big hit, Since the maximum value of the number of payouts and the time taken for the jackpot game are variable, the game of making the payout balls differ depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs in the game property of acquiring the jackpot in the right-handed game You can add sex. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being played casually, and it is possible to improve the attention to each variation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing the eleventh in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the clocking change of 1 specific winning a prize mouth 1000a and 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). Hereinafter, operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the eleventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the timer 28 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the solenoid 2810 to move the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. The slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  In the first round of round game R, with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, the communication holes 5920 are opened, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48), but the first (2) When storing spheres from the storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255. Even if it is 3), it is possible to end the round game R by winning a prescribed number (10C) without a problem.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Drive control to start a round game R of the second round after the lapse of the third interval time Int3 between the rounds. Here, since a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at an interval of 3 seconds, part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 at the end of the first round game R It is possible to globally discharge the spheres (up to 14) that can be stored in a row.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 2810 so as to close the second specified winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  Similarly, round games R of the third round to the 15th maximum round are repeated between the rounds R between the rounds with the first interval time Int 1 between the rounds R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state The solenoid 2810 is controlled so as to be displaced at the same time so as to open and close the second specified winning opening 2255a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 2810 is such that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time between the rounds Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to the present operation pattern, three balls from the adjustment flow passage 5911 flow into the storage flow passage 1231 each time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the largest number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the whole ball is stored until the end of the big hit game (at the end of the round game R in the 10th round). Since it is possible to cause the road 1231 to enter the ball, it is possible to end the jackpot game in a state where the ball does not remain in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating with the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. The MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view variation display (design variation presentation) is finished. The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started. In addition, since it is the same as that of the 11th operation pattern to round game R of the 4th round, it abbreviate | omits description.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is over, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between the rounds has elapsed, and the round After the lapse of the third interval time Int3, the round game R of the fifth round is started.

  In the fifth round, the solenoid means 1510 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. To drive the opening and closing plate 1300 for a long time.

  And, when round end conditions (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the prescribed number of pachinko balls have been won) is satisfied in the fifth round of round game R, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  Here, even in the fifth round of round game R, it is possible to flow the balls from the communication holes 5920, but unlike the case up to the fourth round, the balls enter from the first specified winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of balls from the communication hole 5920 is actually performed, the specified number of balls can not be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls obtainable in the fifth round game R of this actuation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls obtainable in the same round round R in the eleventh actuation pattern and the first Since the end of the round game R is to be waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is prolonged.

  Similarly, round games R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds are repeated with third interval time Int3 between rounds between rounds R similarly, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the drive control of the solenoid 1510 is performed so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In this operation pattern, from the fifth round game R, reduction in the number of winning balls that may occur in the subsequent round game R and extension of the round time cause balls to flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231 Depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the jackpot, the reduction in the number of balls or the extension of the round time changes to what extent. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel corresponds to the number of balls having passed through the second entrance 640, while the drawing of the special symbol 2 by passing the sphere of the second entrance 640 (second entrance Since it is possible to receive the lottery based on entering the ball to 640, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 relates to the number of lottery of the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 It is assumed that the numbers are the same.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specified winning opening 1000a or the second specified winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to 12 balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231 until the fourth round game round R. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the balls are flowed into the storage channel 1231 through the communication holes 5920 because the jackpot game was started in a state where 13 or more balls were stored in the adjustment channel 5911 That's the case. In other words, after shifting to the high probability state, the jackpot game is started in a state where the drawing of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640) is received 13 times or more. .

  Therefore, the number of prize balls decreases if you win a jackpot after receiving a special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640) 12 times after shifting to the high probability state Since the extension of the round time does not occur, it is possible to improve the player's ability to pay attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery.

  In addition, after the 13th lottery, the number of winning balls is reduced for each lottery, and the round time is extended for every 3 lottery, so the player for the number of times that the jackpot can be obtained Can improve the power of attention.

  That is, for example, when a big hit is obtained in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), storage is made through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow path 1231 is two, the number of balls that can be won in this round is eight. In addition, when a big hit is acquired in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), the storage flow path through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round. Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is three, the number of prizes that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the number of winning balls in the round game R of the fifth round decreases.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning the jackpot by the 13th to 15th lottery, in any case, it flows into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R and the ball remains in the adjustment channel 5911 Is zero. Therefore, from the round game R of the sixth round, it is possible to win a specified number of balls in the first specified winning hole 1000a, thereby it is possible to end the round game R of the sixth round, round time There is no change in the degree of extension.

  In addition, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 in the case of winning the jackpot is 16-18, in the round game R of the sixth round, in the case of 19-21, in the round game R of the seventh round, 22-24 When the number of balls is reduced in the eighth round game R, in the ninth round game R, in the ninth round game R, in the eighth round game R, in the tenth round game R, in the tenth round game R And an increase in round time will occur.

  Thereby, as in the present embodiment, in the game property where the high probability state is terminated by the number of times of drawing, the case where the jackpot is obtained shortly after the transition to the high probability state and the case where the jackpot is obtained near the end of the high probability state Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profit (the number of balls to be paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.) given to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the benefit given to the player is reduced as the number of lottery from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition increases, so that the number of lottery until the jackpot acquisition is small. Originally, there should have been a chance to be able to receive the lottery with a high probability even with the remaining lottery number, but it is possible to partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction that it can not be received.

  In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first drawing after becoming a high probability state, then the remaining 29 drawings were added, and the next drawing should have been 59 times. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to 30 times can be partially resolved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In the high probability state as well, if you win a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the second specified winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern It becomes possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of times of drawing after opening and closing and transition to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming to win a ball at the first ball entrance 64 in the high probability state.

  In this case, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 is increased without being linked to the drawing of the special symbol as compared with the case of playing the right-handed game, the interval for receiving the drawing is extended, and the game time is increased. There is a risk of becoming long.

  Therefore, as a way of gaming in the high probability state, the player can receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is won Do you aim to win the jackpot of the jackpot h) (do you play right-handed game), be prepared to increase the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 by the jackpot win, and be prepared to extend the game time, jackpot game Whether to aim for a jackpot of jackpot type (hijacker H) that can eliminate the risk of winning balls in the game or to play a left-handed game can be selected as appropriate. As a result, the range of gaming methods to be selected can be expanded according to the taste of the player and the situation (such as playable time) placed.

  In addition, after the high probability state is finished, it is difficult to open the second ball entry port 640, and the player shifts to the left strike game. In this case, although a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, in the big hit type (big hit H) that can be acquired in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by the predetermined number of winnings, the profit (the number of balls awarded, the profit on both sides of the playing time) given to the player is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being impaired. The player can start playing the game at any timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of drawing of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (second entrance In the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the time of winning a jackpot is the special symbol 2 up to a jackpot winning, although it has been described on the assumption that the number of balls entered into the mouth 640 is the same. It should be kept in mind that the number is equal to the number of lotteries.

  That is, while the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed along with the ball winning in the second entrance 640, it is for the player to recognize whether or not the jackpot has been won in the lottery, the subsequent reach effect or Since it is after the button pressing effect, etc., it is common that the player continues to hit the ball into the second ball entrance 640 also during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 can be held up to four, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player efficiently receives a lottery, a so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of lottery in which the player can recognize the determination of the jackpot, the state in which a maximum of about four balls are entered into the second ball entry port 640 is maintained.

  In addition, even if the number of reservations is maximum, even if entering the second entrance 640, the lottery is not received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911, so that the jackpot game can be benefitted by the player. The possibility of decreasing is increased. Since the suspension is digested by stopping the fluctuation and starting the next fluctuation, in other words, the longer the period until the suspension of the fluctuation, the higher the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game decreases. It will be.

  Therefore, when the ball is kept at the time of the high reach such as long reach and the like, it is possible to form the game characteristic which increases the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the big hit game decreases. As a result, since the player can be prevented from continuing the launch of the ball in the production with a high sense of expectation such as long reach, etc., the concentration power which the player has allocated to the adjustment of the shot output of the ball is eliminated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration to the effect such as long reach, and to improve the attention to the effect.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described, but the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. The arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is in the specific area 4830 It is comprised so that the state after a big hit game may change by whether it passes through.

  52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 taken along line LII-LII of FIG. In FIG. 52, the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is illustrated. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering front plate 1200, the opening and closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600). And the rear cover 1700), the interference device 6900 according to the sixth embodiment is provided.

  The interference device 6900 is disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and has a slide movable shaft disposed along a flat surface with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the tip of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910 And an interference member 6930 which slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes an elongated hole 6921 which is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 as the tip end side of the tip member 6920 is.

  The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in a thin plate member 1110 disposed opposite to the storage flow passage 1231 of the covering front plate 1200, and the rear end is an elongated hole 6921 The rear end moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. This back-and-forth operation enables entry into the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is disposed at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to bring it into the extended state (see the phantom line in FIG. 52), the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231.

  53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. 53 (a) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53 (b) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and “V” is described on the ball that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later .

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), while 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the retracted state of the interference member 6930, the third ball in the extended state of the interference member 6930. The subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of round games R for the jackpot game is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the prescribed number of balls can not be won. Since the round game R can not be ended by the predetermined number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the predetermined time. The effects that can be realized using this difference will be described below in conjunction with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (special variation of the special symbol) of the special symbol, for example, 4 minutes It is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is 1 with a probability of one.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol oddity state (high probability state) is given until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 10 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is 10 times After completion, it is configured to be set to the normal state, but when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, it is normal until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 10 times after the end of the big hit game It is configured to be in the time saving state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, two types of "big hit I" and "big hit j" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 differ depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right of transition to the special symbol's definite variation state (high probability state).

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54) . In the case of a jackpot I, a two-round jackpot game is executed in a thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 balls and can almost certainly not acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the high probability state.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the big hit j is associated and specified (see FIG. 54).

  In the case of jackpot j, a two-round jackpot game is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right of transition to the special symbol in the certain variation state (high probability state).

  As mentioned above, when it is a big hit in the lottery of special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second ball entrance 640), almost certainly get the right of the transition to the special symbol state (high probability state) of the special symbol Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case of winning a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64). Therefore, in order to obtain a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), in the special symbol oddity state (high probability state), the player plays the right game Do.

  During the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the variation time of the normal symbol shortens (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a increases when the normal symbol hits (1 It is set as second × 2). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol state of variation, it is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and if it is a big hit, the big hit j (the transition to the special symbol of high probability state) Because it becomes easy to be repeated the definite variation state of the special symbol which becomes the jackpot) which can acquire the right of, it becomes easy for the player to acquire a large number of prize balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54A and 54B, the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a and the specified area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is the first specified prize in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  In FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time between rounds Int1 is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long operation time TL). Be done. Therefore, it is not used for relative comparison of the lengths of each time in FIG. 54, but the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed according to the temporal relationship described below.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the determination for the special figure, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation presentation). The operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930, which is performed when a big hit game is given, will be described below.

<When operating with the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  The MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation presentation) is finished. The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is Is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a long time.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for the long operation time TL, and the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again after the long operation time TL. The control is performed to cause the interference member 6930 to operate for a long time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state for the long operation time TL. During this time, it is not possible to win a defined number of balls in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53 (b)). And in this embodiment, since the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, the interference member 6930 is not waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Since it is in the retracted state, it is substantially impossible to win a prescribed number of balls, and the round game R of the first round ends when the first operation time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 can not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can not obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852 and 6910 are controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the big hit game is ended with the lapse of the time.

<When operating with the fourteenth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  The MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses when the special view fluctuation display (design fluctuation presentation) is finished. The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP.

  That is, the timer 15 starts the measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening and closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is Is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a long time.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state for a minute time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the minute time, the interference member 6930 is held again in the retracted state. As described above, the solenoid 6910 is controlled to drive the interference member 6930 for a short time.

  And in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the pachinko balls of the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) When the winning) is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round is ended.

  In this embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state only for a very short time, it is in the retracted state in most of the time, so as shown in FIG. 53 (a), It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, since the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the restriction member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can obtain the right to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds has passed, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  And, in round game R of the second round, when round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or specified number of pachinko balls win) is satisfied, The opening and closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

  When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852 and 6910 are controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the big hit game is ended with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time that is expected to be three or more and less than six in the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is disposed on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball blocks the line of sight of the player, making it difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to check the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, since the change due to the extension of the interference member 6930 is limited to the fact that the third and subsequent balls move slightly in the storage channel 1231, it is recognized to the player whether or not the change by the interference member 6930 has occurred. The game can be made fun by making the first specified winning opening 1000a win a ball and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without making the player feel uncomfortable by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can.

  Then, the balls are stored near the inlet of the storage channel 1231, and the first round of round game R is not completed to give a sense of discomfort for the first time, and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is actually counted. It is possible to create a new playability of recognizing the difference in jackpot type for the first time.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (the change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify the change of the situation of the game board 13 in an easy-to-recognize mode from the given sense of incongruity, and allow the player to recognize the difference in jackpot type. Therefore, the attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 is dropped as it is, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured to allow the ball disposed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 to flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 according to the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, except for the configuration of the front cover 7200, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall 1220, the housing 1230, the detection sensor 1240, and the drop delay plate 3250). And a second falling delay plate 7260 newly disclosed in this embodiment.

  The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extended on the back side of the thin plate member 1210 so as to extend between the end surface 3251 b and the housing portion 1230, and descends as the upper surface 7261 separates from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second falling delay plate 7260 is extended rearward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the second drop delay plate 7260, the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is less than the diameter of the sphere near the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second falling delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 57) relative to the movement trajectory of the balls rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the falling delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the balls rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second falling delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member which changes whether or not the ball comes into contact with the ball depending on the path of arrival of the ball. That is explained below.

  58 (a) and 58 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 7000 in a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). In FIG. 58 (a), the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state in a state where the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3 is illustrated, and in FIG. 58 (b) The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, the ball is covered with the front inclination of the plate portion 1310 which occurs at the time of operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. Go down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it will abut on the second falling delay plate 7260 in the process of falling down, flow down to the falling delay plate 3250 along the inclination of the upper surface, and then roll on the upper surface of the falling delay plate 3250 to fall again at the falling position Pf3. To reach.

  The distance between the second falling delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the second falling delay plate 7260 and the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball. Can be prevented from vertically falling on the back side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the balls rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 are on the main body member 3100 side along the rear inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250. Flow down while in contact with the

  At this time, the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball is disposed below the second drop delay plate 7260, so that the extension length of the second drop delay plate 7260 to the back side is greater than the movement trajectory of the ball. The upper surface 7261 can receive a ball falling from above while holding it on the front side.

  The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not abut on the second falling delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and drops as it is after reaching the dropping position Pf3. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without a break.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball is subjected to the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball is not received depending on which side the ball is closer to the second drop delay plate 7260.

  In this embodiment, two balls are connected in a row to roll on the top surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 while maintaining the action of causing the balls rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 to smoothly fall to the position facing the end surface 3251 b. Even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the falling of the ball disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, even when two balls are in a row, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 is disposed in front of the detection sensor 1240, it is a case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. Also, the ball can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, after the ball rolls the upper surface 7261 of the second drop delay plate 7260 to the left, it resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, the ball can be maintained on the near side of the opening / closing plate 1300 substantially over the time it takes to roll over the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 and pass over it. Thereby, the number of wasted balls (balls which flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first out port 66) which may occur during the interval time can be reduced.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

  59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away to make the opening and closing plate 8300 visible, and a part of the side wall 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIGS. 59 and 61, the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (rising attitude), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the opening state (hanging attitude). In FIGS. 60 and 62, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (immersion posture). The state after becoming) is illustrated. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the drawing is the front (front) side, and the rear side of the drawing is the rear (rear) side. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper side (upper side), the lower side is the lower side (lower side), the right side is the right side (right side), and the left side is the left side Each side will be described. Furthermore, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, the opening / closing plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 is approximately 4 etc. between the shaft portion 1320, the loaded portion 1330, and the both shaft portions 1320 described in the above embodiments. A plate portion 8310 is formed into a plate shape in three sections of the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) in a front view thereof.

  That is, in the present embodiment, a gap is generated between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. It will be set up.

  In addition, since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening and closing plate 8300 is shortened as compared with the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular recess 1122 can also be shortened. In the present embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in the minimum necessary range for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the covering front plate 8200 and plays a role of a rolling surface of a ball guided to the detection sensor 1240. The configuration of the covering front plate 8200 is the same as that of the covering front plate 1200 described in the above embodiment except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. I omit explanation.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-like member that protrudes toward the main body member 1100 from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and the protruding end portion (rear side end portion) thereof is a support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100. Abut on the main body member 1100 in such a manner as to close the open end (front side end portion). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right side shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward as it goes to the right such that the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) is in a surface position with the upper surface (rolling surface) of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state. The lower surface is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. The arc on which the shape of the lower surface is based is formed as an arc whose radius is shorter than the radius (longest radius, that is, the radius of the movement locus of the upper end of the facing surface 8341b) of the movement locus (arc) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 Be done. As a result, the upper corner portion of the opposing surface 8341b abuts on the fixed receiving portion 8250 in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 moves (rotations) the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. It is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion (the extension length to the left) of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is designed as a length such that a ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 does not get on the rolling surface as it is. Ru. That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is disposed to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, even if the ball may collide with the fixed receiving portion 8250 when the ball falls in the vertical direction from the inclined surface 1237, the center of gravity of the ball is on the left of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 There is almost no event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240, and the ball spills from the fixed receiving portion 8250 to the left and falls toward the first out port 66.

  In addition, when the ball spilled to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 closes the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is directed to rotate clockwise in a front view). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state change of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 to the open state due to the load given from the ball.

  In addition, from the configuration on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of the nails, the second ball entrance 640, etc., see FIG. 2), the ball having a speed downward to the right to the fixed receiving portion 8250 It is extremely unlikely that a jumping event will occur.

  Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having a rolling surface is disposed on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not have the effect of facilitating the guiding of the ball to the detection sensor 1240 excessively. Configured

  The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the flow of the balls rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) while opening and closing the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 in a rotational operation. The details of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 will be described below.

  The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and the receiving plate 8341 disposed on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and the receiving plate 8341 extend toward the rotation shaft Relative rotation of the rod-like connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 disposed on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and configured to be able to abut the power transmission member 1400, the linking portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 It is a rod-like member to be connected, and mainly includes a pivot support rod portion 8344 rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110.

  In this embodiment, in the shaft support bar portion 8344, the supported portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 has a circular cross-sectional shape, and a support portion for supporting the connecting portion 8342 on the front side and a load receiving portion 8343 on the rear side. A supporting portion to support is formed in a D-shaped cross section (a shape that is not circular). A fitting portion (a hole or a recess) having a shape corresponding to the D shape is formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the load receiving portion 8343. In the use state (see FIG. 59), the support portion and the fitting portion are fitted By being put together, the connecting portion 8342 and the load receiving portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

  The load-bearing portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is pivotally supported by the shaft support bar portion 8344 and is a curved curved upper surface that contacts the power transmission member 1400, and a load-loaded portion 8343 And a center of gravity portion 8343b including the center of gravity position of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps with the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 during operation of the power transmission member 1400, and is extended when the extending portion 1420 is moved downward (tilted). The extension portion 1420 and the right end which starts to be in contact with each other have a substantially parallel surface with respect to the contact start line FL1 including the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start to contact.

  A smooth curved surface is formed in such a manner that the radius of rotation gradually shortens from the right end to the left end which is the contact end point with the extension portion 1420, so the extension portion 1420 and the load-loaded portion Load transfer to and from 8343 can be made smooth (with low dynamic friction). Accordingly, the followability of the load receiving portion 8343 with respect to the extension portion 1420 can be improved.

  The center-of-gravity portion 8343 b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in a closed state (immersion position) when no load is generated from the power transmission member 1400. That is, since the center-of-gravity position of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is included in the center-of-gravity portion 8343b, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (immersion posture) by rotation by its own weight. Then, when the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 abuts on the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250, further rotation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (immersion posture). Be done.

  The connection portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at the left end of the receiving plate 8341 (ie, the portion adjacent to the opening / closing plate 8300 and in which a load may occur). Thereby, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is the opening / closing plate 8300 Even if it collides with it, the possibility that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be damaged can be reduced.

  In addition, the connection part 8342 should just be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the axial support rod part 8344, and the configuration mode is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support bar portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support bar portion 8344 may be connected (ie, two The left and right ends of the support plate 8341 may be supported by a bar), and the two bars in that case may be connected and reinforced by a planar plate along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support bar 8344. Also good.

  The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-like portion having a longitudinal width substantially the same as the width of the plate portion 8310 of the opening and closing plate 8300, and is continuous with the flat rolling plane 8341a and the left end of the rolling plane 8341a. And an opposing surface 8341b disposed opposite to the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening and closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

  The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a flat plane parallel to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (rising attitude) in the open state (projecting attitude).

  The opposing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and the width in the short direction (the thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is approximately equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. This makes it possible to enlarge the load receiving surface at the time of contact between the opposing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged by the load at the time of contact (cracking or chipping It is possible to make it easy to avoid the occurrence or breakage.

  Here, the facing surface 8341 b is disposed on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of the plane passing through the shaft support bar portion 8344 and orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the movement trajectory LC1 of the facing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is a rolling plane in the open state. It will expand upward (radially outside of the shaft support portion 8344) than 8341a. This makes it easy to push the ball (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240. The details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, an operation aspect and an operation sequence of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the restriction member 1600 by the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described.

  63 and 64, operations of the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in time series. Further, FIG. 65 illustrates a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 and a time-dependent change in the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). 63 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63 (c).

  FIG. 64 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). 64 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64 (c).

  In FIGS. 63 and 64, in order to facilitate understanding, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600 and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), and the illustration of the other components is omitted, and the open / close plate 8300 and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 are closed (FIG. The state change from a) and FIG. 63 (b) to the open state (see FIG. 64 (c) and FIG. 64 (d)) is illustrated in time series.

  That is, in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (state where the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20 (c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1 with the tip member 1520 displaced. 64A and 64B, the tip member 1520 is displaced so as to be separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second auxiliary distance h2a in the state of being separated by h2a. 64 (c) and 64 (d), the position where the tip member 1520 is displaced and is separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is displaced) Excited State of being arranged in a final arrival position) of the focus is illustrated, respectively.

  When tip member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from reference line O1 by auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63 (c)), power transmission member 1400 makes the lower surface of extension portion 1420 an abutment start line FL1. It is the state and agreement to be matched. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts receiving a load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)). The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state until the state shown in FIG. 63 (c) and FIG. 63 (d) is reached).

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 65, in the column of the tip member 1520, the distances h1, h2, h2a, h3 and h4 are shown in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600 are driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating faster than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and ends earlier. .

  Further, the restricting member 1600 starts the operation toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts the operation toward the open state, and enters the storage state simultaneously with the opening / closing plate 8300 becoming the open state. As shown in FIG. 65 where the respective timing charts are illustrated symmetrically, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the respective members operate in the reverse order of the case where they are driven (excited).

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a. The state in which the ball can enter the ball is maintained (see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Therefore, in a period in which the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the movement trajectory LC1 of the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is configured to expand above the rolling plane 8341a, and the ball P81 is detected at the timing when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240. The plane of the center of the sphere P82 which flows down with the sphere P81 on the upstream side of the plane is a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the axis portion 1320 and passing the center of the axial support bar portion 8344 It is disposed closer to the detection sensor 1240 than the passing plane) (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state, the ball P82 can be given a load directed to the right (direction to push it into the detection sensor 1240) at the upper end of the opposing surface 8341b.

  Thereby, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the sphere P81 is a detection sensor on the premise that a sphere is formed (the state of the sphere upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the conditions, see FIG. 59, spheres P81 and P82). When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled by being detected by 1240 (for example, when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240, when a predetermined number of entering balls in the round game R is detected) Even if only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the over-winning (so-called over-winning. In other words, the prescribed number of round games R (this number In the embodiment, it is configured to allow the detection sensor 1240 to detect more than ten balls) (passing through the first specified winning opening 1000a)). Can.

  In this embodiment, while the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arc track to apply a load to the ball P82, after the load is pushed to the detection sensor 1240 side by the load, it rolls on the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along the circular arc trajectory, the ball P82 flaps when passing through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the ball P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of stagnation, rebounding, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the sphere is configured to be able to be stored on the downstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (storage flow channel 1231), and as described in each of the above embodiments, the detection sensor is used by the ball stored in the storage flow channel 1231. It is configured to be able to regulate passage of 1240 balls. Therefore, when the storage channel 1231 is full of balls, the ball P82 is not allowed to enter the storage channel 1231 by being restricted by the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, and the auxiliary opening / closing operation is performed. After the member 8340 is closed, it spills and flows down to the first out port 66.

  On the other hand, if a gap is generated in the storage flow passage 1231, only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can allow the extra winning. Therefore, the arrangement of the balls downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the balls in the storage channel 1231) can change the ease of occurrence of the over-winning, so Control can be performed by adjusting the flow of the ball in the passage 1231.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is smooth in a manner that the rotation radius gradually decreases from the contact start portion (right end) with the power transmission member 1400 toward the contact end portion (left end). A curve was made to be formed. This enables load transfer to occur in a state where dynamic friction is small. Accordingly, the followability of the load receiving portion 8343 with respect to the extension portion 1420 can be improved.

  In the state where a ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (first specified winning hole 1000a), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is limited to only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When changing from the open state to the closed state (rotation), a load directed from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (first specified winning hole 1000a) is applied. Thus, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (when operating to the closed state), a limited number (one in the present embodiment) of balls enter the detection sensor 1240 (first specified winning opening 1000a). It can be made easy to ball. This can increase the possibility of the occurrence of a limited number of overruns.

  In addition, the possibility of the occurrence of the over-winning varies with the storage condition of the balls in the storage channel 1231. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the over-winning occurs, depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored items, etc.) of the balls in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state). Furthermore, the arrangement state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 or the operation mode of the interference member 6930. That is, by controlling the driving (excitation) mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, it is possible to achieve the equalization of the number of the prize balls due to the over-winning.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  66 and 68, the state after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (rising attitude), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the opening state (hanging attitude) 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted attitude), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (engaged attitude). The state after becoming is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. Briefly described, the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment corresponds to one in which the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment is replaced.

  As in the above embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front side overhanging end of the pressing portion 1422 and the front side overhanging end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are identical to be orthogonal to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400. It is arranged on a plane. Therefore, even when the time difference forming portion 5423 pushes the engagement portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 8300 (even in the state before being pushed by the pressing portion 1422, the opening and closing plate 8300 is opened. The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

  The thin plate member 9110 is extended to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with a length capable of guiding the ball to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 which is bored with a size through which the ball can pass and the auxiliary entrance port 9111 A rolling plate 9112 is mainly provided.

  The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is a through hole disposed on the left of the discharge port 1150 in a front view, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) balls are dispensed by detecting passage of the ball. It is a prize ball mouth. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 may be a ball entrance (for example, an out port) in which the payout of the winning balls does not occur.

  The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate on which a ball flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the covering front plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary entrance hole 9111 ( D) formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward. Furthermore, the rolling plate 9112 is formed in such a manner as to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary entry port 9111, and on the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111 is formed as an inclined surface in which the upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side. Ru.

  That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided to the front side of the auxiliary entry port 9111 along the slope, and then passes through the auxiliary entry port 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three winning balls are paid out to the player.

  The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed such that it does not pick up a ball which rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 and flows down the free falling ball FK1. That is, in the state where the first variable winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 regardless of how much right strike continues.

  On the other hand, the opening and closing plate 8300 having an upper surface which is inclined downward toward the right is driven even slightly (for example, it is excited for only 0.1 seconds and the opening and closing plate 8300 is rotated toward the open state) When the ball flows down the loaded flow down path FK2 in which the loaded ball flows down, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and may pass through the auxiliary entrance port 9111. That is, in the present embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 8300 is driven, the ball in contact with the opening and closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary entrance hole 9111 besides the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Here, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 is different from that described above in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

  70 and 71, operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 are illustrated in time series. Further, FIG. 72 shows a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the restriction member 1600.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). 70 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70 (c).

  71 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71 (c).

  In FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600 and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed for easy understanding. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), and the illustration of the other components is omitted, and the open / close plate 8300 and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 are closed (FIG. The state change from a) and FIG. 70 (b) to the open state (see FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 71 (d)) is illustrated in time series.

  That is, in FIG. 70 (a) and FIG. 70 (b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (state where the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 70 (c) and 70 (d), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. 71A and 71B, the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 71 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced, and is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) State is shown, respectively.

  When the tip end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first auxiliary distance h1a (see FIG. 70C), the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400 and the restriction are restricted. This is the same as the state where contact with the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts. That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the restriction member 1600 starts receiving the load from the opening and closing plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b)). c) and until the state shown in FIG. 70 (d), the restricting member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharged state).

  In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, the open / close plate 8300 is opened in a state where the tip end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71A). The state (raising position) is set, and the regulating member 1600 is set in the storage state. Then, in a state where the tip end member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71A) which has been in the closed state is opened (see FIG. 71 (c)).

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the opening and closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (rising posture) The member 1600 is maintained in the storage state.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600 are driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening and closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340. After the operation is completed, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts the operation.

  Further, the restriction member 1600 starts operation toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts operation toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time as the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened. As shown in FIG. 72, the respective timing charts are illustrated symmetrically, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, the respective members operate in the reverse order of the case where they are driven (excited).

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 starts driving from the non-excitation state, only the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operation, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 does not start operation yet. Therefore, by shortening the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing the short opening), the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be changed while maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 73, in the column of the tip member 1520, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are illustrated in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  In FIG. 73, a case where the period for driving (excitation) the solenoid 1510 is half of the time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) required for the switching plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state is illustrated. (Ie, the case where it is driven (excited) for only 0.05 seconds is illustrated).

  In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and the operation of raising only the opening / closing plate 8300 to the intermediate state is repeated. According to this operation, a load can be applied to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300. Therefore, the flow-down path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening and closing plate 8300 is driven The path FK1 can be switched to the load down path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, by continuing the firing of the ball by the right strike, the ball can be made to pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111 and it can be configured to pay out the prize ball to the player.

  With this configuration, it is possible to configure, for example, a game characteristic in which a prize ball is paid out by a small hit game. In the small hit game, by driving (excitation) the solenoid 1510 with the opening pattern shown in FIG. 73, the flow-down path of the ball which has reached the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the opening and closing plate 8300 operates. A ball can be guided to the entrance 9111 to cause payout of a winning ball.

  The small hit game solenoid 1510 can be driven a plurality of times consecutively, so the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of points in time. For example, since one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) 36 times when the drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds in total. be able to.

  Further, by setting the interval of driving (excitation), it is possible to easily apply a load to the ball through the opening and closing plate 8300. For example, if the ball is fired at 0.6 second intervals, then 0.6 × X (number of arrivals of the sphere) = 0.5 × X + 0.1 × X =, so solenoid 1510 has an interval of 0.5 seconds. By driving (excitation), it is possible to apply a load to the balls via the opening and closing plate 8300 at a rate of one in about five balls regardless of the timing of driving (excitation) start.

  In this case, about seven balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 in one small hitting game, and about 21 winning balls can be paid out to the player.

  The period of the small hitting game in this case is 0.5 seconds interval × 36 times = about 18 seconds. As described above, by prolonging the time of one small hitting game, it is possible to prevent the situation that the holding ball of the special symbol is lost (broken) by the end of the small hitting game. Thereby, a small hit game can be generated without interruption.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 disposed above the auxiliary entrance 9111 is maintained in the closed state, so that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is operated (above the auxiliary entrance 9111). The ball falling to the side of the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 (that is, the ball flowing down in the load flow down path FK2) is bounced under load from the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, or auxiliary opening and closing It can be prevented that the rolling detection surface 8341 a of the member 8340 is guided by the detection sensor 1240.

  Referring back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specified winning opening 1000a. The state in which the ball can enter the ball is maintained as described above in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, even in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily carry out an over winning with a limited number of balls.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the control member 1600 is controlled to change to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed, When the storage channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the premature discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 by mistake, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an over winning.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 71A). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be changed while maintaining the state (open state) in which the ball can be placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a change in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and a time change of the position and state of the tip member 1520, the opening and closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600. In FIG. 74, in the column of the tip member 1520, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, h4 are shown in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

  In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is 1⁄4 of the time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) required for the switching plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. The case where the drive (excitation) is released for only 0.025 seconds is illustrated. In the following, this mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as "1/4 release".

  In this case, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the restriction member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the sphere in the storage channel 1231), and only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls riding on the upper surfaces of the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, several balls arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 (the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 and the opening and closing plate 8300 The ball disposed at the boundary of (mainly, the ball disposed at the outside of the motion trajectory LC1) can flow downward toward the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 (see FIG. 66).

  Thus, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 8300 still passes the detection sensor 1240 when the opening and closing plate 8300 is still in the open state (if 15 pieces of award balls are paid out), The detection sensor 1240 can be configured to pass through the auxiliary entry port 9111 without passing (when payout of three winning balls occurs).

  In this case, since the time until the specified number of balls pass through the detection sensor 1240 is delayed, the time for the round game R can be extended without causing ball loss.

  Note that the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with projections or depressions, or a longitudinally long rib may be provided on the front side of the thin plate member 9110 at a position where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 contacts. Alternatively, the flow velocity of the ball may be reduced, and the balls may be connected on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. As a result, the possibility of a ball being placed at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300 can be increased when 1⁄4 cancellation of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is performed. The function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved by releasing the drive (excitation) by 1⁄4.

  Further, the timing and the number of executions of the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set to a plurality of types by being associated with the jackpot type.

  For example, if firing of the balls occurs at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1⁄4 of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled during 9.0 seconds required for the 15 balls to reach the opening and closing plate 8300. Occurs approximately five times, that is, one quarter release of the actuation (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs once in 1.8 seconds, thereby assisting approximately five balls during the round game R It can be guided to the entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player can be made the same as in the case where only one ball is over-winning in the first specified winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

  Also, by doubling this interval, ie, once every 3.6 seconds, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs, approximately 5 balls are executed while executing round game R twice. It can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player can be made the same as in the case where only one ball is over-wined in the first specified winning opening 1000a while the round game R is performed twice.

  In addition, in order to satisfy 5 times in 9.0 seconds, it is not necessary to set equal intervals of 1.8 seconds each. For example, the solenoid 1510 may be added five times in 9.0 seconds in a mode of sequentially adding 0.2 seconds to each of 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.2 seconds and so on. It may cause a 1/4 release of Further, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 may be generated at disjointed timings. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which 1⁄4 of the solenoid 1510 is released.

  Also, for example, by making the timing to execute 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 dense in the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 by continuing to fire the ball from the start of the round game R Playability can be configured to increase the probability of being played.

  In this case, stopping the firing of the ball at the interval between rounds may cause the ball not to reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing at which 1⁄4 of the solenoid 1510 is released. Can be suppressed.

  That is, it is possible to start the next round game R in the state that the hit ball has reached near the first variable winning device 9000 if the ball is hit in the interval between rounds, and the assistance is inserted. Since it is possible to increase the probability that the ball is guided to the ball mouth 9111 and as a result it is possible to increase the number of paid out balls, it is possible for the player to keep hitting the ball vigorously in the interval between rounds. it can.

  In addition, for example, by concentrating the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 in the second half of the round game R, winning of a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) (first specification) is made halfway through the round game R It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which the ball is intermittently fired so as not to cause the winning of the winning opening 1000a).

  In this case, in the second half of the round game R, the direction in which the round game R is extended until 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed causes payout of the winning balls due to the ball passing through the auxiliary entrance port 9111. Since it is possible to cause the player to increase the number of payouts, it is possible to cause the player to execute a loose jackpot game such that the ball is fired intermittently intermittently.

  In this case, a difference is made in the number of times the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs in the second half of the round game R (for example, there are 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). Since it is possible to differentiate the additional winning balls obtained as a result of the loose jackpot game, the player's attention to the flow mode of the balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 is maintained at a high level. can do.

  On the other hand, the ball may be continued to be fired, and a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of balls may be made to win the first specified winning hole 1000a before the release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs. . In this case, an increase in payout of the winning balls due to the passage of the balls to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can not be expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the big hit game end You can advance the timing of receiving the lottery later.

  As described above, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim for the payout of the winning balls by the auxiliary entrance 9111 or to ignore it and terminate the round game R early.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The ball that collides with the opening and closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening and closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary insertion hole 9111 by being given a load directed to the auxiliary insertion hole 9111 did. As a result, even in the case of an operation mode in which the period during which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state is short, it is possible to easily pay out the winning balls. Can be motivated to execute.

  The ball reached the upstream of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at a specific timing by executing 1/4 release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while continuing the state in which the opening / closing plate 8300 guides the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Made to flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111. Thereby, it is possible to provide variations in the progress mode of the round game R in the jackpot game and the mode of payout of the winning balls.

  For example, even if the number of passing balls in the first specified winning opening 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can receive an extra winning ball by paying out the winning ball by entering the auxiliary entry hole 9111. It is possible to obtain prize balls (in this embodiment, the number of prize balls exceeding 150) to be paid out when a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the specified winning hole 1000a.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the solenoid 10182 of the middle discharge device 10180 is de-energized, and the state in which the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 reaches the lowermost end is illustrated. Is driven (excitation), and a state in which the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 can be discharged halfway is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the first variable winning device 10000 includes the case where it is possible to discharge the ball from the midway position of the storage channel 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the covering front plate 10200. Except for differences from the embodiment, the configuration described in the above embodiment is combined. Briefly described, the movable parts (that is, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600, the interference device 6900) except the intermediate discharge device 10180 have the configuration in the eighth embodiment. Is used as it is.

  In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging the sphere at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the covering front plate 10200 is extended in a box shape opened toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage portion 10230 including the storage channel 1231, the protruding portion 1235, and the inclined surface 1237. .

  The housing portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed in such a manner that the lower wall portion of the box bulging downward, and a through hole 10233 drilled in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232.

  The bulging portion 10232 is bulging with a volume equal to or greater than that of the sphere whose flow is restricted downward by the interference member 6930, and a through hole 10233 having a cross-sectional area equal to or larger than the sphere connected to the storage channel 1231 in that portion. Is formed. In this way, the ball staying at a position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to be dropped downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

  The through hole 10233 is a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally in the horizontal direction under the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231, and a vertical hole spatially connected with the horizontal hole 10233a and extending downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b and an inclined surface 10233c which is inclined downward toward the back as an upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b.

  The lateral holes 10233a are disposed on the upper side of the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right end portions, and are disposed below the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 in the vicinity of the right end. It is comprised in the aspect approached into the upper side of the plane (plane of a fixed inclination) in alignment with the extension of a lower base.

  The main body member 10100 has substantially the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board in addition to the one described as the configuration of the main body member 1100 in the above embodiment. A horizontal hole 10111 to be drilled, a discharge port 10112 to which a ball sent to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c is able to pass so as to pass therethrough, and a thin plate member 10110 is arranged to move along the horizontal hole 10111 And an intermediate ejector 10180 having a portion.

  The middle discharging device 10180 is mainly inserted into the lateral holes 10111 and 10233a, and the movable member 10181 which can be moved to the left and right, and a solenoid 10182 which generates a driving force to move the movable member 10181 to the left and right. Prepare.

  The movable member 10181 excites the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening in the storage channel 1231 (an opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the non-excitation (non-drive) state of the solenoid 10182. In the (driven) state, the state is switched to the open state (see FIG. 77) which allows passage of the sphere through the opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage channel 1231.

  The movable member 10181 is maintained in a non-contact state with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not mounted. Thereby, the occurrence of friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232 can be avoided, and the movement resistance can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the closed state, the movable member 10181 is supported by the upper surface and the left and right end portions of the bulging portion 10232 abutting vertically. Thereby, in the closed state of the movable member 10181, even when the ball gets on the upper surface of the movable member 10181, it is possible to prevent the movable member 10181 from hanging down excessively, and the ball in the storage channel 1231 The flow of water can be smoothed.

  The movable member 10181 is formed as an inclined surface which is an upper surface and which is inclined downward toward the left, and which is an inclined upper surface 10181a functioning as a rolling surface on which a ball rolls in a closed state, and a lower surface An inclined lower surface 10181 b formed at the left end and inclined downward toward the right is mainly provided.

  The inclined upper surface 10181a is a state before the ball rides, and the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 at the top and bottom (the movable member 10181 is floating), and the right end portion is adjacent It is disposed slightly below the lower bottom surface of the flow path 1231. As a result, when the ball transfers from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a, the load (resistance) that the ball receives can be reduced.

  In addition, the inclined upper surface 10181a is a state after the ball is on, and in the state where the movable member 10181 is in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the upper and lower direction (the movable member 10181 is sunk), The bottom surface of the flow path 1231 and the surface position are formed. Thereby, when the ball transfers from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231, the load (resistance) that the ball receives can be reduced.

  The shape of the above-described inclined upper surface 10181 a is not the same shape as the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 because the degree of inclination is loose. However, since the difference is slight, the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2, as in the above embodiment also in this embodiment. It is assumed to be seconds.

  The inclined lower surface 10181 b makes it easy to get on and off the bulging portion 10232 even when the ball gets on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state and the movable member 10181 starts to fall forward. It is an inclined surface provided in As a result, the movement of the tip of the movable member 10181 is restricted to the inner surface of the vertical hole 10233b, so that the problem of stopping in that state can be prevented, and the flow of the sphere of the storage channel 1231 is maintained smooth. be able to.

  When the intermediate discharging device 10180 is in the open state (see FIG. 77), the ball on the upstream side including the third storage ball counted from the downstream end flows down the vertical hole 10233b and loads from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is sent to the back side, and is sent to the ball discharge passage (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

  In the present embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112 a that detects passage of a ball, and is configured to be able to determine the number of balls having passed through the discharge port 10112. Then, the ball entering the first specified winning hole 1000a is a detection means for detecting the ball discharged from the detection sensor 10112a or the discharge port 1150 (for example, the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, FIG. Passage is detected by reference), and control is performed to determine whether the number of balls entered matches the number of discharged balls.

  According to the present embodiment, the storage flow path when the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the first specified winning opening 1000a due to the operation mode of the intermediate discharging device 10180 in the round game R, It is possible to switch between when the tank 1231 is full and when the storage channel 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, in order to facilitate understanding, it is assumed that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state.

  78 (a) to 78 (d) are diagrams showing an example of the change of the state of the first specified winning opening 1000a in the round game R and the change of time of the state of the movable member 10181. In FIG. 78 (a), the first specified winning opening 1000a is in the open state (also shown as "open" in the figure. Note that the closed state of the first specified winning opening 1000a is also shown as "closed" in the figure. If the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also shown as “closed” in the figure. The same is true in the following figures) over the period in which the same applies in the subsequent figures. In 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also shown as "open" in the figure, and the same in the subsequent figures) throughout the period in which the first specified winning hole 1000a is in the open state. The time change of the case is illustrated respectively.

  Further, in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the first predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment) elapses after the first specified winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state. After the predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state, and the time change when maintained as it is is shown in FIG. 78 (d), the first specified winning opening 1000a is opened. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in this embodiment) after the state change starts, and then the movable member 10181 closes after a second predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment) Time change when changing to the state and keeping as it is is illustrated respectively.

  In this manner, the driving of the movable member 10181 (the driving of the solenoid 10182) is linked (correlated) to the combination of what round game R is to be executed and what the jackpot type is. It is possible to execute in a kind of drive mode.

  For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78A, since the movable member 10181 is always closed during the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is discharged as in the above embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the balls are not discharged from the middle position of the storage flow channel 1231, the storage flow channel 1231 can be obtained by entering a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls into the first specified winning hole 1000a. It will be full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be made impossible).

  Also, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (b), since the movable member 10181 is always in the open state during the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. Before reaching the discharge port 1150, it falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. That is, even if a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, the storage channel 1231 will not be full. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate (make it possible) an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R.

  In FIG. 78 (b), after excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled as the end of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is reached after 2 seconds (period required for the ball to pass through the storage channel 1231). Since it changes to the open state, it is possible to drop the first specified winning opening 1000a toward the through hole 10233 including the ball that passed last (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released). Therefore, the ball having passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a can be configured not to flow down to the outlet 1150 at all.

  For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the open state 1.0 second after the start of the round game R, and 3.0 seconds after that, the movable member 10181 Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if the balls can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, the prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) The storage channel 1231 will not be full even if the ball of the (a) ball enters the first specified winning hole 1000a. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate (make it possible) an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R.

  In order to arrange the ball above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, taking into consideration the time for the ball to flow down the storage channel 1231, about 2.5 from the start of the round game R It is necessary for the ball to pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a before the lapse of seconds.

  In this embodiment, the time required for the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specified winning hole 1000a (the shortest time, about 2.5 seconds) Time, shorter than about 4 seconds). Therefore, it is not in time to launch the ball from the start of the round game R.

  Therefore, in order to prevent the storage channel 1231 from being full, it is necessary to continue the firing of the ball also in the interval between rounds before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode of stopping the firing of the ball in the interval between rounds.

  In addition, the effect by the display device or the like is configured such that the player can not easily grasp the information about whether or not the round game R in which the driving mode shown in FIG. Therefore, regardless of whether or not it is a round game R driven in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the game mode to stop the firing of the ball in the interval between the rounds just before that round game R is suppressed Can.

  Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is brought into the open state, and 2.0 seconds elapses thereafter. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change to the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed while the round game R continues, but when the round game R ends, the control is skipped and the movable member 10181 is forced to be in the closed state Can be switched.

  In the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), for example, when the first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) When round balls R have passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a, all the balls that have passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a are stored because the round game R has ended before the movable member 10181 is opened. It is stored in 1231 and the storage channel 1231 becomes full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R (can be made impossible).

  On the other hand, for example, when the second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls is the first specific winning combination When passing through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the end of the round game R, and the ball falls toward the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112, so that the storage channel 1231 is full. It does not become tongue. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate (make it possible) an excess prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round games R.

  Therefore, according to the drive mode of FIG. 78 (d), the prescribed number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is determined depending on whether the time taken for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or more than the reference time T11s. It is possible to switch whether or not the excess prize winning occurs.

  In the case of this driving mode, it is preferable to execute the round game R for a long time, in order to emphasize the payout number of the winning balls in the round game R. That is, it is preferable to stop the firing of the balls intermittently so that the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls does not enter the first specified winning opening 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds may be promoted.

  On the other hand, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), as described above, it is possible to aim for the occurrence of overruns by continuously firing the ball at intervals between rounds.

  In this way, driving modes in which the preferred ball firing modes conflict with each other are distributed to the round games R of the jackpot game (by controlling to make the driving modes different depending on the jackpot type even in the same round), A player's concentration on jackpot game can be improved as compared with the case where the jackpot game can be always executed in the same manner of launch (the profit obtained by the player is similar).

  According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the restriction member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is determined according to the operation mode of the movable member 10181 It can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the reservoir channel 1231 is filled with ten balls and the case where the reservoir channel 1231 is not filled even if ten balls are loaded.

  In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, seven storage channels 1231 (9 when two balls are already disposed downstream of the interference member 6930, see FIG. 75). It is possible to switch between the case where the tank is filled by entering the ball and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not filled even if 7 (or 9) balls are inserted.

  Although the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 in an extended state in response to the movable member 10181 being in the open state, the ball rides on the momentum and passes (jumps over) the upper part of the through hole 10233 in the left and right direction. It can be prevented.

  The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the one described above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by the operation of the operation button 300.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  By setting the movable member 10181 in the open state, the sphere can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. As a result, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specified winning opening 1000a.

  That is, the number of balls entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a and the number of stored channels of the storage channel 1231 are the same while the first specified winning hole 1000a is kept open, and the first specified winning hole 1000a is entered. It is possible to configure the case where the number of balls and the number of stored channels of the storage channel 1231 are different. As a result, the possibility of occurrence of an overcoming winning on the first specified winning opening 1000a can be changed by the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 in the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of installation front board 11200.

  As shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of this embodiment, the shape of the opening and closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream side portion of the fall delay plate 3250 is omitted, The second variable winning device 3000 has the same configuration as that of the third embodiment except that the additional winning opening 11183 and the like are added. Therefore, the same elements as those of the embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the main body member 11100, in addition to the configuration already described in the above embodiments, a thin plate member 11110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board is separated by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of a ball. A pair of left and right projecting thin plate member 1110 is provided with a projecting rib 11111, a guide hole 11112 which is formed as a long long hole and guides movement of the opening / closing means 11190 described later, and extends to the left of the guide hole 11112 And a guide recess 11113 configured as a bottomed recess to be formed.

  The main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow passage of a ball, and an opening / closing unit 11190 that changes the winning probability of the ball to the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening / closing means 11190 will be described later.

  In the drop delay plate 3250 formed on the covering front plate 11200 in the present embodiment, only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position farther from the side wall 1220 than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side is maintained. The left portion of the cutting plane SP12 is omitted.

  The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position where the ball which has rolled on the inclined surface 1237 and reached the drop delay plate 3250 does not reach alone. That is, the ball that has rolled on the inclined surface 1237 and reached the drop delay plate 3250 flows downward to the right along the slope of the drop delay plate 3250 (in the direction approaching the detection sensor 1240) unless external force is applied. Do.

  On the other hand, when a load is given to the ball and the ball is thrown to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls to the second additional winning opening 11183 side with high probability. This falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening / closing means 11190 to be newly described in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening through which three winning balls are paid out by detecting passage of a ball.

  The opening and closing plate 11300 has an inclined surface 11340 left after being scraped off in a shape that is inclined so as to approach the left shaft 1320 from the rotation front end toward the rotation shaft in the left half.

  The position where the speed in the left-right direction becomes zero after the inclined surface 11340 lands on the falling delay plate 3250 to the right of the cutting surface SP12 at the end on the rotating tip side (final arrival position FP12, figure It is placed to the right of the center of the sphere that reached 82 (see (a)).

  Therefore, when the open / close plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state when there is a ball at a position where the velocity in the left-right direction is 0 (final arrival position FP12, see FIG. 82A), The ball is loaded. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIG. In FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (c), the change of the state of the first variable winning device 11000 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 82 (a), the opening and closing plate 11300 is closed. The final reaching position FP12 of the ball rolling on the surface 1237 and landing on the fall delay plate 3250 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 82 (b), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened from the state shown in FIG. The state after the change is illustrated, and in FIG. 82 (c), a state in which the ball falls from the state illustrated in FIG. 82 (b) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the ball disposed at the final arrival position FP12 abuts on the inclined surface 11340 as the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state, and is given a leftward load. The ball given a leftward load is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the fall delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

  On the other hand, when the ball does not reach the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when the ball slightly descends from the final arrival position FP12 and is disposed at the position illustrated by a solid line in FIG. 82A), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened. Even when changed to the state, the inclined surface 11340 does not abut the ball, and the ball has a component directed to the right because the opening / closing plate 11300 rotates (the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal) Direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 side. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the opening and closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, depending on the position on the front side of the opening and closing plate 11300, whether the ball is directed to the detection sensor 1240 , Can go to the second additional winning opening 11183.

  The payout of the winning balls by passing the ball through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an excess winning ball exceeding the winning balls scheduled for the jackpot game for the player, so the ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183 The more money there is, the more profit the player will earn.

  The open / close plate is compared with the case where the firing of the ball is stopped by continuing the firing of the ball toward the first specified winning opening 1000a while the opening / closing plate 11300 maintains the closed state (interval between rounds). Since the situation that the ball is placed at the final arrival position FP12 can be easily generated at the timing when the 11300 changes to the open state, promoting the game mode of continuing the firing of the ball over the inter-round interval period it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the player stops the firing of the ball during the interval interval between rounds.

  In addition, since entering the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183 is on the condition that the opening and closing plate 11300 is changed to the open state, the state where the opening and closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game) In a state other than the above, it is configured that entering the second additional winning opening 11183 is unlikely to occur even if the right hitting is continued.

  Thus, in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation in which the right-handed instruction effect is not executed), the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 even if right-handed It is possible to configure so that it is difficult for the player to obtain the accompanying benefits. That is, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be functioned as a winning opening which makes it easy for the ball to enter in a situation (small hit game or big hit game) where driving of the opening / closing plate 11300 occurs.

  Subsequently, the opening / closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIGS. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000, and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) show the arrangement of the projecting ribs 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 and the second additional winning opening 11183. It is a front schematic diagram of projecting rib 11111, opening-and-closing means 11190, and the 2nd addition winning opening 11183 which show typically. In FIG. 85 (a) to FIG. 85 (c), the time change of the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening / closing means 11190 is a movable means which is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moved to the left and right in conjunction with the movement of the tip member 1520 and is supported by the guide hole 11112 in the inserted state. Main body support portion 11191, a transmission portion 11192 extending upward from the back side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and supported by the tip member 1520, and extending leftward from the front side portion of the main body support portion 11191 An extending portion 11193, a first projecting portion 11194 projecting toward the front side at the left end of the extending portion 11193, and an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the ball on the right side of the first projecting portion 11194 And a second protruding portion 11195 protruding in the same shape as the first protruding portion 11194.

  An assembling method of the opening and closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically expanded so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portion is slightly longer than the main body support 11191. It is formed as a long hole as horizontal.

  Therefore, after the transmission part 11192 is projected to the back side through this enlarged part, the opening / closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and thereafter the drive device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100 and the transmission part 11192 is supported by the tip member 1520 Thus, the opening / closing means 11190 can be assembled in an interlocking manner with the tip member 1520. In the movable range of the solenoid 1510, the transmission part 11192 does not reach the enlarged part at the right end of the guide hole 11112 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), so that the problem of the opening / closing means 11190 coming off the guide hole 11112 is prevented can do.

  The extension 11193 is formed with a thickness sufficient to completely receive the guide recess 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the front side of the opening and closing means 11190 from colliding with the extending portion 11193, and the flowing path of the ball changes in the front and back direction, or the extending portion 11193 It is possible to prevent damage.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates that are inclined downward toward the left in a front view. In this embodiment, when the ball on the drop delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, it falls between the projecting ribs 11111 and enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by the opening / closing means 11190. It is switched whether or not to. This will be described in detail.

  FIG. 85 (a) shows a state where the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 and the projecting rib 11111 on the right side are disposed on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

  When the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (a), the ball abuts on the second projecting portion 11195 and flows leftward. As a result, since it flows off from the second additional prize winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional prize winning opening 11183 can be lowered.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows the state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the middle position of the movement range (see FIG. 20 (c)). That is, this corresponds immediately after the opening and closing plate 11300 is closed.

  In this case, the upper end portion of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed to the left of the vertical line passing through the middle position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111, and the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 is the second additional prize. It is disposed to the right of the center line of the mouth 11183.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (b), the ball abuts on the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the right, and abuts on the second projecting portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the flowing ball flows down toward the second additional winning hole 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning hole 11183 can be increased.

  In FIG. 85 (c), the state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the right end position of the movement range is shown (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the open / close plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state as in FIG. 85 (b).

  In this case, the upper end portion of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed to the right of the vertical line passing through the middle position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111.

  Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (c), the ball abuts on the first projecting portion 11194 and flows leftward. Since the flowing ball deviates from the second additional winning hole 11183 and flows down, the probability of entering the second additional winning hole 11183 can be lowered.

  That is, while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open or closed state, the opening / closing means 11190 keeps the probability of the ball entering the second additional winning opening 11183 low and keeps the second additional prize on the way. It is configured such that the probability of the ball entering the mouth 11183 is high.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing means 11190 interlocks with the state of the opening / closing plate 1300 to change the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183. Here, the difference in the drive control of the solenoid 1510 will explain the case where the ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning hole 11183 and the case where it can not be expected.

  The phenomenon that the ball flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the drop delay plate 3250 occurs when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82B and 82C).

  Therefore, in the drive pattern (operation pattern with low ball entry probability) in which the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the drive (excitation) state, when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the projecting rib 11111, the tip member 1520 Similar to the arrangement of the above, the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position. Since the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained since the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the ball which has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional prize hole 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

  On the other hand, in the drive pattern (operation pattern with high ball entry probability) in which the drive (excitation) is canceled once (the open / close plate 11300 is short-opened) immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) When the ball that has flowed to the left passes through the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end position, but thereafter the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released. The biasing force of the return spring moves the opening / closing means 11190 toward the right end position. As a result, the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a load facing right from the first protruding portion 11194 and flows down along the second protruding portion 11195, so the ball is moved to the second additional winning opening 11183. It can flow down.

  Thus, by providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 11300, the same timing (for example, timing when the inclined surface 11340 contacts the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82 (b)) It is possible to change the probability of the ball flowing to the left entering the second additional winning opening 11183.

  In the operation pattern with a high ball entry probability, the timing for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In this embodiment, the timing at which the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 by the load from the opening and closing plate 11300 passes through the projecting rib 11111 and reaches between the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 Is controlled to release the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

  In addition, the 2nd additional winning a prize mouth 11183 may be constituted as a ball entrance which starts change of special symbol 2 by ball entering of a ball. In this case, since the number of balls reserved for the special symbol 2 can be increased by the ball reaching the opening and closing plate 11300 during the interval interval between rounds, it is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit game. Regardless, the fluctuation associated with the holding of the special symbol 1 is started, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the phenomenon of giving the player a disadvantage.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Depending on where on the front side of the opening and closing plate 11300 the ball is arranged at the timing when the opening and closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, whether the ball goes to the detection sensor 1240 (enters the ball), the second additional winning opening 11183 In addition to being able to switch whether to head (enter), continuing the firing of the ball during the interval between rounds makes it easier for the ball to flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183. As a result, since it is easier to increase the number of paid-out balls by continuing the firing of the balls during the inter-round interval period, it is possible to promote the game mode of continuing the firing of the balls during the inter-round interval period. It is easy to do.

  While the state of the opening and closing plate 11300 is maintained, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to reach the ball even if the ball arrives. Thus, the second additional winning opening 11183 can function as a winning opening in which the ball can easily enter in a state in which the drive of the opening / closing plate 11300 (small hit game or big hit game) occurs.

  While it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the state of the opening and closing means 11190 is maintained, it is easy for the ball to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 in the middle of the state change of the opening and closing means 11190 In addition to being configured as described above, a ball that receives a load from the open / close plate 11300 when the open / close plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state is sent to the second additional prize opening 11183 It was configured to flow down to 11183. Thereby, the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 11300 after the opening and closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (round game R is started) Can change.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140, a first control example will be described. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away to make the opening and closing plate 1300 visible, and a part of the side wall 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. It is illustrated by. Further, FIG. 86 (a) shows a schematic view showing the shielding state of the first variable winning device 6000, and FIG. 86 (b) shows the inside from the shielding state in which the inside is hard to see (though it is difficult to see). The schematic diagram which shows the permeation | transmission state of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus 6000 at the time of the permeation | transmission production | presentation which makes variable into the visibility which can be visually recognized is performed is shown in figure. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 by the thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the storage channel 1231. Configured (the permeability of the thin plate member 1210 is configured to be low).

  In addition, even when trying to look into the interior of the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is bent and formed as a flow channel, and the downstream side can not be visually recognized. It is configured such that the number of balls stored in can not be grasped. In addition, since the arrangement position of the interference device 6900 is downstream of the bending portion, the movable state of the interference device 6900 can not be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the thin plate member 1210 is extended on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 86 (a)) of the detection sensor 1240 in the opening direction (see FIG. 14) to limit the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 In addition, it is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to make it difficult to grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the shielding state of the first variable winning device 6000. it can.

  In the variable winning device 6000 configured in this manner, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, success of the timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B)). As shown in FIG. 86 (b), the covering front plate 1200 is configured by a half mirror so as to switch to a transmission state in which the inside is visible. As a result, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

  A light sensor for detecting light incident from the outside may be provided behind the covering front plate 1200. In this case, using the characteristics of the half mirror that makes the inside visible when irradiated with strong light from the outside, the fraudulent act of irradiating the strong light to the covering front plate 1200 and trying to look inside is performed. , And the output of the light sensor. Therefore, by setting an error command corresponding to the change of the output of the light sensor and controlling the continuation of the game to be difficult, it is possible to suppress the cheating.

  In this control example, the configuration to switch to the transmission state is used by irradiating the covering front plate 1200 with light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. For example, a part of the covering front plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means can be moved so that the incident angle of light irradiated to the covering front plate 1200 is switched from the light emitting means (LED) constantly lit. It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside is visible only when the movable part is positioned at a predetermined position.

  In addition, the covering front plate 1200 may be formed of a transparent color that allows the inside to be visually recognized, and the surface may be configured to be subjected to processing (for example, emboss processing) to diffusely reflect the irradiated light. Thereby, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the first variable winning device 6000 by the light emitted from various lamps, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, various types When the lamp is not lit), the inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the store clerk can easily check the inside of the variable winning device 6000.

  In the case of using such a configuration, a shielding wall is provided to shield the first variable winning device 6000 from being irradiated with light emitted from various lamps, and the shielding wall is made variable between the shielding state and the shielding state. A configuration may be provided. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the inside of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 even while a game is being performed.

  In addition, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating light to the first variable winning device 6000 and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 A state (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which a visible state (a state in which light is not irradiated) may be switched.

  Furthermore, a movable member for decoration is provided on the covering front plate 1200 from which the inside can be visually recognized, and by controlling the operation of the movable member, the state where the inside of the storage channel 1231 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is A state where it can move at a position not overlapping the storage flow path 1231) and a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage flow path 1231 (a state where the movable movable member for decoration is moved at an overlapping position so as to cover the storage flow path 1231) You may make it switch.

  Moreover, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 86A, the covering front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage channel 1231, and it is ensured that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it has an effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in an attitude in which normal gaming is performed.

  For example, it may be difficult to visually recognize only the lower half (downstream side of the bent portion) of the storage channel 1231, and the visibility of the upper half may be ensured (even if the formation of the upper half half mirror is omitted). Alternatively, in a similar manner, it may be difficult to visually recognize only a portion overlapping with the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 in a front view. Thus, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be built at low cost.

  Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be secured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half may be omitted), and the upper half may be made less visible. In this case, while the lower limit of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the balls remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231, the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 It can be difficult to grasp the exact number.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to set the timing to stop the firing when the player temporarily stops the firing of the ball in order to reduce the dead ball (a ball that does not enter the winning opening). In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, if the storage channel 1231 is full (10 balls are stored), it is not possible to expect further ball entry Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to reduce wasted balls by stopping the firing of the balls at that timing.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000 in the round game R of the predetermined number of times does not necessarily match the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the variable winning prize device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can not be accurately known. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231.

  That is, only with the configuration of this control example, while the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 is secured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half is omitted), the configuration that makes the upper half less visible is effective. It becomes difficult for the player to easily set the timing for stopping the firing of the ball. As a result, the player's attention and concentration to the firing of the ball in the jackpot game can be improved, and the player can be prevented from playing casually.

  As a feature of the present control example shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), in addition to the change in the above-mentioned viewing state, the operation timing of the interference member 6930 is operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Although the timing which can be set by can be mentioned, the details will be described later.

  Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by it. To be executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is constituted by ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least one second.

  In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a predetermined period (one second or more), it is determined whether the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot) It can be suppressed that it is overlooked). In addition, if the combination of big hit symbols (the combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the disassembly and there is a holding ball, the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after 1 second of stop display . In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time. Moreover, when both the holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the holding ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the lottery based on the holding ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in the state where the holding ball is not present, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters for either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the ball into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 despite the fact that the player continuously launches the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game at all because the player quits playing the game. to cause.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is accepted. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of balls held, which is the number of balls (parking balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

  In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the present pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols for which the lottery is easy to be executed (one of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2) are different according to the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol for which a lottery is easily performed in the current gaming state is performed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol whose lottery is difficult to be executed in the current gaming state is executed.

  Here, it is a big attention item for the player that the lottery of the special symbol which is difficult to be executed is executed. For example, in the normal state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 2 in which the lottery is difficult to be executed is executed, and when the lottery result is the jackpot, the player is compared with the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1 There is a possibility that the expectation of the profit to be obtained may be high. In addition, for example, in the high probability state of the special symbol lottery of special symbol 1 which is difficult to execute the lottery is executed, when the lottery result is the jackpot, compared with the case where it becomes the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 The expectation of the profit obtained by the player may be low.

  Therefore, in the small area Ds3, the game is performed by performing the variable display only when the drawing of the special symbol for which the drawing is difficult to be performed in the current gaming state is performed (by dividing it from the variable display in the main display area Dm) It is easy to attract the attention of the player, and the player can be drawn to the variable display.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display region Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbols displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed in the right small region Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a hachimaki in this control example) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character The notice effect is performed by making it appear or the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing variable display based on the drawing of the special symbol 1; If the ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the drawing of the special symbol 2 is being performed, the number of entrances is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first While being indicated by the symbol display device 37, it is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number symbol) indicates the number of balls held for the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed on the lower half (second symbol) The holding ball number pattern) indicates the number of holding balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 87 exemplifies a case in which four first reserved symbols are displayed, and the second reserved symbol is displayed zero (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-parking balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of holding balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or the area divided into four is different by the number of holding balls (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, timing effects (operation effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this control example, based on an operation on the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1), an effect associated with the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) is performed. In addition, as an effect related to the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, for example, an effect of changing the visibility of the inside of the storage channel 1231, a discharge mode of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, and the like An effect to be changed is exemplified. And, these effects are configured such that the contents of the effects change depending on the degree of the difference between the predetermined reference operation timing and the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, according to the timing effect (operation effect), by executing the operation with good timing, the effect is configured such that the profit obtained by the player is maximized. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the notice effect performed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is performed, and FIG. 88 (b) to FIG. 89 are It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing production (operation production). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (the operation button 300) are changed based on the operation of the operation means The display contents of the 3 symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the third symbol display device 81, the number-of-rounds display portion 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a mode showing that round game R in the third round is in progress. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, a display of “Aim for the right” is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the gaming method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls acquired based on the winning of the ball in the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 1000a. Be done. The number-of-earnings display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning hole 1000a, and then is moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally the small area Ds2 is displayed. It is added as an acquisition indication.

  In the number-of-rounds display portion 714, the display regarding the section of the game currently being executed (the number of rounds or the interval) is largely displayed on the left, and the display regarding the section of the game started after the section of the game currently being executed is on the right It is displayed small.

  Also, four circles are displayed side by side below the number-of-rounds display. In this circle, the circle to be filled is switched depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is filled (see FIG. 88 (a), corresponding to the insufficient display), and stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of balls to be played is four or more and less than seven, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven When the number is less than 9 or more, the second circle from the right is filled (see FIG. 92A, corresponding to the insufficient display), and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10 In the case, the right end circle is filled (see FIG. 92 (b), corresponding to full display).

  In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) is started from the next round, and a guidance display for notifying the game effect of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used for timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In this effect area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and a sub display area Ds4 in which a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88B) is displayed corresponding to the button display mode 715 Below the sub-display area Ds4, there is provided a sub-display area Ds5 which is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and displays information on the player's operation.

  The sub display area Ds4, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 (b), is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled from right to left, and the display pointer 719 is a display mode indicating operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at timing matched with the bar display portion 717, a success effect (see FIG. 88B described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on (see FIG. 86 (b)) in relation to the success effect being executed in the fourth round game R. In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the inside of the covering front plate 1200 is difficult to visually recognize when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, while the transmission lamp It is comprised by the half mirror so that it switches to the permeation | transmission state which the inside can recognize visually by lighting 227ba-227be. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flow-down condition (the storage channel 1231) of the ball flowing down near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)). It is possible to make the player grasp the storage mode).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 89, in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R, some of the transmission lamps 227ba of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be light. Thus, while it is not possible to visually recognize the storage mode of the sphere arranged in the vicinity of the interference device 6900 (the lower half of the storage channel 1231), the sphere is arranged in the vicinity of the detection sensor 1240 (the upper half of the storage channel 1231) The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), while the advance notice effect is being executed, the characters “standby” are scrolled and displayed in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5 from right to left.

  Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display portion 717, the screen center is displayed. The characters “good” are displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, as a result, the text “Attention to the attacker!” Is displayed near the display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub display area Ds5. The letters "good" are displayed as well.

  In this case, the player can easily notice the display by distributing the character "good" to the third symbol display device 81, and the attacker who noticed the display can attach an attacker (the first variable winning device 6000). It can be made easy to make it pay attention to). Then, the player can be made to notice that the storage spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 can be visually recognized, and the player who noticed that is the number of stored players. In response, suitable launch ball adjustments can be made.

  The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719c does not coincide with the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect), and The characters "bad" are displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the character "bad" is displayed in the sub display area Ds5 as in the result display mode 720. In this case, the characters "Attention to the attacker!" Are not displayed.

  In this case, the player can easily notice the display by distributing the characters "bad" on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the player is not allowed to visually recognize the storage ball stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 by not displaying the character of “Attention to the attacker!” Since it is possible to suppress paying attention to the winning device 6000), it is possible to maintain the ability of the player to pay attention to the effects of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of confidence with respect to the display of the character "It pays attention to the attacker!"

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 89, when the result display mode 720 is displayed, a part of the transmission lamps 227ba are on. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the round game R of the fourth round, after the display pointer 719 passes the bar display portion 717, the operation of the operation button 300 is performed even after 3 seconds. If it is not performed, it is controlled so as to keep all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be turned off, so in the round game R after that (from the fourth round to the sixth round) of the reservoir channel 1231 It is configured to be extremely difficult to view the inside.

  FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, and FIG. 90 (b) to FIG. ) Is a schematic view showing an example of display contents during timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (the operation button 300) are changed based on the operation of the operation means The display contents of the 3 symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the third symbol display device 81, the above-described number-of-rounds display portion 714 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a mode indicating that it is in the interval between rounds just before the fifth round game R. In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, a display of “Aim for the right” is displayed on the guidance display unit for guiding the gaming method.

  At the center of the screen, an operation instruction display consisting of the characters “press!” Prompting the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used for timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

  In the sub display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, a band display part 716 which is a display mode indicating an operation timing as in the bar display part 717 is displayed. The band display unit 716 is adjacent to the first band portion 716a where the character of “safety” is displayed on the right side of the bar display portion 717, and the bar display portion 716a is provided adjacent to the first band portion 716a. A second band portion 716b in which the character “high” is displayed overlapping with the upper and lower portions 717 and a third band portion 716c in which the character “failed” is displayed on the left of the second band portion 716b .

  As described above, in the sub display area Ds4, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left. In this control example, depending on which position of the band display unit 716 the display pointer 719d is on by operating the operation button 300 (operation means), it is controlled to change the profit obtained by the player.

  For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the first band portion 716a, a relief effect (see FIG. 91A described later) is performed. In this case, while the advantageous event that it is possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol occurs after the end of the big hit game, the payout of the prize ball in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly reduced (specified number (In this control example, the number of winning balls decreases as the player can not enter the ball 10), and an adverse event occurs in which the duration of the round game R for the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds) .

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the second band portion 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90B described later) is executed. In this case, an advantageous event occurs that it is possible to acquire a privilege to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and the prescribed number (10) of balls in the round game R of the fifth round While there is an advantageous event that it is possible to enter the special winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round of round games R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), no adverse event occurs.

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is located above the third band portion 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not performed, a failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91 (b) described later) is executed. In this case, while the disadvantageous event that it is not possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game occurs, the specified number (10) of balls in the fifth round game R An advantageous event occurs in that the player can enter the special winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Since the maximum benefit can be obtained by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b overlapping with the bar display portion 717 at the top and bottom, as shown in FIG. And even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without a sense of discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band 716b in the vertical direction The letters “highest! V earned!” (Highest effect) are displayed as a result display mode 720 at the center of the screen, and that the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. Ru. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to obtain the maximum profit, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b overlapping with the bar display portion 717 at the top and bottom, control is performed so that the maximum profit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round of round game R) displayed in FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 89 (effect in the interval between rounds is started immediately Also, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without discomfort.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), since the guidance display indicates “Don't let go of your mind even after the end of the round”, the interval between rounds after the end of the round game R of the fourth round (Figure Also in 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. As a result, the player is not aware of the display of the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90 (b), and the possibility of inconvenience caused by the inability to operate the operation button 300 (operation means) can be lowered. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at such a timing that the display pointer 719e coincides with the first band 716a in the upper and lower direction. While the letter (reliable effect) of "reliable! V with acquisition!" Is displayed at the center of the screen as the result display manner 720, the operation of the operation button 300 makes the display manner of the button display manner 715 variable. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a profit that can be relieved with some disadvantages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, with some disadvantages, as mentioned above, the payout of the prize balls in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly reduced (the prescribed number (10 in this control example) can not be entered. It means that the duration of the round game R of the 5th round will be the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719f coincides with the third band 716c in the vertical direction The letters “Failure! V not! Next expectation!” Are displayed at the center of the screen as a result display mode 720, and the display mode of the button display mode 715 can be changed by operating the operation button 300. Displayed by As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a large amount of disadvantage will occur.

  In addition, as mentioned above, it is a disadvantage that it can not acquire the privilege transitioned to the high probability state of a special symbol after the end of a jackpot game, as mentioned above. Also, in this case, as described above, the specified number (10) of balls can be entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a in the fifth round of round game R, and the continuation of the fifth round of round game R Since the time can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the timing of the end of the jackpot game can be advanced compared to the case shown in FIG. 91 (a), and the drawing of the special symbol can be executed early. Since it is possible, the transition timing to the next jackpot game can be facilitated earlier.

  As described above, in this control example, there is a profit obtained by the player based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, the player's willingness to operate the operation button 300 (operation means) can be improved.

  Next, display in the round game R of the sixth round will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b). FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying that the third round game R is being executed by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in FIG. 92 (a), it is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display in case a jackpot type is "big hit L" or "big hit N", and in FIG. 92 (b), jackpot type is "big hit K", It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k."

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (a), the jackpot type is won by the jackpot of "jackpot L" or "jackpot N", that is, it is elected in the sixth round jackpot. The letter "Big win" is displayed.

  Also, in the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot type wins the jackpot of "big hit K", "big hit M" or "big hit k", ie, 6 round big hit The character of "big hit" is displayed to indicate that the player has won, and in the sixth round of the round game R, the interference device 6900 is executed with an operation pattern (twentyth operation pattern) advantageous to the player The character of "+ chance" is displayed as the over prize possibility increase informing mode 721 for notifying that, and accordingly, the character of "striking right!" Is displayed on the guidance display portion in the small area Ds3.

  If the jackpot type is "jackpot K", "jackpot M" or "jackpot k" jackpot, in the sixth round of round game R, by continuing without stopping the firing of the ball, more than the specified number of balls entered The interference device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence (see FIG. 99 (a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving payouts of balls exceeding the prescribed number by continuing the firing of the balls according to the display of FIG. 92 (b).

  Thus, in addition to the aspect informing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, by notifying the mode of informing the operation status of the interference device 6900 in the big hit on the display screen in the round game R, A display mode suitable for round game R of various patterns can be displayed. In this control example, by continuing or stopping the firing of the ball according to this display, the player is likely to receive the maximum benefit scheduled for each jackpot type as the benefit given to the player. Controlled by Therefore, the player can make it easy to obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

  In this control example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is made to differ based on the operation content for the player to be executed for the timing effect (operation effect), but in addition to that, for example, the timing effect Operation history (operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) in an operation effect (for example, a mini game effect in a big hit game or a reach effect in special symbol fluctuation) executed other than (operation effect) The presentation mode of the timing presentation (operation presentation) may be configured to be different based on the number of times, the content of the operation, and the operation result). As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly with respect to various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, the timing effect is not limited to the result of the operation on the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, for example, based on the clocking period clocked by the clock means (RTC) or the game period in which the player played the game. You may comprise so that the presentation mode of (operation presentation) may be switched.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the change with respect to FIG. 4 is demonstrated, and description is abbreviate | omitted in the same part.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram for explaining a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  Selection of jackpot random number counter C1 to be used for lottery of jackpot (and jackpot) and selection of jackpot type (jackpot symbol) for setting of display of jackpot lottery and first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 Used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, the stop type counter C3 used to select the stop type, the change type counter CS1 used to select the change pattern, and the first hit random number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

  Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In addition, the small hitting type counter C5 is used for the selection of the small hitting type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated periodically in the main processing (see FIG. 117) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value is stored in the RAM 203 for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a where the counter value is stored for winning for the first entrance 64 and the winning for the second entrance 640. Special symbol 2 holding ball storage 203b is provided.

  In this control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, each counter value is a special symbol when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable display or the special symbol is not being played in the big hit game of the special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the first holding ball storage area 203a and the second ball entry port 640 has a winning game ball, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) Various settings and control processes are performed. Similarly, various counter values stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b are moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, and various kinds for displaying the special symbol 2 in a variable manner Setting and control processing are performed.

  On the other hand, during a period when it is not possible to draw a special symbol such as during variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the big hit game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 etc. In the case of winning in the ball opening 640, when the number of holdings for the winning entrance (starting opening) is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the winning is achieved. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entered ball entrance is stored. In addition, when the number of pending items for the winning entrance is the upper limit value (four in this control example) or more, acquisition of each counter value etc. is not performed but a winning ball (five in the present control example) Only the winning balls are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in this control example), and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in this control example) There is. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is specified in the first hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94 (a)) of the main control unit 110, and the first hit random number counter C1. When the value matches with the value of the jackpot random number defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the drawing of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, when the gaming state is in the low probability state, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0” in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. If it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is within the range of “1 to 4” in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 If it is in the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined to be a jackpot.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that is the big hit of the special symbol For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 that is the big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "0" is the first hit random number table as described above It is stored in 202a (refer FIG. 94 (a)). As described above, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values is 320, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is “1/320”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is the big hit of the special symbol, and the random value "1-4" is the first hit random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. As described above, since the total number of random number values to be the big hit is 4 among the total number of random number values to be 320, the probability to be the big hit of the special symbol is “1/80”.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)) The Rukoto. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach is generated, it differs from the symbol to which reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "reach out" (for example, a range of 90 to 99) at which the symbol stops and "complete out" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt processing in this control example), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is the special value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in a definite variation state of a special symbol, a jackpot is easily generated, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 The table of (1) is selected, and "complete out" is likely to be selected, and "reach out" is narrowed to 90 to 99, making "reach out" difficult to select. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 A table for low probability time is selected, it becomes difficult to select "completely out", and the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach out" becomes wide as 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done.

  In this control example, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 117) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and for each, the variation pattern selection table is set according to the pass / fail judgment result. It is done.

  In the present control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. Are acquired and stored in the execution area of the normal symbol of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the normal symbol is specified in the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 94 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. In this control example, in the second random number table 202c, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random number values that become the hit of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 9 It is ". Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 5 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability to be hit of the normal symbol at low probability of the normal symbol is “1 / 48 ".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time reduction state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability to be hit by a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2" . As described above, in this control example, the random number value corresponding to the normal symbol is largely different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the collision probability is significantly different. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is hit are also different between the low probability time and the high probability time of the normal symbol . For this reason, since the ease of entering the second entrance 640 is largely different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), A player can play a game by aiming at the first ball entrance 64.

  In the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the through gate (normal entry ball opening) 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. In 2), the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the second ball entry port 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate (normal ball entry port) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the high probability state of the regular symbol, the variation display of the normal symbol is 1 second in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2) If the value of the second random number counter C4 that has been executed and acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as the symbol), and the second entry port 640 is opened for “one second × two times”. In this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric character combination may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the game characteristics.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, "0 to 239"), and it is performed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 117), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 116) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this control example. In addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c described above, the ROM 202 further includes a first type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area. 202e and an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided at least.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (refer to FIG. 94 (b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per unit is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), “big hit K” is defined in association with the special symbol 1 in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C 2 is “0 to 24”. This "big hit K" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit K" is 25, so "big hit K" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit K", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the end of the big hit, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST 80 times). Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of the expected ball (expected ball) that the player can acquire from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of “25 to 49”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit L”. This "big hit L" is a big hit of 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value to be "big hit L" is 25, so "big hit L" is determined when it becomes big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit L", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and transition to a high probability state of 80 times (ST 80 times) after the big hit is similar to "big hit K", but as described later, In terms of gaming efficiency (payout ball number / time required for a big hit game), it is a disadvantageous big hit type compared to “big hit K”.

  In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of "50 to 74", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with "big hit M". This "big hit M" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit M" is 25, so "big hit M" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit M", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

  In addition, for the special symbol 1, “big hit N” is defined in association with the range of “75 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C 2. This "big hit N" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, 25 counter values are "big hit N", so "big hit N" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 25% (25/100).

  In this "big hit N", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and it is similar to "big hit M" that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the big hit ends, but as described later The jackpot M is disadvantageous in that the maximum payout number is small (the possibility of over winning is low).

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the jackpot k is defined in association with the range (entire range) of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99". This "big hit k" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit k" is 100, so "big hit k" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The proportion is 100%.

  In this "big hit k", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, whether to shift to a high probability state of 80 times short (ST 80 times) or whether 100 times short state of a normal symbol is given It changes according to the game mode of the player in the jackpot game. The game mode of the player is not limited at all, and a ball may be allowed to pass through a predetermined entrance, or a predetermined operation means may be operated. I will mention later.

  In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds for the jackpot game, but the special bonus 2 (the time saving state or the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is more advantageous when the jackpot is given It is defined that (it becomes easy to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the game proceeds to a high probability state in which the player who is more likely to win the game by winning the special symbol 2 wins against the game winning by the lottery of the special symbol 1. The configuration is easier. Therefore, once the continuous shooting mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the lottery of special symbol 2 is performed by entering the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed Becomes easy to be executed, and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the detailed contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. The opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the big hit game, using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 6 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set to the opening / closing plate 1300 and “retraction state” is set to the interference member 6930 as scenario contents. In the operation scenario 1, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage of the operation It is controlled to return to the state (a state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the interference member is in the retracted state).

  The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario with a maximum of 10 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario content and “retraction state” is set in the interference member 6930. In the operation scenario 2, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 10 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage It is controlled to return to the state.

  In the operation scenario 3, “open (opened state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (opened state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario contents, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state” This is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which 1.0 second → overhang state 0.1 second → evacuation state is set. In the operation scenario 3, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is ended by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 3, unlike the operation scenario 1 and the operation scenario 2 described above, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that the storage channel 1231 is opened. It is possible to discharge the remaining balls, but the details will be described later. In addition, since closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 second, four balls can be discharged from the reservoir channel 1231 (as described above, 0.2 second is required for discharging one ball).

  Among the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, the spheres discharged while the closed (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and 18.0 seconds later (the fifth round) The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closing position 20.0 seconds after the start of the game R).

  This “after 2.0 seconds” is later than the timing at which the third ball counting from the downstream passes through the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball is a numerical value set as a time point before the time when it passes the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the outlet 1150 just before the end of 0.8 seconds in which the closing (closing state) of the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained (from the start of the fifth round game R 1.). It is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass the communication path 4810 from the discharge port 1150 (0 seconds elapsed) (2.0 seconds elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R). .

  In the operation scenario 4, “open (open state) 0.2 sec → closed (closed state) 0.8 sec → open (open state)” is set as the scenario content in the opening / closing plate 1300, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state” This is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which 1.0 seconds → overhang state 24.0 seconds → retraction state is set. In the operation scenario 4, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage of the operation It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 4, the open / close plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed) similarly to the operation scenario 3 described above, so that the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 Can be discharged, the details will be described later. In addition, since closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 second, four balls can be discharged from the reservoir channel 1231 (as described above, 0.2 second is required for discharging one ball). Among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls discharged while the closing (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 as described above. is there.

  The “projected state 24.0 seconds” in this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the projected state at least until the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as described later, it is impossible for the specified number (10 in this control example) of the spheres to pass the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Because the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state is It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific region 4830.

  In the operation scenario 5, “open (opened state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → opened (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario contents, and the retracted state is set to the interference member 6930 This is an operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds in which 0.2 seconds → overhang state 0.2 seconds → save state 2.6 seconds → overhang state 20 seconds → save state is set. In the operation scenario 5, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and the initial stage It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 5, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that one sphere left in the storage channel 1231 is discharged as described later. In addition, it is an operation scenario that restricts the flow of the balls by the interference member 6930 and limits the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to eight (see FIG. 53 (b), the interference member 6930 It corresponds to the state that there is one ball downstream of).

  In this case, it is possible to restrict passage of the sphere through the detection sensor 1240 in a state where the number of spheres passing the detection sensor 1240 is less than the prescribed number (9 in this control example). The passage of the sphere to the detection sensor 1240 can be enabled based on the displacement of the sensor 1240, so that the passage of the sphere to the detection sensor 1240 can be generated in a state where a plurality of spheres are arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to generate an over-sized winning (so-called "over winning").

  In the operation scenario 6, “open (opened state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → opened (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as scenario contents, as in the operation scenario 5. In the operation scenario with a maximum of 30 seconds, in the interference member 6930, “Retraction state 0.2 seconds → overhang state 2.6 seconds → retraction state 0.2 seconds → overhang state 0.2 seconds → retraction state” is set is there. In the operation scenario 6, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is ended by detecting the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls in the detection sensor 1240 even before 30 seconds have elapsed It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 6, although the opening and closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), the opening and closing plate 1300 is restricted because the ball is restricted from flowing down to the interference member 6930. This is an operational scenario in which the ball is not ejected from the outlet 1150 while maintaining the closure (closed state). Further, after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (see FIG. 53 (see FIG. a) See) The round game R ends based on the detection of the tenth ball in the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not possible to make it easy to generate an over winning.

  As described above, by dividing and storing the operation scenario based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, the profit given to the player by the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 currently being executed is provided. It can be easily determined.

  In each operation scenario, the opening / closing plate 1300 is forcibly closed by entering a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls into the first specified winning hole 1000a (see FIGS. 8 and 9). (Operation scenario ends), but the interference member 6930 is a round game R even when the specified number of balls enter the first specified winning opening 1000a in the middle of the operation scenario. The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the end of the inter-round interval after the end of, and is controlled to change to the save state (the operation scenario ends) simultaneously with the end of the inter-round interval.

  FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f. The opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information of what jackpot type and which round game R for which each scenario type set in advance corresponds.

  When executing operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 in the MPU of the main control unit 110, information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening and closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f Reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e, the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved.

  The opening and closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202 f is configured to be able to set a corresponding operation scenario based on the combination of the jackpot type and the number of round games R in the round game. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

  In this control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is movably controlled according to the start timing of the round game R of the big hit game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the operation scenario, the setting order is stored in advance in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario that changes in order each time the operation scenario ends from power on (or predetermined operation start timing). It may be controlled. Thus, the correspondence between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, so that it is possible for the player to make it difficult to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

  Referring to FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), an open / close plate corresponding to the jackpot type The operation modes of 1300 (first specified winning hole 1000a), interference member 6930 and distribution device 4850 (specified area 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

  In FIGS. 96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b), the first specified winning hole 1000a is in the open state. Also indicated as "open", the closed state of the first specified winning hole 1000a is also indicated as "closed", the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as "tension", the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as "retraction", The state in which the sphere can flow into the area 4830 (that is, the state in which the distribution operation member 4851 is disposed in the open position) is also indicated as "open", and the state in which the sphere can not flow into the specific area 4830 (that is, the distribution operation member) The state where the 4851 is placed in the closed position) is also shown as "closed".

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the first specified winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round round game R to the fourth round round game R is Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game round R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  Further, as described above, the drive mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the jackpot type (see FIG. 96A). That is, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round (the ball is open to the specific area 4830 so as to be allowed to pass), and 18.0 seconds later (5 The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closing position (20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the round) (the ball is closed so as not to pass the specific area 4830).

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96 (a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot K (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to the present operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game round R (0.2 seconds × 10 In the fourth round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 does not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game. In addition, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, so one second after the start of the fifth round game R The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the control member 1600 is in the discharging state) immediately after the start of the fifth round game R Since the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball is opened to the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, since the storage channel 1231 is formed in a shape capable of storing the restricted number of balls (10 in this control example), the fifth round game R and the first specified winning opening 1000a are divided into 10 balls. It can be ended by entering the ball individually. Therefore, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged in the round game R of the fifth round while the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830 (20.0 seconds), so the first specification By continuing to fire the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give the player an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to what can be done, the fifth round of round game R can be finished in a short time (it is finished by winning a prescribed number (10 in this control example)), so time efficiency against the number of payout balls in the jackpot game You can raise it.

  In addition, since the timing when the ball passes the specific area 4830 is after the end of the round game R of the fifth round, it is unclear whether the ball passes the specific area 4830 over the fifth round game R As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000 a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot L (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the sixteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at an interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game R, so 0.2 seconds × 5 In the fourth round game R, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game R. For example, in the round game R of the fourth round, when five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the number of storage is left in the storage channel.

  Here, since the progression of the round game R of the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the cases will be separately described below.

  First, when 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round round game R, the fifth round game R starts with 5 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 Be done.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where five balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, advantageous benefits (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after discharge One ball remains in 1231. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of additionally enterable balls in the storage channel 1231 is nine (the number of balls less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example)), so five rounds The round game R does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1, has elapsed, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  In FIG. 96 (b), as a representative example, the time change when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game round R is illustrated.

  Second, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round round game R, the fifth round game R starts with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231 Be done.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, advantageous benefits (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game.

  Thirdly, in the fourth round of round game R, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is from 0 to 8, 5 is obtained from the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. The round game R of the 5th round is started in the state by which the number of balls (0 to 3 balls) pulled is stored.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  In addition, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, so one second after the start of the fifth round game R The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, the distribution operation is performed in a state where the ball can not pass through the specific area 4830 while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the whole sphere (0 to 3). Since the member 4851 is maintained, there is no event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game. In addition, 19 seconds have passed since the start of the fifth round game R, provided that the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the fifth round game R If the number of balls (10 in this control example) is entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a in advance, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 cause an event of passing through the specific area 4830 As the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the player is given an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). be able to.

  Summarizing the first to third cases described above, if there are 10 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the event of the ball passing through the specific area 4830 is made early On the other hand, the time efficiency to the number of paid-out balls in the fifth round round game is reduced (in the first case), and the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round round game R are 9 In the case of one, it is possible to cause an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 at an early stage, and time efficiency for the number of payout balls in the round game of the fifth round is increased (in the second case), the fourth round When there are 0 to 8 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R, an event in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round game R In, go up is time-efficient for the payout prize ball number of 5 round round game (third case).

  Therefore, in the case of performing control with the same operation pattern, it is possible to change the timing at which the player gains a profit and the size of the obtained profit for each game mode of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, as described above, in the fourth round game R, by setting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to nine, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized. . Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, the information on the standard of the number stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)). As a result, the power of attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved, and the player's gaze can be guided.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specified winning hole 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 97 (a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot M (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the seventeenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to the present operation pattern, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are ejected at the upper limit of nine in the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round of round game R (0.2 seconds 9 balls = 1.8 seconds), balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game round R may remain at one upper limit in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game round There is sex. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is newly added in the fifth round of round game R. The ball that has entered the ball is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 in 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round of round game R, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 is in a period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the control member 1600 is discharged). The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and an event of passing the specific area 4830 does not occur immediately after the ball can be opened to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, the interference member 6930 is in an extended state until 1.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round of round game R and 25.0 seconds have elapsed, and the flow of the ball is restricted (FIG. 86). (Refer to (a)), the storage channel 1231 can not store a limited number of spheres (10 in this control example) (a maximum of 9 can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930) The spheres are not stored and can be stored at a maximum of 7). Therefore, the 5th round game can not be ended until 25.0 seconds have passed after the start of the 5th round game R, and then 10 balls are entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a. When the predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) elapses, the round game R of the fifth round is ended.

  Therefore, while it is possible to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the fifth round), it is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fifth round Can not eject the ball. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specified winning hole 1000a, there is no event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

  That is, in the present operation pattern, the ball is configured to be incapable of passing through the specific area 4830, so that an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) is given to the player. In addition to the inability, the fifth round round game R becomes longer, so time efficiency against the number of prize balls in the jackpot game can not be increased (can be lowered).

  FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000 a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 97 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the eighteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round, with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the eighteenth operation pattern is the seventeenth operation except that the length of the interval between the rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is different. Since the pattern is the same as the pattern, the description of the portions common to the above description is omitted.

  The difference between the eighteenth operation pattern and the seventeenth operation pattern is whether residual balls remaining without being discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 are generated in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round.

  That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the inter-round interval is set to the fourth inter-round interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds). When ten pieces are stored, one remaining ball is generated.

  On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, since the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time between the rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds), the number of discharged pieces is 10 at maximum, and the number of stored pieces 1231 is 10 pieces (maximum Even if it is stored, it can be discharged all over the world, and there are no remaining balls.

  In this case, in the seventeenth operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, it is specified immediately after the start of the fifth game round game R On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, immediately after the start of the fifth round of the round game R, it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected, usually, big hit). Since there is no ball (remaining ball) to be discharged, the player can grasp that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R (Expected Unusual Win).

  Therefore, it is possible to change the player's sense of expectation depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 while substantially sharing the benefit that the player can obtain.

  In addition, as described above, the sixteenth operation pattern (see FIG. 16) in which the profit obtained by the player is larger than the jackpot of the jackpot type of the jackpot M, and the remaining balls occur at the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round. Since the difference from 96 (b) can be grasped by the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231, the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specified area 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the nineteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R for the fourth round, the fifth round game R for the fifth round, interposing the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. The round game R of the fifth round is started in the operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95 (b)) described above.

  First, according to the present operation pattern, it is changed by the operation of the player how many balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round.

  That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) according to the above-described timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhang state. Since the discharge of the ball thereafter is restricted, the ball disposed on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 will remain in the storage channel 1231. The operation on the operation button 300 is controlled such that only the timing at which it is first pressed in the inter-round interval is determined to be valid, and the subsequent pressing is invalidated, the details will be described later.

  Here, since the progression of the round game R in the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage flow channel 1231, the power of attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved. The case will be separately described below.

  First, the case where there are many balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when there are five or more) will be described. That is, it is a case where round game R of the 5th round is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91A).

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the fifth round of round game R is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage flow channel 1231, the balls can pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Since the passage is made, it is possible to give an advantageous benefit (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round of round game R is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after discharge One or more balls remain in 1231. Therefore, in the fifth round of round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (the number of balls less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the round does not end until 30.0 seconds which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1 elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game decreases.

  That is, in the first case, there occurs an advantageous event that it is possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of the prize ball in the fifth round game R is slightly less (The number of winning balls decreases as the player can not enter the specified number (10 in this control example)), and the duration of the round game R for the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds). Events occur.

  Secondly, the case where there are four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, it is a case where round game R of the 5th round is started in a state where four balls are stored in storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90B).

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, advantageous benefits (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given to the player at an early stage.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game. In addition, it is limited after lapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fifth round from the control aspect of the interference member 6930 that the sphere of the specified number will enter the first specified winning combination hole 1000a. .

  That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs that it is possible to acquire a privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and the prescribed number (10) in the fifth round game R While there is an advantageous event that the ball can enter the first specified winning hole 1000a and the duration of the fifth round of round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the disadvantageous event is It does not occur.

  Third, the case where there are few balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when there are three or less) will be described. That is, it is a case where the round game R of the 5th round is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91 (b)).

  Here, as described above, in this control example, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing when it passes 4830 (the timing when the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

  In addition, it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, so one second after the start of the fifth round game R The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, the distribution operation is performed in a state where the ball can not pass through the specific area 4830 while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the whole sphere (0 to 3). Since the member 4851 is maintained, there is no event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 Although all the balls that have been shot are discharged, the interference member 6930 maintains the overhanging state until 1.0 seconds after 1.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round of round game R, so it is prescribed during that time The number (10 in this control example) of balls can not be entered into the first specified winning hole 1000a. In addition, when 20.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round of round games R, the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball can not pass the specific area 4830.

  Therefore, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R of the fifth round is configured not to cause an event of passing through the specific area 4830.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231 All the balls that were on are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the fifth round game R can be The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a (it can be ended without waiting for the lapse of 30.0 seconds which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1).

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the jackpot game. In addition, it is limited after lapse of 25.0 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fifth round from the control aspect of the interference member 6930 that the sphere of the specified number will enter the first specified winning combination hole 1000a. .

  That is, in the third case, while the disadvantageous event that it is not possible to acquire the privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game occurs, the prescribed number (10 pieces) of in the fifth round game R An advantageous event occurs such that the ball can enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when there are five or more spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, while an event that the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 can be generated at an early stage, If the time efficiency for the round game payout prize number decreases (in the first case) and there are four balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is caused early The ball passes through the specific area 4830 if there are three or less balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 (in the second case) because the time efficiency to the number of paid-out balls in the fifth round of round games increases. While the event does not occur, the time efficiency for the number of paid-out balls in the fifth round game is increased (in the third case). Then, which case is applied changes depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  That is, since the profit obtained by the player can be changed by the timing at which the operation button 300 is operated, it is possible to improve the attention power to the timing effect (operation effect) and to participate in the timing effect (operation effect). You can increase your motivation.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99 (a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M or k (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, an upper limit is placed on entering the first specified winning hole 1000a in the sixth round of round game R (entering the number of balls exceeding the prescribed number (10 in this control example)). It can be easily generated by one. Details will be described below.

  The interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set as the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 being zero.

  Immediately after the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is brought into the overhang state, but returns immediately to the retreat state (see FIG. 95A). Therefore, from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the ball that first enters the first specified winning opening 1000a by 1.0 seconds has passed without being restricted by the interference member 6930, 2 It reaches the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, a position in contact with the regulating member 1600) in 0 seconds.

  The ball that entered the ball first is discharged 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round when the first specified winning hole 1000a is closed (the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened). . Here, since the period during which the first specified winning hole 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one upper limit.

  At 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts opening. Therefore, the sphere disposed on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing downward by the interference member 6930 from this point on.

  The internal shape of the storage channel 1231 is formed such that a maximum of two spheres can be stored downstream of the interference member 6930 and a maximum of seven spheres can be stored upstream of the interference member 6930 in the overhang state of the interference member 6930 (see FIG. See 86 (b)).

  After 3.0 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, so it stays on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 It will be.

  On the other hand, as described above, when one sphere disposed at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the sphere disposed downstream of the interference member 6930 in the storage channel 1231 becomes Less than one. Therefore, the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight at maximum. Since the total with the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is nine and becomes less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example), the prescribed number of spheres is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the overhang state Can not be entered into the first specified winning combination 1000a, it is not possible to end the round game R of the sixth round.

  During this time, since the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86 (b)), the player continues to strike the right according to the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92 (b)). A plurality of balls can be aligned on the top surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 (a so-called "grape" can be generated).

  When the interference member 6930 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state, it flows down along the inclination of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to follow later that the sphere whose flow is restricted inside the storage channel 1231 flow down. (Like an avalanche). The opening / closing plate 1300 starts to move toward the closed state as the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specified winning hole 1000a due to the flow of the balls, but the number of discharges corresponds to the number of discharges. Then, since a gap for one ball is generated in the storage channel 1231, the momentum of the inflow of the balls into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operation.

  Therefore, before the opening / closing plate 1300 closes the first specified winning opening 1000a, an event may occur in which a ball carrying momentum enters the first specified winning opening 1000a. In this case, an upper limit of one excess is exceeded. It is possible to generate a prize.

  In addition, when the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 at the timing 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the downstream of the interference member 6930 after 3.0 seconds has elapsed The number of balls placed in does not change. Therefore, in this case, the number of balls remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 does not occur, the above-described void does not occur inside the storage channel 1231, and it is configured that the effect of causing the over winning can not be exhibited. Ru.

  FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specified winning hole 1000 a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the 21st operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the twenty-first operation pattern, the round game R of the sixth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, an extra ball into the first specified winning hole 1000a (a ball with a number exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example) is generated) in the round game R of the sixth round It can be difficult. Details will be described below.

  The interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round is set as the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds. That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started with the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 being zero.

  Immediately after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is maintained for 2.6 seconds in the overhang state (see FIG. 95A). Therefore, the ball that has first entered the first specified winning opening 1000a by the time 1.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game R of the sixth round is restricted to flow down to the interference member 6930.

  When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the ball restricted from flowing down resumes flowing, but 0.2 seconds (the time required for the flow of the storage channel 1231 to be 2.0 seconds / reservable number 10 pieces) In), only the length of one ball is enough for the balls to flow down. Therefore, the ball that has resumed flowing down is the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, by the time the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating (opening of the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). It can not reach the position where it abuts on the regulating member 1600). Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the balls are not discharged from the storage flow passage 1231 at the timing 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round.

  At 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the sixth round, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts opening, but returns to the retracted state immediately. Therefore, after that, the balls arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 are not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and the balls are stored in order in the storage channel 1231.

  With the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls entering the first specified winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the twentieth operation pattern), the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed. Change to At this time, the number of balls stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is ten, and the storage flow channel 1231 is full, so that more balls are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23A), the number of balls entering the first specified winning hole 1000a is a prescribed number (in this control example, 10). Limited), and it is not possible to cause over wins.

  Therefore, even if a ball is disposed on the upstream side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at the end of the sixth round of the jackpot game R, the ball does not lead to the player's benefit. Therefore, in the sixth round game R in the jackpot game of the jackpot type jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 does not strongly prompt the continuation of the firing of the ball (see FIG. 92A). To be executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state with reference to the start of the round game R in the sixth round, and the interference member It is difficult to occur when over winning is likely to occur in the round game R of the sixth round while performing common control with the timing at which 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state (see FIG. 99 (a)). The case (see FIG. 99 (b)) can be generated.

  This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the sixth round game R in the present jackpot game is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or whether it is controlled by the twenty first operation pattern. Since it is possible, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball is fired that is suitable for the operation pattern while predicting the operation pattern. This makes it possible to prevent the player from unintentionally digesting the jackpot game.

  As described above, when the first specified winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specified winning opening 1000a is short-opened (open for 0.2 seconds), Two balls do not remain downstream of the interference member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specified winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twenty-first pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specified winning opening 1000a is opened for a short time (open for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain downstream of.

  Therefore, it is controlled by the 21st operation pattern whether the sixth round game R is controlled by the 20th operation pattern by confirming how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930 The interference member 6930 is retracted for a predetermined period of time (for example, the interference member 6930 is retracted 23.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round). It may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize in 0 seconds before).

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 holding ball Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , Closing flag 203q, count start flag 203qa, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V prize winning counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning quantity counter 203w, discharged quantity counter 203x, other memory area 203z It is.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter The values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning combination), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data includes four holding areas (hold Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas. In the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the respective counter values acquired based on the start winning for the second ball entry port 640 are stored. About the storing method etc. of a counter value, since it is the same as that of special symbol 1 reservation ball storing area 203a, it omits about the detailed explanation.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is obtained from four hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth). Among the vacant areas of the area (area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to a winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so it is the same as the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 suspension ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack winning data stored in another reserve area into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the fluctuation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111). reference). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102 (b)) is noise Even if the main control unit 110 shifts from the actual number of balls held by the main control unit 110 due to the influence of the .

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) of the number of holding balls each time the number of holding balls changes. Send ball number command for display for display. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times.

  The initial value of this special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is set to zero, and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. One by one is added (see S410 in FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command similar to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter that counts up to.

  The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See S704 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 114: No) ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of the remaining special symbol in the probability variation state of the special symbol. That is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a natural number, it is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is in the low probability status of the special symbol. In this control example, since the definite variation state of the special symbol usually involves the time shortening status of the normal symbol, the numerical value of the probability variation counter 203g corresponds to the remaining short time period (the number of times of variation of the special symbol).

  When the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game, the probability change counter 203g sets 80 at the end of the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the definite variation state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

  Further, the probability variation counter 203 g is a big hit by drawing a special symbol, and is set to 0 when the start of the big hit is set (see S 219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, in a state where the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability change counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power supply interruption occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is configured to be backed up.

  The time saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining short time (the number of times the special symbol changes) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At this time, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the big hit game, 100 is set at the end of the big hit game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in the present control example, when the jackpot game is not set to the definite change state, 100 time saving states are given.

  In this control example, although the case where the time saving state is given regardless of the jackpot type has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, all or one of the jackpot types ("big hit K", "big hit L" and "big hit k") that can flow the ball to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode When a ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game in the unit, control may be performed so as not to provide a time saving state.

  In this case, the game was not performed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the ball was not fired or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification of the display device. Because the loss due to) is excessively large (does not shift to the special symbol's definite change state that was originally intended to be transferred, and the time saving state is not given), it is possible to improve the motivation for playing the game in the appropriate game mode it can.

  In the operation scenario storage area 203i, when the operation control (see S1004 in FIG. 117) of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) is started, the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f (FIG. )) This is an area for reading and storing the operation scenario from. Operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

  The operation counter 203 j is a counter for determining the timing at which the interference member 6930 is movably controlled in the storage valve operation process (see S 1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set to the operation counter 203 j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

  The exit flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state, and indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state (see FIG. 53B) if it is on. If it is off, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

  The exit flag 203k is determined to be an operation start timing when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected in the effective period in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125) (S1403 in FIG. 19: Yes) If it is set (S1408 in FIG. 125: Yes), the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed by being set to ON and set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). When the) ends, it is set to OFF (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start counting of the remaining ball timer 203n described later.

  The remaining ball timer 203 n is a timer that is counted to identify a normal range in the jackpot control process (see S 1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203 n reaches the upper limit (the value corresponding to 1 second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor If the number of spheres detected at 4860 (see FIG. 51) does not match the total number of spheres detected by the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51), the difference between the numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

  The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharges discharged from the discharge port 1150 across each round. If it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121) (S1231 in FIG. 121: No), an error command is set.

  The closing flag 203 q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000 a is put in the closed state, and is a flag set to ON in the winning process (see S 1112 in FIG. 123) (FIG. 123). S1278), which is used to start the counting of the closing counter 203r described later. Then, the closing flag 203 q is set to off based on the fact that the closing counter 203 r has reached a predetermined value or more in the V winning process (see S 1009 in FIG. 129).

  The count start flag 203 qa is set to on in the fifth round game R based on the closing flag 203 q being set to on, and is used to start the counting of the closing counter 203 r. Then, the count start flag 203 qa is based on the fact that the closing counter 203 r has reached the upper limit value (the value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) in the V pay process (see S 1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

  The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 at a normal timing in the V pay process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). Is a counter to The closing counter 203r is incremented by one each time the V winning process is executed.

  In the control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as an interval period after the round game R in accordance with various timings. The closing counter 203r is used to determine abnormality in the timing of V winning in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

  In the V flag 203s, the ball is in a specific area 4830 (FIG. 51) at a predetermined timing (within a set value, a predetermined period after the first specified winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is closed in this control example). This flag is set to ON when it is detected that the vehicle has passed through. The V flag 203s is set to OFF after the value of the probability change counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

  The V prize winning counter 203t is a counter decremented by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V prize winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V prize winning counter 203t is for determining that the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 has normally passed through the specific area 4830 in a state where the distribution operation member 4851 is disposed at the open position. In the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123), a numerical value (in the present control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set as the closing flag 203q is turned on.

  The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until setting a notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) based on the predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). .

  The winning number counter 203 w is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won in the first specified winning opening 1000 a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S 1112 in FIG. 123).

  The number-of-discharges counter 203 x is a counter that counts the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203 w and the discharging number counter 203 x is determined every time the remaining ball timer 203 n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormality processing (see S 1113 in FIG. 124).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. A large opening solenoid (for closing or opening the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the first specified winning opening 1000a) A solenoid 209 comprising a solenoid 1510) or a solenoid for driving a motorized part, and a solenoid 6910 for driving the interference member 6930 are connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands or commands for these via the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and The operation button 300 operated by the user is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208 and signals output from the operation button 300 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253. Perform various processing.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and indicates the rough fluctuation contents (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) Is used to determine the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The opening and closing plate and interference member operation scenario 222b is provided to allow the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation status of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110. The opening / closing plate stored in the ROM 202 of the control unit 110, the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and the opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario table 202f is an area in which information stored in the operation scenario table 202f is stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a change start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. A flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a probability change state flag 223i, a short time state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, and an operation flag 223p The effect temporary storage area 223r, the first operation effect flag 223wa, the second operation effect flag 223wb, the first input flag 223wc, the second input flag 223wd, the effect executing flag 223x, and the pressing period information storage area 223y And other memory area 223z There has been provided with at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to the holding ball number of the variation effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is the second special symbol ( Corresponds to the number of holding balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

  As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e Can not get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c The number of holding balls is to be managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls in the variable display is added by entering balls into first entrance 64 and second entrance 640, or when the main controller 110 selects a special symbol When the variable display in is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, the number of holding balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e The command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball reception is used from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. Also, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c after storage, a display holding ball number command for the display control device 114 Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number-of-holding balls number pattern corresponding to the value of the number-of-holding balls counter 223c in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. While the value is changed. Accordingly, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when the command set when the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 increases or decreases. Counter, which is used to synchronize the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control unit 110 and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control unit 113. is there. The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the number of holding balls of the special symbol mentioned above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since it is the same, it omits about the explanation.

  The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223g is configured of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main processing (see FIG. 131) is executed. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined with reference to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, the values of the different counters are different. Used. Thereby, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that it is possible to suppress the bias of the effect pattern to be set. The effect pattern may be set using the values calculated after performing different processing on the values acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the first place of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tenth place of the acquired value, and the other selection indicates one of the acquired value It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by doubling the value of the third digit by the value obtained by multiplying the fifth digit by ten, and to refer to the first digit of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the effect pattern to be set while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game, and when the round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( When the jackpot ending command is received, the value of the counter is reset to 0 (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display command related to the display during the big hit game is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

  The probability change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probability change state of the special symbol. If this probability variation state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if off, it indicates that the probability probability state of the special symbol is. The probability variation state flag 223i is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control unit 110.

  In this control example, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more in this control example, it is considered as an aspect indicating that a probability variation game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203h If it is one or more, it is a mode indicating that a time saving game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is a mode indicating that a normal game is being played.

  It is determined whether or not the present is a definite variation state of the special symbol according to the state of this definite variation state flag 223i, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navi image displayed in the special symbol oddity state, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when executing the right-handed game in the normal state To determine the

  The time saving state counter 223 j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal time saving state of a symbol. At this time, if the short state counter 223 j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol, and if off, it indicates that the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the short state counter 223 j is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. At this time, according to the state of the short state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the right-handed navi image displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol is displayed, or whether or not the right-handed warning image is displayed in the normal state.

  The storage state flag 223 k is a flag for determining the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 86A), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 The setting is made based on the detection result of If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and if it is off, less than the storage number of balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 Indicates that.

  The storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (four in this control example) in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137). When it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number (see S2807 in FIG. 137), the storage channel 1231 is set to OFF (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, an intermediate number display is executed on the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (FIG. 88 (FIG. 88). (A) is executed.

  The storage upper limit flag 223 m is a flag for determining that the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in this control example), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 The setting based on the detection result of the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 is made. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the sphere of the upper limit number is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and if it is off, the sphere of the upper limit number is not stored in the storage flow path 1231 Show.

  The storage upper limit flag 223 m is set to ON when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is the upper limit number in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) (see S2814 in FIG. 137) When it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the upper limit number, it is set to be off (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, the full tank display (see FIG. 92B) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, the dissatisfaction display (FIG. 92 (a)) is executed.

  The storage counter 223 n is a counter for counting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the passage of the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and the discharge of the ball from the outlet 1150 is the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 (or dedicated The value of the storage counter 223n is configured to be decremented by 1 when detected by the

  The operation flag 223p is a flag that determines whether the operation button 300 has been operated. If the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 is operated, and if off, it indicates that the operation button 300 is not operated. The operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination processing (S2218 in FIG. 132: Yes), and is set to OFF in button input monitoring and effect processing (see S3007 in FIG. 139). .

  The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect content until the effect is executed, and for example, an effect mode of timing effect (operation effect) to be executed during a big hit The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored during the period from the setting timing (third round) to the timing (time fourth) at which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the big hit. The effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and a round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the big hit internal effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134) is executed. Is read out (S2537 in FIG. 134).

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether or not to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means (the operation button 300). If it is on, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if off, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

  In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the fact that the round game R of the fourth round is started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa is the second operation effect flag 223wb. In contrast, it is set that the round game R of the 4 round surface of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k is started, respectively. Then, the effect information read out from the effect temporary storage area changes according to the setting of the first operation effect flag 223 wa and the second operation effect flag 223 wb.

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF after the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

  The first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are flags for limiting the number of times of operation of the operation button 300 during the corresponding effect (in the present control example, limiting to one time), and the respective operations The first operation is performed during the period, or it is set to ON by exceeding the operation period, and the input of the operation button 300 thereafter is invalidated. In addition, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to off after the fifth round of round game R is started and the effect executing flag 223x is set to off (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

  The effect under execution flag 223 x is a flag for determining whether the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed if it is on, and it should be off For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect executing flag 223x is referred to when it is determined whether the operation on the operation means (the operation button 300) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect).

  The round during which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started in the large hitting middle effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134) of this effect executing flag 223x (S2532 in FIG. 134: Yes), and the effect round command for display is displayed. After setting, it is set to on (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is ended, it is set to OFF (S2542 in FIG. 134).

  The pressing period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). .

  In this pressing period information storage area 223y, a successful pressing period is set in correspondence with the set display pointer (effect pointer). The success pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring and rendering process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the success pressing period.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initial setting process to be executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program is set.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance are started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by the fluctuation effect when entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. Display on 81

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and if it is "big hit of special symbol", "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the change production, and if it is "out of special symbol", "×" symbol is after the change production stop Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball entering into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image alternates with the third symbol display device The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a town, a sea, the sky and the like are displayed. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored as a back surface image in the back surface image area 235c.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is a big hit (big hit K etc. In the case of), the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specified winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is opened, and the round effect is This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back surface image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) and light in the image as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present control example, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 104) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 105 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 105).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231. Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. Set to off.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected, and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. The simplified command determination process and the simplified display setting process are executed so that the image upon power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing and display setting processing is performed.

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Because there is no resident target image data, the resident image transfer setting processing for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, it is necessary for the drawing processing. The normal image transfer setting process for transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later (see FIG. 106) in which the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame, the pointer The update process is executed, and the value of the pointer 233 f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 106) is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 106, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 235. Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set, and the image controller 237 is set. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a.

  On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 107 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 319, 99, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in association with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210) A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If S has not passed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot is K, the jackpot L, the jackpot M, the jackpot N, or the jackpot k is determined.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when becoming big hit K, blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when it is big hit L, red LED is turned on. In the case of the jackpot M, N or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and in the case of the jack off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specified winning opening is set based on the big hit type (S217), and then the start of the big hit is set (S218) . Specifically, the operation scenario indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening 1000a. That is, the first specified winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for 1 to 4 rounds, a predetermined period (until 30 seconds pass, or until 10 balls are won), and in 5 and 6 rounds It is shown that the first specified winning combination port 1000a is set to be opened in a corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95 (b)). When the process of S218 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), the state command setting process for determining whether or not the time saving state is finished is executed (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

  In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 109, the state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and various kinds of probability change counter 203g and hour / minute counter 203h. The game state is determined based on the value of the counter, and the state command is set (S234, S238).

  In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes) The value of the counter 203g is decremented by one, and the value of the counter 203h is decremented by one (S232). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S233: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating that it is in the normal gaming state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S235). If it is determined that the value 203h is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S235: No), the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203 h is 0 (S 237), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S 237: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating that it is in the normal gaming state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b And each value of stop classification selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302). If it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301; Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, four random numbers from "1 to 4" are set as random number values for the big win of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is made common in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, according to the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 It may be a different random value. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values to be the jackpot may be made different. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability gaming state Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is hit or not is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes the hit match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes) , A jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the 5 types of special symbols (big hit Of K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot types (jackk K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k) . Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit K, big hit L, big hit M, big hit N and big hit k) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

  As the fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, “disengagement (for long time)”, “disengagement (for short time),” “chance out”, “disengagement” There are a variety of "normal reach", "outside super reach", and "outside chance reach". In addition, as the variation patterns of various jackpots, various “shared normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared chance reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is out of reach or completely out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 117), these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Will be sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and determines whether or not the first ball entry 64 or the second ball entry 640 has a prize (start prize). When there is a start winning, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters, and performing a suspension process of the value.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the free holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The processes of S407 to S412 differ from each other only in that the process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are performed with the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are identical, their detailed description is omitted. Further, when each process of S407 to S412 is finished, the pre-reading process is executed (S413), and the present process is finished.

  Next, the prefetching process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S413). This pre-reading process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 If there is no new winning combination (S501: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first winning slot 64 or the second entering slot 640 has a new winning (S501: Yes), whether the gaming state at the start of the change is a definite variation state of the special symbol or not If it is determined (S502) and the special symbol is in a definite variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  If it is determined in the process of S502 that the gaming state is not a definite variation of special symbol (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Migrate to

  In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 which are the judgment results of the big hit are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and the process ends.

  Next, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640 It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S608: Yes), the second acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a regular symbol is per formed is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202 c 2 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607. And, based on the second random number table for low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 10 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202c1 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S609 or S610 is the hit of the normal symbol (S611), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S611: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S613: Yes), the motorized role attached to the second entry port 640 The opening period of the object 640a is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S614), and the process proceeds to the processing of S617. In the process of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the open period of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds and The number of times of release is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to the process of S617.

  In the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S617.

  In the process of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S617: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to one second (S618), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with “30 seconds → 1 second” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further Since the open period of the second ball entry port 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623).

  In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as

  When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device is ended when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol It determines (S624).

  If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. If the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, then the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is performed. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S614 or S615 end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is judged whether or not the passing of the ball in the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 has occurred, and the passing of the ball has occurred. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the normal entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704).

  Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is of the empty hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 Of these, the first area is stored (S 705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93) in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 116, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S910 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S910.

  As described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. 117, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S912) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the process of S912, the process proceeds to the process of S913.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power supply recovery is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a definite variation state, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the number of time reductions of the normal symbol.

  A state command is generated according to the value of the time saving counter 203 h or the value of the probability variation counter 203 g and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, recognition of the game state can be made to coincide between the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, even though the symbol is in the low probability state, the right-handed navigation (see, for example, the small area Ds3 in FIG. 88A) may be displayed, or conversely, the symbol is in the high probability state. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of a right strike warning image (not shown) when the player strikes a right. That is, the gaming state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

  When the process of S913 ends, a rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S914). Then, the interruption is permitted (S915), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating process of S1013 and S1014 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001).

  Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command.

  Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) or the start winning process (see FIG. 111) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or A jackpot control process is performed to open or close the first specified winning opening 1000a of the variable winning device 6000 (S1004).

  In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the first specified winning opening 1000a is set in accordance with the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) for each round of the jackpot state. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized item opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (refer to FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, in the first symbol display device 37 End the fluctuation display being executed and stop the stop symbol (the first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110). Display (light on).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit.

  Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S612 or the processing of S616 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( Turn on).

  After the process of S1007 is performed, a storage control process is performed (S1008). The storage control process (S1008), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, executes a process for setting retraction and extension of the interference member 6930. Next, when the process of S1008 ends, V winning process is executed (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, other processes are executed (S1010).

  When the process of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S1012: No), during the time to the predetermined time, ie, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main process, (1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1013, S1014).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1011, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 115 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1015 is executed.

  First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1017), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S1011 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001.

  That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed or the first specification It is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 1000 a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1103 that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). When it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

  The operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). Thereafter, the process ends and returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) for each round and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 are set.

  As described above, since each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Such problems can be suppressed.

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the process of S1105 ends, a number-of-rounds command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this processing ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the opening and closing process is executed (S1108).

  Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening / closing process (S1108). In the opening / closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 matching the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the big hit control process (S1004) is returned. , End this process.

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the closing time of the opening and closing plate 1300 after six rounds are finished, and the waiting time which is the balling time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage channel 1231 and the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800) It is required, and in this control example, when 3 seconds has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is judged whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as ball clogging has occurred, or the player causes the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 to be illegally stopped by a strong magnet or the like. There is a possibility that the error command is set (S1232), and then the ending command is set (S1233).

  The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command corresponding to the display mode of the selected error notification is transmitted to the display control device 114. When an error command is received by the display control device 114, an error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, the characters "Ejection error, call a hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and control is performed to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) is strongly emitted in red, or the audio output device 226 A loud clerk (in this control example, the sound of the bell of a black telephone) is output by (see FIG. 4) or the like, and the hall clerk is controlled so as to notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, an ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1233 is completed, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set on (that is, whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234) and set on (that is, the specific area 4830). If the ball passes through (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 80, and the value of the time counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to OFF. (S1236), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1234 that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the hour / midday counter 203h is selected. It sets to 100 (S1237), returns to jackpot control processing (S1004), and ends this processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set to the probability variation counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether a ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set a probability change. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the jackpot game is over.

  Furthermore, if it is possible to pass the ball in the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, since the probability change gaming state is awarded after the jackpot game, whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game You can play games with an interest.

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No) This processing ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control processing (S1004).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S1252). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is performed in the fourth round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1253 that the end timing of the fourth round is not reached (S1253: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the 0.5 second counter in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during the two seconds of the interval time which is the brushing time after the end of the fourth round, and the voice of "press" Is output.

  Therefore, the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player must operate the operation button 300 in the interval time after the fourth round, and attention is drawn to the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal. The number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made less visible. Thereby, it can be suppressed that whether or not a sphere passes through the specific region 4830 is identified from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, by performing the above-described control to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round, it can be difficult to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830, The player can play the game expecting that the probability change gaming state is provided (provided) until the end of the big hit game (and even after the end of the big hit game).

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is provided across the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and four rounds It may be performed continuously from the eyes.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1252 that the value of the notification counter 203u is larger than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is decremented by 1 and updated (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203 u after update is 0 (S1256). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), a notification command is set (S1257). Thereafter, this process ends. In response to the notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 performs setting of an audio output of "press".

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, the winning process is performed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 123, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1271). The round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened to when it is closed to the end of the interval period. If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1271: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether it has passed the detection sensor 1240 of the first specified winning opening 1000a. If it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specified winning opening 1000a has passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1273). Thereafter, the processing of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 has not passed (S1272: No), the processing of S1274 is executed.

  In the process of S1274, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203 w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203 q is on (S 1277), and it is determined that the closing flag 203 q is on. (S1277: Yes), the process ends and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1277 that the closing flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set on (S1278), and then the set value of the V prize effective counter 203t ( In this control example, a numerical value range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more is set (S1279), and thereafter, the opening and closing plate of the first specified winning opening 1000a The closing of 1300 (the state change of the closing state) is set (S1280), and then a numerical value (in the present control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set to the V prize winning counter 203t (S1281). The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball is in the flash time after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Thereafter, the present process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V prize winning counter 203t fluctuates based on the number of stored balls. Thereby, when only three spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 (controlled so that the spheres do not pass in the specific region 4830), the flow of the spheres is caused by the contamination etc. in the storage channel 1231. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in a delayed manner, the passage of the specific area 4830 can be invalidated outside the range of the setting value of the V pay counter 203t.

  Thereby, when the display effect which is different depending on the storage number of the storage channel 1231 is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the degree of expectation that the display effect shows (the degree of payout of the award ball, the end of the big hit game It is possible to prevent the difference between the degree of possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol and the like) and the actual game result later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1274 that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether a round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether the opening / closing plate 1300 is halfway closed based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, if it is determined that it is the timing to close halfway (S1276: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed, and if it is determined that it is not the timing to close halfway (S1276: No), this processing is executed. The process ends and returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing for monitoring whether or not the specific area 4830 has been illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1301). When it is out of the round effective period (S1301: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is within the round effective period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the outlet 1150 (S1302). It should be noted that whether the gaming ball has passed through the outlet 1150 is determined by whether the passing of the gaming ball is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51). To be done.

  If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203x is incremented by one and updated (S1303). Thereafter, the process of S1304 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: No), the processing of S1304 is executed.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated since it is in the period of the balling time (S1305). The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the upper limit (in this control example, various interval times) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is determined (S1306: Yes), the number of spheres detected by the number of discharged areas (see the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) It is determined whether or not the total number of balls and the number of balls detected in the above match the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203w) (S1307).

  If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the processing of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), a value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the processing of S1309 is executed. Do.

  In the process of S1309, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309). If it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: No), the processing of S1312 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is the start timing of ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). If the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the processing of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set because there is an abnormality in discharging the ball (S1311), and the process of S1312 is executed.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, the game ball is left illegally in the storage channel 1231 or the probability variation determination unit 4800, and even if the jackpot type of the jackpot to be acquired later is the jackpot type M, N, the game region is allowed to pass through the specific area 4830 Can be suppressed.

  In this way, by controlling the ball discharge error to be notified at the start timing of the ending effect, error notification is performed even when there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of discharges in the round game R of each round. Can play the game. Thereby, the game characteristic that the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is partially restricted in the interval between rounds, and the next round is started with the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 can be realized .

  In addition, even when there is a difference between the number of balls and the number of discharged balls in each round of round games R, since it is possible to execute the game without giving an error notification, the interval between rounds is 2 seconds (stored It is possible to set a period shorter than the period required to exhaust the spheres stored in the flow path 1231 globally.

  In addition, the setting method of the ball discharge error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, set a value that can occur normally as the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of discharged items, and if the number difference is within the range of the value, do not set the error command, the difference of the number If the value is out of the range of the value, control may be made to set an error command. In this case, it can be determined that a ball discharge error has occurred without waiting for the start timing of the ending effect, so that the occurrence of an abnormality can be detected early. Thereby, when the error of ball discharge is caused by the wrongdoing, early detection of the wrongdoing can be achieved.

  In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1313). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203 w and the discharged number counter 203 x are respectively reset to initial values (S 1314), and then this process is ended.

  Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117) and is for setting the state of the interference member 6930.

  As described above, the interference member 6930 changes its state in response to the player operating the operation button 300 according to the situation (S1403 to S1407), and the state changes at a preset timing (S1403 to S1407). The storage control process (S1008) includes both of them.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 is It means that it is in the evacuation state. Next, it is determined whether it is a valid period of the operation of the operation button 300 (S1402).

  If it is determined that it is the valid period (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether the player has pressed (operated) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (ie, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept as it is. This process is ended as it is in order to save.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S1403: Yes), upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404) of the operation counter. In upper limit value setting processing 1 of the operation counter (S1404), processing is performed to set an upper limit value different depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the upper limit value of the operation counter.

  That is, in the upper limit setting process 1 of the operation counter (S1404), pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected after the interval period between rounds is started from the interval period between rounds (ie, the pressing detection signal is The period to be detected is subtracted, and a value indicating the remaining period is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state, the exit flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the extension state (the extension state based on the operation of the operation button 300; In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that it is in the ejection state 1), the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1407), and this processing is ended and storage control is performed. It returns to a process (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the valid period (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). If it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), upper limit value setting processing 2 of the operation counter is executed (S1409). Here, upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the contents of upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409) of the operation counter. In upper limit value setting processing 2 (S1409) of the operation counter, processing is performed to set an upper limit value preset by the operation scenario as the upper limit value of the operation counter.

  That is, in the upper limit setting process 2 (S1409) of the operation counter, first, it is determined whether it is a change timing to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1431). If it is determined that it is not the change timing to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 (S1431: No), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the change timing to the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value from the operation scenario (the interference member 6930 is maintained in the overhanging state based on the operation scenario) The value corresponding to the period to be stored is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the storage control processing (S1008).

  Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extension state, the exit flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the extension state (the extension state based on the operation scenario, the extension state In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that it has become 2), a storage state command corresponding to the overhang state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the overhang state, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear surface image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the overhang state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command.

  That is, for example, it is set to a mode in which the character of "passing ball stored" is displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87A). This allows the player to easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the storage state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is on (S1401: Yes), a storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, the storage valve operation process (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage valve operation process (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

  In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not shown, when the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

  When it is determined in the process of S1443 that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to OFF (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to OFF (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S1443, even when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this process ends.

  When the process of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, is on) (S1413: No), this process is ended. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1413 that the exit flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), this means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this, the storage state command corresponding to the retreat state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the evacuation state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs, to the display control device 114, a display rear surface image change command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the evacuation state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command.

  By executing the storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set in accordance with the operation situation of the operation button 300. As a result, it is possible to switch between the state in which the flow-down of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930 and the state in which the restriction is released and the flow-down of the ball is permitted.

  Further, this storage control process can drive the interference member 6930 at any timing other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, the member that operates according to the operation status of the operation button 300 and the member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be configured of the same member.

  Next, the V winning processing (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) is a process for executing control in the main process (see FIG. 117) to monitor the flow of the ball after the first specified winning hole 1000a is closed. .

  In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203 qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203 qa is not on (ie, off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether the closing flag 203 q is on (S1502). If it is determined that the closing flag 203 q is on (S 1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current execution is the fifth round (S 1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing flag 203 q is not on (that is, off) in the process of S1502 (S1502: No), and it is determined that what is currently being executed is not the fifth round in the process of S1503. If it is determined (S1503: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), this means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 for opening and closing the specific area 4830 operates. Then, in order to determine whether the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830 is occurring normally, the closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 (S1505), and then the V prize winning counter 203t is similarly decremented by 1 Update.

  Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if it is the predetermined value (S1507) (Yes), the closing flag 203 q is turned off and set (S 1508), and then the process proceeds to S 1509. On the other hand, if it is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1509.

  In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit (4.0 seconds). If the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit (S1509: Yes), this means that the value of the V prize winning counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to OFF (S1510), The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to the process of S1512. On the other hand, when the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S1512.

  As described above, since the count start flag 203 qa is turned off after the closing counter 203 r reaches the upper limit value (that is, after 4.0 seconds have elapsed since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed), The process of S1512 is not performed. That is, execution of the process of S1512 is limited to 4.0 seconds after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

  In the process of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the passage of the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). If it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V prize winning counter 203t falls within the set value range (S1513).

  In the process of S1513, when it is determined that the value of the V prize winning counter 203t falls within the set value range (S1513: Yes), this means that the ball has normally passed through the specific area 4830. The V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and the process ends.

  Immediately after the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, the V prize winning counter 203t is set to a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds, and is subtracted therefrom. As described above, the set value of the V prize winning counter 203t is set as the timing at which the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 passes the specific area 4830, and in this control example, it is 3.0 seconds. Hereinafter, it is set as a numerical range corresponding to (3-0.2 × number of stored spheres) seconds or more.

  Therefore, for example, when the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V prize effective counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the value is out of the range of the setting value. In this case, it is suspected that the ball will stay near the lower end of the communication passage 4810 (clogging or will stop due to clogged ball) and the ball will start to flow immediately after the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. It is controlled to notify an error.

  Also, for example, when the ball passes the specific area 4830 after a long time has elapsed since the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V prize effective counter 203 is less than (3-0.2 × number of stored balls) seconds), It is out of the range of setting value. In this case, a problem occurs (such as ball biting, or retention due to a ball being clogged) in the flow-down mode at the time of discharge of the ball from the storage flow channel 1231, and the discharge timing of the ball from the storage flow channel 1231 (the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed) Since it is suspected that the ball has begun to be ejected late from the timing at which it becomes a state, it is controlled to notify an error just in case.

  In addition, as cheating to hold the ball, cheating by holding a ball with a strong magnet or cheating a ball bonded with a thread onto the game area and manipulating the ball by the player operating the ball are assumed . In the pachinko machine 10, for the fraud caused by the magnet, a magnetic sensor (not shown) may be disposed in the vicinity of the storage channel 1231, or the magnetic force may not reach the storage channel 1231 or the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800. It copes by spacing apart and arrange | positioning behind the glass unit 16 (refer FIG. 1), or thickening the glass unit 16. As shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the yarn is attached to the communication passage 4810 via the storage flow passage 1231 when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entering prevention portion 1331 against the fraud caused by the ball to which the yarn is adhered. And the portion which holds the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7), which is a side wall of the housing portion 1230, and the thread is fixed and the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. The yarn is fixed by being pinched by the outlet 1150. Therefore, even if the player manipulates the yarn, the load can not be transmitted to the ball in the communication passage 4810. For example, the yarn held by the player is released at an arbitrary timing, Even if the ball is aimed to pass the specific area 4830 illegally, as described above, since the yarn is fixed in places, it is easy to prevent the ball from passing the specific area 4830 illegally. Can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V prize winning counter 203t does not fall within the set value range (S1513: No), an error or some defect is suspected, so an error command is set. (S1515), and the process ends. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

  In this control example, the setting value of the V prize winning counter 203t is set based on the number of stored storage channels 1231 to determine the occurrence of fraud or failure, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, the occurrence of fraud or failure may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of balls from the storage channel 1231, or the occurrence of fraud or failure may be detected by detecting a period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. The determination may be made, and if the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the required number (less than four), occurrence of fraud or failure based on the detection of passage of the sphere in the specific area 4830 You may judge.

  In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V pay effectiveness counter 203t is within the set value, but it is not always necessary. It is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the value of the V prize effective counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON, and the game can not be made until the error due to the error command is eliminated. You may control it. Although the elimination of the error command is executed by turning off the power, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may need to be cleared.

  In this case, if the timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830 is shifted due to a defect of the pachinko machine 10, not the player's fraud, after the fact that it is detected, the player has no problem in the high probability state of the special symbol. It is possible to play a game.

  On the other hand, if the player's injustice is the cause, after the fact is discovered, the game of the injustice player is first stopped, the hall clerk clears the RAM 203, and the special symbol low probability state Force control to become This makes it possible to prevent an extra waiting time before another customer starts playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 for which the fraud has been made.

  In this control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, control is performed so that the ball can not be fired, or an error is notified when the ball is fired and the clerk is made aware of it. Such that the balls are controlled so that the balls are not paid out even if they enter the winning opening (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped), the balls are fired or the balls are not It is controlled so as not to be playable by a control mode such as being controlled to turn off the power based on entry to the mouth.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 130, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S2120 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current startup process (see FIG. 131). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S2117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2117 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S2120 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 to start initialization of the RAM 223. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. (From S2003) is judged to be data destruction in the RAM 223 (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S2120 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current start-up process is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the full-range storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is performed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2117 is performed, the process of S2008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Set permission (S2012), and shift to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S2008 when the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, because the power-on processing was started after the power was completely shut off, and the processing of S2008 to S2006 via the processing of S2004. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability change state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control unit 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. By updating the probability variation state flag 223i based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with each other. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  The reason for skipping S2009 clear processing is that when the processing from S2004 to S2006 leads to the processing of S2008, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S2101 has been executed (S2101), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S2101: No), the processing proceeds to S2111 without performing the processing of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process concerning S2102 to S2110 that mainly relates to display (effect) and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec) to determine whether 1 msec has elapsed or not. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111, the variation display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 in a short cycle. The process of S2111 is executed in a short cycle, so that it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S2112 is executed in a short cycle. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay. Further, by executing the process of S2113 in a short cycle, settings relating to the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be performed without delay based on the storage state.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S2102) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S2104).

  The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed in accordance with the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring and effect process monitors an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect, and an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. Is a process to set to In this process, when the player's operation of the operation button 300 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the button input monitoring and rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed in time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2110 is completed, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S2111). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S2112. In the process of S2112, the variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the fluctuation effect, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the processing returns to S2101 and the main processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the command determination processing (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for

  In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is It is determined whether it has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main control unit 110 is the first special symbol and the second special It is outputted corresponding to each of the symbols.

  If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is received from the received variation pattern command. Are extracted (S2203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified as the variation pattern type of the special symbol in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each type of special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol) In the case of notifying the start of the variation display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the special symbol to the display control device 114 in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) which is stored in the form (When setting a variation pattern command for display of a special symbol)

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

  Next, the stop type (complete out, reach out, small hit, small hit, large hit K, L, M, N, k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process is terminated. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of stop of the change effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S2204 that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), a display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and the process ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command Of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the variable sphere of the second special symbol is extracted, corresponding to the extracted counter value, provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 The counter value is updated (S2210), and the process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the starting winning combination is performed. Every time there is a special symbol 1 hold of the main control unit 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c by the processing of S2210. It can be adjusted to the values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, respectively.

  Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, if the holding ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  If it is determined in the process of S2209 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). When it is determined in the process of S2212 that a winning information command has been received (S2212: Yes), a winning information command reception process is executed (S2213).

  In the winning information command reception process (S2213), the setting of various flags and the setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol being held, before the fluctuation of the special symbol being held is started (that is, the special symbol being executed before the fluctuation of the special symbol of the object) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol to which the prize information command has been transmitted, and to the player by using the lottery result of one special symbol using the variable display periods of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestive notification can be made, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that a winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), a display notification command is set (S2215), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2214 that the notification command has not been received (S2214: No), the storage device related command (S1414, see FIG. 125) corresponding to the save state or the overhang state is supported. It is determined whether the storage status command to be stored (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216) If it is determined that the storage device related command has been received in S2216 (S2216: Yes), the corresponding display rear image is changed A command is set (S2217), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2216 that no storage device related command has been received (S2216: No), it is next determined whether an operation command has been received (S2218). When it is determined in the process of S2218 that the operation command has been received (the operation of the operation button 300 has been operated (depressed)) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. Do. The operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received (S2220).

  If it is determined in the process of S2220 that a hit related command has been received (S2220: Yes), a hit related process is executed (S2221), and this process ends. The detailed contents of the hit related processing (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2220 that the hit related command has not been received (S2220: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S2222), and this process is ended.

  In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command Are set to transmit the display control device 114 to the display control device 114. For example, the ball entry command set based on the ball entering each ball entry port provided on the game board 13 Is received, the process of accumulating the number of balls is executed for each type of ball entrance into which the ball has entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process (S2221). This hit related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process that is executed when a hit related command is received from the device 110.

  When the hit related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big hit opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined in the process of S2503 that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot middle effect processing is executed ( S2505), this processing ends.

  The jackpot effect process (S2505) is a process for selecting an aspect of round effect (effect of round game R and effect of inter-round interval), and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2503 that the hit related command received this time is not the round number command (S2503: No), it is next determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main control unit 110 when each round at the jackpot is completed. If it is determined in the process of S2506 that the interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of finished rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( S2507), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the big hit ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this process is ended. Also, in the processing of S2508, even when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this processing ends.

  Here, the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505). In this jackpot middle effect processing (S2505), in addition to the jackpot game effect for celebrating the jackpot as the effect to be executed during the jackpot, the player visually recognizes the inside of the storage channel 1231 by operating the operation button 300. The first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) to be enabled and the second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) for changing the state of the interference member 6930 by operating the operation button 300 by the player The effect mode and the presence / absence of the effect are set, and the effects are executed after the continuous emission effect which promotes the continuation of the emission of the ball even after entering the number of balls.

  When the jackpot middle effect process (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect executing flag 223x is on (S2531). If it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2531: No), next, whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the third round of the big hit (S 2532).

  If it is determined in the process of S2532 that the command is the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

  In the process of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534), and if it is judged that the jackpot k is (S2534: Yes), the second operation presentation flag 223wb is turned on. (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not k (S2534: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S2536.

  That is, if it is a big hit k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON, but if it is a big hit other than the big hit k (big hit K, L, M, N) , And only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to on.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the effect round command setting process for display will be described (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the effect round command setting process for display (S2536), first, it is determined whether the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as the information that can be read out from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), this processing is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot effect processing (S2505).

  In the first display mode, as the effect round command for display, in the round game R of the third round, display that there is an operation effect in the next round and that there is an operation effect also in the interval period after the end of the next round (see FIG. In the interval period after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the operation effect is displayed (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

  In addition, the display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot L or M (S2553) ), When it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information readable from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this processing is ended And return to the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505).

  In the second display mode, as the effect round command for display, there is an operation effect in the next round in the round game R of the third round (see FIG. 88 (a)), and the number of stored balls in the fourth round game Information is set to be displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)), and in the interval period after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is set to be displayed. Be done.

  Here, information about the number of stored balls is prepared so as to be displayable, and based on the operation button 300 being operated at the success timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing when the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display unit 717). Control so that the display is performed.

  In addition, the display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2553 that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, it is jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), information that can be read out from the effect temporary storage area 223r The third display mode is set (S2555), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot effect processing (S2505).

  In the third display mode, as the effect round command for display, in the third round of round game R, a character prompting that there is an operation effect in the next round and promotion of the ball directed to the first specified winning opening 1000a is displayed It is set as shown in FIG. 88, and is set so that a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect is displayed in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the fourth round.

  In addition, the display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  As described above, the displays of the round game R of the third round and the round game R of the fourth round are collectively set as a presentation effect round command.

  Referring back to FIG. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read out from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and a display effect round command for display effect of the round game R of the third round and the round game R of the fourth round is set (S2537), The effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF (S2539), and this processing is ended.

  Although the details are not illustrated, in the process of S2539, when the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to OFF, the process is skipped. doing. This can prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S 2532 that the command is not the round number command indicating the third round (S 2532: No), it is next determined whether the round number command received this time is the fourth round of the jackpot ( S2540).

  If it is determined in the process of S2540 that the command is the round number command indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round is reached is set. Then, since the display mode of the fourth round is already selected as described above, the present process is ended to avoid selecting another display mode redundantly, and the process returns to the hit related process (S2221).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2540 that the round number command received this time is not the fourth round of the big hit (S2540: No), then the round number command received this time is the fifth round of the big hit It is determined whether or not (S2541).

  When it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect executing flag 223x is set to OFF (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag described later The input flag 223wd is set to off (S2543), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the process proceeds to S2544.

  In the process of S2544, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the sixth round of the jackpot (S2544). If it is determined in the process of S2544 that it is a round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M or k (S2545: Yes), a continuous emission round command for display is set (S2546), the present process is ended, and the process is returned to the hit related process (S2221) .

  The display continuous firing round command is set to be a display including a display (see small area Ds3 in FIG. 92B) prompting to continue without stopping the firing of the ball as the display effect round command. . This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94 (b)) in which over winning can be expected in the round game R of the sixth round. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of over-winning by continuing the firing of the ball according to the display.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2544 that the command is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or the process of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M or k (ie jackpot L, If it is determined that it is N) (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and the process ends.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the round number command of the first, second and fifth rounds and the sixth round when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, N is received, the round number command for display is set by the processing of S2547. Ru. On the other hand, when another round number command is received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. As described above, by changing the display of the round game R according to the jackpot type or the number of rounds, the jackpot game can be progressed without making the player get bored.

  The various display round number commands etc. (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the MPU 221 In the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) to be executed by the H.264, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number commands, display effect round commands, display continuous emission round commands), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect Do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the current round number is determined by the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current number of rounds in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223 h may be omitted.

  Also, although the fourth round display mode is also selected when the third round command is acquired, other configurations may be used, for example, the third round command is acquired The control equivalent to the control performed when being executed may be repeatedly performed even when the fourth round number command is acquired. Also, for example, when the third round number command is acquired, only the display mode is set, and when the fourth round number command is acquired, selection of the display mode is performed. It is good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the next round (three rounds) before the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed is performed. In the round of, the notice effect is performed to notice that the timing effect (operation effect) is to be performed (see FIG. 88A). Then, timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  As such, since the advance notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is known in advance that the effect of causing the player to operate the operation button 300 is executed. it can. Moreover, since the advance notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the problem is that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance effect is executed. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is performed in a predetermined number of rounds during a big hit, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the storage channel 1231. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are stored, timing effect (operation effect) may be performed in the next round. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in which balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 more positively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S2112). This variation display setting process (S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) is a first special symbol based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation display effect. Alternatively, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (complete removal, reach removal, jackpot), processing for setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. The respective processes of S2702 to S2705 are executed.

  More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), and then the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (S2703), and the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding Based on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c), winning information included in the command storage area The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2706.

  In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2706 that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132) In the process of S2206 (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S 2710), and this processing ends.

  Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring processing (S2113) is one of the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 51). Is a process for determining that the

  Here, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage channel 1231 is provided as part of a storage device capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 balls can be stored. It is composed of

  A detection sensor 1240 is disposed at the upstream end of the storage flow channel 1231, and the detection sensor 1240 detects the entry of the ball into the storage flow channel 1231. Further, the sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage flow channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed the first specified winning opening 1000a (that is, whether the passage of the ball has been detected by the detection sensor 1240) (S2801), and the first specified winning opening If the ball has passed through 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

  In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the outlet 1150 (that is, whether the passage of the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870) (S2803). When it is determined that the has passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

  In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is on. It is determined whether it is (S2806). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (ie, off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set on (S2807), and a display intermediate number command is set (S2808) And the process of S2812. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2806 that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2812.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2805 that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2805) S2809). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S2810), a display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. . On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2809 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2812.

  In the process of S2812, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on It is determined (S2813). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (ie, off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set on (S2814), and a display full command is set (S2815) ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2813 that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2813: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2812 that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816) ). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set off (S2817), a display dissatisfaction command is set (S2818), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2816 that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, off) (S2816: No), the process ends.

  As described above, settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed based on detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform effects based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231.

  In the above description, the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 by the number of ball entry based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharge based on the detection result of the specific area detection sensor 4860 and the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 The number of is calculated, but it is not limited to this.

  For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a ball is disposed at an arbitrary position of the storage channel 1231, and the ball is stored downstream based on the passage of a predetermined period in a state where the ball is detected by the sensor. It may be determined that there is. As an example, when a sensor is disposed at a position where the third ball from the downstream stops, the sensor enables three balls including two balls disposed downstream thereof to be stored in the storage channel 1231. Can be determined.

  In addition, even if the open / close plate 1300 is closed, if the detection of the ball by the sensor is continued, it can be suspected that the ball is illegally held, and thus an error notification is made. Can be found early. That is, a sensor that detects a sphere can be used both for detecting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and for detecting fraud.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the lamp output processing (S2103) will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this lamp output processing (S2103). This lamp output processing (S2103) is one of main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command to be transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is a process for

  Here, in the present control example, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, the decorative lamp 227a (described above which is used for effects provided throughout the pachinko machine 10 The inside of the covering front plate 1200 is provided for the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the electric decorative parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) and the storage channel 1231. A transmitting lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for making the transmitting state visible to the player is provided, and other lamps 227z.

  When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether it is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) that is clocked by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. If it is determined in S2901 that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process moves to S2905.

  When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, control is performed so that all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be light (in intensity).

  Here, in the present control example, the covering front plate 1200 is provided so as to make it possible to configure a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage channel 1231 and the operation state of the interference member 6930 in the normal gaming state. There is. As described above, the covering front plate 1200 is configured to be changed from the shielding state to the transmitting state by irradiating a predetermined light (light of the transmitting lamp) from the back surface.

  Then, during the predetermined period (the predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after the game machine is powered on, the transmitting lamp is turned on regardless of the gaming state. Thereby, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, that is, at the timing when a clerk checks the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the covering front plate 1200 can be easily visually identified. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the present time is not within a predetermined period (30 seconds) (after a predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) since the start processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed ( S2901: No) Next, it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 has detected passage of a sphere (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball which has passed the detection sensor 1240 ( The process proceeds to S2903) and S2906.

  In this case, the transmission lamp lighting command in this case is a transmission lamp 227b for a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the sphere to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage flow channel 1231. Is set to light, and while the permeation state is maintained while the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, the permeation state can be released after the sphere is stopped. It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (shielded from the transmission state) on condition that the sphere has passed through the outlet 1150 or that the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the nonspecific area detection sensor 4870 detects the passage of the sphere. It may be configured to change to the state). Thus, the covering front plate 1200 can be maintained in a transparent state throughout the period in which the spheres remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 does not detect passage of the sphere (S2902: No), next, it is determined whether the transmission lamp related command has been set (S2904), and the transmission lamp related command is set. If it is (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command designated in advance is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, when the transmission lamp related command is not set (S2904: No), the process directly shifts to the processing of S2906.

  The setting of the lamp-related command for transmission is mainly performed by the sphere number confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG.

  Referring back to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the process of S2906, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (playing state) (S2906), and this process is ended. Note that the decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current gaming state, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring and rendering process (S2107). In this button input monitoring and effect process (2107), the input whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform corresponding effects. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, setting of an operation button effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated, or various flags based on the content of the operation Settings are made.

  Specifically, first, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period when the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a pressing success period, Set a transparent lamp lighting command to execute lamp lighting based on the determination result, or set a display command to display the ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect) accompanying it (See FIG. 140). Second, in the interval period after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period when the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the pressing success period or the pressing success period It is determined whether or not the depression failure period, and a display command for displaying an effect (a large success effect, a success effect, a failure effect) based on the result is set.

  When the button input monitoring and effect process (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect in-progress flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), next, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S3002) . If it is determined in step S3002 that the jackpot k is determined (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003). If it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not jackpot k (ie, jackpot K, L, M, N) in the processing of S3002 (S3002: No) or in the processing of S3003, it is not during the interval (that is, round game When it is determined that R is in progress (S3003: No), a ball number confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 140, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the ball number confirmation process (S3004). This ball number confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring and effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. is there.

  This ball number confirmation process (S3004) monitors the input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the rendering effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the operation content, or a transmission lamp lighting command for performing lamp lighting is set, The display command for displaying the ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect) accompanying it is set.

  When the ball number check process (S3004) is executed, it is first determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes) Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasping related command have already been set, the present processing ends, and the processing returns to the button input monitoring and rendering processing (S2107).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3101 that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, off) (S3101: No), it is then determined whether the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected. (S3102). When the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the sphere number grasping period (S3103).

  Here, the ball number grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 matches at least a part with the bar display portion 717 in the above-described timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B). In this sphere number grasping period, the length can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the bar display unit 717.

  In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 cm, the operation speed thereof is 20 cm / s, and the width of the bar display portion 717 is 1 cm. In this case, since the sphere number grasping period is the same as the time for the display pointer 719 to move 4 cm, it is 0.2 s.

  If it is determined in the process of S3103 that the ball number period is within (S3103: Yes), a display ball number grasp success command is set (S3104), and a transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set (S3105) And the process of S3111.

  Here, when the command for determining the number of balls for display success is set, a display prompting the user to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (for example, the character display of “notice to the attacker !!”) is the third symbol display While being executed in the device 81, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set such that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least over the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3103, it is determined that the operation is not within the sphere number period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at the timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 deviate (see FIG. 89)) (S3103: No), a display ball number grasping failure command is set (S3106), a transmission lamp lighting command (middle / long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display prompting the grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

  In addition, the transmission lamp lighting commands (middle and long) are set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is turned on at least over the fourth round round game R to the fifth round round game R.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3102 that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether the limit time (3 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fourth round in this control example) has passed (S3108). If it is determined that the limit time has elapsed (S3108: Yes), the display ball number grasping impossible command is set (S3109), the transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the limit time has not passed (it is less than 3 seconds from the start of the fourth round of round game R), this process is ended, and the button input monitoring and effect process (S2107) Return to).

  Here, when the display ball number grasping impossible command is set, the display prompting the grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed either, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 does not change either (see FIG. 88A).

  In addition, the transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the round game R thereafter.

  As described above, in the present control example, the player can be obtained from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b when the operation button 300 is operated rather than the operation button 300 is operated. It is controlled to increase profits. In addition, when operating the operation button 300, the third symbol display device 81 performs the operation during the ball number grasping period (0.2 seconds in this control example), rather than performing the operation at other timings. It is controlled so that the profit which a player can obtain from the display in and the lighting aspect of lamp | ramp 227b for permeation | transmission becomes large.

  Therefore, the player can improve the operation desire to operate the operation button 300 during the round game R of the fourth round, and can concentrate on the operation. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is about to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the limit time), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. (S3101), only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is validated in the ball number confirmation process (S3004).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully set the timing for operating the operation button 300 while avoiding the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly. In addition, since the player can suppress the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 300 by executing the display (the alerting display) prompting this on the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the operation button 300 is performed. The number of times can be prevented from exceeding the number of times of service at an early stage, and the durability of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  When the process of S3111 ends, the present process ends, and the process returns to the button input monitoring and effect process (S2107).

  Referring back to FIG. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). If it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005: Yes), the display operation button related effect command has already been set, so this process is ended and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) Return to

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3005 that the second input flag 223wd is not on (ie, off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). If the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132), an effect for changing the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (see FIGS. 90 and 91) Means that the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 has been performed (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, this means that the state change of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state is performed.

  If it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set off (S3007), and the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round game R is rounded After subtracting the value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the interval by 0.2, it is determined whether the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by further subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of balls left on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 in the storage channel 1231.

  Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4 when the display pointer 719d is at a position where at least a part of the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band 716b in the timing effect (operation effect). Control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90 (b)). Here, during a period in which the display pointer 719d coincides with the second band portion 716b, at least a part of the positions coincide with each other, the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band portion 716b. , Can adjust the length.

  In this control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 cm, and the width of the second band portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 cm. Since the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 0.2 seconds, the time required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band 716b is 0.1 seconds. The operating speed of the display pointer 719 is 72 cm / s. After setting in this manner, the display pointer 719 is controlled such that the left end thereof reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds of At the timing, the right end passes the left end of the second band 716b). In this control example, by performing control in this manner, it is possible to limit the period in which the display pointer 719 matches at least a part of the second band portion 716b to 0.1 seconds.

  When it is determined in the process of S3008 that the number of remaining balls is 4 (S3008: Yes), a display operation button large success presentation command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button large success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90 (b)).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3008 that the number of remaining balls is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the reason that the number of remaining balls in S3010 is 5 or more is the operation of the operation button 300 when all of the display pointers 719d are at the positions above and below the first band portion 716a in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91 (a)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too early) before 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period.

  If it is determined in the process of S3010 that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), a display operation button success presentation command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a moderate profit (that is, a profit that is neither the highest nor the lowest) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The display shown is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. If the limit time (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), a display operation button failure presentation command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, the reason that the number of remaining balls in S3010 is 3 or less is the operation of the operation button 300 when all the display pointers 719d are in the upper and lower positions coincident with the third band 716c in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too late) after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period or the case where the operation button 300 is not performed.

  Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (See FIG. 91 (b)).

  As described above, in the present control example, the profit obtained by the player is larger when the operation button 300 is operated than when the operation button 300 is not operated, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 also changes accordingly. To be controlled. Moreover, when operating the operation button 300, the operation is performed at the timing when the number of remaining balls is 4 (from 0.7 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the interval period starts). It is controlled so as to obtain the highest profit and to obtain the medium profit if it is earlier than the timing and the minimum profit if it is later than the timing.

  Therefore, the player can improve the operation desire to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the round game R of the fourth round, and the operation mode of the operation button 300 can be selected.

  That is, when the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, he can obtain a medium profit without danger by pressing the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period (stablely In profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the best profit, any delay in the operation will not give you a moderate profit and you will get the lowest profit. The benefits are unstable and volatile.

  As described above, by making the operation mode of the operation button 300 different, the player can select one that can stably obtain a moderate profit or one that is unstable but can obtain the highest profit. be able to.

  Accordingly, the operation of the operation button 300 can be concentrated. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is about to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the limit time), and while the second input flag 223wd is set to ON, the button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) Since the process is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is validated in the button input monitoring and rendering process (S2107).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully set the timing for operating the operation button 300 while avoiding the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is blindly hit repeatedly. In addition, since the player can suppress the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 300 by executing the display (the alerting display) prompting this on the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the operation button 300 is performed. The number of times can be prevented from exceeding the number of times of service at an early stage, and the durability of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The visibility inside the storage channel 1231 was changed according to the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. As a result, it is possible to change the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900.

  In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to remove the line of sight from the storage channel 1231 and pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) and participate in the timing effect (operation effect) I configured to play. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game ends while the line of sight of the player is concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

  Furthermore, as a result of the player operating the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect), when the storage channel 1231 is in the transmission state, attention is paid to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is disposed. Configured to prompt you to do so. As a result, it is possible to urge the player's gaze focused on the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) to be transferred to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

  In the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), a circle is displayed so that the number range of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. This makes it easy for the player to predict the internal state of the storage channel 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and makes it easy to determine how many more balls should be fired by the specified number of winnings. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the ball emission mode.

  As timing effects (operation effects) performed by the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), different qualities (in the present control example, regarding the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and payout of award balls) When the timing effect (operation effect) for giving a profit directly linked to the) is continuously executed, the operation timing for giving the highest profit for the player is grasped as the same timing (similar timing) for the player. Configured to be. As a result, even when the transition from the previous timing effect (operation effect) to the later timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, the player can perform the operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  Depending on the jackpot type, in a predetermined round game R (round game R in the sixth round), when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (the 20th operation pattern, the operation scenario 5) and when it is not discharged (the 21st Operation pattern, operation scenario 6). Thereby, it is possible to prescribe the presence or absence of the occurrence of excess winning in the predetermined round game R by the jackpot type.

  By changing the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the fourth and fifth rounds) according to the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period It comprised so that a state (the number of storing balls) might change. Thereby, even if the mode of the state change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth 1000a in the round game R, the interference member 6930, and the specific field 4830 is the same, the progress mode of the round game can be changed.

  A predetermined number of round games R (in the present control example, round game R in the fourth round), a number (in this example of control, nine balls) of balls different from the prescribed number (in this control example, 10) By ending in the state of entering the specific winning a prize opening 1000a, it is configured such that the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (in this control example, the fifth round game R) is maximized. did. This makes it possible to suppress the player from unintentionally digesting the jackpot game.

  In the configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific region 4830 as the first specified winning opening 1000a is in the closed state, while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state, the specified number of first specified winning openings 1000a The ball was configured to be unable to enter the ball. Thereby, the operation mode of the interference member 6930 can define the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specified winning opening 1000a The timing and the timing of the end of the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to define the timing at which the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R.

  In the open state of the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is configured to be easily retained in a state in which the ball is aligned on the upstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a, and the retained ball is in the state where the first specified winning opening 1000a is closed. It is configured to flow downward toward the first specified winning hole 1000a at changing timing. As a result, it is possible to collect a plurality of staying balls collectively in the first specified winning opening 1000a and make it possible to enter the ball, and it is possible to increase the possibility of occurrence of an over winning.

  In addition, it is possible to define the number of overtime winnings. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excess winnings from becoming excessive and to prevent the game characteristic from being disturbed.

  Furthermore, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the over-winning can be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 disposed downstream of the first specified winning hole 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is predefined based on the jackpot type. Ru. As a result, even if the ball is similarly retained on the upstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where the over winning occurs and the case where the over winning does not occur based on the jackpot type.

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, a benefit obtained by the player in the round game R (for example, the visibility of the inside of the storage channel 1231, the number of discharged balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, or It was comprised so that the presence or absence of generation | occurrence | production of the ball entering into the specific area 4830, and the maximum number of balls in round game R) change. This makes it possible to improve the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect).

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the display device (the third symbol is configured so that the two types of profits that the player can obtain seesaw, and the player can grasp the aspect of the profits that the player can obtain It comprised so that it might display on the display apparatus 81). As a result, the player who visually recognizes the display on the display device can obtain the profit corresponding to the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit desired to be obtained preferentially. Because of this, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in timing presentation (operation presentation).

  Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, with reference to FIG. 141, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 141, for the special symbol 1, the “big hit P” is defined in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 49”. This "big hit P" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit P" is 50, so "big hit P" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 50% (50/100).

  In this "big hit P", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, control is performed so that at least one jackpot is determined before shifting to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of the expected ball (expected ball) that the player can acquire from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of "50 to 99", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with "big hit Q". This "big hit Q" is a big hit of six rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit Q" is 50, so "big hit Q" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery The proportion is 50% (50/100).

  In this "big hit Q", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit m" is defined in association with the range (entire range) of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99". This "big hit m" is a big hit of 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit m" is 100, so "big hit m" is determined when it becomes big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery The proportion is 100%.

  In this "big hit m", six rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to the high probability state. In this control example, after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, control is performed so that at least one jackpot is determined before shifting to the low probability state. Therefore, it is an advantageous jackpot type in terms of the expected ball (expected ball) that the player can acquire from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds for the jackpot game, but the bonus (high probability state of the normal symbol or high probability state of the special symbol) given after the big hit ends is the special symbol 2 Is specified to be advantageous (it becomes easy to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in the present control example, the game proceeds to a high probability state in which the player who is more likely to win the game by winning the special symbol 2 wins against the game winning by the lottery of the special symbol 1. The configuration is easier. Therefore, once the continuous shooting mode (high probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the lottery of special symbol 2 is performed by entering the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed Becomes easy to be executed, and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, in the sixth round game R, control of different operation patterns corresponding to the jackpot type is described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described above in the ninth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing time change of the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 in the twenty-second operation pattern, and FIG. 142 (b) is an opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing in the twenty-third operation pattern. FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the twenty-fourth operation pattern.

  In this control example, in the sixth round game R of the jackpot P, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the twenty-second operation pattern, and in the sixth round game R of the jackpot Q, the twenty-third The opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are driven in the operation pattern, and the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are driven in the twenty-fourth operation pattern in the sixth round round game R with a big hit m.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the twenty-second operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulation member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and the start of the round game R is started. After the elapse of the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example), the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state.

  In addition, the interference member 6930 returns to the evacuation state at the end of the round game R (skipped when the round game R ends before the standby time TK). Here, in the round game R, passage of a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls is detected at the first specified winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example) It ends when 30 seconds have passed.

  In the round game R of the sixth round of the jackpot P in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are drive-controlled in the twenty-second operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) before the waiting time TK elapses. When the ball of the ball enters the first specified winning combination port 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

  On the other hand, when the specified number of balls does not enter the first specified winning hole 1000 a before the waiting time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, and ten balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231. Since it lose | eliminates, it becomes impossible to enter the ball | bowl of the defined number into the 1st specific winning a prize mouth 1000a, and the time which round game R requires takes the maximum value (30 seconds) of 1st operation time T1.

  The waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) does not stop the firing of the ball in the interval between the rounds from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, even after the start of the round game R of the sixth round By continuing the firing, the predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls is set as a sufficiently reachable period for the first specified winning opening 1000a. In the present control example, the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  On the other hand, for example, when the firing of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds from the end of the fifth round game R and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the fired ball From the balance with the time (about 4.0 seconds) to reach the first specified winning a prize opening 1000a, a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls is determined by the elapse of the waiting time TK. It can not pass 1000a.

  Therefore, the sixth round game R when the ball is stopped firing at the interval between the rounds immediately before the sixth round game R is compared with the case where the ball continues to be fired at the interval between the rounds. Can be configured to increase the time required for As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode of stopping the firing of the ball in the inter-round interval.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the twenty-third operation pattern, while the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), before the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, opens and closes on one side). That is, control for canceling driving (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is performed a plurality of times.

  In addition, it is the same as the twenty-second operation pattern that the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state after the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R .

  According to this operation pattern, all the balls on the opening and closing plate 8300 do not enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, but some of the balls flow downward to the auxiliary entrance hole 9111. It is possible to make it difficult for the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls to pass through the first specified winning hole 1000a before the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses rather than the operation pattern. .

  Therefore, with high probability, it is possible to set the round game R of the sixth round for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the twenty-second operation pattern, since it is possible to receive the payout of the winning balls by entering the auxiliary entrance 9111, the number of payout balls is more than that of the twenty-third operation pattern. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, while the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), before and after the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens and closes a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, opens and closes on one side). That is, control for canceling driving (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is performed a plurality of times.

  It is to be noted that, after the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state is the twenty-second and twenty-third operation patterns. It is similar to the operation pattern.

  In this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening and closing plate 8300 enter the first specified winning hole 1000a, but some of the balls flow downward to the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similar to the twenty-third operation pattern, it is possible to lower the probability that the round game R ends when the specified number (10 in this control example) of the balls passes the first specified winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, with high probability, it is possible to set the round game R of the sixth round for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the twenty-third operation pattern, since the ball can be made to enter the auxiliary entrance port 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, in a longer period than the twenty-third operation pattern. Over time, it is possible to generate the payout of the winning balls resulting from the entry into the auxiliary entrance 9111. Therefore, it is possible to generate more award balls as compared with the twenty-third operation pattern.

  In this operation pattern, even after the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, control is performed such that one-side opening / closing occurs. That is, even after the storage channel 1231 is filled with the spheres (full) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-side opening / closing still occurs, so placement of the spheres The ball can be easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at one side opening / closing time as compared with the case where is not specified.

  Next, display in the round game R of the sixth round will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b). FIG. 143 (a) and FIG. 143 (b) are schematic diagrams which show an example of the display content alert | reported that 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performing round game R of the 6th round.

  In FIG. 143 (a), an example of the display of the round game R in the sixth round when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", or the sixth round game in the case of "big hit m" The schematic diagram which showed an example of the display before progress of standby time TK in R is illustrated, and in FIG. 143 (b), the standby time TK in the round game R in the 6th round in the case of jackpot type "big hit m" The schematic diagram which showed an example of the display after progress is shown in figure.

  That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit P" or "big hit Q", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is "big hit" In the case of “m”, after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained, the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) after the waiting time TK elapses. A display command is set such that the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the number-of-rounds display portion 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is in the round game R of the sixth round. A sub-round display portion 714b is displayed at the upper left of the screen in a mode, and below the number-of-rounds display portion 714 to indicate that it is a period in which additional prize balls can be expected in the round game R.

  In FIG. 143 (a), the number-of-rounds display portion 714 is light-emitting (brightly displayed), while the sub-round display portion 714b is unlit (displayed darkly), and in FIG. 143 (b), the number of rounds is displayed reversely. While the portion 714 is turned off (displayed dark), the sub-round display portion 714b is displayed light (displayed brightly).

  That is, in this control example, the round game R is executed by the display of the mode shown in FIG. 143 (a) in the period in which the payout of the prize ball accompanying the entry to the first specified winning combination 1000a is main. In addition to informing the player that the payout of the winning balls accompanying the entry into the first specified winning opening 1000a can not be expected after the elapse of the waiting time TK, but due to the entry into the auxiliary entry slot 9111 It is possible to make the player recognize that the period in which the payout of the winning balls can be expected is continued.

  Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the substantial profit that the player can obtain by entering the ball. That is, as described above, the payout of the winning balls due to the entry of one ball into the auxiliary entry port 9111 is three as described above, which is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specified winning hole 1000a. It is. This change in the number of winning balls with respect to the number of balls entered can be easily recognized by the player.

  In addition, the ball flows to the auxiliary entry port 9111 only when the ball is disposed between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 within a short time that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened, Whenever the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened, the ball does not necessarily flow to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111.

  Therefore, the ball entering frequency of the ball into the auxiliary entrance port 9111 during the light emission display (bright display) of the sub-round display unit 714b is the light emission display (bright display) of the round number display unit 714. This is lower than the ball entering frequency to the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  As described above, according to the present control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the benefit obtained by the player (the change of the winning balls paid out by entering one ball, the ball, the ball Can be notified at the same time that a change has occurred in the

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 143 (b), the character of “+ chance” is displayed as the above-described over winning possibility increase notification mode 721. In this control example, this character “+ chance” may cause the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by firing a ball, and the ball may be awarded by entering the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111. In response to being able to receive a payout of

  As described above, in this control example, control is performed to pay out additional winning balls due to the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 in the round game R. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls (150 in this control example) to be paid out to the player as the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specified winning opening 1000a. More than the number of prize balls (excess balls) can be paid out.

  In particular, in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, there is a high possibility of entering the auxiliary entrance port 9111 even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, and compared to the other twenty-second and twenty-third operation patterns, The number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the drive mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

  That is, in the twenty-second operation pattern to the twenty-fourth operation pattern in this control example, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player, while keeping the driving mode of the interference member 6930 the same.

  In addition, the maximum number of times of entering the auxiliary entry port 9111 corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 performs the opening / closing operation in the round game R. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

  According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the inter-round interval period, the time required for the next round game R is likely to be longer when stopping the firing of the ball than when the firing of the ball is continued in the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the inter-round interval period.

  The number of award balls to be paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed by the driving mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (that is, depending on whether the above-mentioned "one side opening / closing" occurs). . In other words, whether the ball reaching the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 passes through the first specified winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary entrance hole 9111 downstream thereof, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member It can be switched according to the driving mode of 8340.

  Thus, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and the timing at which the ball is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be divided. Therefore, for example, during the round game R, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the time. In this case, the balls having reached the movable object to be circulated are distributed in the order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the reached balls are guided to the winning opening (a winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary entrance 9111). Thus, the power of attention in the vicinity of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved.

  That is, the ball is fired at a timing when the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111, and the ball is stopped at other timings, whereby the number of fired balls relative to the number of paid-out balls can be reduced.

  On the other hand, it was configured to vary the timing at which the ball should be fired to aim for winning in the auxiliary entrance 9111 based on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to request the player to change the firing mode of the ball for each big hit game, so it is easy to prevent the player from playing the big hit game casually. In addition, making it hard to grasp the jackpot type can prevent the occurrence of the capture method in advance, and a certain player (experienced player) receives an excessive profit (for example, the number of balls paid out rather than the number of fired balls). Can be prevented from occurring.

  The auxiliary ball entry port 9111 is disposed at a position where the ball is not guided (it is difficult to be guided) when the opening / closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excitation). As a result, the player's concentration on the game can be improved as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance port 9111 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are not driven.

  In the round game R, the player can easily grasp the change in the expected value of the number of balls paid out with respect to the number of balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (the third symbol display device 81) So configured. In this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to arbitrarily select whether to continue or stop the ball from the display of the display device while the same round game R continues.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148, a third control example will be described. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening and closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening and closing plate In addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

  This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when it becomes a small hit based on the entry of the gaming ball to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is

  The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the first hit random number table 202a indicates whether the value of the first hit random number counter C3 acquired by the game ball entering the first entrance 64 is a big hit or not. It is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit or not, and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the first winning random number counter C3 is obtained. It is a table in which a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the purpose is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202 a 1 is determined to be a random value in the first special symbol lottery based on entering the first entrance 64 into a random number. It is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if “0”, it is determined that a big hit is made. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 319", it is determined that the value is out.

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), is a random value (determination value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the jackpot has occurred. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “1 to 318”, and if “1 to 318”, it is determined that the small hit is made. In addition, when it is determined that "319", it is determined that it is out.

  Thus, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In the first random number counter C3, at the time of the drawing of the first special symbol based on entering the first entrance 64, the random number for the first special symbol is 1 random number, and the total number of random numbers is Among 320, since the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 1, the probability to be a jackpot of the first special symbol is "1/320". In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be small per unit is 3, the probability to be a small per unit of the first special symbol is "3/320".

  On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on entering the second winning opening 640, the random number that will be the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, while the total number of random numbers is 320, the jackpot and Since the total number of random number values is 1, the probability of becoming a jackpot of the second special symbol is "1/320". In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be small hits is 318, the probability to be small hits of the second special symbol is "318/320".

  In the same manner as each embodiment or each control example described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol is hit, the variation display on the second symbol display device is ended, and then the stop symbol (the second symbol) is "○". The symbol is lit and displayed, and the motor-operated accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  The motorized accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds in the middle of the hour, but only 0.2 seconds in the middle of the hour. Therefore, even when the time is not short, even if the value of the second random number counter C5 is a hit, it is difficult to win the game ball to the second winning opening 640. In this way, it is possible to suppress the game in which the player attempts to enter the second winning opening 640 despite the fact that the player is not shorting time (does not show the big hit with time reduction).

  FIG. 146 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored as described above, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 is each It is specified in association with the jackpot type and the type of winning opening that has become the lottery trigger for the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning combination is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49" A jackpot R is associated with and defined (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

  When the jackpot R is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99", the jackpot S is defined in association with it (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

  When the jackpot S is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is ended becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls, but can not obtain a time-saving benefit after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot based on the drawing of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), it is possible to make the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game time-saving state with a probability of 50%. During the short hours, you will aim to gain more jackpots by the small hit game described later.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is a big hit in the range of "0 to 9" n is associated and specified (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). The jackpot n gives the player the same benefit as the jackpot R described above.

  That is, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "10 to 99", the jackpot p is associated and defined (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). While the jackpot p gives the player the same prize ball payout as the jackpot n described above, a difference is made in the number of times of variation of the time-saving game.

  That is, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the time saving state (four times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is absorbed four times. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot that occurs in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640) shifts to the time saving state with the establishment of 100%. Therefore, the possibility of acquiring the next jackpot in a short time after the end of the jackpot game is increased, as compared with the case where the jackpot of the special symbol 1 is achieved.

  As mentioned above, during the short time of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electrically operated part 640a when the normal symbol is hit It is set to be longer (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make the ball enter the second winning opening 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. And if it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2, since it will be in a time-saving state after the big hit ends, it will be easier to obtain the big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 more.

  Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the special symbol which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and tends to be a big hit G when becoming a big hit is likely to be repeated. It becomes easy to acquire a lot of prize balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in the present control example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are related, and the sphere is the specific area 4830 (in the present control example, the next big hit is due to the passing of the balls. Although it is determined whether or not to pass through the area to be determined (see FIG. 51), the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

  The small hitting type selection table 202g is a small hitting based on the first entrance 64, a special symbol 1 small hitting selection table 202g1 for selecting a small hitting type, and a small hitting based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 147 (b), when the small hitting based on the first entrance 64, the value of the small hitting type counter C6 is “0 to 1”, the small hitting A is selected, “2 to 99 In the case of "", small hit B is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), when the small winnings based on the second winning opening 640, the small hitting A is selected if the value of the first type counter C6 is "0 to 9", "10 In the case of ̃99 ”, the small hitting B is selected.

  In this control example, the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hitting type (see FIG. 148). Although the details will be described later, the small hitting A is a small hitting provided with a high probability of a big hitting by passing the gaming ball through the specific area 4830, and the small hitting B is a small hitting with a high probability of not giving a big hit. .

  Further, in the present control example, the jackpot provided after the small jack A and the small jack B is configured to be the jackpot G (16R time short-lived jackpot).

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the classification of the jackpot given after that is determined according to the classification of the small hitting, it is a case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hitting as the other specification. Also, determine the type of jackpot by the jackpot selection table (acquire the jackpot right only), and then execute the jackpot that acquired the right just before the gaming ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the small jackpot game thereafter May be By doing this, it is possible for the player to select the small hit that passes the specific area 4830, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 148 shows a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 at the small hitting A, and a time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 (see FIG. 51) at the small hitting B It is. The operation of the distribution device 4850 is the same for small hits A and small hits B.

  In FIG. 148, the deviation of the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the timing of driving of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and it is illustrated as starting operation at the same point.

  First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept open over 1.0 seconds from the start of the small hit, and when 1.0 seconds elapses, the drive of the solenoid 1510 ( Excitation is canceled. 0.2 seconds after the release of the excitation, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, and the open / close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

  Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In small hit B, solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) to keep open / close plate 1300 open for 1.8 seconds from the start of small hit, and when 1.8 seconds elapses, drive (energized) solenoid 1510 ) Is released.

  Thus, while the small hitting game time itself is the same (1.8 seconds), the small hitting A and the small hitting B differ in whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hitting game. .

  In this control example, when the small hitting game is started immediately after the end of the small hitting game, that is, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol remains and the small hitting game occurs continuously, between the small hitting games The period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to 0.4 seconds at the minimum. Therefore, in the above-mentioned mode, when small hitting games occur continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), discharge is performed from the discharge port 1150 between small hitting games The number of balls to be played is limited to two. Therefore, the ball which entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small hit game may remain in the storage channel 1231 even during the next small hit game.

  The operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The sorting device 4850 maintains the sorting operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the solenoid 1510 was driven (excited) at the start of the small hitting game, and 2.0 seconds have elapsed. The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. In addition, the sorting device 4850 moves the sorting operation member 4851 to the open position for 3.2 seconds after 3.2 seconds have passed since the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) at the start of the small hitting game. When 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in such a manner as to return the distribution operation member 4851 to the closed position again.

  That is, the distribution operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for one small hit game. The first movement corresponds to one second (corresponding to the time taken for the ball passing through the discharge port 1150 to reach the distribution operation member 4851) after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed in the small hitting A. .

  From this, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven with the small hitting A, when the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 in advance, the ball is passed to the specific area 4830 when the first distribution operation member 4851 is moved. It can be done. On the other hand, since the probability that the small hitting A occurs is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to frequently cause passing the sphere to the specific area 4830 at this timing.

  The second movement of the distribution operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hitting game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball that has passed the discharge port 1150 passes the distribution operation member 4851) Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is a mode in which the ball is not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small hitting game is two.

  That is, according to this control example, when only the small hitting B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the ball does not pass the specific area 4830 unless the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. It can be configured as follows.

  Thereby, when only the small hitting B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the timing when the ball passes the specific area 4830 can be limited when the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, it is possible to obtain a paid-out award ball collected in the time-saving game by the award ball paid out by the game in which the ball is continuously put into the second entrance 640 so that the number of held balls does not become zero.

  On the other hand, while it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 while continuing to put the ball in the second entrance 640, in order to acquire the next jackpot (to pass the ball to the specific area 4830) , It is necessary for the player to create a timing to set the number of holding balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time saving game. In this way, in the time saving game, if the number of remaining short times decreases, it is possible to configure the timing for setting the number of holding balls to 0 frequently so that the profit obtained by the player can be increased.

  In addition, according to the setting of the movement of the 2nd time, if the number of balls discharged | emitted from the storage flow path 123 is three, although a ball | bowl passes through the specific area | region 4830, it is not restricted to this. That is, the fourth ball may be set in a case where the number of discharged pieces is larger than the number (two pieces) discharged in the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hitting game, for example, the fourth ball is the specific area 4830 The second movement may be set at the passing timing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hitting game). In addition, the shortest interval for small hitting games may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of discharged pieces is one), and in this case, the second movement is more than the number of pieces discharged (one). It may be set, for example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hitting game).

  In addition, since the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is about 1, 2 on average in one small hitting game, the storage channel 1231 is performed before the small hitting game in which the number of holding balls becomes 0. By storing the ball on the surface, it is possible to increase the possibility of the ball passing through the specific area 4830. Therefore, it is possible to select the timing for setting the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 to 0 by the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 which is increased / decreased each time a small hit game. Thereby, the power of attention to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In the present control example, the longer the duration of the time saving game, the more the award winning balls due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. Here, by setting the number of winning balls in the second entrance 640, it is possible to allow the player to select whether to shorten or lengthen the time saving game period.

  For example, if the number of winning balls in the second entrance 640 is one, there is no profit (the number of paid-out balls) that the player can obtain by subtraction of the number of firings (0). Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to shorten the time-saving game period.

  On the other hand, if the number of winning balls in the second entrance 640 is two or more (for example, five), there is a benefit (the number of winning balls) which the player can obtain by subtraction of the number of firings (one). that's all). Therefore, it may be advantageous for the player to reduce the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and extend the time saving game period.

  In this control example, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 for one small hitting game is set to 1.8 seconds from the opening to the closing of the first opening, so to the first specified winning opening 1000a in one small hitting game. The number of balls entered is 3 or 4 but it is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hitting game with an opening pattern such that the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) are obtained during one small hitting game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specified winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, the ball is the lower end of the opening and closing plate 1300 when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed even if the opening time of the opening and closing plate 1300 is short. It is possible to extend the time until it falls downward more than that, and to guide the ball to the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  In this control example, since the ball is controlled to be able to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the period from opening to closing is a small hitting game (small hitting A, small hitting B) of 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0 When repeated at intervals of 4 seconds, the number of small hitting games against the number of shootable balls is 11 balls / 3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be fired during 3 small hit games.

  Here, in order to generate a small hit game, it is necessary to cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so when the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 is 0, such as at the time of right strike start In order to generate three small hitting games, it is necessary to cause three balls to enter the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, the remaining eight balls are deviated from the second entrance ball port 640 and headed to the first specified winning hole 1000a. In three small hits, for example, when all small hits are the above-mentioned small hits B, six balls are discharged by passing three small hits. Therefore, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231 after three small hitting games. Therefore, the expected number of balls additionally remaining in the storage channel 1231 when firing the balls continuously is two for three small hit games.

  In addition, the ball which has passed through the first specified winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game concerned is not discharged if it does not reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specified winning hole 1000a, and even if it is considered that opening in a small hitting game is completed in 1.8 seconds, the corresponding small hitting game is the first It may occur that the opening of the next small hitting game is started before the ball which has passed through the specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, when the balls start to be stored in the storage channel 1231 (when the number is 0, it is the first time), a small hit game in which the number is not 0 (for example, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231) The balls can be made more likely to remain in the storage channel 1231 as compared to when the balls are additionally increased in the small hit game to be executed and the continuation time).

  On the other hand, if the number of holding balls in the second entrance 640 is not zero, the number of remaining holding balls and the number of remaining balls in the second entrance 640 are new. If the number of balls having entered the second entrance 640 exceeds three, three small hitting games can be executed at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls heading to the first specified winning hole 1000a during the three small hitting games is eight or more, and more balls can be directed to the storage channel 1231, and for the small hitting three times It is possible to additionally leave more than two spheres in the reservoir channel 1231.

  As described above, in this control example, the small hit game generated based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and then as many balls as possible are selected. (1) It is controlled that the player who enters the specified winning combination port 1000a and leaves the ball in the storage channel 1231 is profitable for the player. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 does not contribute to the occurrence of the small hitting game (when the number of holding balls is full (4 in this control example)), the ball in the second ball entrance 640 Entering the ball is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of the number of winning balls and the viewpoint of increasing the number of balls additionally left in the storage channel 1231 (to the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game) May be disadvantageous to the player).

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the power of attention to the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game.

  Here, in the present control example, when aiming to pass the sphere to the specific region 4830, more than two spheres are stored at the stage where the number of holding balls of the second entrance 640 becomes zero. It needs to be stored in the channel 1231. That is, on the basis of (when looking at) the number of balls more than twice the number of holding balls of the second entrance 640, if the number of holding balls is not reduced, the balls flow into the specific region 4830 It is configured to be difficult to do. Thereby, in addition to the power of attention to the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2, the power of attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In this control example, the game area adjustment (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which the ball easily passes through the normal ball entry port 67 during the right-handed game and a large number of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 Even in the adjustment where it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entry ball opening 640 and many balls easily face the first specified winning opening 1000a, it is possible to reduce the loss given to the player.

  That is, for example, in the case of adjustment in which many balls enter the second ball entry port 640 during right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231 and generation of small hitting game B continues. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, since the ball can pass to the specific area 4830 if the small hitting game A selected in the establishment of 10% is generated, the ball enters the specific area 4830 It is possible to aim for many prize balls to be paid out by causing many balls to enter the second entrance 640 in the meantime.

  In addition, for example, when it is adjusted that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game and it is easy for many balls to face the first specified winning opening 1000a, the ball is present at the second entrance 640. Because it is difficult to enter, it is possible to enter most of the right-handed gaming balls into the storage channel 1231, and additionally, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640 is zero. Because it is easy to maintain it, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 early, it is possible to end the short time game early, and a period in which a loss occurs due to the ball being difficult to enter the second entrance 640 (that is, Period) can be shortened.

  In this control example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the first specified winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hitting game, it is preferable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hit game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, a second specified winning opening 2255a different from the first specified winning opening 1000a may be set as a winning opening used in the jackpot game.

  In this case, the storage channel 1231 may not necessarily be joined, and for example, the first specified winning opening 1000a and the second specified winning opening 2255a may constitute an independent storage channel, The second specified winning hole 2255a may not constitute the storage channel (is discharged to the ball discharge channel).

  Note that this control example exemplifies one means of the technical idea relating to a gaming machine that “a player can select (aim to hit) the timing at which a ball is made to flow into the specific area 4830”, and other means for the same purpose May be used.

  For example, when the small hit (small hit A in this control example) for driving (exciting) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode in which the ball easily flows into (flows into) the specific area 4830, the ball hardly flows into the specific area 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in this control example) for driving (excitation) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the drive mode (in which it does not flow) is selected according to the small hit type By controlling the notification to the user, and controlling the ball fired after grasping the contents of the notification to include the case where it can pass the specific area 4830, the timing at which the ball flows into the specific area 4830 is a game It may be possible for the person to make a choice. According to this, it is possible to allow "a game mode of avoiding the ball entering the specific area 4830 by not firing the ball at a predetermined timing".

  In addition, the means of alerting | reporting is not limited at all. For example, notification may be made by the display of the third symbol display device 81, or may be made by voice.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage channel 1231 is configured as a channel extending on a flat surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured such that the right side of the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-rear direction. That is, the detection sensor 1240 may extend in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 and extend in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and may be configured as a flow path extending in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150 again.

  The flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a flow path shape in which the extending direction is switched from the left and right to the front and back (rotated by 90 degrees on the vertical axis) by using the shape of the storage flow path 1231. It is formed by uniting two substantially symmetrical light transmitting two members having a recess forming one side surface of the flow path on the opposite side from the left and right.

  In the storage channel 1231 including the channel extending in the front and back direction, the direction of the channel is different from that of the above embodiment, but the number of balls that can be stored downstream of the first specified winning hole 1000a is a prescribed number (in this embodiment, 10). Are designed to be That is, also in the present embodiment, the same game characteristics as the game characteristics described in each of the above embodiments can be configured.

  Also for the storage channel 1231 including a channel extending in the front and back direction, the solenoid 6910 enters the channel in a driven (excited) state, and an overhanging state for restricting the flow of balls in the channel; In the state where the drive (excitation) is released, an interference member is disposed which is retractable from the flow path and switchable to a retracted state which allows the flow of the ball in the flow path.

  Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow passage is the same as that of the sixth embodiment. That is, among the balls stored on the downstream side of the first specified winning hole 1000a, a flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second ball counted from the lowermost ball restricted to flow down by the restriction member 1600 It enters inside and is arranged to be able to regulate the flow-down of the third ball, and in the overhanging state of the interference member, seven pieces at the upstream side of the interference member and at the downstream side of the first specified winning opening 1000a Spheres can be stored.

  The flow path extending in the back and forth direction is formed such that the third and subsequent balls are stored behind the second ball, counting from the lowermost ball restricted from flowing downward by the restriction member 1600. Therefore, when the second sphere is disposed, the sphere is disposed on the front side of the interference member, so the interference member is hidden by the sphere. That is, the state of the interference member can be made difficult to grasp by the ball.

  Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the whole sphere can not be seen visually, and the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the sighting object is because the flow path itself extends to the back side. When the reservoir channel 1231 includes a channel extending back and forth due to a reason such as being far away, a state in which ten spheres are stored in the reservoir channel 1231 by retracting the interference member, and the interference member And the state in which nine spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 are difficult to grasp from the arrangement of the spheres. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even if the first variable winning device 1000 is directly viewed.

  In the case where such a feature is provided, for example, the number of balls entered into the first specified winning opening 1000a may be displayed by the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the person who looks at the third symbol display device 81 grasps the number of balls entering the first specified winning hole 1000a, rather than visually recognizing the storage channel 1231 having poor identifiability of the number of stored balls. Since it can be configured to be easy, the power of attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved relative to the power of attention to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be easily removed from the first variable winning device 1000.

  Although the case where the number of the balls discharged | emitted from the storage flow path 1231 was controlled by the working length of the control member 1600 was demonstrated in said each embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port restricting member for opening and closing the second discharge port can be provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port You may In this case, even if the operating length of the second discharge port restricting member is not strictly controlled, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged. Therefore, the number of discharged balls can be changed between when the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and when the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, when the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be simultaneously opened, it is possible to shorten the time required to discharge the ball all over the ball and to shorten the interval.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is rotated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is moved up and down, the ball can be guided to the first specified winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the upper position, and when it is arranged at the lower position, the ball is arranged from the first specified winning opening 1000a. You may make a difference. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the ball between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200 when raising the ball, the raising operation of the ball can be made smoother.

  Although the above-mentioned each embodiment explained the case where the ball stored by storage channel 1231 was discharged from single outlet 1710, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, an additional outlet may be disposed at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed by discharging from the discharge port 1710 or discharging from the additional discharge port. That is, it becomes difficult to discharge the ball clogged to the side of the discharge port 1710 from the additional discharge port. Further, by discharging both of the discharge ports simultaneously, the ball discharge efficiency can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right of transition to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of the balls discharged, regardless of the discharge speed (interval) of the balls.

  Although the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation may be started simultaneously. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  Although each said embodiment demonstrated the case where the resistance of the ball | bowl's ball entry changes, by whether the space | interval which a ball | bowl will enter into the storage flow path 1231 (whether the storage flow path 1231 is full). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, depending on whether or not the number of balls stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is close to the full state, a predetermined ball entering the storage flow channel 1231 may be decelerated. In this case, even when the specified number (count number) of the round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage flow channel 1231, it is possible to suppress winnings equal to or more than the specified number. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while reducing the number of winnings of the prescribed number or more, as compared with the case of decelerating the ball regardless of the stored number. In addition, you may accelerate not only deceleration. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than the specified number of winnings.

  Although each said embodiment demonstrated the case where ball | bowl is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the ball entering the 1st specified winning a prize mouth 1000a is controlled by the storage ball, it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electric operated member may be provided that operates by a predetermined amount each time a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and that makes it easy to restrict the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the inter-round interval can be shortened as compared with the case where the storage balls are discharged at one time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the specified number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be possible to store a specified number of +1 balls. In this case, it is possible to limit the number of balls passing the specified first special winning opening 1000a beyond the specified number to one per round game R. In this case, the round in which the 11th ball easily passes and the round in which the 11th ball is restricted may be switched in each round.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball can not be held at the front position of the first specified winning opening 1000a (it falls), so there are no two balls winning simultaneously However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be held only for one ball, and may have a possibility of passing through the first specified winning opening 1000a until the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Also, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 has a plurality of inlets and a single outlet, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the channels may branch off toward the outlet on the way. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can be left in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the balls are discharged from.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the storable number of balls when entering from the first specified winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed number of winnings (count number) in the round game R of the big hit game, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of storable balls when entering a ball from the first specified winning opening 1000a is less than the prescribed number of winnings (count number) in the round game R, and the number of storable balls when entering the second specified winning hole 2255a May be equal to or more than the predetermined winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure the game characteristic that the round time is inevitably extended when entering the ball from the first specified winning hole 1000a while discharging the ball all the time at the interval between rounds.

  Although the said 3rd Embodiment demonstrated the case where the ball which flowed down below the opening / closing plate 1300 was lifted above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300 again, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the ball may be lifted by a fixed action movable character capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the movement of the ball can entertain the player.

  Although the case where the delay member (falling delay plate 3250) is disposed below the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described in the third embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening and closing plate 1300 may be formed to slide in a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be disposed above the opening and closing board 1300. The ball may not be in contact with the rib when the sliding plate 1300 is in the open state, and the ball may be in contact with the rib in the closed state. Thereby, also at the upper side of the opening and closing plate 1300, the flow-down speed of the ball can be changed to delay the flow-down.

  In addition, as a method which does not contact | abut a ball | bowl with a rib, bringing a ball | bowl back and forth either side by inclination of the front-back direction, and arranging a rib on the opposite side is mentioned.

  In the third embodiment described above, the falling of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be disposed on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be formed of a flow path curved through the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300. In this case, the ball passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300 so that the ball once it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize by the opening and closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. Flow can be used to produce effects, and since the area to delay the ball is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round is started even when the interval is long Enough sections can be secured.

  The inlet is preferably below the opening and closing plate 1300, and the outlet is preferably above the opening and closing plate 1300. In addition, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the inlet be narrowed by a part of the opening and closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of the ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening and closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

  In the third embodiment described above, the ball is decelerated by moving the opposing surface 3251a of the extending plate portion 3251 further from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to be gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravity acceleration in the direction of flow of the ball decreases, and the ball can be decelerated.

  Also, the change in acceleration and deceleration may be reversed. In the case where the ball accelerates as it goes downstream, it is possible to prevent the formation of an array on the drop delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment described above, the drop delay plate 3250 is disposed below the opening and closing plate 1300, so that only the ball passing through the opening and closing plate 1300 is in contact with the opening and closing plate 1300. It is not limited to For example, in the open / closed state, the ball enters the pocket in which the winning opening is disposed, and in the closed state the ball rolls on the upper surface of the open / close plate. A rib may be disposed that can be abutted when reaching the downstream side on the plate. A ball that enters the pocket as it is does not abut the rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, the ball can be prevented from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted at the drop position Pf3 and the ball is dropped vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, a through hole is formed through which the ball passing the detection sensor 1240 can pass, and the ball is discharged from the through hole You may In this case, the ball can be disposed above the opening / closing plate 1300 even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has fallen just before the detection sensor 1240 and landed on the fall delay plate 3250 is However, the ball that has dropped to the second drop delay plate 7260 due to a similar drop flows once to the left (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then drops to the drop delay plate 3250 again. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the ball is delayed below the opening and closing plate 1300 and the path in which the ball flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the flow path in which the balls entered from the second entrance 640 and the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down merges into the storage flow path 1231 and the number of balls is related to each other However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, balls may be made to flow into the storage channel 1231 by automatic supply. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the case is described in which the benefit obtained by the player decreases as the number of lottery times until the big hit is increased in the high probability state, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the larger the number of lottery times until the jackpot is won, the more profit the player can obtain. In this case, the jackpot obtained in a short time is less profitable, and since it takes a long time to increase the jackpot obtained, the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be equalized.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is changed has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an operation member may be provided that operates in the storage flow channel 1231 in accordance with the number of stored products and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow channel 1231. In this case, since the operation member moves according to the number of storages regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort because the operation timing of the operation member is different from normal.

  Although the said 6th Embodiment demonstrated the case where the number of balls which can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes, when the interference member 6930 forms a projecting state, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the portion forming the storage channel 1231 (especially, the U-shaped portion) is moved in the extending direction (left and right direction) of the channel to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231 It is good. In this case, even if the player moves in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether the player has moved or not because of the small amount of movement. Therefore, it is possible to form a game that the player can notice the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 It can be improved.

  The movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the possibility of movement may be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, the interference member 6930 protrudes in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the reservoir channel 1231 can be seven. Also, the pattern for forming the overhanging state after the spheres are stored and the pattern for forming the overhanging state before the balls start to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between the round in which the stored number is 7 and the round in which the stored number is 9 by a single member.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changeable to the overhanging state while discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing of discharging the ball and the timing of bringing the interference member 6930 into the overhanging state, it is possible to form the modes of discharging the ball in a plurality of patterns.

  In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is viewed supplementarily, but it is not limited thereto. For example, only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may open and close, and the opening and closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping a ball from vertically above, so as to prevent the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 from passing to the left. In this case, a limited number of overruns can be permitted based on the alignment pattern.

  In addition, for example, for each round game R, the opening and closing mode of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 may be switched depending on whether it is a long time opening or a short opening repeatedly. In this case, at the end of the round game R, whether it is detected and closed by the detection sensor 1240 or closed as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a specified number of balls are balls that have passed the detection sensor 1240 while closing. It is possible to switch whether round game R ends and the next opening does not occur by being detected. In this case, since the possibility of occurrence of overruns is lower in the case of repeated short openings compared to the case of long-term opening, the possibility of occurrence of overruns should be made different depending on the operation pattern. Can.

  In the eighth embodiment, although the case where the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are driven by the same drive device has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, dedicated drive devices may be provided, and may be independently driven and controlled.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner to rise forward and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 faces to the left Although the case where it was constituted so that it might rotate in a mode which approaches opening and closing plate 8300 from the upper part was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, an axis in the front and rear direction), and the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 face each other (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). You may operate it. In this case, an effect can be performed such that the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 sandwich the ball with the change in state.

  Although the case where the opening and closing plate 8300 has the ball entry preventing portion 1331 has been described in the eighth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening and closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 can be made to correspond as a member for restricting the guidance of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. In addition, for example, the front surface portion of the ball insertion preventing portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed on the back surface side. In this case, it is possible to extend the period from when the opening / closing plate 8300 is closed toward the closed state until the passage of the ball of the detection sensor 1240 is disabled.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening and closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 have been described as members for permitting passage of the ball to the first specified winning opening 1000a, but the members are not necessarily limited thereto. There is not. For example, by omitting the ball entry preventing portion 1331, the allowance of passage of the ball to the first specified winning hole 1000a can be switched to the last by the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340, and the opening and closing plate 8300 It may be interpreted that the ball is thrown toward 9111 or the first out port 66. That is, the opening and closing plate 8300 only serves to guide the ball to the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specified winning hole 1000a is switched according to the state of the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 It may be interpreted as being In this case, the attentional power of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be improved as compared to the attentional power to the opening / closing plate 8300.

  In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of movable members on the upstream side of the first specified winning hole 1000a, and a driving mode for operating one member to move the ball to the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable member is a single member (for example, the opening and closing plate 1300), and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be in an extended state corresponding to the timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed. Sphere discharge from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or by setting a period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed short (time required for one sphere to be discharged from the outlet 1150 (In other words, less than 0.2 seconds), it may be suppressed that the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231).

  In the ninth embodiment, the case has been described where the auxiliary entrance 9111 is configured as a general winning opening, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to the lottery of special symbols. In this case, the special symbol 2 is configured to be able to acquire the lottery of the special symbol 2 by entering the ball into the auxiliary entrance port 9111 based on the control in which the special symbol 2 fluctuates prior to the special symbol 1, thereby making the jackpot game Immediately after the end, it is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol 1.

  In the ninth embodiment, the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state changes in a state in which the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in which the rolling ball does not collide with the gaming ball) and a state in which the rolling plate 9112 protrudes in the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state in collision with the gaming ball) It may constitute as a movable plate by which drive control is carried out. In this case, various operation patterns are exemplified. For example, it may be a constant operation from power on or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the jackpot game.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depends on the restoration mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the return operation of the power transmission member 5400, a damper may be provided to apply a load to the power transmission member 5400 after the auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed. In this case, since the period in which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state can be extended after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state, the control of opening on one side can be facilitated.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the ball entry to the auxiliary entry port 9111 is switched on the premise that the opening / closing plate 8300 changes state toward the open state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the ball may enter the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 at a predetermined rate during a period in which the opening / closing plate 8300 maintains the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant motion may be disposed, and the ball may collide with the movable object to cause the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111.

  In the tenth embodiment, the ball is discharged from the middle of the storage flow passage 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181, and the number of balls that can be accommodated in the storage flow passage 1231 can pass through the first specified winning opening 1000a. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage channel 1231 may be variable. In this case, since the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of balls having passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a, confusion of the player can be prevented.

  In the first control example described above, the area around the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300, and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit area need not be in the vicinity of the first variable winning device 6000, but may be a wide area (center frame 86 or the like) including the first variable winning device 6000.

  In addition, various means is illustrated as a means of a change of the lighting aspect of the lamp | ramp 227b for permeation | transmission. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is disposed in the audio lamp control device 113, and data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rise of the clock pulse, and corresponds to the transmitted data at the fall of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when turning off the light, data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. Also, it may be a combination with a latch.

  In addition, a plurality of lighting pattern tables may be simplified in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining the lighting pattern table and the above-described clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or may be controlled using a serial port driver.

  The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting method (lighting method in which a difference in light and dark is caused by changing a time interval between lighting and turning off) or a high and low voltage.

  In the first control example, although the case where the transmission lamp 227b is kept on when the operation effect is successful is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on only for a short period (instantly). In this case, the attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. In addition, based on the success of the operation effect, for example, it may be notified that the remaining number of balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231 should not be lit, instead of lighting the lamp.

  In the first control example, five or more balls are stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930, and the interference member 6930 is retracted by operation of the operation button 300, thereby causing the balls to flow into the specific region 4830 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is four or less and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the general winning opening is disposed at a position where the balls can pass through. You may. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called "holding device".

  Although the case where the number of balls to be caused to enter the storage channel 1231 is notified by display in the round game R in which the operation effect has been performed has been described in the first control example, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the number of balls to be caused to enter the reservoir channel 1231 in a round game after the round in which the operation effect is performed may be advanced by one round ahead of the round in which the operation effect is performed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from being excessively accumulated in the reservoir channel 1231 before the notification.

  In addition, when notifying the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, the time that is not sufficient to reach that number (continues to shoot the balls It is desirable to execute notification in a time that is insufficient in the Thereby, even if firing of the ball is continued from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the ball is excessively entering the storage flow passage 1231 at the execution timing of the notification.

  In the first control example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 or the number of displayed images may be controlled based on a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol required until the jackpot, the score accumulated by the number of times of playing, etc. are exemplified. In this case, for example, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is large, or when the privilege is high, the degree of difficulty of the operation effect is controlled to be low, and the burden required by the player until the jackpot (number of times of variation, As the number of times of game play is larger, the profit obtained by the player can be more easily increased by the operation effect.

  Here, as the difficulty level, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself, the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect, and the like are exemplified. As a case where the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation production is high, for example, execution timing of the operation production and the notification which accompanies the second half of round game R (the period progress which can enter the sphere of specified number into the storage channel 1231 It is illustrated that it is arranged at the back). In this case, at the timing of notification, a situation may occur where the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231.

  Further, the degree of difficulty of the operation effect itself may be associated with the degree of difficulty of profit acquisition after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to succeed the operation itself, but since the time lapse until the operation timing is long, as the number to be allowed to enter the reservoir channel 1231 by then There is a possibility that more balls than the indicated number may enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is fast, it is difficult to succeed the operation itself, but since the time lapse until the operation timing is short, the number of balls to be stored in the storage channel 1231 by then It is possible to prevent more than the number of balls notified as being entered.

  In addition, since the continuation time of the remaining round games R differs depending on the difference in the execution timing of the notification, the display effect to be adopted may be switchably controlled in correspondence with the continuation time of the remaining round games R. For example, when the duration of the remaining round game R is short, the display effect is configured with a video that can be ended in a short period, and when the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, the video is displayed with a long duration You may constitute an effect. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem that the loading of the moving image is not ended in the remaining time of the round game R, and the round game R is ended without being displayed.

  In the first control example described above, nine cases where the number to enter the reservoir channel 1231 is less than the prescribed number have been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an extremely small number of balls (for example, two balls) may be made to enter the storage channel 1231 so as to increase the profit obtained by the player. In this case, it is possible to urge the player to stop the firing of the ball at the start of the round when the notification is given. In addition, at the same time, notification such as "Stop launching" may be performed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  In the first control example, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted for a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation button 300 with the state in the vicinity of the interference member 6930 (flowing state of the ball) as a standard, and to improve the attention power for the operation effect.

  In the first control example, the timing at which the error command is set at S1515 is the timing at which the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 is performed, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. If the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 even after the setting, discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, another movable object for restricting the passage of the ball in the discharge port 1150 is disposed, and when the power is turned on, it is driven (excited) so as to allow passage of the ball in the discharge port 1150, and an error command is generated. May be controlled to change its state so as to restrict passage of the ball. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls remaining in the storage flow passage 1231 from being discharged from the storage flow passage 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated. When an error command is set by decelerating due to contamination or the like, the disadvantage caused to the player can be reduced. After that, the error command can be canceled by turning the power off, and the game can be resumed from the state where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (the state immediately before the error command is set) by turning the power on again. .

  The control of the movable object is not limited to the control by the presence or absence of the setting of the error command. For example, control may be performed so as to change the state when the power is turned on or off. In this case, for example, when the game can not be continued due to a sudden power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231.

  The control of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, it is not necessary to be able to resume the game from the state immediately before the error command is set, even if it is found that the setting of the error command is based on the cheating and clears the RAM 203. It is also possible to control the movement of the movable object and discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231 before resuming the game.

  In addition, the aspect of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, a driving device may be separately provided, and the means for preventing the discharge of the ball may use the restriction member 1600, or the interference member 6930 may be maintained in a stretched state as processing when the power is off. The interference member 6930 may be employed as the movable member.

  In the first control example, the control flow is configured based on how many rounds have been started in the jackpot middle effect processing S2505, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect, such as the start of a round game R where a ball can pass through the specific area 4830, the start of a round game R where an operation effect is started, etc. The flow may be configured. In this case, even if the number of rounds of effecting to be performed is changed due to a specification change or the like, significant change in control flow can be made unnecessary, so the burden of specification change can be reduced. it can.

  Also, the control flow is configured such that the flag turned on in the control flow when it is determined to be the third round in the jackpot middle effect processing S2505 is turned off in the control flow when it is determined to be the fifth round. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flag may be controlled to be turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the round of the fourth round of the round game R. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing the specification when adopting a four-round jackpot game.

  In the second control example, although the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 by the drive control of opening and closing only the auxiliary opening and closing member 8340 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by using the opening and closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode in which the opening and closing plate 1300 is maintained in a closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary ball entry port The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can be made to flow down to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 without dividing the board for guiding the ball to the first specified winning hole 1000a.

  Further, in this case, by setting the period for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state to less than 0.2 seconds, the discharge port 1150 is again discharged (in the state of being discharged) again before the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. You can regulate the passage of the ball. Therefore, the balls can be made to flow down to the auxiliary ball entry port 9111 without reducing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second control example described above, the display mode of the number-of-rounds display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b is controlled to be switched based on the elapse of the waiting time TK, but It is not limited. For example, control may be performed so as to be switched based on the number of balls having passed through the first specified winning hole 1000a. In this case, the display is switched based on the fact that nine balls stored in the first specified winning hole 1000a become full (the storage channel 1231 becomes full in the overhang state of the interference member 6930), It is possible to make the player grasp the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage channel 1231 is full.

  It should be noted that the determination of the number inside the storage channel 1231 may be made by the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or by separately providing a contact sensor in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls can be directly detected. You may

  Although the case where the character of "+ chance" is displayed as the excess prize possibility increase informing mode 721 at the predetermined timing of the predetermined jackpot type has been described in the second control example, it is not necessarily limited thereto. There is not. For example, regardless of the jackpot type, during the period when the ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 may be controlled to be able to display the character of "+ chance" as the over prize possibility increase notification mode 721, or auxiliary ON It may be controlled to be able to display the character of “+ chance” of the over prize possibility increase informing aspect 721 as over display during a period in which the ball mouth 9111 can not enter the ball. For example, when the number-of-rounds display portion 714 is displayed brightly, the characters “+ chance” may be displayed.

  In addition, the character of "+ chance" may be displayed continuously for a certain period as the overcoming prize possibility increase notification mode 721, or may be displayed so that the display and the non-display can be switched in a short period. It is good.

  In the second control example described above, it is configured to control whether or not the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens on one side based on the jackpot type and the time passage from the jackpot start, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the occurrence frequency or occurrence timing of one-side opening may be changed based on the jackpot type or the time lapse from the start of the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the emission mode of emitting the ball by aiming the ball to reach the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed (reduce the effect of the emission mode).

  In the third control example, while the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the case where the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 continue to be discharged has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by employing the interference member 6930 and controlling the overhanging state at a predetermined timing, the case where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. This can complicate the player's selection of the ball launch mode, thereby preventing the player from playing casually.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points not allowed to win more than the target number>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. The game is characterized by further comprising ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for the ball to pass through the ball entry port when it is detected by the detection unit that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port for a predetermined period. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member unexpectedly, extra balls are generated between the start of the operation of the operating member and the falling of the balls from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of spheres may pass through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make the balls after the predetermined number of balls difficult to pass the detecting means by the ball entering preventing means. Therefore, regardless of the strength of the ball in the state of being disposed upstream of the ball entrance, the ease of passage when the ball passes through the ball entrance is determined by the number of balls within a predetermined number and the predetermined number of balls It can be changed with the following spheres. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that a predetermined number or more of spheres pass through the detection port.

  As means for preventing ball entry, means for changing the ease of passage of the ball entrance according to the detection result of the detection means, or the one for which the ease of passage of the ball entrance at all times is constant, etc. Is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the ball entering preventing means includes a containing means for containing the ball that has passed through the ball entry port, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball comes out from the containing means, and an outlet thereof. A discharge switching means is switched between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball can not pass the discharge port, and the storage means is between the entrance and the discharge port. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is formed with a volume in which the predetermined number of balls are accommodated at a maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the accommodation means is formed with a volume for accommodating a predetermined number of balls at maximum between the ball entrance and the outlet, so discharge switching When the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the storage means, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent the predetermined number of balls from passing through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the predetermined number of balls from passing through the ball entrance.

  A game machine A3 characterized in that, in the game machine A2, the ball switching means is formed so as to be maintainable in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the ball entry port while the sphere is being discharged from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching means and the ball switching means may be simultaneous or different.

  A game machine A4 characterized in that the game machine A2 or A3 includes a drive means which is shared by the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the shared driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the discharge switching means starts the state change from the first state after the ball change-in means starts the state change from the second state to the first state. In the aspect of starting state change toward two states, the state change start is ordered, and these state changes are completed substantially simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible that the ball entering the storage means after the entry switching means is in the first state is discharged from the discharge port. Since it is possible to cause the ball switching means to start operation from the second state before completing the discharge of the ball from the discharge port while preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the discharge from the discharge port As compared with the case where the ball entering switching means is started to operate after the completion of the game, it is possible to reduce the number of balls passing through the game area and going to the out port, without passing through the ball entering switching means.

  The ordering of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching means, or a dedicated driving means is provided for each switching means to control the same timing. It is good.

  A game machine A6, comprising changing means for changing the maximum storage number of the storage means in any one of the game machines A2 to A5.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodated accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that it is temporarily (for example, specified round) predetermined It is possible to make it possible to form a state in which more balls than the number are housed in the housing means. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  Further, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine in which the predetermined number of numerical values have been changed by using the same shape accommodation means (it is possible to cope with the specification difference). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed as compared with the case of forming the shape for each specification.

  In the gaming machine A6, the ball entry port is communicated with the first ball entry port and the containing means downstream of the first ball entry port, and the ball having flowed down the game area is allowed to pass, and And a second entrance into which the passage is switched by the entry switching means, and the entry of the ball from the first entry into the receiving means, and the entry from the second entry. In the case where the ball enters the means, the maximum number of accommodating means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets which ball entrance allows the passage of the ball. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first ball entrance and the ball entering from the second ball entry can both be stored in the storage means Therefore, the space required can be reduced as compared to the case where separate accommodation means are provided for each.

  In the gaming machine A6, the change means includes an interference means capable of extending to the inside of the storage means, and the interference means interferes with a ball extended to the inside of the storage means, and the storage means A game machine A8 characterized in that the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means is changed in the case of being evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, changing the volume inside the storing means to change the number of balls stored without changing the ball entering path of the balls into the storing means Therefore, it is possible to switch the number of accommodated units without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the storage means, and is characterized in that a ball can be arranged on the front side at the time of retraction. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retraction can be hidden by a ball disposed in the front. Thereby, the operation of the interference means can be made inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And a ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for the ball to pass through the ball entry port in a state in which it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port for a predetermined period. A game machine comprising: storage means for storing the ball having passed through the ball entry port; and a visual recognition means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the ball stored in the storage means. AK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the visibility of the downstream of the detection port does not change, so the effect of the effect by the ball passing through the detection port becomes insufficient, and the power of attention may decrease. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AK1, it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls contained in the containing means by the visually difficult means, so different effects are produced depending on the number of balls contained in the containing means. In the case of adopting a mechanism that produces a <RTIgt; A </ RTI> <RTIgt; A, </ RTI> the player's anticipation of the resulting effect may reduce the likelihood that it matches the resulting effect. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the effect.

In the gaming machine AK1, when the ball comes out of the storage means, a discharge port through which the ball passes, a first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and a second state in which the ball can not pass through the discharge port And the storage means is formed with a volume in which the predetermined number of balls are stored at a maximum between the ball entrance and the discharge port. Machine AK2
According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1, the balls can be stored in the storage means, so that the period in which the effects by the balls can be maintained can be extended.

  In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, a gaming machine AK3 characterized in that it is configured to change the operation of the visual recognition difficulty means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition can be improved.

  In addition, as an aspect of predetermined conditions, it is not limited at all. For example, as the predetermined condition, it may be adopted that it is detected that the player operates the operation means operable by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the magnitude of the degree of deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means or the like and the actual manipulation timing is detected, and the degree of change of the operation of the visual recognition difficulty means is changed according to the magnitude. Also good. For example, when the degree of deviation is smaller than when the degree of deviation is large, the visibility of the sphere accommodated in the accommodation means may be changed. In this case, the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. Also, the reverse is also possible.

  Also, for example, it may be adopted that the ball has passed through a predetermined ball entry as the predetermined condition. In this case, for example, the degree of the change in the action of the visual difficulty-impairing means may be changed according to the number of balls having passed through the predetermined entrance in a predetermined period. For example, as the number of balls passing through the ball entrance increases, the visibility of the balls contained in the containing means may be changed. In this case, the player can be motivated to fire more balls. Also, the reverse is also possible. In this case, since it is possible to make the adjustment of the firing strength of the ball intense, it is possible to suppress a dumb game.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over wins>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entrance when the ball switching means is in the second state, as compared to when the ball switching means is in the first state. A game machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably dropped to the out port, can the ball be hit so that the ball does not fall off from the operating member? Depending on whether or not (the level of the player's launch technology), there has been a problem that some of the actual balls are generated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side position of the ball entry port can not be guided to the ball entry port By delaying the flow of the ball, the ball can be easily arranged at the upstream side position of the ball entrance until the ball switching means is switched to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is at the upstream position of the ball entry port, the ball is guided to the ball entry port. As a result, since the influence of the player's launch technology on the actual appearance of the ball can be reduced, it is possible to configure a beginner-friendly game machine.

  In addition, the aspect of a delay means is not limited. For example, it may be formed by a laterally long member that supports the ball from below, and may be a drop restricting means that restricts falling to the end, or may be a convex means formed by a projection that decelerates the ball by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, in the state where the ball is disposed downstream, the delay means is characterized in that the degree of delay is increased as compared with the case where the ball is disposed upstream.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball rises in a state where the ball is disposed downstream of the delaying means, so the attention power of the balls flowing down along the delaying means Can be improved.

  The aspect of the degree of delay is not limited at all. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that the distance of the ball disposed on the downstream side of the ball disposed on the upstream side increases with the opening direction of the ball entrance. A game machine B3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delaying means is arranged such that the distance between the opening direction of the ball entrance and the ball increases in the case of being disposed downstream of the delaying means. Is formed, and it is possible to suppress direct entry into the ball entrance when the ball rushes down the delay means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the ball entering switching means includes raising means for raising the game area when changing from the second state to the first state, and the delay means comprises the first means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the gaming machine B4 is disposed lower than the raising means in the state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed lower than the rising means in the first state, so that the balls are switched from the ball entering switching means The ball can be delayed after being made visible to the player as if it has fallen. This can improve the attention to the ball.

  The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the gaming machine B5 is provided on the upstream side of the flow-down path of the ball than the elevating means, and restricts the upward movement of the ball and guides the ball in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the rising restriction means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Can prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

  In the gaming machine B5, the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the rise restricting means is capable of entering the ball and has a relief entrance for giving a predetermined benefit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball is given a load when the ascending means rises and flies away from it as a profit other than the profit generated when the ball passes through the ball entrance The player can be given a benefit that occurs when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even when the ball deviates from the flow-down path to the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the lowering of attention power, and it is possible to improve the player's interest by the movement of the ball.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the delay means is provided with a variable action portion having a different action to be given to a ball depending on the difference in the mode of arrival to the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be differentiated depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. This makes it possible to select different balls for different actions.

  In addition, the aspect of the difference in the aspect of reach | attainment is not limited. For example, it may be a difference in arrival position of the ball with reference to the ball entrance, or a difference in flow direction of the ball until reaching the delay means.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action unit delays the flow of the ball reaching the delay means at a position spaced apart from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or more A game machine B8 characterized in that it does not act on the ball reaching the delay means at the position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, the variable action unit delays the flow of the ball by the variable action portion to a ball close to the ball entrance and the state switching of the ball switching means is not in time. On the other hand, it is possible to maintain an appropriate gaming speed by setting the variable action unit not to act on a ball far from the ball entry port and sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball entry switching means.

<Point BK that makes use of the ball reached at the interval>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And while the ball switching means is in the second state or compared with the ball reaching the ball switching means while the ball switching means is in the first state, or from the second state A gaming machine BK1 comprising a profit granting means which easily gives a player a profit by means of a ball reaching the ball entry switching means while changing to the first state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is disposed such that the detection opening of the big winning opening is in the horizontal direction, and a predetermined number of balls detects the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates in response to passing through the mouth, and by dropping balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, prevents balls of a predetermined number or more from passing the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably dropped to the out port, can the ball be hit so that the ball does not fall off from the operating member? Depending on whether it is high (low or high of the player's launch technology), the player actually has to be careful to play since there is a slight increase in ball appearance, and there is a problem that the interest may decrease.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, by adopting the profit giving means, it becomes easy for the player to give a profit to the player by the ball reached while the ball entering switching means changes its state Since it is possible to incorporate chances into the large and small of profits, it is possible to remove the prudence from the game and to improve the interest.

  In addition, the aspect of the profit provided to the player by the profit giving means is not limited at all. For example, the winning balls may be paid out, the lottery of a predetermined symbol may be performed, the right to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game may be acquired, or the determination of the next jackpot may be made.

  For example, when the aspect of the profit given to the player by the profit giving means is a lottery of the special symbol 2, the ball of the special symbol 2 is made to reach the entering switching means at a predetermined timing during the big hit game. The number of holding balls can be increased to a predetermined upper limit. Thereby, when transitioning to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, since the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 being held is started Can. Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player, the jackpot is unintentionally obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player is reduced. can do.

  A game machine BK2 characterized in that, in the game machine BK1, a ball is thrown to the profit giving means by a load given from the ball entering switching means.

  According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the ball is thrown to the profit giving means when the ball entry switching means is stopped.

  In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the gaming machine BK3 is characterized in that the profit that can be given to the player by the profit giving means is not less than the loss that can occur while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. .

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the ability of the player to pay attention to the profit giving means can be improved, and the game is played so that the profit given by the profit giving means can be obtained. Can be driven to

  A gaming machine BK4 according to any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, wherein the profit giving means is controlled to be able to select a plurality of types of periods maintained in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, a plurality of types of periods in which the profit giving means is maintained in the second state are selected. The timing of the change to the second state can make it difficult to launch the ball. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball to the profit giving means, it is possible to configure the playability that the ball must be continued to be fired.

<Points to adjust the game of jackpot game>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, a ball capable of passing through the ball inlet in relation to the number of balls passing through the ball inlet during a period in which the first state is formed before that A game machine C1 characterized by comprising a number changer capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the ball switching means sets the number of balls passing through the ball entrance in the state where the ball switching means forms the first state by the number changing means. In the case where one state is formed, the ball entry port can be changed in association with the number of balls passed through, so that in the series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state Adjustments can be made.

  The method of adjusting the profit is not limited. For example, when the ball entry switching means has previously formed the first state, the ball enters the ball when the ball entry switching means has subsequently formed the first state due to passing through the ball entrance through a large number of balls. It may be a mode that suppresses the number of players who can enter the ball, or the player's benefit (not limited to withdrawal, if the ball entry switching means then forms the first state due to the same event). For example, it may be a mode in which the acquisition of the right to transition to a high probability state may be increased.

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes an accommodating means for accommodating the ball passing through the ball entry port, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball comes out from the accommodating means, and an outlet for the ball. And the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes. A game machine C2 comprising: operation mode switching means capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the storage means according to the difference in the operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the number of balls stored in the storing means can be changed by the operation mode switching means so that the balls can be left in the storing means. And the number of remaining balls can be made variable. This makes it possible to change the number of balls required to fill the containing means with the balls, and to physically change the maximum number of balls passing through the entrance.

  In addition, the aspect of the difference in an operation aspect is not limited at all. For example, the operation period may be made different, or in the case where a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, it may be exemplified which discharge switching means is disposed at which discharge switching means is operated (operation target) or the like.

  In the gaming machine C2, a gaming machine C3 characterized in that the number changing means comprises an interval maintaining means for maintaining an ejection interval of balls from the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the discharge occurs regardless of the number of balls contained in the containing means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be defined in accordance with the length of the period in which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed in accordance with the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  In addition, as an aspect of a space | interval maintenance means, it does not specifically limit. For example, the flow path may be formed so that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately before the discharge port from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened. It is good also as a means provided with a rib which is provided with a convex and which gives a load to the ball to decelerate the ball.

  In the gaming machine C3, the space maintaining means includes a projecting portion which protrudes from an inner side surface of the accommodating means in the flow-down path of the ball in the vicinity of the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the projecting portion is projected to the inflow path, so that the ball coming down is brought into contact with the projecting portion and decelerated. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow-down velocity from being greatly changed by the sphere and the distance from the outlet is close, and it is possible to equalize the flow-down velocity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine C4, the storage means includes a discharge path for causing the balls to flow continuously in a predetermined flow-down direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protrusions alternate with each other from the facing surface that constitutes the discharge path. The game machine C5 is characterized by being projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the projecting portions are alternately projected from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the balls are collided with the balls flowing down the discharge path. It is possible to cause the protrusion to collide with each other at predetermined intervals while being displaced in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined flowing direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the storage means includes a rolling discharge plate portion connected to the discharge path and rolling a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolling the rolling discharge plate portion A game machine C6 characterized in that the flow-down speed of the ball is set to be larger than the flow-down speed of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate flow down faster than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so the balls stored in the storage means Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) of discharging the balls from the discharge port can be kept constant.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the ball entry port is provided with a start port for making a big hit determination of a special symbol by passing a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, it is possible to associate the number of big hit determinations of the special symbol with the number of balls entered into the ball entrance. Thereby, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed by the number of times of determination of the special symbol required to obtain the big hit.

  The gaming machine C7 includes starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not the ball having passed the starting opening enters the storage means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the ball entering switching means. A game machine C8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

  By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port can discharge the ball from the first discharge port (under the same conditions) or the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. The number of remaining balls may be arranged at a changeable position.

  In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so the flow-down speed of the balls flowing down the storage means is changed. Even in this case, the number of balls discharged from the storage means can be maintained.

  In addition, arrangement | positioning of a 1st discharge port and a 2nd discharge port is not limited at all. For example, one may be disposed at the lower end of the accommodation means and the other may be disposed at an intermediate position of the accommodation means, or both may be disposed at the lower end and a branch flow channel for distributing spheres upstream thereof. You may

  Further, the operation modes of the first discharge port and the second discharge port are not limited. For example, one may be opened one by one or both may be opened. When both are open, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the containing means can be shortened compared to the case where the balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thus, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the out port during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  The first discharge port may be disposed at the lower end portion of the storage unit, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is used as the storage means regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls stored in the storage means varies, the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls can be easily kept constant. In addition, even if the ball hitting and the like are reduced, the state in which the ball remains inside the housing means can be easily formed.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be disposed on the downstream side branched at the lower end portion of the storage unit.

  In this case, since it is possible to switch which discharge port the ball discharged last is discharged from the state in which the same number of balls are stored in the storage means by the operation mode of the discharge switching means, the balls are discharged From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the ball. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player is changed depending on which discharge port the ball discharged last is discharged from, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow of the ball.

<Directing as if the round had switched during the round>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. In the open state switching means configured to be able to switch between a period in which the ball easily passes through the ball entry hole and a period in which it is difficult to pass when the ball switching means maintains the first state. A game machine CK1 characterized by.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the ball entering mode to the big winning opening in each round is the same, there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the big winning opening. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, while the ball entering switching means maintains the first state, the attention force for the ball entering aspect of the ball into the ball entrance can be improved by the switching means during the open state .

  The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of the movable object disposed on the upstream side of the detection means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection means. It is good.

  In the gaming machine CK1, a gaming machine CK2 comprising: notification means for notifying a change in a profit given to a player while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state.

  According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, it is determined that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the ball entry switching means maintains the first state. The person can understand. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

  In addition, the aspect of alerting | reporting of an alerting | reporting means is not limited at all. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, notification may be made to put a break in the middle of the round game R (switch the screen or output a sound), or turn off the display of the number of rounds As a sub-round, it may be informed as if a new round game R has been started. In any case, assuming that the start timing of the round game R and the timing of notification by the notification means are game breaks, the number of times the jackpot exceeds the maximum number of rounds of control letters (for example, 16 rounds) By setting (for example, a break of 20 times), it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  The gaming machine CK2 is configured to be able to easily give a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that balls exceeding the number allowed to pass through the ball entrance are guided to the ball switching means. A game machine CK3 characterized by comprising conditional profit giving means.

  According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CK2, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from becoming useless balls when firing more balls than can pass through the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to link the interest improvement to the player by the effect and the substantial benefit (the payout of the winning balls).

  It should be noted that a notification may be issued to continue the launch so that the player does not stop the launch by visually recognizing that the ball has stopped passing through the entrance. Various modes are illustrated as a mode of information in this case. For example, it may be a direct notification such as "continue launching", or may be a notification suggesting the number of firings in an euphemistic manner such as "if you put 5 pieces, chances are large", or "some things can be seen through a sphere" In this case (in this case, it is not visible when there is no sphere, and when there is a sphere, it emits a light beam that displays visibly a certain figure or picture in the vicinity of the entering switching means and at a predetermined position where the sphere accumulates) Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the game of the jackpot game every round>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. A switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state in response to passage of the specified number of balls through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state; A game machine DK1 comprising: adjustment means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entry into the ball entrance based on a prescribed number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, since the excess ball into the ball entry can be adjusted by the adjustment means, the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the ball entry can be changed in a short time. While doing it, it can be leveled in a long time.

  In addition, it is not limited at all as an aspect of adjustment of excess ball entry. For example, it may be adjusted so that equal excess entering balls can be expected each time on the basis of a prescribed number of passing through the entrance during the first state. ) The second excess entry sphere occurring when the first state is entered at other (multiple or single) timing is reduced relative to the first excess entry sphere occurring when the first state is entered at the timing. Adjustment may be made to balance the first excess ball entry and the second excess ball entry, or the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state is short and long (big hit game and small hit In the game), the number of occurrences of excessive ball entry may be distinguished and adjusted to balance them.

  In addition, ball entering switching means may be comprised by single arrangement | positioning, and may be comprised by multiple arrangement | positioning.

  The gaming machine DK1 includes load applying means configured to be capable of applying a load directed to the detection means to a ball disposed at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detection means in the process of switching drive by the switching drive means. A game machine DK2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DK1, the ball disposed on the upstream side of the detection means can be configured to be easily detected by the detection means by the action of the load applying means.

  The number of balls to which a load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, one or more may be used.

  In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the start of the switching drive, an after-driving ball entering switchable between a permitted state permitting passage of the ball to the ball entrance and a restricted state restricting the passage of the ball. A game machine DK3 characterized by comprising state switching means.

  According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass to the ball entrance regardless of the flow of the ball to the ball entrance or the operation speed of the ball switching means Since it can be defined by the ball entry state switching means after driving, it is possible to make it easy to adjust the degree of excessive ball entry to the ball entry port.

  In any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, a load given from the ball to the ball entry switching means is imparted in a direction along a direction in which the ball entry switching means is driven at the time of the switching drive. Machine DK4.

  According to the gaming machine DK4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball switching means is prevented from being changed to the second state by the load from the ball. .

  In addition, as an addition aspect of the load from a ball, for example, it is comprised so that a ball entering switching means may be driven by the mode which falls downward (droops) by switching drive, and the dead weight of a ball is given to a ball entering switching means The case is illustrated.

<Points to adjust the game of the jackpot game every round>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. Switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state in response to passage of the specified number of balls through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state; A post-drive ball entry state switching means capable of forming a permitted state permitting passage of the ball to the ball entry port and a restricted state restricting the passage of the ball after the switching drive by the switching drive means is started; A game machine D1 characterized by comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the ball entry state switching means after driving switches whether or not the ball can enter after the entrance is closed by the switching drive means, extra balls can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls can be equalized throughout the jackpot game.

  In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the drive entry ball state switching means forms the restricted state in the first ball entry port. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the second entrance slot forms the permissible state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is determined when the ball passes through the first ball entry and when the ball passes through the second ball entry. Since it is switched whether or not it is possible to enter the ball, it is possible to improve the power of attention as to which entry opening means the entry switching means opens.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance is provided with a fall hole on the near side of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is on the near side of the opening of the first entrance. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that a ball arranged on the upstream side is dropped to the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entrance, the ball is dropped while the ball switching means maintains the second state. Can be dropped away from the ball entrance. This makes it possible to prevent the balls exceeding the specified number from passing through the first ball entrance.

<Point where balls merge from multiple winning openings to storage channel>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. An accommodation means for accommodating up to a predetermined number of balls having passed through the ball entry port; and a ball accommodated in the accommodation means based on the switching of the ball entering switching means to the second state from the accommodation means A game machine EK1 comprising discharge means for discharging, wherein the ball entry switching means can be switched to the first state before the end of the discharge action by the discharge means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, since the discharging action by the discharging means is configured to be able to end except the ball finished in the containing means, the number of balls that can enter the ball entrance in each round is related It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in winning balls throughout the jackpot game.

  In addition, since the ball can be stored in the storage means over a period in which the state of the ball switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of balls that can pass through the ball entrance while the ball switching means is maintained in the first state More spheres can be accommodated in the accommodation means. As a result, since it is possible to inform the user of an indication of the frequency of entering the ball, it is possible to show the player the gaming efficiency of the gaming machine currently playing.

  In addition, the means which shows gaming efficiency is not limited at all. For example, the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls shot (number of balls / number of balls fired) may be used, and every time the ball switching means is in the first state, the number of balls continuously entered the ball entrance It may be an indicator indicating whether the ball is passed.

  In addition, the number of the ball inlet, the ball switching means, and the housing means may be plural or not only one. In this case, the ball switching means and the housing means may be provided corresponding to each ball entrance, and the state change of each ball switching means may occur in order, or each ball switching means It may be configured to change states partially simultaneously.

  In the game machine EK1, a game machine EK2 characterized in that whether or not the discharging action ends with leaving the ball stored in the storage means is adjustable by the discharge mode of the ball.

  According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to enhance participation in the game of firing the gaming ball toward the ball entrance.

  In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the ball entry comprises at least a first ball entry and a second ball entry, and the balls having passed through the first ball entry or the second ball entry merge A game machine EK3 characterized in that the accommodation means is formed.

  According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the balls passing through the first ball entry or the second ball entry merge in the interior of the housing means capable of housing the balls up to a predetermined number. Thus, the number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the first ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the number of balls passing through the first ball entry and the second ball entry (the number of payouts accompanying the ball) throughout the entire game.

  A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. The housing means is provided with housing means for housing up to a predetermined number of balls having passed through the ball entrance, the ball entrance comprising at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the first ball entrance Alternatively, the storage means is formed in such a manner that the balls having passed through the second ball entrance merge to form a game machine E1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls having passed through the first ball entry or the second ball entry merge in the inside of the accommodating means capable of accommodating the balls up to a predetermined number, so that the first ball entering The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the number of balls passing through the first ball entry and the second ball entry (the number of payouts accompanying the ball) throughout the entire game.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the storage means is empty, the number of balls that can be stored in the storage means by passing through the first ball entrance and the storage by passing through the second ball entrance. A game machine E2 characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first ball entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance are different. It is possible to improve the player's ability to pay attention to whether or not the entrance of the ball is opened.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance is set smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second ball entrance, and in the closed state of each ball entrance, a predetermined upper limit number of balls are ejected The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number which can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is opened during the opening when the second ball entrance is opened a plurality of times. Game machine E3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the ball passing through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and the second entrance after opening the first entrance The ball passed can differ from the actual benefit given to the player.

  That is, when passing through the second ball entry before opening the first ball entry, even if more balls than the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entry passed through the second ball entry, it exceeded The minute is not discharged, and the number of balls minus the residual portion is accommodated from the first entrance, so eventually the same number as the second entrance can be accommodated from the first entrance If the player passes the number of players, only the same profit can be obtained.

  On the other hand, when passing through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, if the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance has passed through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can gain additional benefits as it is not

  In addition, the setting of the number which can accommodate a game ball is performed in various aspects. For example, it can carry out by setting of the length and the thickness of the channel in which the game ball is accommodated. In addition, the change of the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to the number of winning balls, for example, changing the substantial profit given to the player depending on whether or not the ball can pass the specific area. Can.

<Point where interference member overhangs>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. And an interference means disposed in the flow-down path of the ball having passed through the ball entry port, and capable of switching between an extended state capable of interfering with the ball and a retracted state not interfering with the ball. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the mode of launch of the balls respectively, so it is large for the winning balls through the entire jackpot game There is a problem that there is a possibility that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the interference means is disposed in the flow-down path of the ball which has passed through the ball entrance, the interference means is maintained in the overhanging state, from the ball entrance to the interference means The ball can be clogged in the path of the ball to prevent further balls from passing through the ball entrance. In this way, it is possible to adjust the winning balls through the entire jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  A gaming machine F2 comprising: parking means for holding a ball in front of the interference means in the retreat state of the interference means in the game machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state in a state in which the ball is parked in front of the interference means. In comparison to, the action can be hidden by a sphere. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the operation.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the balls passing through the detecting means are passed. A game machine F3 characterized in that an aspect of a state change of the interference means is changeable.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, since the mode of the state change of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured with a plurality of types, while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of benefits from the number of storage>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. The operation means disposed in the flow-down path of the ball having passed through the ball entry port and capable of operating with a plurality of movement patterns, and changing the profit that can be obtained by the player based on the movement pattern of the movement means A game machine FK1 characterized in that it is configured.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode in the big hit game of the operating member disposed at the big winning opening, opening a specified number of balls for a long time open and entering a specified number of balls There is a gaming machine controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the big winning opening in each round by switching according to each round with a short time opening in which the ball is not possible (for example, Reference 18572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the big winning opening, which may reduce attention to the downstream of the big winning opening. There was a problem that there was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operating means is disposed downstream of the entrance, and the operating pattern of the operating means is configured to be able to change the profit that can be obtained by the player. Can improve the power of downstream attention.

  In the game machine FK1, a game machine FK2 comprising operation means operable by a player, wherein the operation pattern of the operation means is configured to be changeable by the player operating the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine FK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK1, the player can change the operation pattern of the operating means by operating the operating means, thereby improving the player's willingness to operate the operating means It can be done.

  In the gaming machine FK2, a first benefit and a second benefit are set as the benefit given to the player based on the game ball passing through the entrance, and the first operation mode of the operation means is used to set the first operation. A game machine FK3 characterized in that an aspect of acquisition of a benefit and the second benefit changes.

  According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player is directly changed by the operation mode of the operation means, so that the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. it can.

  The modes of the first benefit and the second benefit are not limited at all. For example, the first benefit may be set as payout of a prize ball, and the second benefit may be set as finalization of a probability change state after a big hit game (as a gaming machine with V positive variation), or the second benefit may be set as a jackpot determination (It may be set as a small hit game in the 1 type 2 type blender).

  The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, for example, the benefits given to the player in the first benefit and the second benefit are the payouts of the winning balls, and the number of paid balls in the first benefit is lower than that in the first benefit. If the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is greater, or the benefits granted to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot gaming state, compared to the number of rounds of jackpot gaming in the 1st benefit The case where the number of rounds in the second benefit is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another thing having a different nature, for example, the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is an award while the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the transition to the jackpot gaming state. In the case of the payout of the ball, and the fact that the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the clear indication of the gaming state, the payout awarded to the player in the second benefit is the maximum earned balls And the like are exemplified.

  In addition, as something which is in a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first benefit relates to the game state after the end of the big hit game (or the profit of the player such as the number of fluctuations until the next big hit) In contrast to the disclosure of the information), the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (or the information related to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) The case of destruction is exemplified.

<Point 1 to make it difficult to predict whether or not to win a V from the behavior of the attacker
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means In the game machine having the profit switching means switched on, in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entering switching means in the first state are the same, when the ball can pass through the profit giving means, and the profit It is possible to switch to the case where the ball can not pass through the application means. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case of flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route, and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route is to prevent the ball from entering the big winning opening in the first place Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it can not maintain the attention to the ball heading to the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of letting you notice the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the ball can pass through the profit giving means and the ball passes through the profit giving means in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, it does not block the ball entering the ball entrance. In this way, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the ball entrance.

  The gaming machine G1 is provided on the upstream side of the profit switching means, and is provided with a stopping means which is switched between a stopping state for stopping a ball passing through the detecting means and a passing state for passing a ball passing through the detecting means. When the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the retaining means is switched from the suspended state to the passing state, and the ball flowing down to the downstream of the retaining means is switched to the profit A game machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the balls are profited at any timing by temporarily stopping the balls passing through the ball entrance by the holding means disposed upstream of the profit switching means. It can prevent reaching the switching means. This prevents the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing no matter how the ball passes through the ball entrance while the ball switching means is in the first state. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that it comprises period changing means for changing a period in which the ball flowing down through the stopping means can reach the profit switching means after switching the stopping means to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the period changeable means allows the ball to pass through the stopping means and then the time period in which the profit switching means can be reached changes. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the playability of the game, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  The period changing means may be means for changing the flow-down speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or may be means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state to when the ball starts to flow down. The means for changing the number of balls staying in the stopping means may be used.

  In the game machine G3, a game machine G4 characterized in that the period changing means is capable of switching the number of balls to be held by the stopping means in accordance with a profit given to a player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted by the number of balls parked in the parking means, so the ball paid attention to the balls parked in the parking means The power can be improved.

  In addition, the means to switch the number of balls to be retained by the retaining means is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to change the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, after shortening the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state extremely short and then immediately shortening the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that, Since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream side of the retaining means is extremely small, even if new balls do not enter from the ball entry port, a large number of balls are staying in the retaining means.

  On the other hand, in the case where the period for setting the ball entry switching means to the first state is made extremely short immediately after taking a sufficiently long period for passing the stopping means in the passing state, In addition to the fact that the majority of the balls flow down to the downstream of the stopping means, since the balls do not newly enter from the ball entrance, it means that almost no balls are staying in the stopping means.

  As described above, by changing the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period in which the ball entering switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter, the stopping means is stopped in the stopping means regardless of the firing mode. The number of balls can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ball entering switching means comprises setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of types of closing maintaining periods maintained in the second state, and a predetermined period from the end of the closing maintaining period. A game machine G5 characterized in that the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means sets a plurality of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. Since the period from when it passes through to when the profit switching means is switched to the first state is formed by a plurality of types, the balls pass through the profit giving means even if the number of balls to be held by the holding means is the same. It is possible to formably control the case of passing and the case of not passing. Therefore, the attention to the flow of the ball can be continuously improved.

  In addition, for example, the ball entry switching means is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow passage of the specified number of balls in the ball entry port, and a period for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the second state immediately thereafter When the setting means selects the closing maintaining period in the form of extremely shortening (the ball passing through the stopping means is shorter than reaching the profit switching means), the ball entering switching means is in the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means by counting from time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means becomes the passing state to when the profit switching means becomes the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it can be arbitrarily determined whether or not the ball that has passed through the retaining means passes the profit giving means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls to be parked in the parking means and the mode (for example, timing) of parking, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the balls having passed the parking means pass the profit giving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entering switching means is generated not by the first operation caused by the specified number of balls entering the ball entrance but by the second operation caused by the passage of the prescribed time. A game machine G6 characterized by comprising intentional selection means for intentionally selecting so as to make it possible.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching unit is limited to the operation at a preset time by the operation of the intention selection unit. It is possible to eliminate the switching randomness due to the passage mode of the ball at the entrance. Thereby, while the profit switching means is in the first state, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter the ball.

  In addition, as an intentional selection means, it is illustrated that a ball does not pass through a ball entrance by passage of a smaller number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally clogging (preventing passage) the ball passing through the ball entrance.

  A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means In the gaming machine having the profit switching means switched on, the notification based on the judgment result of the flow-down mode judging means for judging whether the flow-down mode of the ball to the profit giving means is normal and the flow-down mode judging means And a notification means for performing the game GK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that a player who tries to obtain a profit of fraud arises not a little due to the fraudulent act of applying a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before reaching the distribution unit. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, when the abnormality is determined, the notification means notifies of the abnormality, so that it is possible to suppress the cheating. That is, there is a high possibility that the user will not be able to obtain an illegal profit through notification even if the ball is illegally obstructing the flow of the ball, so a person who intends to profit illegally (hereinafter referred to as “cheating person” or The effect of deterrence against "injustice" can be exerted.

  In addition, the aspect of determination of abnormality is not limited at all. For example, after the profit switching means is switched to the first state, the timing at which the ball is discharged may be set, and the notification may be performed by not detecting the discharge of the ball even at that timing. In this case, since notification can be performed before the ball passes the profit switching means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to complain.

  In the game machine GK1, the flow-down mode determination means performs the determination based on the number of balls disposed between the ball entrance and the profit provision means.

  According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether the flow-down mode of the ball is abnormal, not depending on the degree of accumulation of gaming balls from the entrance to the profit giving means. it can.

  In the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, a gaming machine GK3 comprising arrangement restraining means for restraining a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit giving means after the notification means executes a notice.

  According to the gaming machine GK3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, a change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when resuming the game when an unexpected error occurs. Loss can be minimized.

<Point 2, making it difficult to predict whether or not to win a V from the action of the attacker, there is a paka>
A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means A gaming machine comprising: a profit switching means switched at a mode in which a ball reaches the profit switching means is changeable by an operation mode of the ball entering switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case of flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route, and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route is to prevent the ball from entering the big winning opening in the first place Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it can not maintain the attention to the ball heading to the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of letting you notice the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to change the mode in which the balls reach the profit switching means by the operation mode of the ball switching means while maintaining the state in which the balls can pass through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control how to bring the ball to the profit switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the number of balls related to the time during which the ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1, the player is guided in what manner the ball is guided to the profit switching means from the length at which the ball switching means is maintained in the second state. Thus, the player's attention to the operation of the ball entry switching means can be improved.

  The gaming machine H1 or H2 is characterized in that a starting state in which ball feeding to the profit switching means is started is established while the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine H1 or H2, the ball is thrown to the profit switching means only in the start state, and the operation of the ball entering switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it is possible to set the first state again, it is possible to form the game characteristic that throwing of the ball to the profit switching means is not necessarily started even if the operation is started from the first state. As a result, since it becomes necessary to directly confirm whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, the power of paying attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

  A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance Ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port; detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port; A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passing ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball can not be guided to the profit giving means A gaming machine provided with profit switching means switched at a state change means configured to be in a state changeable state by detecting passage of a ball, and the state change means To the profit switching means based on the frequency of ball passage Gaming machine HK1, characterized in that it is configured to be switchable, the number of balls that can be spherical.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, balls which have passed through the special winning opening are distributed by the distribution unit to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the result of the distribution. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case of flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route, and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not dropped to the advantageous route is to prevent the ball from entering the big winning opening in the first place Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it can not maintain the attention to the ball heading to the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of letting you notice the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine HK1, the number of balls capable of being sent to the profit switching means is switchable based on the passage frequency of the balls to the state changing means, so the ball entering mode to the profit switching means Can be changed. Thereby, the attention power with respect to the behavior of the ball which has passed through the ball entrance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine HK1, when the ball entering frequency to the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, the upper limit of the number of balls to be thrown to the profit switching means is set in a predetermined period. Machine HK2.

  According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to break away from the gaming nature in which it is better to let the state changing means pass the ball.

  In the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the gaming machine HK3 is characterized in that the ball which has passed through the ball entrance in the plurality of opening and closing of the ball switching means is put together to the profit switching means. .

  According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, entering the ball into the entrance at the time of opening and closing of the entering switching means can be related to the throwing mode to the entering ball switching means Therefore, the variation of the ball sending mode can be increased as compared with the case where the ball sending mode to the ball entering switching means is independent at one opening and closing of the ball entering switching means.

  In addition, how to count the number of opening and closing of ball entering switching means is not limited at all. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the ball entry switching means, or may be counted by the number of occurrences of combinations of operations of the ball entry switching means (for example, preset operation patterns such as small hitting games).

  Operation means operable by the player, a storage state for temporarily storing the ball entering the ball switching means, and a passage state for releasing the storage of the ball and allowing it to flow toward the profit providing means A game machine HP1 comprising: temporary storage means which can be switched according to the present invention, and the state of the temporary storage means can be switched by the operation of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine HP1, since the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the operation of the operation means.

  In the gaming machine HP1, a gaming machine HP2 characterized in that a profit given to a player is selected from a first benefit or a second benefit according to the operation timing of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HP1, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operation means.

  The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may be in an opposite relationship.

  Here, for example, the benefits given to the player in the first benefit and the second benefit are the payouts of the winning balls, and the number of paid balls in the first benefit is lower than that in the first benefit. If the number of balls paid out in the 2 benefits is greater, or the benefits granted to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot gaming state, compared to the number of rounds of jackpot gaming in the 1st benefit The case where the number of rounds in the second benefit is larger is exemplified.

  Further, as another thing having a different nature, for example, the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is an award while the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the transition to the jackpot gaming state. In the case of the payout of the ball, and the fact that the benefit given to the player in the first benefit is the clear indication of the gaming state, the payout awarded to the player in the second benefit is the maximum earned balls And the like are exemplified.

  In addition, as something which is in a contradictory relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first benefit relates to the game state after the end of the big hit game (or the profit of the player such as the number of fluctuations until the next big hit) In contrast to the disclosure of the information), the benefit given to the player in the second benefit is the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (or the information related to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) The case of destruction is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine HP2, passage of the ball in the ball entrance when the ball switching means is in the first state is restricted based on the fact that the first benefit is selected. Game machine HP3.

  According to the gaming machine HP3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first benefit, the ball is prevented from passing through the entrance regardless of the state of the entrance switching means. It is possible to eliminate the need to temporarily stop the firing of the ball (to perform a so-called “stop”) in anticipation of timing when the player does not want to pass the ball to the entrance because it can it can. In this case, the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the ball entry switching means, so that the desired game can be smoothly performed.

  In the gaming machine HP3, a gaming machine HP4 that is controlled to be able to continue playing regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detection means based on the selection of the first benefit.

  According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine HP3, by making the detection means clogged, it is possible to realize the gaming property of restricting the ball.

  Game machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, In any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3 and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that in any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. . Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation member of the big winning opening operates with the predetermined number of balls passing through the detection opening as a trigger, and the predetermined number or more of balls pass through the detection opening of the detecting means. There is a game machine which prevents that (for example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-181572).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the visibility of the downstream of the big winning opening does not change, so the effect of the effect by the ball passing through the big winning opening becomes insufficient, and the power of attention may be reduced. There was a problem of that.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the attention power of a ball which has passed through a big winning opening.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a game area in which the balls flow down, a ball entry port through which the balls flowed down in the game area pass, and a ball which flows downward from the upstream side Ball switching means for switching between the first state capable of guiding the ball to the ball inlet and the second state incapable of guiding the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball ball to the ball inlet; Detecting means for detecting entry of the ball into the ball, and the ball enters the ball entry opening in a state in which it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined number of balls enter the entry port during the predetermined period. A ball entering preventing means is provided which makes it difficult to pass through, and the ball entering preventing means is provided with a containing means for containing the ball that has passed through the ball inlet, and visually recognizes at least a part of the balls contained in the containing means. It is equipped with a visual difficulty means that makes it difficult to
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the attention power of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to extend the period during which the attention power to the ball can be maintained.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 third symbol display device (part of notification means)
110 Main control unit (part of change means, part of period change means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means, part of flow mode determination means)
300 operation button (operation means)
640 2nd ball entrance (part of ball entrance, starting opening, part of state change means)
640a Electric role (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specified winning a prize mouth (a part of the ball entry, the first ball entry)
1140 Protruding part (part of spacing maintaining means, projecting part)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entering prevention means, part of number changing means)
1210 Thin plate member (means for visual difficulty)
1231 Reservoir channel (part of ball entering prevention means, part of number changing means, part of driven ball entry state switching means, housing means, discharging path, part of adjusting means)
1231a Guide surface (part of space maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of space maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Protruding part (part of spacing maintaining means, projecting part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening and closing plate (part of ball switching means)
1310 Plate (lifting means)
1331 throwing prevention part (a part of entering prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Regulating member (part of ball entering preventing means, part of number changing means, discharging switching means, stopping means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
2251 Second storage channel (part of ball entering prevention means, part of number changing means, part of after-driving ball entering state switching means, containing means, discharging path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a Second specified winning combination (a part of the ball entrance, the second ball entrance)
2840 Slide plate (part of ball switching means)
3181 additional winning combination (relief opening)
3182 Curved extension plate (lift control means)
3250 Falling delay plate (part of delaying means)
3251b end face (part of falling hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit giving means)
4850 Distribution device (Profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit giving means)
5900 Ball adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (Interference means, part of period change means, part of adjustment means. Part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, part of operation means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Opening and closing plate (part of ball switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening / closing member (part of ball entering switching means, part of switching means during open state, part of adjusting means, part of load applying means, part of ball entering state switching means after driving)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit giving means, part of conditional profit giving means)
10180 Intermediate discharge device (part of operation means)
11183 2nd additional winning a prize mouth (a part of ball entry)
11190 Opening and closing means (part of driving ball entry state switching means)

Claims (3)

A game state where the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth in a second state incapable of guiding the ball into the ball entry port, and detection means for detecting ball entry into the ball entry port. ,
The ball game apparatus further includes ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for the ball to pass through the ball entry port in a state in which it is detected by the detection unit that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port during a predetermined period.
The ball entering preventing means includes a containing means for containing the ball that has passed through the ball inlet, and a visually difficult means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls contained in the containing means. A game machine that features it. An outlet through which the ball passes when it comes out of the containing means;
A first state in which a ball can pass through the outlet;
And discharge switching means which is switched in the second state where the ball can not pass through the discharge port;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the storage means is formed with a volume in which the predetermined number of balls are stored at a maximum between the ball entrance and the discharge port.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the operation of the difficulty in visual recognition is changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Images